JP2020058726A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Based on the fact that operation means operable by a player is operated within an effective period set by effective period setting means, a performance is executed by performance execution means, and a first performance can be executed after the effective period is at least in the first state. When it is determined that the first performance is executed by the performance execution means, the effective period is variably set so as to be in the first state, thereby increasing a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 146

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operating means, and there are gaming machines that perform various settings based on the operation result of the operating means. In such a gaming machine, the interest is improved by operating the operating means.

JP 2012-249877A

  However, there is a need for further interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is an operation unit operable by a player, and an effect execution unit capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit within an effective period. And an effective period setting means capable of setting the effective period, wherein the effect executing means sets the effective period to be at least a first state based on the operation means being operated within the effective period. It is configured such that the first effect can be executed as the effect after the effect is reached, and the effective period is the first effect when the effect executing unit determines that the first effect is executed. It is variably set to be in one state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising operation determining means capable of determining the operation content for the operating means within the valid period, and the effect executing means includes the operation determining means. When the determination result of No. is a specific determination result, the first effect can be executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine has operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of operation of the operating means within the valid period, and the operation determining means has the operation number of times. When the number of operations measured by the measuring means reaches the specific number of operations, it can be determined that the result is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation means operable by the player, the effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means within the effective period, and the effective period. A valid period setting means that can be set, and the effect execution means, based on the operation means being operated within the effective period, the effective period after the effective period is at least in the first state. Is configured to be able to execute the first effect, and the effective period is set to the first state when the effect executing means determines that the first effect is executed. It is variably set to.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine recited in claim 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, it has an operation determination means capable of determining the operation content with respect to the operation means within the valid period, and the effect execution means, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, the first The production can be executed.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, it has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means within the valid period, and the operation determining means has the operation number measured by the operation number measuring means as a specific operation number. In this case, it can be determined that the result is the specific determination result.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XIIa-XIIa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XIIIa-XIIIa line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XIV-XIV line of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a displacement control device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement control device. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XXIa-XXIa line of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a launch effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the launch effect unit. 25A is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 25B is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 25. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the firing unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear surface disassembled perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear surface disassembled perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear surface disassembled perspective view of an injection device. 28A is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34B. FIG. 35A is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 28A is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36B. 28A is a plan view of the front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a plan view of the rear transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the ejection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the ejection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the ejection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the ejection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. 28A to 28E are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. 28A to 28F are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the ejection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion portion of the transmission arm member, which accompany the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member. It is a figure showing the time change of. It is a front perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member. It is a front view of a functional plate part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional plate part. It is a front view of a functional plate part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an effect member. It is a rear view of the effect member. 74A is a rear view of the effect member, and FIG. 74B is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the production member in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a horizontal slide member. FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of a route formation member of a wiring guide member. 77A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 77A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87B is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 87A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88A. 77A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89A. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. It is a partial front enlarged view of the 1st decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of a game board in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the scaling unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linearly moving member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing time change of arrangement of a columnar projection. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linearly moving member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing time change of arrangement of a columnar projection. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the launch unit in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the substrate box in a 7th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a substrate box. (A) is a front view of a board box, (b) is a side view of a board box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. 108A is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and FIG. 108B is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main control device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main control device in the portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). 112A is a front view of the main control device when viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112A, and FIG. 114B is a side view of the main control device when viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114A, FIG. 114C is a side view of the main controller viewed from the direction of the arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114A. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated to the on position. 115A is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115B. is there. 115A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115A. It is a figure. 115A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115A. It is a figure. 116A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116A, and FIG. 116B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116A. It is a figure. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 121A is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121A. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a La-La sectional view of a variable winning device, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of a variable winning device, (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a flow path solenoid inoperative, It is the figure which showed the state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge flow path was covered with the guide piece of the switching member. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button repeated hit production start screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button repeated hit effect upper limit reaching screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of button repeated hit effect result screen 1st, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of button repeated hit effect result screen 2nd. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the screen which carried out the continuous hit after reaching the upper limit in button continuous hit production, and (b) showed the example of the display mode of the pursuit screen during button continuous hit effect. It is a figure, (c) is a figure showing contents of production setting. (A) is a figure which showed the icon display possible area, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the suggestion mode display screen of icon display production. (A) is a figure showing an example of the screen where the first icon is displayed by icon display production, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the production result of icon display production. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen which shows another pattern of an icon display production. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button effect start screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a normal pattern at the time of pressing of button effect. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the delay pattern at the time of pressing of button production, (b) showed an example of the display mode of the delay pattern 0.8 seconds after pressing of button production. It is a figure. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when an effective period has passed during a button effect delay standby. (A) is a figure showing an example of a collective production start screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of an obtainable character display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a character acquisition screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a collective production end screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of the last acquisition chance screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the last GET screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a battle production start screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a weak attack screen during battle production. (A) is a figure showing an example of a heavy attack screen during battle production, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a boss destruction screen of battle production. (A) is a figure showing an example of a boss escape screen of a battle production, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a battle battle screen of a battle production. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo detachment effect for 14 seconds, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of restarting from a pseudo detachment stop. It is the timing chart which shows the contents of the button operation and the flow of the effect in the continuous hit effect. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of each mode of button production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each aspect of the collective effect. It is a timing chart showing a flow of battle production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the pseudo-off effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in a 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 1st control example. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically showing the RAM configuration of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st per random number table in the 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the 1st per hit type selection table in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the 2nd random number table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving / probability change table in a 1st control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the change production pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) shows the content of the normal production pattern table in a 1st control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production pattern table for time reduction and probability change in a 1st control example. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically composition of a continuous hit production selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the upper limit frequency selection table in the 1st control example. It is a figure. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the end number selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) is the model showing typically the contents of the production result selection table in the 1st control example. It is a figure. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the random display production selection table in a 1st control example, (b) showed typically the content of the production icon storage area in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display order selection table in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the permutation storage area in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the display mode selection table in a 1st control example typically. Is. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display number selection table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay production selection table in a 1st control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the group production selection table in the 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the character storage area in the 1st control example typically. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the character number selection table in the first control example. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of the battle production selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the HP selection table in the 1st control example. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final remaining HP selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the battle mode selection table in the 1st control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an abnormal process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the big hit related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a stop process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production aspect setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the continuous hit production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the delay production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the battle latter half production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving / probability change production setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the random display production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production execution management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation production management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flow chart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing display jackpot-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows V production command processing. (A) is a flow chart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various devices which the pachinko machine in a 2nd control example has, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the injection device typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the effect member is located at the operation position, and (b) is a state where the effect member is located at the operation position and the division operation is executed. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the ejection device is driven and the granular member is ejected in a state where the granular member is ejected. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the effect member moves to the standby position and the granular member returns to the storage area, and (b) shows a state where the rotating member is driven. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the ejection device is driven and the granular member is ejected. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various devices which the pachinko machine in a 2nd control example has, and the production content. It is the timing chart which showed typically the situation of various devices of a pachinko machine when a series of accessory productions are performed in a 2nd control example over time. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of operation control of the launching accessory at the time of starting in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory at the time of a series of accessory production in a 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed typically the abnormality discrimination result during the series of accessory effects in the second control example, and the flow of the effect to be executed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the accessory action table in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the abnormality determination table in a 2nd control example typically. Is. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an initial operation process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production mode setting processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory production management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the production abnormality detection processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd production inside abnormality determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production execution management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the button repeated hit production start screen in a 1st modification, and (b) showed an example of the display mode of the screen which urges a specific operation during button repeated hit production. It is a figure. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed after the upper limit is reached in the first modification, and (b) is an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed before the upper limit is reached. It is the figure shown. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode just before the end of an effective period by non-execution of a specific operation in the 1st modification, and (b) is a display mode when an effective period is over by non-execution of specific operation. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an end command reception process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display variation pattern command setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the V interruption processing 3 which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a push command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production timer renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the display control control equipment in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table in the 4th control example, (b) showed typically the content of the 4 table for normals in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the time saving / probability change 4 table in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design lottery processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the result command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of an obtainable character display screen in a modification of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an obtainable character display screen of a chance UP pattern in a modification of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. It is the figure which showed an example of the acquisition possible character display screen of the combination by which the jackpot is decided in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character storage area in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the character lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the number lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle effect setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the arrangement | positioning setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a modification of icon display production. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the expansion rate selection table in the modification of icon display production. It is the flowchart which showed the random display effect setting process A performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of icon display effect. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the demonstration production state in the production modification of the launching thing. (B) is the figure which showed an example during the demonstration production state end process in the production modification of the shooting accessory. (A) is the figure which showed the state which the projectile accessory in the production modification of the projectile accessory is located in the reference position. (B) is the figure which showed the state in which the projectile accessory in the production modification of the projectile accessory is located in the preparation A position. (C) is the figure which showed the state which the projectile accessory in the production modification of the projectile accessory is located in the preparation B position. It is the flowchart which shows the accessory production management processing B which is executed by the MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the production modification of the projectile accessory. It is the flowchart which shows the production mode setting processing B which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the production modification of the projectile accessory.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape with an upper surface protruding and protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a wind turbine (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. It is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side) (see 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and the game area is launched). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display device is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also determines the type of big hit. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability change. In addition, in the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state”, the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate that has the rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in the manner of tilting or standing up to the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closing state, the opening / closing plate is located in the play area. By blocking the gap between the second winning port 640 and the second winning port 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.

  It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not changed, and the second symbol Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In addition, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (rearward of the window portion of the base plate 60) visible through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortened time, the second winning port 640 may be increased during the probability change or the shortened time by other methods such as increasing the winning probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variably displayed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

  Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be on the left or right of the variable display device unit 80 or below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, or may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

  In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (Situation), it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning accessory 640a is provided. To the left, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and a lot of chances for the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the through gate 67 is passed to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  Unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game board 13 has a bilaterally symmetrical configuration, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 with "right hitting" or to hit second with "left hitting". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is during a probable change, during a shortening time, or during a normal time), how to shoot a ball to the player. There is no need to change "left" and "right". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the player cannot aim at the first winning opening 64 with "right hitting", and the ball fired with "left hitting" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is during a probable change, during a shortening time, or during a normal time), how to shoot a ball to the player. Can be requested to change to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding the game property that changes how to hit the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to be displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, For example, it may be on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, on the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or on the upper side.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the second winning opening 640.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205. .

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5 and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

  Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted and the back side is visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

  The operation unit 500 includes a bottom case 511 and a rear case 510 formed in a box shape, the front side of which is open from an outer wall portion 512 which is provided upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The back case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the end on the front side of the outer wall portion 512, and the game board 13 is faced in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). The support plate part 513 which supports is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning projection 513a protruding toward the front side in a shape capable of fitting with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so that the fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted therethrough.

  The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. The protrusion may have a shape (smaller outer shape). In addition, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion 513a also has a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As described above, the game board 13 includes rails 61, 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (not shown) on the base plate 60 that has been cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 having a shape, a sphere flow-down unit 150 configured to allow the spheres discharged from the game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) are fired toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling a possible firing effect unit 300 and the like, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral portion is arranged and fixed so as to face the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive resin material, and is configured so that a player can easily recognize various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. As a result, regardless of the shape or arrangement of the base plate 60, it is possible to visually recognize the structure provided on the back side of the base plate 60 and use it for various effects.

  For example, even when the sphere flow-down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so that the sphere flowing down the sphere flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the sphere flow-down unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect produced by the visually recognized sphere, but details will be described later.

  If there is a portion that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member having low light transmittance (or light impermeable).

  The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The launch effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is separated from the center frame. It can be fired toward the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 to effectively visually recognize the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. it can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

  The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper inside of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 symmetrically arranged on the inner left and right portions of the rear case 510. Equipped with.

  Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 at the left and right positions of the opening 511a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in time series. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state, and FIG. 8 illustrates the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the projecting state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state. In FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the enlarged state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state are illustrated.

  Further, FIG. 10 illustrates the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the production standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production upper end state. In FIG. 11, the left side displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state and the right displacement rotation. The unit 800 is in the effect lower end state.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap each other in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes its state from the production standby state, a collision may occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the production standby state is controlled to be executable under the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 operates. By controlling the state change from the production standby state to be executable under the condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are overlapped in a front view. Can be avoided.
Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (the front and rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlarging / reducing unit 600 is configured to be displaceable downward with the effect members 700 collectively arranged at one location, and in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the displaceable displacement. The components of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the above state, and the operation is controlled so that the area viewed in front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

  After that, the enlarging / reducing unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are aggregated again (see FIG. 8), and are displaced upward in a state where they are collectively arranged at one place, and are returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG. 7.

  The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the production standby state not only in the vertical component but also in the horizontal component direction.

  In this embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape with each center point C1 as a center, and an advancing / retreating path portion S1b extending from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a to the lower left and right sides.

  In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right lateral slide members 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while on the right side. The horizontal slide member 840 is disposed above the lower end of the common arc portion S1a.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 11, when the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is displaced upward, it is as if the lateral slide member 840 were the third symbol display device 81. The player can visually recognize it as if it is rotationally displaced about the center point C1 arranged near the center.

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom in the effect using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

  12A and 12B are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13A and 13B are shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along line XIV-XIV of FIG. 9.

  Note that the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, but the state where the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2) is shown in FIGS. 12 to 14.

  12 (a) and 13 (a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b), the granular member 320 is fired and scattered. An example of the completed state is illustrated.

  In the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600, in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the central portion of the collective arrangement is arranged above the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300. Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is visible through 310.

  On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the effect member 700 is arranged in the vicinity of the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is invisiblely shielded.

  Since the displacement locus of the scaling unit 600 and the partition member 310 do not interfere with each other, the firing effect unit 300 is configured to execute the motion effect of launching the granular member 320 to the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600. It is possible to control.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is fired in a path inclined upward as it goes forward. , Is struck on the front wall of the partition member 310 and bounces and rises in the range formed by the partition member 310.

  Thus, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if coming toward the player's side, and attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

  Further, with such a configuration, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement.

  In other words, the standby position of the granular member 320 fired toward the partition member 310 of this embodiment may be a position directly below the partition member 310 or a position closer to the front. However, in this case, since the shooting effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure the installation space of the guide path through which the ball entering the first winning opening 64 flows. It becomes difficult, and there is a possibility that it is necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 310 is arranged at the forefront position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged obliquely rearward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning port 64 can be secured, It is possible to arrange the guide route of the ball without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the first winning port 64 cannot be freely arranged from occurring.

  When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12A, the granular member 320 scattered inside the partitioning member 310 and the third symbol display device 81 are shown as shown in FIG. 12B. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This allows the player to visually recognize the combination of the planar display and the movement of the granular member 320 that is displaced three-dimensionally.

  When the control to fire the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13A, the granular member 320 scatters inside the partition member 310 and the state of the scaling unit 600 as shown in FIG. 13B. It can be shown to the player along with the changes. In this case, for example, by adjusting the timing of the scattering of the granular member 320 and the timing of displacement of the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 on the front side of the scaling unit 600 that changes state. Can be visually recognized, and the force of the state change of the scaling unit 600 can be strengthened.

  Here, as a method of effecting with the state change of the enlarging / reducing unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the state change of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 is also conceivable.

  However, as in the present embodiment, in the situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to effectively produce the display.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms the range in which the granular member 320 that produces an action in accordance with the state change of the scaling unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the scaling unit 600. Therefore, even if the enlarging / reducing unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult for the player to see the granular member 320.

  Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small-sized member, it is possible to prevent the scaling unit 600 from becoming harder to see than when the granular member 320 is configured with a large-sized member.

  Therefore, the effect of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 can be improved even in the state where most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlarging / reducing unit 600.

  Further, the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

  That is, the displacement rotation unit 800 is, like the scaling unit 600, a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (standby standby state, see FIG. 7), and Since the slide member 840 can be changed in state in which it is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (production lower end state, production upper end state, see FIG. 10 and FIG. 11), corresponding to that state , The effect of visualizing the scattered granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 in combination, and the effect of visualizing the scattered granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 in combination are executed. be able to.

  In this case, it has been described that the enlarging / reducing unit 600 can effectively produce an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the displacement of the mode in which the rendering member 700 is dispersed, but the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. The air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing member 854 by scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing member 854 disposed in the. It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at a high speed, and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visualizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visualizing it in combination with the scaling unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. Can be used as and.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the launch effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. The displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged on the rear surface side of the front end line FL1 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced right above from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit. 800 may collide.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating path portion S1b is set as a path capable of avoiding a collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path that passes through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the ejection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are set. The degree of freedom in setting can be improved, and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured to have a large displacement width because it can be displaced upward beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged so that a space can be secured between them, however, until the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 is secured even during transportation. Not considered. Therefore, at the time of transportation, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and regulate the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 so that they are not arranged close to each other.

  Returning to FIG. 6, description will be made. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement restricting device 180 is configured such that the state can be changed by a manual operation from the rear surface of the rear case 510, and restricts the enlarging / reducing unit 600 from downwardly displacing from the effect standby state in the restricted state.

  By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported.

  More specifically, conventionally, a means for suppressing the displacement of the movable accessory by packing a cushioning material (a cushion member such as cotton) in a range in which the movable accessory is displaced, and for removing the buffer material after the arrival at the game hall. Therefore, the movable accessory may be prevented from being displaced during shipping or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetration point for extracting the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the rear case 510 are not present. If the and are not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be pulled out, and there is a possibility that the game hall will be overloaded.

  As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is adopted in the present embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between the regulated state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is regulated and the regulated released state in which the regulation is released without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the rear case 510. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

  15A is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15B is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15C is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a figure.

  15A and 15B, the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulation-released state is shown, and in FIG. 15C, the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state is shown. As shown in FIG. 15A to FIG. 15C, in the displacement regulation device 180, the cylindrical state 183d is projected from and retracted from the contact member 181, so that the regulation state and the regulation release state are switched. In the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to project to the inside of the rear case 510 and engage with the restricted hole 657 of the scaling unit 600, which will be described later in detail.

  16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18 (a) is a rear view of the contact member 181. 18B is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18C is a front view of the operation member 183.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 that is disposed in contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6) and a contact member that is disposed on the rear side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operating member 183 in the front-back direction, an operating member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guiding member 182, and an operating member 183 disposed between the operating member 183 and the contact member 181. The operation member 181 is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply a biasing force toward the back side.

  Since the operation member 183 is formed in a substantially oval shape that is long in the left and right in rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that accommodate the operation member 183 are also formed in the substantially oval shape that is long in the left and right in rear view. Since the displacement regulating device 180 is formed, the outer shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long in the left and right in a rear view.

  The contact member 181 is designed mainly in the shape of a plate so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510, and holds the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the rear side. The wall portion is extended, the insertion hole 181a into which the fastening portion projecting from the rear case 510 is inserted, which is formed in the left and right end portions, and the coil spring 184 can be arranged in a gap. A tubular holding portion 181b protruding toward the side and an engaged portion 181c configured to be able to engage with the operating member 183, which constitutes a known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183, are provided.

  The guide member 182 includes a main body portion 182a that extends in the front-rear direction and has an elliptical annular shape that extends along the outer periphery of the contact member 181, and a screw into which a fastening screw that is screwed into a fastening portion that is inserted into the insertion hole 181a is inserted. The insertion portion 182b, the fastening portion 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the contact member 181 is screwed, the retaining portion 182d protruding radially inward at the rear end of the body portion 182a, and the body portion 182a. The upper and lower inner portions include a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction.

  With this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, and the operation member 183 can be held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by the setting of the fastening direction.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is configured to be inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the rear case 510). Therefore, the fastening screw cannot be touched when the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is removed from the rear case 510.

  Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the rear case 510 is inserted from the rear side of the guide member 182 into the screw insertion portion 182b, the rear side of the rear case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). (Refer to FIG. 3), the displacement regulating device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510.

  The operation member 183 has a main body 183a formed in a cup shape having an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, the outer shape in rear view is formed and the front side is open, and the front edge of the main body 183a. From the bottom of the main body 183a to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a cylindrical portion 183d that protrudes from the center of the bottom of the main body 183a to the front side. An arcuate ridge 183e protruding in the front side in an arcuate shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 around the portion 183d and a position at which the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181 can be engaged. And an engaging portion 183f that is configured to form a known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

  An elliptical seal is attached to the back surface of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15 (a)). By arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent mistakes in the vertical position during assembly. can do.

  By making the main body 183a elliptical, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from rotationally displacing. That is, even if the operating member 183 is likely to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

  The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in a rear view, and thus the operating member 183 can be prevented from falling out of the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction in the state where the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182.

  The groove 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the longitudinal displacement of the operation member 183. In the present embodiment, the ridges 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side, so that the groove portions 183c are also formed on two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is mistakenly placed upside down.

  The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be inserted through the central opening of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. When the cylindrical portion 183d projects from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 and regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as described later.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 and a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 183e is disposed so as to be able to be arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is arranged so as to face the large-diameter side tubular portion of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction.
When the operation member 183 is pushed in, the arcuate ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased and the load can be locally increased. It is possible to prevent a load from being generated.

  The arc-shaped protrusion portion 183e is not formed in a circular shape, but is formed in an arc shape in which a circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. This can prevent the engagement portion 183f, the cylindrical portion 183d, and the coil spring 184 from being too far apart.

  The state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operation member 183 is urged to the back side by the coil spring 184. When the operation member 183 is pushed to the front side against the urging force, the operation member 183 includes the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is actuated and is pushed in with a minimum stroke or more actuated by the latch mechanism, the regulation state and the regulation release state described above are alternately switched.

  As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated, and the operation member 183 is applied with a minimum external force by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, the displacement regulating device 180 may unintentionally change its state.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally changes in state due to shock at the time of shipping or vibration during transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state (the production member 700). Is located at the upper displacement end).
When the production member 700 displaced from the production standby state is placed in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13) and subjected to a shock during shipping or a vibration during transportation, the production member 700 is a partition member for the launch production unit 300. There is a risk of collision with 310, and the production member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement portion 183f is arranged at a position (a position eccentric to the right side) away from the position (center position) where the biasing force is applied to the operation member 183, and the operation member 183f is disposed. The gap between the groove 183c of the guide member 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set to be large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operating member 183 is intentionally lowered.

  Accordingly, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be preliminarily inclined, and thus the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a displacement amount in which the operation member 183 is displaced in the front-rear direction by an unintended external force.

  The relationship between the displacement regulation device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

  21A shows the regulation state of the displacement regulation device 180, and FIG. 21B shows the regulation release state of the displacement regulation device 180.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the open / close base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 so that the operator can extend the hand. It is configured to be touched. Since this position is opposite to the side (opening / closing front end side, right side) on which the operator who opens the inner frame 12 and enters the work enters, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the operator unintentionally displaces the displacement restricting device. Touching 180 can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that form the above-described latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but also for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

  For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the operating member 183 may change its posture and the left side may not be pushed in sufficiently.

  Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to push the formation portion of the latch mechanism at the pinpoint, which makes it easier for the displacement regulating device 180 to generate the necessary displacement. It can be said that it is easy to successfully switch the state of the restriction device 180.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c forming the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the worker enters from the right side to regulate the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the worker can easily perform the operation of pinpointing the formation portion of the latch mechanism.

  Further, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed to the pushed side. Therefore, as the pushing amount increases, the pushing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operation member 183.

  In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear 650. This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

  Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operating member 183 (front-back direction) are orthogonal to each other, the operating member 183 applies a load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent receiving. Accordingly, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated without making the formation portion of the latch mechanism strong.

  As described above, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained. Therefore, the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, the maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily by maintaining the state of the scaling unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state during maintenance.

  That is, when the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 during maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement restricting device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the scaling unit 600, so that the scaling unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are prevented from colliding. You can

  If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the deregulated state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180. (See FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 becomes displaceable, and the enlarging / reducing unit 600 can be made to perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

  Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and looked into from the open front end side (right side), so that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the deregulated state. It will be explained that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged in front of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and therefore the direction viewed from the right side. In, the operating member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the displacement restricting device 180 is in the deregulated state, the operation member 183 is arranged so as to project beyond the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 toward the rear side. When viewed from the right side, the operating member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

  Therefore, the worker does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as a confirmation work before turning on the power, but the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly moved with respect to the outer frame 11. By observing that the operation member 183 is protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the direction of opening and looking in from the right side, it is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the deregulated state.

  In the present embodiment, the rear case 510 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and the operation member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

  Here, the case where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulation device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. . In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricted state, it is detected that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has not changed its state during the operation when the power is introduced. The detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52). Is determined from the output of, and the position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  By showing the position detection error display to the clerk of the game machine store, it is possible to notice that the state of the displacement regulation device 180 may not be changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting whether or not the state of the scaling unit 600 has changed, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the position detection error display normally provided in the scaling unit 600 is used to provide an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 without preparing a program for displaying an additional error or a display material. Can be output. As a result, it is possible to reduce the design cost.

  In the present embodiment, when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the scaling unit 600 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, it is required that the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is disabled while the power is on and that the power is once turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation member 183 may be operable even while the power is on.

  Further, the configuration that disables the pushing operation of the operation member 183 can be set arbitrarily. For example, the pushing operation may be disabled by the friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operating member 183, or the large diameter portion may be provided on the proximal end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the plate rear surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front and rear to limit the displacement of the operation member 183.

  As a different situation, an example in which the operation member 183 of the displacement regulation device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 matches the front and rear of the cylindrical portion 183d.

  For example, during maintenance, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes to the restricted state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the scaling unit 600, when a driving force is generated after the maintenance is completed and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is limited. By displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. It is possible to inform the clerk of the gaming machine store that the above is true, but details will be described later.

  Accordingly, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be determined by diverting the device for detecting the state of the scaling unit 600 without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be executed before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling into the inner frame 12, not only opening the inner frame 12 but also the work of opening the back pack 92 from the inner frame 12 are required. It is preferable to operate the device 180.

  It returns to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 and demonstrates. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlarging / reducing unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as an effect device for enlarging the game. These rendering devices will be described in order from the launch rendering unit 300.

  22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the assembled state of the launch effect unit 300, the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161. That is, it is possible to perform an effect for the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

  Since the partition member 310 is formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the granular members 320 scattered inside, and to the player who visually recognizes the area surrounded by the center frame 86. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular members 320 in an overlapping manner.

  24 is an exploded front perspective view of the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the launch effect unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the launch effect unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forms a box shape with an open lower side, and the partition member 310. A plurality of granular members 320 arranged to be displaceable inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged so as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not fall off from the partition member 310, and the partition member A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

  The partitioning member 310 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-shaped portion arranged at the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And a bottom plate portion in a parallel relationship with the front plate portion 311 is disposed on the back side of the front plate portion 311 and has a closing wall extending from the left and right sides and the upper portion of the bottom plate portion to the front side so as to close the gap. The back surface partition 313 and an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) formed integrally below the back surface partition 313 and formed between the front plate 311 and the back surface partition 313 are communicated with each other. The back partition lower part 314 which can be configured between the curved plate part 312 and the path, and the deformed penetrating part 315 penetratingly formed in the back partition lower part 314 are provided.

  Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the partition member 310 in a front view are substantially the same. Is formed. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

  Accordingly, the component member for hiding the edge portion of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for the purpose of hiding the edge portion of the partition member 310. Displayed by eliminating the need for a dedicated component member for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 and reducing the number of members while the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized as overlapping with the display by the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the characters are divided, it is possible to maintain the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81.

  The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 will be scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 will be very large for a powerful effect. There is a need to do more. Therefore, if the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, a powerful effect can be executed by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with high density.

  On the other hand, if the space is too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is secured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the back partition lower portion 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration at the time of injection.

  Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the back partition lower part 314 than the left and right central portions 312b, the left and right portions 312b are closer to the left and right portions 312b than the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right central portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in can be narrowed.

  In other words, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left and right central portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is located in the internal space IE1. It is possible to easily reach the vicinity of the central portion. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the granular member 320.

  In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize the granular members 320 as if they were exploding and scattered in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1. Can be improved.

  The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed so as to incline downward toward the back side and incline downward toward the center of the left and right sides.

  Thus, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, it is possible to displace the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, toward the center of the left and right sides and downward toward the rear side.

  Further, the degree of descending inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured such that the descending inclination toward the left and right center side is steeper than the descending inclination toward the rear side. Accordingly, as a tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, the displacement toward the center of the left and right sides can be generated in preference to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, in the right and left end positions where the granular members 320 tend to be dense due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later, the granular members 320 try to be displaced toward the back side all at once, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) during the downward displacement. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the degree of descending inclination toward the back side of the left and right central portion 312b of the bending plate portion 312 becomes steeper as compared with the degree of descending inclination toward the left and right central portion of the left and right portions 312a of the bending plate portion 312. Is configured. Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid that the granular members 320 are concentrated during the flow.

  On the other hand, in the back partition lower part 314, the plate portion that is arranged to face the back surface side of the bending plate portion 312 is approximately the same as the left and right center portions 312b of the bending plate portion 312 in a side view (see FIG. 12A) ( It is formed in a flat plate shape having an inclination angle such that the space between the left and right central portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the back partition lower part 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly larger angle) the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320.

  Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the rear partition lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the emission direction of the granular member 320, which can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given from the rear partition lower portion 314 to the granular member 320 is substantially uniform. can do.

  The odd-shaped penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and has a short portion that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long portion that bends left and right in a manner of connecting the upper ends of the short portions. Equipped with. The penetrating direction is formed so as to incline obliquely upward from the back surface side to the front surface side with respect to the plate surface of the back surface partition lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12A). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the rear section lower part 314 (the lower side portion of the odd-shaped penetration portion 315 in FIG. 12A) forming the odd-shaped penetration portion 315 is not arranged to face the ejection direction of the granular member 320.

  This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 will collide with an acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is ejected, so that it is possible to avoid a local load from being generated on the granular member 320 and the rear partition lower part 314, and It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the lower part 314 of the rear section from being cracked or chipped.

  As shown in the enlarged view of FIGS. 24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least softer than the resin material that forms the partition member 310) and has a substantially soccer ball shape (a regular pentagonal shape of 12). And 20 regular hexagonal 32-sided polyhedron, which is formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron, and is provided with non-penetrating concave portions 321 which are concavely provided along a plurality of parallel straight lines.

  The non-penetrating recesses 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the geometrical center position. That is, in the straight line direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased to the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

  Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to the posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

  In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed, breakage or chipping of the granular member 320 can be easily avoided. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed toward the ejection direction when the load is ejected from the ejecting device 400, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed collides with the front plate 311. You can Thereby, the load at the time of collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

  The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the rear surface partition portion 313, an electric decorative substrate 332 that is fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electric decorative substrate 332. A lid portion 333 arranged on the right side and fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 331 and formed between the fixed plate portion 331 and the fixed decorative plate portion 331 so as to be able to accommodate the decorative board 332.

  The illumination board 332 is provided with a light irradiation section 332a such as an LED on both right and left sides, and light having an optical axis is irradiated in the left and right direction from the light irradiation section 332a. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light can be visually recognized as light divided into particles.

  Of the light emitted from the decorative substrate 332, the light emitted to the right side may illuminate the right path (right-handed flow path) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. One purpose. The light emitted to the left will be described later.

  The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance (or light impermeable), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as the light divided into particles, and the decorative board 332 is fixed to the fixing plate unit 331 and the cover unit 333 in a range apart from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is possible to avoid being shielded and visually recognized.

  The second light irradiator 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the rear surface partition portion 313, an electric decorative substrate 342 that is fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the electric decorative substrate 342. And a lid portion 343 which is disposed on the left side and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 so as to be able to accommodate the decorative board 342 between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341.

  The fixing plate portion 341 is formed of a resin material having low light transmittance (or light impermeable), while the lid portion 343 is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, when viewed from the left, the illuminated substrate 342 is visible, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is extended and protrudes leftward. Thereby, the player's visual field can be narrowed in advance, and it is possible to prevent the left side surface of the decorative board 342 from being visually recognized in a front view.

  Accordingly, it is possible to irradiate light through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding visual recognition of the illuminated substrate 342.

  The illumination board 342 is provided with a light irradiation section 342a such as an LED on both left and right sides. Light having an optical axis directed in the front direction is emitted from the light emitting unit 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side portion of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left side path of the game area.

  Here, the configuration different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the right-side illumination substrate 332 is positively directed to the game area is that the pachinko machine 10 has a gaming property (normally The left-handed game is played, and the right-handed game is performed during the probability change, the time saving, and the big hit game). This will be described below.

  The game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the downward flow path of the ball on the left side of the game area, so during normal play, the firing intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball flows down along the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity in the left side portion of the game area is set too high, the visibility of the ball deteriorates, which hinders the adjustment of the emission strength of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

  On the other hand, when shooting a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically hits the ball with the maximum firing strength. The fired rubber 69 suppresses the momentum of the fired rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the flow path of the ball on the downstream side is significantly reduced, and the ball travels exclusively through the same path.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed in the downstream side of the second winning opening 640 with a width that allows one ball to pass through the second winning opening 640. All the balls that have not been thrown pass through the guide route DL1 and head toward the variable winning a prize device 65 and the general winning award 63 arranged on the downstream side.

  As described above, since it is not necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball is deteriorated in the right side portion of the game area (particularly where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since it is unlikely to occur, it is possible to execute an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

From such a situation, in the present embodiment, in the decorative board 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation section 332a is arranged so as to direct light to the game area, while the decorative board 342 arranged on the left side. Then, the light irradiation section 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area.
As a result, it is possible to execute an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction with the player.

  Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting unit 342a arranged on the right side surface. Through holes 341a are formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portions 342a. Thereby, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the illumination board 342 is shielded by the fixing plate unit 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a, You can avoid being seen. The object illuminated by the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface will be described later.

  26A is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 when viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 25. It is a figure. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiator 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiator 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310 and a light on the back side of the partition member 310. An LED through which the shaft passes.

  As a result, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is illuminated. It is possible to execute an effect to irradiate.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the light irradiation unit 342 a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 does not have an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310, and the back side of the partitioning member 310 is not provided. It is composed of only LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

  Thereby, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is controlled. Can be improved.

  In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the comfort of the game in the normal state can be improved. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but since it is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64, Often, the player is looking at the left side range from the center of the game area.

  In this case, when light is emitted from the second irradiation device 340 to the inside of the partition member 310, the light shines at a position as close to the front as the game area, so that the player who views the left side of the game area is backlit. Therefore, the visibility of the game area for the player may deteriorate.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved to the back side and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a. It is possible to weaken the degree of influence that the has on the visibility of the game area.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 emits light with high intensity while illuminating the inside of the center frame 86 in a front view while reducing the degree to which the game area is illuminated. The performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect of causing the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) to shine without lowering the visibility of the game area.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the back side of the vertically arranged substrate unit 167, avoiding a vertically arranged substrate unit 167 which irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. Accordingly, since it is possible to perform the light emission effect while avoiding the light from the light irradiation unit 342a entering the light guide plate 161, the light effect performed by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are illuminated. It can be separated from the production.

  When the light guide plate 161 is adopted as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the effect. In particular, the light emitted to the periphery of the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) is likely to cause the light guide plate 161 to shine, which may cause a need to suppress the light emission intensity, which causes a reduction in the degree of freedom in production. Was there.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiator 342a is configured to travel so as to avoid the light guide plate 161, so that the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiator 342a is improved. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect around the light guide plate 161.

  It returns to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 and demonstrates. The injection device 400 is a device that is disposed below the partition member 310, and on which the granular member 320 that flows down from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 rides.

  28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. 28 and 31, the configuration of the injection device 400 is shown as an outline, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show the details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show the details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged on the rear side. Also, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, the injection device 400 is, as a member to be fixed, a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and is fastened and fixed on the back surface side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member with the fixed member 350, and electrical wiring and a transmission arm member 470 to be described later that are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360. A limiting member 370 for limiting the displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed in the central portion.

  The fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the gaming board 13 and the launch unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). Then, the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350 so that the driver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

  Therefore, as a preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is possible to perform the work of removing the firing unit 300 from the game board 13. This prevents the situation where the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular member 320 is discharged from the fixing member 310 in the state where the launching unit 300 is attached to the game board 13. be able to.

  The injection device 400 is configured to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350, and is configured to be linearly displaceable by inserting a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401. A linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed above the linear motion member 410, displaceably supported along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface on the upper portion; The contact member 430 is disposed below the moving member 410 and is configured to be changeable between a contactable state and a contactless state in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410.

  The injection device 400 is a member that is displaceably disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is configured to be capable of transmitting a load to the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 and rotatable to the space forming member 360. A front transmission member 440 that is axially supported on the outer peripheral surface of the front transmission member 440, and a drive shaft that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 that is fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and that meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460, which is arranged on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440, are provided.

  The injection device 400 is a member displaceably arranged on the back side of the space forming member 360, and is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 so that the injection device 400 can move from the rear transmission member 460. A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 that is rotatably supported by a straight line extending in the left-right direction so as to be rotationally displaceable and that is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

  The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the protruding direction of the shaft portion 362 protruding from the space forming member 360. The drive force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the intermediate range in which the drive gear 450 that rotates by the drive force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged in the divided range, and the drive force is in the front range and the rear side. Is transmitted to each of the ranges, the displacement of each component occurs in the front side range and the rear side range.

  From such a design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are provided with openings for transmitting driving force, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

  Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the range on the front side of the intermediate portion 401 and the range on the rear side of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the front range and the rear range. , The details of the configuration in the intermediate range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

  First, the description will be given focusing on the range on the front side. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-described opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 protruding from the upper end to the front side in a columnar shape, and the columnar protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported by a plurality of rods, a plurality of rod fixing parts 404 which are arranged at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar protrusion near the lower end toward the front side. The support pillar portion 405 is provided, and the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed at the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

  The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is constantly biased by the coil spring SP1, and before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range, the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the biasing force. The coil spring SP1 is arranged obliquely below the linear motion member 410, but this also has the aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 easily accumulates.

  The linear motion member 410 includes the above-mentioned claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted therein, and a trapezoidal protruding portion 413 protruding from the upper end portion in the left-right center in a trapezoidal shape. A linear ridge portion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower ridge portion formed below the ridge portion 414 as a ridge shorter than the ridge portion 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the center of the left and right toward the front side.

  The trapezoidal protrusion 413 is formed so as to be able to contact the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protrusion 413 can contact the collision member 420, and the portions other than the trapezoidal protrusion 413 do not contact the collision member 420. It

  The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other components during load transmission, which will be described in detail later.

  The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion that abuts the cushioning member 352 of the fixed member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by this abutment (the upward displacement end is set).

  The collision member 420 has a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate shape that extends from the rear end of the curved plate portion 421 in parallel with the plane on which the linear motion member 410 is displaced. The plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 in the displacement direction of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 at the lower ends of the left and right central portions of the plate portion 422. The buffer member 424 is provided at a position opposed to each other and is arranged so as to be able to contact the trapezoidal protrusion 413.

  The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423. That is, the cylindrical protrusion 403 is also used as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

  The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a resin material having high durability and high flexibility. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 contact each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 is not damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

  The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular long plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed at one end of the long plate as a circular opening through which the support column 405 can be inserted, and the other end of the long plate. At a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting part 432, and a hook-shaped projecting part 433 projecting toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting part 432. Prepare

  The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support pillar portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is rotatably supported by the support pillar portion 405 so as to be rotatable.

  The projecting portion 432 and the hook-shaped projecting portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members at the time of load transmission, which will be described in detail later.

  The fixing member 350 can receive the motor fixing portion 351 on which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, the cushioning member 352 arranged so as to be able to contact the displacement restricting portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 that are formed as recesses and are fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screws that are inserted from the front side into the through holes inside the recesses into the female threads formed in the circular protrusion 403; And a guide portion 354 configured by an inclined surface that is narrowed from the front side and the left and right directions to guide the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

  The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a resin material having high durability and high flexibility. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the displacement restricting portion 416 is prevented from being damaged or chipped. be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cushioning members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of positions where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the biasing direction. As a result, as will be described later, even if the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward at a high speed by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load that the linear motion member 410 receives at the time of sudden stop. Can be absorbed by the deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

  The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to rotate and remove the fastening screw inserted into the coupling recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, in the state where the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12), a screwdriver can be inserted into the fastening screw. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

  This prevents a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened in the state where the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300 are assembled, in advance. You can

  Next, a description will be given focusing on the range on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a spine. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of a plate-shaped portion extending to the front side at the upper end position left and right end portions of the face plate portion, and arranged below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363 And a pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protruding from the rear plate portion to the front side, and formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right end portions and arranged on the same line to have a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates an urging force to the side that retracts the lid member 480, and a cylindrical projection on the rear side at the upper left of the opening 361. Cylindrical protrusion 3 It includes a 6, a.

  The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. Along with this, a wall portion having an arcuate inner surface centering on the shaft portion 362 extends from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. The wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

  The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclinations of the left and right inner side surfaces are flush with the left and right inner guide surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the flowing-down granular member 320 is on the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

  The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that the protruding tip contacts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. The flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 while the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

  The support pillars 365 have different shapes on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed into a small-diameter tubular shape that projects toward the left and right outer sides, and on the left side, it is formed into a tubular shape having an inner diameter capable of receiving the tubular portion of the left cover member 489.

  The cylindrical projection 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. The transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off by fixing the large-diameter head screw to the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366.

  The transmission arm member 470 is a long member that is formed in a V-shape in appearance, and has a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366 and is a support through which the columnar protrusion 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical projection 472 projecting from one end in the lengthwise direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and another end in the lengthwise direction orthogonal to the axis of the support hole 471. And a transmission protrusion 473 provided in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

  The columnar protrusion 472 is formed so as to extend through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 to the front side and engage with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusions 472 is changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the rear transmission member 460, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 is changed, which will be described later in detail.

  A restricting member 370 is disposed on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and presses the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back surface side and the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling.

  The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the rear surface side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 to the rear surface side (the rear surface side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). This can prevent the cylindrical protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, and thus can prevent the engagement between the cylindrical protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 from being released. it can.

  The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent the placement of the electric wiring from changing (for example, changing the placement of the electric wiring due to vibration, etc.), and to secure the entry route for other components. The lateral slide member 840 and the wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced along a path including a position close to the device 400.

  The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted into the lid member 480 and that transmits the driving force to the lid member 480.

  The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable forward and backward through the partition member 310 through the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12A), and is a curved plate-shaped forward and backward portion. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right end portions of the advancing / retreating portion 481, and a plurality of receiving plate portions 485 coaxially received at the extending end portions of the extending plate portion 485. Receiving portion 486, a transmission hole 487 formed in the left extended plate portion 485 in the shape of a curved long hole and through which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a tubular shape surrounding the right receiving portion 486. Is formed in a disk shape having a portion and surrounds the receiving portion 486, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column 365 can be inserted, and the fastening screw The right hip which is prevented by the It includes a member 488, a cylindrical portion to be inserted into the left side of the receiving portion 486, a left cover member 489 having a long hole shape portion continuous to continuously transfer hole 487, a.

  The left cover member 489 is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c, which are not formed like a drill hole along the axial direction, but will be described in detail later.

  The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured so as to face the axis, it is not a shape in which the pipe is simply divided, but the radius of the arc and the forming length are changed according to the left and right positions. The design intention will be described.

  First, the advancing / retreating section 481 includes an overhanging section 482 that makes a business trip to the entry side at the left-right center position. The overhanging portion 482 is formed so that the overhanging width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end face on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. Thus, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, the load directed to the left and right outside with respect to the component. Can be given and the constituent members can be driven outward to the left and right.

  Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the irregular-shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhanging portion 482 precedes the partition portion 482. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left-right center position where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a small position shift that may occur at a portion (the left-right center of the overhanging portion 482) that starts to enter the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315, so that the advance / retreat portion 481 cannot enter the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315. Can be suppressed.

  Thirdly, the radius of the arc is lengthened near the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481 as opposed to the lateral center position of the projecting portion 482. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays near the left and right sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

  This way of staying is not completely left-right uniform and may be left-right uneven. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if a sufficient space is not secured, the unevenly retained granular members 320 may collide with the advancing / retreating portion 481. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is increased in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where the granular members 320 are likely to stay. This makes it possible to secure a sufficiently long interval between the advance / retreat portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance, so that even if the manner in which the granular member 320 stays is uneven, the granular member 320 and the advance / retreat portion 481 are not separated from each other. You can avoid collisions.

  Another design concept will be described. The extended plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be recessed toward the retreat side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the extended plate portion 485 from colliding with the retained granular member 320.

  In addition, even when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 is curved in the concave formation portion of the extended plate portion 485 and the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be gathered on the upper part of the collision member 420 by being configured to have a size such that it can pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

  The receiving portion 486 has a different shape on the left and right sides. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular tubular shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape), which is a design considering assembly.

  It returns to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31 and demonstrates. Since the support column portion 365 supporting the lid member 480 extends to the outside in the left-right direction particularly on the right side, when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the support column member 480 is supported. It is necessary to divide the advancing / retreating portion 481 in order to assemble it to the pillar portion 365.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The odd-shaped penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured to be able to move the lid member 480 forward and backward with respect to the partition member 310, and to be able to prevent discharge of the granular member 320 from the partition member 310. That is, the modified through portion 315 cannot be made unlimitedly large, and the flexibility of the modified through portion 315 is limited.

  Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to such an extent that it cannot pass through the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315, the forward / backward displacement cannot be performed, so that the shape is required to have accuracy. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed by coupling a plurality of members, the shape may be collapsed due to factors such as an assembly error.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different between the left and right, and the advance / retreat portion 481 does not need to be divided. In the assembling process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the supporting pillar portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a while being inserted into the supporting pillar portion 365. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support pillar portion 365.

  At this time, in the right receiving portion 486b, the support pillar portion 365 is arranged to face the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting fastening screws through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing it into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

  After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and if the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right supporting column portion 365 is supported so as not to fall off, the lid member 480 is free. The forming member 360 can be rotatably supported.

  The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 to 36, displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in time series.

  34A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34B is a transmission arm member when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34A. FIG. 34C is a side view of the cover member 480 and the cover member 480, and FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34B.

  35A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35A. FIG. 35C is a side view of the cover member 480 and the cover member 480, and FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG.

  36A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36B is a transmission arm member when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36A. 36C is a side view of the lid member 480 and FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG. 36B.

  35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. In detail, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the entry side end portion within the displacement range, and in FIG. 34, the lid member 480 is located at the retract side end portion within the displacement range. The state in which the lid member 480 is arranged is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the lid member 480 is arranged in the intermediate position of the displacement range is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane shown in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane shown in FIG. 34B). ) And are orthogonal.

  Therefore, without any countermeasure, the contact area of the left cover member 489 normally changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the lengthwise direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is the left-right direction as shown in FIG. It is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts on the right side of the left cover member 489 (close to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470) in the state of being inclined with respect to each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is in contact with the left cover member 489 in the width direction when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction. To be

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34C, FIG. 35C, and FIG. 36C, the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can abut in the widthwise direction.

  That is, in comparison with the first contact surface 489a of the left cover member 489, the first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side, The second contact surface 489b is formed to have a small inclination with respect to the left-right direction, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side so that the second contact surface 489b is formed with a smaller inclination to the left-right direction as compared with the second contact surface 489b. And a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in the state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left-right direction is gradually reduced as the first contact surface 489a is maximized and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 is approached. Designed to.

  More specifically, since the contact position between the transmission projection 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial direction of the lid member 480 as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, The inclination of the contact position of the left cover member 489 with the upper side surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

  Accordingly, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is relative to the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489) at the timing when a large load occurs, that is, the timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

  As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489), so In addition to the small contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and the transmission projection 473 may be overloaded. is there.

  As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the ratio of the weight of the lid member 480 loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing / retreating portion 481 occupying most of the own weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the own weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction in which the lid member 480 is displaced to the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

  In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but most of the dead weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, so at least the biasing force. A part can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

  As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than when most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. Can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retracted position to the approached position, the distance between the contact position of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 is When the member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side, it is configured to have the longest length.

  In addition, in the first contact surface 489a, the normal line at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 is an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

  As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes long, so that the load required to rotate the lid member 480 is reduced. can do.

  As a device of the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34C, the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission protrusion 473 is formed with the groove 473a along the longitudinal direction up to the position beyond the center in the width direction from the front side to the back side.

  As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by the deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by the deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b), and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape extending along the same plane across the left and right sides. To be done.
Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the protruding portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction.

  The radius of the overhang portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the left-right center position is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the bending plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum entry width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, and thus the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (to a degree caused by a design error of each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding and being damaged.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, the description will focus on the intermediate range. The driving gear 450 meshes with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 are rotated as the drive gear 450 rotates. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following description, counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the front (when viewed from the front transmission member 440 side) will be described as forward rotation.

  The front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 have a structure for ensuring a relative position and a rigidity for each other on the sides arranged to face each other, and are used for transmitting a driving force on the opposite surface. A shaped portion is formed. Details of the shape portion used for transmitting the driving force will be described below.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front-side transmission member 440 has a substantially disc-shaped main body plate portion 441 and an axially protruding portion that is axially more centrally than the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441 and has a groove inside thereof. A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is formed in the center of the main body plate portion 441 to a size that allows the shaft portion 362 to be inserted, and a gear that is formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 that covers the teeth, a detected portion 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation The transmission projection 446 is provided so as to project parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442.

  The groove forming portion 442 is provided with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. Regarding the groove, the front transmission member 440 is normally rotated in a state in which the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 are arranged in the first groove portion 442a. The second groove portion 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a diameter larger than the reference circular arc of the first groove portion 442a. And a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a.

  The second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, but their forming angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is abrupt. Is designed to be.

  The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a formed along the protrusion direction in a straight line connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Accordingly, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the groove 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the body plate portion 461. A groove forming portion 462 that extends in the axial direction of the main body plate portion 461, and a groove portion is formed in the center portion of the main body plate portion 461 with an inner diameter that is sufficiently larger than the base side outer diameter of the shaft portion 362. And a non-contact opening portion 463 formed so as to avoid contact with each other.

  The main body plate portion 461 is provided with a weight portion 461a that is formed in the radial direction in a range in which the groove portion to be recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of displacement of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotation axis.

  In the present embodiment, in order to calculate the center of gravity when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440 that are rotationally displaced integrally are viewed as an integrated body, and to correct the center of gravity to the rotation axis, the weight portion 461a and The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. Accordingly, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, and thus the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

  The groove forming portion 462 is provided with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. , The rear transmission member 460 is formed in a state in which the first groove portion 462a formed along the first arc shape and the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 are arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the columnar protrusion 472 is guided by positive rotation (clockwise rotation in a rear view), and a first groove portion formed on the opposite side of the second groove portion 462b from the first groove portion 462a. A third groove portion 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than an arc serving as a reference of 462a, and a fourth groove portion 462d connecting the third groove portion 462c and the first groove portion 462a are provided.

  The second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, but their forming angle ranges are not common. That is, as compared with the second groove portion 462b, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees), and the groove and the non-contact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460 are formed. It is designed so that the change in distance between them is slow.

  Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, the outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

  38, 39, 40, and 41 are plan views of the ejection device 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. 38, 39, 40, and 41, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 is visible. Further, for ease of understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic diagram in which a change in length can be grasped.

  38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in time series. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 has flowed down toward the collision member 420 and stopped, FIG. 39 shows a production standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. A firing standby state, which is a state of waiting for a firing timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state, which is a state immediately after the ejection device 400 executes a firing effect. Although FIG. 41 shows the state where the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the displacement on the entrance side will be described as a production standby state (see FIG. 39) of the injection device 400.

  In the production standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, so that the player's eyes can be kept away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below the granular member 320.

  In the launch standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is hung so that the cylindrical protrusion 403 contacts the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

  In the fired state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreat side, the collision member 420 is flipped up by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical projection 403 is guided by the guide hole. It stops at the position where it abuts the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The flow-down of the granular member 320 that is splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being moved to the left and right center sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, so the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixed member 350 and the collision member 420. The depth of the saucer shape configured with the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly in terms of shape. In the present embodiment, the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received evenly is accommodated in the partitioning member 310.

  As a result, for example, even when a large number of the granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return after that, the granular members 320 that have returned earlier will cause the collision members 420 to return. Since a slope which descends downward toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular member 320 returned from the back flows to the left side along the slope. That is, it flows to the left side in a manner of flowing on the granular member 320.

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the left-right deviation of the granular members 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, and thus reduce the uneven arrangement of the granular members 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each firing effect. can do.

  Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged at an intermediate position of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 are at one point. It just abuts at. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the amount of the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, it is possible to change the posture in a manner of rotating about an axis parallel to the axis of one of the cylindrical protrusions 403.

  As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 start returning toward the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture in a manner in which the right side portion is lower than the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost part of the curved plate part 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the attitude of the collision member 420 changes, the center position of the guide portion 354 in the left-right direction and the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 are aligned in a front view, and the center position of the guide portion 354 in the left-right direction is adjusted. It is considered that whether the flowing down granular member 320 flows leftward or rightward is almost evenly distributed to the left and right depending on the difference in the contact point between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 is displaced to the right side with respect to the center position of the guide portion 354 in the left-right direction, and flows down the center position of the guide portion 354 in the left-right direction. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421.
As a result, the granular member 320 returned later is easily flowed down to the side where the granular members 320 that are staying are small, so that the granular members 320 can be easily distributed substantially right and left.

  The change in the posture of the collision member 420 is not always permitted in the same manner. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are respectively arranged at the upper end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the production standby state of the injection device 400.

  Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is restricted, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the production standby state of the injection device 400.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expands and contracts in the direction parallel to the lengthwise direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The attitude of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. This makes it possible to stabilize the way in which the granular members 320 are scattered by receiving a load from the collision member 420 when the retention states of the granular members 320 (the left and right deviations in the number of particles) are equal.

  As described above, when the ejection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. Return to the upper surface of, and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for enabling this state change will be described in detail below.

  42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. FIG. 6 is a plan view of 440.

  42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Other than the above, as a part related to mutual load transmission, the protruding portion 414 and the lower protruding portion 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430, and the hook shape. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

  Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof. Are shown without being hidden.

  Further, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control.

  42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 accompanying the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 (hereinafter, also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43). ) The change in arrangement is illustrated in time series. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

  In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component in the production standby state of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 detects the detection target of the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in the state where the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled by the forward rotation. By detecting the switching from the state in which the portion 445 is not arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 enters, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the production standby state.

  In FIG. 42B, the arrangement of the respective constituent members in a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts the ridge 414 of the linear motion member 410 and starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 is illustrated. From the state shown in FIG. 42B, the front transmission member 440 starts to push down the linear motion member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, between FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 42 (b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420, the collision member 420 slightly vibrates, but the vibration or load is directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

  FIG. 42C shows the arrangement of the respective constituent members in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 starts to be released.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front-side transmission member 440 are in contact with each other, so that vibration or load generated by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 is generated. , Can be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

  On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction in which the linear motion member 410 is pushed down, and this is the transmission position where the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the transmission member 440. It is a direction of separating from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and the vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotation displacement of the transmission member 440.

  The influence on the forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, the effect of differentiating the speed under which the drive control is performed as the rotational displacement from the actual speed, and the effect of preventing the rotational displacement and causing the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are exemplified.

  In FIG. 42D, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in the state where the contact member 430 begins to tilt is illustrated. To be done.

  The abutting member 430 is a member that is not biased by any other biasing means and changes its posture according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. After FIG. 42D, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 is increased to two, that is, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. However, the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is a direction in which the displacement is caused by its own weight. Therefore, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is little changed from the state before FIG. 42D in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

  FIG. 42 (e) shows the arrangement of the respective constituent members in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other.

  After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction in which the transmission protrusion 446 is pushed forward, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 move. The load required for posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  In FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the respective constituent members in a state where the contact member 430 is completely tilted is illustrated. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is formed. The posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (the posture change is prevented) in the state in which is arranged in the third groove portion 442c.

  Therefore, as for the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 is compared with the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are contacted with each other at a speed in a direction facing each other. The aspect can be softened.

  In FIG. 43 (a), a view in the same state as FIG. 42 (f) is shown for easy understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward as the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, and the lower projection streak 415 and the contact member of the linear motion member 410 are abutted. The arrangement of each component in the state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 has started contact is shown.

  The state shown in FIG. 43A to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43D corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

  Each of the lower protrusion portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 is provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the opposite sides at the tip portions on the opposite sides. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage at the contact position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, and to stably contact the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433. Can be contacted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the switching of this state is caused by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Is output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 detects the detection target of the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 while the drive motor MT1 is being driven and controlled to rotate normally. Control to determine that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting the switching from the state in which the portion 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. To be done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43B, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430. A biasing force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load in a direction of raising the contact member 430 is applied to the contact member 430. The displacement of the installation portion 432 is restricted by being hindered by the groove forming portion 442.

  Since the contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (the outer surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (the inner surface of the third groove portion 442c), The load generated at that time is toward the center of the circle.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotating shaft of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding portion 432 is applied to the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being influenced, and it is possible to regulate the displacement of the protruding portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

  Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. Accordingly, for example, heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 needs to be always energized in the firing standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. Can be improved.

  This is a restriction on the setting of the length of the display effect from the firing standby state to the firing state, for example, when driving and controlling the ejection device 400 in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the respective constituent members in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand is illustrated. To be done.

  After the state of FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove portion 442c, so that the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is the front transmission. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

  Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to de-energize.

  In FIG. 43D, the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 is retracted from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion portion 415 of the linear motion member 410, and the restriction of the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is released. , The linear member 410 is displaced upward by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and the arrangement of each component member in the state where the collision member 420 is bounced upward is illustrated. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

  Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since the same configuration is adopted in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  In FIG. 43 (e), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 finishes standing up is illustrated. To be done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) has been applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of raising the contact member 430 in the subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing upright.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a, and the contact member 430 is separated from the contact member 430 via the protruding portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to be directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 rises.

  From the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), when the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is normally rotated, and it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the production standby state, and the MPU 221 (so that the state changes shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of firing productions. The control program (see FIG. 4) is designed.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the ejection device 400, the firing execution control has been described in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated once in the forward rotation direction from the production standby state of the ejection device 400. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, an effect is produced in which the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that is raised by the urging force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 is scattered.

  In this effect, since the granular members 320 are scattered in the player's field of view, it is possible to improve the player's attention with a flash, and for example, a few minutes without being able to tell the player whether or not it is a big hit. At the timing near the end of the subsequent long reach, if the jackpot is a big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular members 320 to perform.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is out of alignment), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may mislead the player as a big hit, which is not preferable.

  Further, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the state does not shift to the firing state (when it is out of order), the driving sound of the drive motor MT1 indicates that the long reach in progress is a big hit. The player will be able to understand whether or not this is the case, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of disconnection, after the ejection device 400 is set to the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. It is configured to be able to return to the production standby state of the ejection device 400 without going through the firing state.

  That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), by driving and controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise), each component is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series described above. Can be made.

  In this case, before the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction starts (see FIG. 42 (e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 into contact with each other. By releasing (see FIG. 42 (f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 when releasing the contact.

  After FIG. 42 (e), the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in the assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous due to the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement associated with the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the direct-acting member 410 from bouncing off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is in the production standby state without performing the production in which the granular member 320 is scattered (see FIG. 42 (a)). Can be returned to.

  Note that, in order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, the detection sensor SC4 is detected. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be drive-controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has re-entered the detection groove.

  Thus, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for not scattering the granular member 320 can be executed with the same preparatory operation accompanying the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player whether the jackpot or the jackpot is easy to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the winning or losing result due to the difference in the driving sound.

  Particularly, according to the present embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, as compared with the case where control is performed to switch the drive direction from the state where the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven. .

  Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the hit / notification notification timing in the effect, it is difficult to determine the driving direction even if a driving sound is generated, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player knows the hit / miss result. be able to.

  As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the hit / notification notification timing without risking that the player grasps the hit / no hit result by the driving sound, so that the drive motor MT1 in the firing standby state can be started. The stop timing can have a wide range. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in the state sufficiently before the firing state, it does not hinder the subsequent production. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 is excessively rotated against the control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

  44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, there is a change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise rotation) of the rear transmission member 460. It is illustrated in time series. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

  In FIG. 44A, the arrangement of each component in the production standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 42A) is shown. As shown in FIG. 44A, in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is placed at the displacement end position on the approach side.

  Since the lid member 480 receives a biasing force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retreat side, a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is generated. Transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without any measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44A, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 abuts the third groove portion 462c of the groove forming portion 462, and the abutment point is interposed therebetween. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface are in contact with each other, and therefore the load generated by the contact is toward the center of the circle.

  Therefore, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, so that the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 44B, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 44C, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change rotationally drives the rear transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force moves the columnar projection 472 upward. Since it acts in the direction of displacing to, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 provided via the lid member 480 are: Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  In FIG. 44 (d), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove 462 d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retreat side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in non-contact with each other.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the lid member 480 to the entry side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of fatigue accumulated in the transmission arm member 470. .

  In FIG. 44 (e), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the first groove 462 a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), the firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is formed. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side and is configured to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

  In FIG. 44 (f), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side and returns to the production standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is a state after execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 ( See e)). Therefore, of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be extremely reduced.

  As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the displacement direction of the lid member 480 is the direction that opposes the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Since most of the above can be used as a driving force for rotating the other constituent members that are in contact with the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be secured.

  FIG. 45 is a plan view of the ejection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. Note that in FIG. 45, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 is visible.

  In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof. Are shown without being hidden.

  In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction in a state in which the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the rising side (for example, the production standby state, see FIG. 42A), and the front transmission is performed. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit is set for the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous drive is restricted.

  When the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven in a state in which the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control is limited to the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. Although the damage of the drive motor MT1 is avoided by providing the above, details will be described later.

  FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the disposition of the linear motion member 410, the disposition of the collision member 420, and the disposition of the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transfer member 440 and the rear transfer member 460 rotate. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a time change of the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  Note that FIG. 46 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective configurations, but shows the guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  Further, in FIG. 46, the horizontal axis indicates the standard of the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the production standby state (FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 44 (a)). That is, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), 162 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (d), 42 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 43 (d), 287 ° corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 ° corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

  Also, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). 44 ° corresponds to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 ° corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

  In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of the forward rotation of the front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degree), and the above-described constituent members corresponding to the angle. The state change in is described. The arrangement change of each component due to the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each component due to the drive control in the reverse rotation corresponds to the left toward FIG. 46. Responding to changes.

  As shown in FIG. 46, before the firing state (angle is 287 degrees), the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward by reversely rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is: It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward when the firing state is reached. That is, in the present embodiment, the upward displacement speed of the collision member 420 can be set to be plural.

  Since the collision member 420 has already risen after the firing state has been exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted midway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

  For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. However, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is suspected to be between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle 360 degrees). If there is a detected portion 445 in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of normal rotation. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

  By this rotation, the injection device 400 is once returned to the production standby state, and thereafter, the execution control of each production is performed. This prevents the situation in which the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 generates heat after a situation where control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. You can

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the granular members 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) to the state (the angle is 304 degrees) when the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change. The front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotation speed that stabilizes.

  For example, if the arrangement stabilizes within 2 seconds after the firing, the drive control is performed so that the front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees (45 seconds / revolution) per second, so that the granularity in the middle of flowing down is reduced. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

  The rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4 times speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entrance side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

  In this state, by stopping the driving in the production standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular members 320 are gathered to the left and right center sides along the shape of the lid member 480. You can Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 drops from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retreat side, and the collision member 420 of the collision member 420 is discharged. Get on.

  In this way, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 to be different, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

  Accordingly, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular members 320 to be fired (arrangement or displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be made different. , It is possible to improve the effect of production.

  It returns to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 and demonstrates. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlarging / reducing unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as an effect device for enlarging the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

  47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the scaling unit 600. 47 and 49, the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600 is shown, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the projecting state of the scaling unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlarging / reducing unit 600 includes an effect member 700 that can be displaced up and down at a center position in the left-right direction and is configured to emit light, and a hemispherical illumination that is fixedly arranged on the left and right sides. And a device 613.

  By performing a light emitting effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player, and an effect of making the player visually recognize it is performed. be able to.

  51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate 611.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes a left-right elongated main body member 601 which is fastened and fixed to a bottom wall portion 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. Side front cover member 610 having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and interlocking with each other in a meshing relationship, and an intermediate portion between the upper arm member 620 and the upper arm member 620. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected to each other at a position that changes with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. A transmission gear 650 that is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2, and is rotatably supported by the main body member 601; Annulus assembled to 1, provided with a torsion spring SP3 loading the biasing force of the upward to the upper arm member 620, and the presentation member 700 coupled to a distal end of the lower arm member 630, a.

  The main body member 601 is formed in a left-right elongated plate shape, and has a pair of left-right elongated guide holes 602 arranged in a straight line, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions extending from the left-right symmetrical position in the front-rear direction. A columnar shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the columnar shaft portion 603 as a central axis, a columnar shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side portion to the back side in a cylindrical shape, An arcuate hole 606 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as a central axis, and a circular shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as a center, the detection groove is directed toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side to the rear side. And a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

  The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

  The columnar shaft portion 603 has a portion protruding from the front side inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620. By screwing a large-diameter screw into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, the upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off.

  The columnar shaft portion 603 has a portion projecting on the back side inserted into the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

  One arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by the overhanging portion 601a protruding from the back side of the main body member 601 in a V shape, and the other arm portion is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions to push down the biased portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

  The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Accordingly, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable with each other.

  The columnar shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. The transmission gear 650 is supported irremovably by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605.

  The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Accordingly, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable with each other. The upper arm member 620 is irremovably supported by the transmission gear 650 by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

  The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is arranged at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in a production standby state, or at a position other than that. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not it has been performed.

  The front cover member 610 is a thin member formed of a resin material having low light transmittance and fastened and fixed to the body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed at the left and right central portions and a rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outer sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions, and is formed so as to project to the front side of the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 to emit light. And a hemispherical lighting device 613.

  The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and shields the field of view so that the columnar shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the rear surface side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, and projecting to the rear surface side with a dimension slightly longer than the front-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacting the main body member 601 with the surface. The overhanging contact portion 611a is in contact therewith.

  Accordingly, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space partitioned by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. it can. In other words, a change in the attitude of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in the attitude of bending with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

  The front plate portion 612 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and configured so that the structural parts of these members are not visible to the player. And a pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a as planes parallel to the front plate part of the plate, and a wiring part formed as a recess opened to the back side in the plate part protruding from the left upper end toward the back side. And a recess 612b.

  The sliding surface 612a is assembled to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, fastened and fixed, and configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1 formed with low friction due to its shape and material can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a flat plate surface formed along the locus of displacement along with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

  The shape of the pressing member PC1 on the side facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the contacting state between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a is point contact. Is configured to be. Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

  The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are brought into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. It

  In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set by the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a size that the effect member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a contacts the pressing member PC1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side, so that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 becomes the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent the contact.

  The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the left and right sliding portions 612a have the same function. That is, at least the arcuate shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 needs to be formed in a flat shape, and the shape in other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed so as to be limited to an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and extends to the back side in other portions (the front side design portion is It may be configured so as to project to the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side), or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured in the same plane shape as in the left side portion of the present embodiment. good.

  The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654. The forward fastening is restricted by the fastening screw that is fixed. That is, by restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 in addition to restricting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is possible to avoid a large local load.

  The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for electrical wiring through which the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630 is passed. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the rear case 510 and the scaling unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the rendering member 700.

  In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction along with the displacement. Even in the case of displacing about half the width of the rear case 510 in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from slackening and dropping downward.

  The hemispherical illuminating device 613 is a device that includes a hemispherical lens member, and irradiates light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back surface side to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

  This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 as compared with the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is oriented in the front-back direction. it can. For example, it is easy to put light in the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or by irradiating light to the effect member 700 in the projecting state or the enlarged state to make the light noticeable. You can

  The upper arm member 620 is formed in a long plate shape, and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar shaft portion 603, so that the upper arm member 620 can be inserted into the columnar shaft portion 603. , A gear portion 622 formed on an arc centering on the support hole 621 and configured to be meshable with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at its longitudinal end portion. The connecting portion 623 configured to be able to insert the cylindrical protrusion 631 and the left upper arm member 620 are formed as long holes having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 is provided that projects from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

  The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin that is continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc around the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. And a portion 624b.

  The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the allowance portion 624b functions as a portion that blocks the transmission of the driving force, which will be described in detail later.

  The biased portion 625 is a portion with which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the biasing portion 625 raises the biasing force in the direction of upwardly displacing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the biased portion 625. The arm member 620 receives.

  Further, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hook-shaped tip portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

  The lower arm member 630 is configured substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path for passing the electrical wiring, and is a circular cylinder protruding from the middle position in the long direction to the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer positions of the columnar protrusion 631 to the rear side in a cylindrical shape, and a front-rear direction at the left and right inner positions of the columnar protrusion 631. And a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetratingly formed along a pair of arcs centering on the support hole 633.

  The cylindrical protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 631 is screwed with a large head diameter screw from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

  The cylindrical protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for reducing resistance, and is attached to the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 632 on the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing in a large-diameter screw from the head.

  The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the placement portion 635, which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is configured such that the lower portion is thicker than the upper portion. Accordingly, when the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at a thick portion, and thus it is effective to change the attitude of the effect member 700 to the forward tilted posture. Can be regulated.

  The lower arm member 630 on the left side is an arrangement portion 635 that is open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin-walled lid portion 636 disposed on the side and functioning as a lid for the placement portion 635.

  The arranging portion 635 is provided with a base end side through hole 635a formed in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the side of the cylindrical protrusion 632.

  The base end side through hole 635a is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side and is guided to the arrangement portion 635, and then escapes from the arrangement portion 635 to the tip side of the lower arm member 630.

  The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the production standby state, a lower meat portion 637 arranged below the boundary is formed so as to be recessed on the back side. To be done. In other words, the upper side is formed as a thin plate portion with the tangent line as a boundary.

  In the lower arm member 630 on the right side, the lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction. Further, in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, the lower side wall portion 637 constitutes the upper side wall portion of the placement portion 635, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is disposed as a lid in the guide path. The thin lid portion 636 is tightened and fixed for reinforcement.

  Since the electric wiring is guided to the effect member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electric wiring. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from being entangled with or scratched by these members.

  The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 composed of the same member and assembled from the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction via the pressing member PC1. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the back side, it abuts and limits the displacement. The same function as in the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side.

  That is, since the lower arm member 630 is configured such that the pressing members PC1 are assembled on both front and rear sides and can contact the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 through the pressing members PC1, it is possible to displace the lower arm member 630 in the front-rear direction. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and easily reduce the resistance to the vertical displacement when the displacement is limited.

  The protruding tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the back side end of the upper arm member 620. This makes it possible to avoid the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601, even when the tip end of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the back side to the extent that it comes into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front and rear.

  This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction unintentionally. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connecting position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are forward and backward. Since it is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself, the displacement of the lower arm member 630 in the front-rear direction is likely to occur.

  The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular body 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 formed in a gear shape on the outer side of the semicircular body 651 in the radial direction, and a semicircular body portion. A support hole 653 formed as a circular hole through which a cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted on the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651, and a cylindrical shape projecting from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main body portion 651 to the front side. Columnar protrusion 654, a detection plate portion 655 formed in a plate shape of a thin plate that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the detection plate portion thereof. A thickening portion 656 is formed to be thickened between the support hole 653 and the supporting hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position of the thickening portion 656 on the support hole 653 side.

  The gear portion 652 is arranged in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

  The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601, and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. With this, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654. The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female screw portion formed at the protruding tip of the columnar protrusion 654 is provided with a large head fastening screw. By being screwed, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

  The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be engageable with the above-described displacement regulation device 180 (see FIG. 6). By disposing the regulated hole 657 on the side of the support hole 653 (a position near the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 moves from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement restricting device 180 in the regulated state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21A). The load (moment) transmitted is configured to be reduced.

  Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a portion that needs to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. In other words, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced by forming the portion where engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall.

  53 is a front exploded perspective view of effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. A rotary plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-shaped main body 710 and rotatably supported with respect to the functional plate portion 720; and between the rotary plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. The expansion / contraction displacing member 740 that is arranged and configured to be displaced in the same manner as a magic hand by interlocking with the rotation of the rotary plate 730, and the drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emission effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 to execute light emission effect, and fastened and fixed to the tips of the plurality of expansion and contraction displacement members 740, respectively, in a production standby state. Dude includes a plurality of shielding design member 760 to be combined so as to shield the passage of light at the front side of the light emitting effect device 750, a.

  The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of columnar protrusions 711 protruding from the left-right symmetric position to the rear side in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the columnar protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary projections 712 protruding in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 from the position above the arc around 711 to the back side, and a pair of columnar projections. A through hole 713 bored in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged below the through hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a pressing member arranged on the back surface of the plate. And a member PC1.

  The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 which passes through the lower arm member 630 and is guided between the disposing portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636 to the tip side of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. As a result, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 may come into contact with other members or be visually recognized by the player.

  The wiring guide member 714 has a function of guiding the electric wiring DK1 and, in addition to the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610, the upper surface is formed of an inclined surface which is inclined downward toward the rear side. It also has the function of softening the contact of.

  That is, when the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the rear side. However, since the wiring guide member 714 contacts the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side during the upward displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

  Similarly to the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also slidably arranged on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower portion can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 in the course of the upward displacement of the effect member 700. With such a configuration, it is possible to separate load generation positions for maintaining the posture of the rendering member 700.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The functional plate portion 720 is formed of a resin material in a substantially plate shape, and has a tubular portion 721 that is formed in a tubular shape so as to project toward the back side in the central portion and has a tubular interior penetrating therethrough, and a central axis of the tubular portion 721. An arcuate hole 722 formed along a coaxial arcuate shape, a sensor arrangement portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged at one end of the arcuate hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. Fixing portion 724 having a large opening for fastening and fixing the drive motor MT3, a radial elongated hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial elongated hole 725a. A plurality of (five sets in this embodiment) guide holes 725 formed of a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect each other at a right angle, and extend outward in the radial direction on the extension line of the radial elongated holes 725a. Multiple (in this embodiment, Extension plate portion 726, and a pair (book) protruding from both ends in the width direction of the extension plate portion 726 from the rear side end portion of the flat surface portion arranged at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726. In the embodiment, each of the extended plate portions 726 is provided with a pair of auxiliary protrusions 727, and a pair of columnar protrusions 728 protruding from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side in a columnar shape.

  The tubular portion 721 is arranged such that its rear end contacts the plate-shaped main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710 with the internal through hole communicating with the through hole 713 of the plate-shaped main body 710. To be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back surface side of the plate-shaped main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the rear surface side end portion of the tubular portion 721.

  As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

  The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 fastened and fastened to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

  The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 to project to the front side, and the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7 to allow the rotary plate 730 to move. The posture can be determined.

  The guide hole 725 is a through hole group formed with a width that allows the guided projections 741b, 741c, 742a of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged, and extends along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the tubular portion 721. The long hole-shaped radial hole 725a to be formed, and the long hole-shaped hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end portion of the radial hole 725a, along the straight line orthogonal to the straight line which is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. And a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b formed in.

  The radial elongated hole 725a and the intersecting elongated hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary projection 727 correct the posture of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. However, the details will be described later.

  The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the front end on the back surface side can contact the plate-shaped main body 710. In the abutting state, a fastening screw inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side is screwed into a female screw formed on the tip side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the functional plate portion 720 becomes the plate-shaped main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

  In the assembled state, the columnar protruding portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730. That is, the columnar protruding portion 728 is also used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-shaped main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

  56 is a front view of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotary plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  The rotating plate 730 is formed of a resin material in a substantially disc shape, and has a cylindrical portion 731 that is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to project toward the front side in the central portion and penetrates the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 formed along the coaxial arc shape, and a long through-hole formed at a position on the outer diameter side of the tubular portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc shaped hole 732. A plurality of guide holes 733 (five in the present embodiment), and extended claw portions 734 extending radially outward at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733.

  The cylindrical portion 731 has an inner diameter designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the detection sensor SC7. A detection part 731a formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove, and a gear part 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape capable of meshing with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

  The arcuate hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed in a length that can secure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at about 120 degrees or less.

  The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape, and each has a small-diameter circular arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 and a center of the cylindrical portion 731 rather than the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a. A large-diameter circular arc portion 733b having a long length from the axis and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b and the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a are provided.

  The form of the connecting portion 733c is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the change in the length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle is formed so as to change corresponding to the position. It In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and improve the effect by making the displacement speed of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 non-uniform.

  The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape protruding in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, is configured to be engageable with the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the rear side in the thickness direction. The back side nail | claw part 734a and the front side nail | claw part 734b formed in the front side rather than the back side nail | claw part 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are divided at a position approximately in the middle of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

  The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided projection portion 743b and the second guided projection portion 744b of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740. The front side claw portion 734b and the back side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, respectively, in which the projecting tip position from the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 differs in the front and rear, and in order. It is guided inward in the radial direction, but details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 is configured such that the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

  That is, even if the elastic displacement members 740 have the same shape, since the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravity direction is different, the displacement generated by the action of gravity is different for each elastic displacement member 740. For example, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down by its own weight and is displaced in the direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is radially outward of the extending claw portion 734. The first guided projection 743b of 740 may be arranged, and the guiding by the extended claw portion 734 to the inside in the radial direction may fail.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740. The guide inward in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

  On the other hand, even if the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to the effect of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in the direction approaching the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, and therefore the extension claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extending claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary and is formed short to reduce the material cost and downsize the rotating plate 730. You can

  The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

  58 (a) is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. FIG. 59B is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760.

  58 (a) and 58 (b), of the five sets of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, one set arranged at the uppermost part is shown in a state in which they are collectively arranged, In FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in a state where it is separated.

  Since the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism that is composed of a plurality of elongated members arranged in two layers in the front and rear, in the following description, a plurality of expansion and contraction displacement members 740 arranged on the front side. The plane in which the long member is displaceable is also referred to as a front layer plane, and the plane in which the plurality of long members disposed on the rear side are displaceable is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

  The expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in two layers in the front and rear and is rotatably supported at the upper end of the pair of base end side members 741 which are rotatably supported at the lower end. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 rotatably supported at the upper ends of the first elongated members 742, and an upper end of the second elongated member 742 are provided. A tip adjustment member 744 having a guide slot 744a extending linearly so as to be guided.

  The proximal end member 741, the first elongate member 742, and the second elongate member 743 configured in a front-rear pair are designed to have the same length and supporting position in the elongate direction.

  The base end side member 741 includes a transmitted projection 741a which is cylindrically projected from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side to the back side, and a rear surface from the back surface where the cylindrical projection 741a is projected to the front side. A guided projection 741b protruding in a columnar shape and inserted through the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of the first elongated member 742 protruding in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided projection 741c inserted into a through hole formed in the.

  The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotary plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotary plate 730 rotates.

  The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction. The guided projection 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided projection 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

  The first elongate member 742 is rotatably supported by the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the elongate direction, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side, and is formed on the front layer plane. The guided protrusion 742a is inserted into the upper end of the base end side member 741 on the side.

  The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate portion 725 and is guided in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

  The second elongate member 743 is rotatably supported by a front-rear direction axis at a substantially intermediate position in the elongate direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape from the upper end of the member on the front layer plane side to the front side in a cylindrical shape. From the upper end of the member on the layer plane side, a member having a diameter of about the member width is provided so as to be flush with the front end face of the member on the front layer plane side, and a pair of cylindrically projecting from the protruding tip to the front side. The support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the substantially middle position of the member on the rear layer plane side to the back side are provided.

  The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives the load directed inward in the radial direction by this guide (see FIG. 56).

  The tip adjusting member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the supporting protrusion 743a of the second elongated member 743 to be inserted therethrough. A pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in a hole shape and a second guided protrusion 744b protruding in a columnar shape from the center position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side are provided.

  The protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is arranged in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front side claw portion 734b of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a load directed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 57).

  The second guided protrusion 744b is not inclined in the shape of the protruding tip, and is inclined as the rotary plate 730 having the rotation center on the transmitted protrusion 741a side is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. The surface (the surface on the left side in FIG. 59 (b)) on the side opposite to the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) is provided with a chamfered inclined surface.

  Due to this inclined surface, it is possible to prevent the resistance at the time of contact with the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 from becoming excessive even if the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is slightly displaced in the front-rear direction. You can

  As shown in FIGS. 58B and 59B, when the expansion and contraction displacement members 740 are collectively arranged or separated, they are arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the expansion and contraction displacement members 740. The support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer ends or inner end portions of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip end adjustment member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the lengthwise direction) of the tip adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

  The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjusting member 744, extends toward the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extending tip toward the side that covers the telescopic displacement member 740. A member having a substantially triangular shape in a front view, which has a shape portion that extends in a slanting direction and that extends in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) from which the extension distal end is displaced. is there.

  The shielding design member 760 is configured to cover the back side decorative member 752 invisible by attaching colored (red in this embodiment) reflection sheets to the front and back sides, and along the back side of the member at the right end portion. The extended plate portion 761 is provided to extend rightward in a plate shape so that the plate surface is formed.

  Similar to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 has colored (in this embodiment, red) reflective sheets attached to the front and back surfaces thereof, and is arranged on the right side in the front view (adjacent to the clockwise direction). It is arranged so as to face the back side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and if the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back side, it abuts, and the displacement can be suppressed.

  The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be displaced from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 to the rear surface side. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid abutting (colliding) along.

  This action becomes more remarkable as the arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is moved away from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least by a dimension allowable for the shielding design member 760 as a positional deviation in the front-back direction of the shielding design member 760. By disposing the extended plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extended plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shield design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shield design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. You can avoid (collision).

  Further, the front surface of the extended plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface or may be formed as a flat surface whose normal line is oriented in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the inclined surface is configured such that it is closer to the back side as it is farther from the shielding design member 760.

  Thereby, for example, with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the uppermost shielding design member 760 in front view is slightly displaced to the back side. Even when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the arrangement position (see FIG. 63), the front and rear position of the shielding design member 760 on the right side in front view is along the front surface inclination of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. The gap can be corrected. Accordingly, the relative front-rear direction positions of the adjacent shield design members 760 can be easily aligned.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the second elongated member 743 of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shield design member 760, the member that supports the right side portion of the shield design member 760 is arranged in the rear plane. A member that supports the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged in the front plane, and the middle portions of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect in a front-rear manner so that the left side portion becomes the right side portion. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily inclined to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Since the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common and the left side portion is the right side portion (the side where the extended plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it can be easily tilted to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Due to the inclination of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back surface side of the shielding design member 760 that is arranged to face the extension plate portion 761. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. A) can be avoided.

  In a state where the five shield design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shield design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shield design members 760 are on the left side (adjacent to the counterclockwise direction in front view). The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 can prevent the position shift to the back side.

  According to this configuration, the shield design member 760 is prevented from being displaced in the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shield design member 760 on the right side (adjacent to the clockwise direction in front view). Therefore, by disposing the five sets of shielding design members 760 so as to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress positional displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

  The interlock between the rotary plate 730 and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotary plate 730 is shown by an imaginary line, and an example of the external layout of the transmitted projections 741a and the guided projections 741b, 741c, 742a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is shown. It

  In FIG. 60, a state in which the expansion and contraction displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58) is illustrated, and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates counterclockwise about 120 degrees in a front view, and the expansion and contraction displacement members 740 are dispersed. The state (see FIG. 59) is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, 742a are guided along the guide holes 725, and the arrangement of the transmitted projections 741a arranged in the guide holes 733 in accordance with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 is the rotary plate. By displacing in the direction of approaching the rotation axis side of 730, the state of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 changes.

  In this state change, since the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side based on the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be displaceable so as to extend, details will be described later.

  It returns to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 and demonstrates. The light-emission production device 750 includes an electric decorative substrate 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 arranged on the front side of the electric decorative substrate 751 and formed of a light transmissive resin material. Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the decorative board 751 and the decoration member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, it is possible to secure a region for disposing the drive motor MT3.

  An opening 751a is formed in the center of the decorative substrate 751. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it becomes possible to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring. However, since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a, the smaller the opening 751a. desirable.

  Since the LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is likely to be dark and visually recognized. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the structure of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

  That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and a light-transmitting member 752a which is assembled from the front side and has a mirror-like visual surface (for example, silver-plated coating). And a mirror surface member 752b.

  Since the opening is formed at the center of the light transmitting member 752a and the center of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at the position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in the front view. . Thereby, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the player can visually recognize the reflected light by the light irradiation from another direction (for example, the light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613). It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized as dark.

  The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 62 to 64, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  62 shows the rendering standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descending midway state in which the rendering member 700 descends from the rendering standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extension unit 600 in the extended state. Illustrated.

  The descending state shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the production standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the rendering standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a of the upper arm member 620 and the allowance portion 624b.
That is, the state in which the cylindrical protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624a and is arranged at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  In this production standby state, for example, it is suggested that the production member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the production member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the pachinko machine 10. The state is switched in accordance with the execution of the effect to be performed, and before the suggestive effect is executed, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin portion 624b side.

  As described above, the allowance portion 624b is a shaped portion that is continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position overlapping 606 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load that rotates the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, and thus the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In addition, even if the above-mentioned effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is the effect aspect in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. Controlled to change state to.

  In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 is not displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front in order to return the columnar protrusion 654 to the allowance 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

  Accordingly, when an effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting an effect related to the effect member 700 thereafter due to a difference in driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

  The allowance portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction to raise the effect member 700. That is, when the effect member 700 is driven up, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the upper end side displacement end position in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the subsequent displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is a margin portion. The displacement is such that it slides along 624b.

  Then, no matter where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged in the margin portion 624b, there is no difference in the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, the accuracy of setting the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is allowed to be low, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately after the detection plate 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). Not limited to the speed, the rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced upward can be set to a large value. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set to a large value.

  In addition, even when the ascending speed is excessively high, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed toward the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessively high, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654.

  Further, even if the ascending speed is excessively high, the upper arm member 620 restricts the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630, which will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the production standby state. A larger value is set from the descending state to the bulging state than in the descending state.

  In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is significantly displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually recognize it as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is drastically increased, and the effect of the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 can be obtained. Can be improved.

  65 to 67 are rear views of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. Note that in FIG. 65, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 65B is also shown as a diagram in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are omitted.

  65 (a) and 65 (b) show the production standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows the descending midway state in which the production member 700 descends from the production standby state, and in FIG. 67. The projecting state of the scaling unit 600 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state in which the detected plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before execution of the production that suggests that the production member 700 is displaced downward. However, the drive motor MT2 is drive-controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestive effect, and the drive motor MT2 is once stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to the production standby state.

  On the contrary, in the case where the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side for upwardly displacing the effect member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling so that the transmission gear 650 is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where the transmission gear 650 has slightly entered the margin portion 624b from the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the production standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, but regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled after a time delay of a time sufficient for the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the allowance portion 624b.

  Thereby, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to the position where the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged at the end of the allowance portion 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulation device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

  The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and is shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the restriction hole 657.

  Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, after pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to bring the displacement regulating device 180 into the regulated state (see FIG. 15C), the transmission gear 650 is set. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled so as to drive and control the effect member 700 to be displaced upward, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is hindered by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG.

  The detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 is being driven, so that the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines the displacement failure of the transmission gear 650. You can

  Based on this determination, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4) can be informed of the abnormality by a method such as performing an error display of a displacement failure of the enlarging / reducing unit 600. By this informing, the gaming machine store The salesclerk can know that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulated state.

  Thereby, the information such as the error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted and the information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be transmitted to the clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device that detects the state of the displacement regulation device 180.

  Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin for the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced upward is too high, the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended by the upper arm member 620 becomes too high, and the lower arm member 630 moves to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), downward acceleration is always added to the lower arm member 630. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower arm portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630. It is possible to increase the contact area in the case of collision with the upper arm member 620. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a large load from being locally applied to the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

  As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be capable of contacting the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently large contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is excessive. Therefore, even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended by the upper arm member 620 becomes excessively high, the lower arm member 620 is prevented from being displaced by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. As a result, the effect member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponding to the state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 67, as in the state shown in FIG. The auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is arranged at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630.

  As a result, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the degree to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, as compared with the descending state, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the rendering member 700 can be increased in the rendering standby state and the extended state.

  In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the production member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the columnar protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 732 and its displacement in the rotation direction is not regulated (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotation direction around the right columnar protrusion 711. The posture may change.

  In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left columnar protrusion 711, but in the direction of rotation around the right columnar protrusion 711. The displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side when the effect member 700 changes its posture is in the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 may be visibly generated without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the projecting state, the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the posture of the effect member 700 changes in the direction of rotation about the right columnar protrusion 711 is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. Thereby, the attitude change of the effect member 700 can be effectively limited by the lower arm member 630, and the attitude change of the effect member 700 can be prevented to a discernable degree.

  In addition, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side are arranged at the end positions of the arc-shaped holes 732 in the projecting state, the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 come into contact with each other to the right side. It is possible to prevent the production member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, with the cylindrical projection 711 of FIG. Note that, as described above, the posture change in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear is limited by the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 extending along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630.

  Similarly, in the projecting state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the end positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 contact with each other to the left side. It is possible to prevent the production member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, with the cylindrical protrusion 711 as the center. It should be noted that, as described above, the posture change in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear is limited by the displacement direction of the right columnar protrusion 711 extending along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630.

  Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (the rotation direction around the axis extending in the front-rear direction) but also in the tilt direction (the rotation direction around the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral swing direction (rotational direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

  For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right columnar protrusions 711, but the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the columnar protrusions 711 arranged above the columnar protrusions 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at the three upper and lower positions by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the tilting direction can be performed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged on the upper side of the columnar protrusion 711 is arranged in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (at the base side of the arcuate hole 634), the effect member 700 is tilted. The long body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in the posture in the direction.

  Further, as described above, the pressing member PC1 is arranged on the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 is used to lower the pressing member PC1 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

  In this way, when a load due to a change in the posture of the rendering member 700 is applied to the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives a load in the bending direction along the longitudinal direction, By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent the posture change of the effect member 700.

  Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (downward) of the columnar protrusion 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

  In the present embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane that passes through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700. In addition, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

  This makes it possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 changes in a manner of tilting forward around the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and at the same time with the lower arm member 630. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction in the case where the effect member 700 changes its posture in a manner of tilting backward around the connecting portion.

  That is, even when there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes may occur in the rendering member 700, the longitudinal displacement of the rendering member 700 is suppressed regardless of which posture change among the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, any posture change can be dealt with.

  As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 may be rubbed or collided with the partitioning member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 from being damaged, the design portion being deteriorated, and the visibility (transparency) being reduced due to damage or abrasion of the partition member 310.

  In the state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts the shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 is continuously driven, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

  In the present embodiment, in the extended state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force that slightly exceeds the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing and displacing to the ascending side. Have control.

  Thus, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is set to a relatively large value (for example, the effect member 700 can be lifted).

  On the other hand, when the effect member 700 is started to be displaced upward, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to prevent the drive motor MT2 from being overloaded.

  For example, when starting the displacement to the upper side, after releasing the driving force for stably disposing the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the drive force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (providing a waiting time until the drive start of the drive motor MT2 is provided), the drive force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement is started.

  As a result, the load applied to the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

  In FIG. 65 to FIG. 67, a change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is shown by an imaginary line, and the inner surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is shown by a hidden line. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided inside the wiring guiding member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 and is passed through to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electric wiring DK1 that may be caused by the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the rendering member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 that is previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to do it. As a result, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 and inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

  The shape of the inner side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. As a result, the load that the electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape portion of the lower arm member 630 in which the arcuate hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electric wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is displaced upward from the projecting state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion where the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electric wiring with respect to the electric wiring DK1. The configuration is such that the DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

  As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out from the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the scaling unit 600 can be stably generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projecting portion 712 arranged in the arc-shaped hole 634 arranged on the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 and largely hidden by the thin-walled lid portion 636 is in the projecting state. It is arranged only at a position visible from the rear (see FIG. 67).

  The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion that is guided by the arcuate hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion that is used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or the disassembled state) can be limited to the projecting state of the scaling unit 600. As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. In addition, as a result of performing assembly and maintenance in a state where the rendering member 700 is arranged at a halfway position, it is possible to prevent the rendering member 700 and other components from being damaged.

  Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of the enlargement / reduction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

  68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  68 and 69, the state in which the scaling unit 600 is being lowered is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the expansion / contraction unit 600 is in the middle of descending, the effect member 700 is not controlled to expand / displace until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter, and the expansion / contraction unit 600 is expanded to the middle position. It is controlled to allow the expansion displacement.

  In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from becoming excessively large in size when viewed from the front, and thus the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

  The decorative member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered) at a position where the effect member 700 is being enlarged and displaced. As the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position not covered by the effect member 700 (gap position), and the mirror surface member 752b is also included at the position covered by the effect member 700. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

  As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the LED or the like arranged on the decorative substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and at the same time, the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted to shield the light. By reflecting the light reflected on the back surface side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

  For example, as a presentation mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LED of the decorative board 751 (see FIG. 53), the ground color of the shielding design member 760 is applied to the mirror surface member 752b (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate 751, the color visually reflected by the mirror member 752b is a mixture of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. Can be different colors. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through a portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

  The control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, control may be performed so as to return to the collective arrangement state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. 68. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled so as to vibrate in the radial direction by switching it in small increments in the forward and reverse directions.

  When the shielding design member 760 is controlled to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of the enlarged displacement to the middle position, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is the tip adjustment member. It is at an intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 744a of 744. This allows the tip adjusting member 744 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

  When such a displacement can be achieved, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or when the shielding design members 760 are enlarged and displaced to the maximum in the radial direction, the supporting protrusions 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743. Are arranged at both ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the shielding design member 760 can be returned to the circumferential arrangement (see FIGS. 58B and 59B). ).

  Further, the midway position that is allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, but can be set arbitrarily. For example, the position may be slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or may be a position slightly before the position at which the maximum expansion displacement is performed.

  Here, in the state of being enlargedly displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extending plate portion 761 is visually recognized to overlap with the shielding design member 760 oppositely arranged in front view), Since the portion 761 plays a role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

  In this embodiment, since a red reflection sheet is attached to the extension plate portion 761 as in the case of the main body of the shield design member 760, the red color of the extension plate portion 761 is visually recognized in the gap between the shield design members 760. Even if the red color is generated, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

  Note that, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect members 700 are enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold color). The extended plate portion 761 visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

  In this embodiment, the case where the light transmitting member 752a is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

  In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlapping margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 shields. Since it is visually recognized in red similarly to the design member 760, the player can visually recognize the shielding design members 760 as if they are at least partially continuous.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shield design members 760 can be made to emit light to be conspicuous, and a light emission effect can be obtained. The effect of can be improved.

  70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  70 and 71, the expansion state of the scaling unit 600 and the expansion state of the effect member 700 are illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the projecting state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter.

  Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The measures for suppressing the change in the attitude of the effect member 700 are as described above.

  In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is arranged so as to be retracted from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the appearance of the light on the mirror member 752b can be changed to that in the case where the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the enlarged displacement.

  That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ground color (silver color in the present embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b. Therefore, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is enlarged and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the LED of the decorative substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. It is possible to change the tint of light visually recognized by the player in time series.

  More specifically, for example, when white light is emitted from the decorative substrate 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member is enlarged with the enlargement displacement. The color of the letter 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the ground color (silver color) of the mirror surface member 752b is easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the tint of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the emission color.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 do not occur continuously, but only in the state in which the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. It is controlled to execute the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700.

  That is, the vertical displacement of the effect members 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect members 700 are collectively arranged. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other constituent members such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

  In addition, in consideration of avoidance of collision with other constituent members, or by configuring so that a problem does not occur in the displacement due to collision with other constituent members, the enlarged displacement during the vertical displacement of the effect member 700. You may control as much as possible.

  The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure.

  72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a), and 75 (a), the plate-shaped main body 710 is not shown for easy understanding, and FIG. As a result, a state in which the rotary plate 730 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear is illustrated. 74 (b) and 75 (b), the rotary plate 730b is not shown.

  72A, a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71) is illustrated, and in FIG. 72B, the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is The state in which the displacement is enlarged to the middle position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a of the rotary plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). The transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at an intermediate position of the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730.

  73 shows a state in which the first guided projection 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side has started contact with the rear side claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and in FIG. 74, arranged on the lower side. The state in which the first guided projection 743b of the expandable displacement member 740 is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

  Due to the influence of gravity being different between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the lower side and the member arranged on the upper side. Different depending on the material.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotation plate 730 side by their own weight, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side rotates its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotary plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

  This hanging amount is lifted by the load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is five, not at the same time, and at least the upper three members are earlier than the lower two members.

  As a result, the effect members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collective arrangement state, so that the lower expansion / contraction displacement member is arranged. When it collides with the 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue may be accumulated in the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early damage.

  In contrast, when the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state, Is generated in a direction in which its own weight opposes the displacement of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and thus the momentum of collision with the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760.

  In FIG. 74, the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotary plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is pushed by the back side claw portion 734a and cut off to be in the collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the tip end adjustment member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw 734b.

  In FIG. 75, a collective arrangement state of effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear until the end position where the columnar protrusion 728 of the functional plate 720 is arranged at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 is shown.

  76 is a cross-sectional view of effect member 700 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the effect members 700, the surface on the central axis side of the back side claw portion 734a contacts the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the diameter of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is increased. Displacement outward in the direction is restricted.

  In addition, the surface of the front claw portion 734b on the central axis side abuts on the second guided projection 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is restricted from being displaced outward in the radial direction. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with the front-rear width in the projecting direction, thereby disposing the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744. The posture can be stabilized.

Furthermore, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is configured to be slidable on the back surface of the extended plate portion 726.
During this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided projection 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 comes into contact with the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The more the position is closer to the collective arrangement, the more the front surface is inclined.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load to the second guided protrusion 744b on the front side.

  Thus, in the configuration in which the tip adjustment member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730, the tip is adjusted as the rotary plate 730 rotates and the effect members 700 approach the collective arrangement state. The tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extended plate portion 726.

  Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from increasing excessively, the load sandwiched in the front-rear direction with respect to the tip adjustment member 744 is gradually increased, and the front-rear position and posture of the tip adjustment member 744 are given. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the front-rear direction position and posture of the shielding design member 760, and it is possible to closely arrange the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state without any gap.

  With reference to FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The shielding design member 760 has a common configuration, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 also has a common configuration.

  As described above, the shielding design member 760 is the side on which the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59A) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, FIG. (See (b)) is arranged to be rearward as compared with the opposite side so that the posture can be easily inclined.

  This is due to the formation mode of the second elongated member 743, and this attitude inclination similarly occurs in the tip end adjustment member 744 to which the shield design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is rearward compared to the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (where the projecting direction is along the front-rear direction). The position is likely to shift to the clockwise direction side (the left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed at the uppermost part, see FIG. 74 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the rotating plate 730, the extending claw portions 734 are arranged so as to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear side, and are arranged in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. It is rotationally displaced so that a load can be applied.

  That is, for example, the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, so that the second guided protrusion 744b moves. Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged can be easily eliminated.

  The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the effect member 700 shown in time series in FIGS. 72 to 75, the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclinations of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are maintained, and then the posture inclinations of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be canceled (corrected).

  That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). ) Can be easily avoided, but after the shielding design members 760 are close to each other, the inclination inclinations of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are canceled (corrected) to thereby prevent the shielding design member. The plate portion arranged on the forefront of 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and the sense of unity of the shield design member 760 in the collective arrangement state can be easily produced.

  The state shown in FIG. 74 (b) is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. Further, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation shown in FIG. 74 (b) is configured to be less likely to occur due to the front and rear arrangement configuration of the second elongated member 743. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the extended plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shield design member 760 that is arranged to face the extended plate portion 761.

  Further, the auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extended plate portion 726 is configured to be able to contact the reduction side wall portion in the enlargement / reduction displacement of the tip end adjustment member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the extended plate portion 726, the auxiliary protrusions 727 come into contact with the left and right end portions of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction-side end portion of the displacement range, so Posture deviation can be corrected.

  As a result, not only the posture is corrected by engaging with the other shielding design member 760, but also the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 can be stabilized when it reaches the reduction side end portion of the displacement range by the single piece. it can.

  It returns to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 and demonstrates. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlarging / reducing unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as an effect device for enlarging the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 includes a pair of units symmetrically arranged and has a symmetrical shape with each other. Therefore, the configuration of the left displacement rotation unit 800 will be described below, and the right displacement rotation unit 800 will be described below. Omit it. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

  77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the production standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

  79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in the assembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 which is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal which is fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 inserted so that the metal rod MB3 is slidable in the left-right direction. Along with the vertical displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820, the driving force of the drive motor MT4 is transferred laterally via the vertical slide member 820. A transmission means 860 configured to be transmitted to the ride member 840, a wiring arm member 870 that is fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotationally displaceable at an upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the metal rod MB2 side, and the wiring arm member thereof. 870 and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the electric wiring.

  The base plate part 810 includes a pair of both end fixing parts 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide part 812 formed on the front side so as to guide the transmission member 830, and a long side on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the cylindrical protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. A fall prevention plate 814 disposed on the back side to prevent the fall of the same.

  The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge portion of the flat plate portion 821 to the rear surface side, and a substantially central position of a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to a rear surface side circle. At the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821, the columnar protrusion portion 823 protruding in a columnar shape, the omission portions 824a and 824b in which the formation of the wall portion is omitted and the size of the connector portion of the electric wiring can be inserted are omitted. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a tubular shape (or a tubular member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a metal rod MB3 can be inserted through the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or provided with a tubular member) and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. Fall prevention member 82 configured to be possible And a shaft support portion 828 that is formed in a columnar shape on the back surface side of the flat plate portion 821 so as to support the two-stage pinion 861 and a cylinder extending horizontally from the upper end to the left and right in the horizontal direction (left in FIG. 79). A support protrusion 829 that is provided in a protruding manner.

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electric wiring by forming a region in which the electric wiring arranged between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced, inside.
The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as the discontinuing portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the back side.

  The metal rod insertion portion 825 has a plate-like extension on the back side at the upper side thereof, and the upper side detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection which are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. The detected plate portion 825a that can be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

  The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a female screw formed on an upper end portion of the main body portion 831 at a tip end portion of a cylindrical protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820. A through hole 832 that is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into it can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the through hole 832 is bored, the rear surface being in the region formed by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

  The cylindrical protrusion 823 has a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-described insertion hole 832 is screwed, and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring, as described later.

  The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is displaced up and down in the vertical direction. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is displaced up and down.

  81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a main body plate member 841 that is formed in a substantially circular plate shape and is restricted in displacement in the left and right direction by inserting the metal rod MB3, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper part of the side to form a guide path for electric wiring, a circular member 847 disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed into a circular plate shape in front view, and the circular member 847. And the main body plate member 841 between the decorative board 850, the annular decoration member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and the circular member 847 via the cylindrical collar member C8. A wing member 854 that is rotatably supported by the wing member, and an intermediate member 857 that is fitted into the opening of the wing member 854 from the front side in order to match the center opening diameter of the wing member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. Comprises a central design member 858 columnar member can be inserted through the outer diameter to the center opening of the intermediary member 857 is projected from the rear side.

  In the main body plate member 841, the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed to the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the rod arrangement portion 842 in which the metal rod MB3 is arranged and the lower side of the rod arrangement portion 842 are arranged. And a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

  The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the lateral displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed in a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electric wiring from rubbing against other constituent members, but details will be described later.

  The circular member 847 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, and is configured such that the wing-shaped member 854 and the drive gear MG5, which are formed so as to be meshable with each other, are assembled in different directions in the front and rear.

  The circular member 847 is formed into a cup-shaped member having a size capable of receiving the wing-shaped member 854, and is formed in a recessed shape toward the back side. The receiving section 848 is provided in a cylindrical shape from the center of the receiving section 848 toward the front side. And a cylindrical protrusion 849 that is formed.

  The receiving portion 848 is provided with a through hole portion 848a which is penetratingly formed in such a manner that a shape overlapping with a cylinder centering on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5 is cut out, and the gear portion 855 of the blade member 854 is formed through the through hole portion 848a. It is exposed to a position where it can be seen from the rear.

  In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can be meshed with the drive gear MG5, the drive force is transmitted with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, and the blade member 854 is rotationally controlled. The wing-shaped member 854 can be rotationally driven regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the production standby state.

  The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a formed at its tip. This is a shaped portion for facilitating the posture maintenance of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, which will be described later in detail.

  83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The decorative substrate 850 has a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a deformed opening 851 formed by a long opening extending thereabove, and its deformed shape. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the decorative substrate 850. And rear side light emitting means 852b.

  The deformed opening 851 allows the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 to be arranged inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the wing member 854 is arranged on the back side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

  The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the odd-shaped opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the decorative substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed with each other.

  The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. Accordingly, light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a near the rotation axis of the wing member 854.

The back side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed outward in the radial direction. Accordingly, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b.
By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side by the uneven shape formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced toward the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-shaped member 854. In addition, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of long concave-convex shapes formed along the arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-shaped member 854 are densely formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847, the player On the other hand, when viewed from the front, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the player does not have to arrange LEDs or the like whose optical axis is oriented in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-shaped member 854 on the front side of the decorative board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved outward in the radial direction. In other words, while using the decorative board 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, the outside of the surface on which the decorative board 850 is formed, that is, the outer side of the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light on the outer side in the radial direction of the wing-shaped member 854 without increasing the size of the decorative substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the wing-shaped member 854 rotates at a high speed, the back side of the wing-shaped member 854 becomes a shadow, which may make it difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range. . In order to eliminate this, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the outer side in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the wing-shaped member 854, but for that purpose, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, since it is necessary to increase the area of the decorative board, the manufacturing cost of the board increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the visual recognition position of light is radially outward of the rotation locus of the wing-shaped member 854 while keeping the size of the decorative board 850 smaller than the rotation locus of the wing-shaped member 854. It can be displaced. As a result, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

  Returning to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, description will be made. The decoration member 853 is a member formed of a light-impermeable resin material and is fastened and fixed coaxially to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decoration member 853, it is possible to effectively perform the effect of changing the appearance of the light inside and outside the decoration member 853 as a boundary.

  For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, a region that appears to emit blue light and a region that appears to emit red light are formed. Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

  The wing-shaped member 854 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has circular openings 854a formed in the front-rear direction in the central portion, and extends radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And

  The circular opening 854a is formed such that its inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

  The wing-shaped member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotatably driven by the drive motor MT5, but no detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 is provided, and the drive motor MT5. The posture of the wing-shaped member 854 is controlled by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing-shaped member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and the idling after the power supply to the drive motor MT5 is deenergized is minimized. It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the wing-shaped member 854 and the actual posture of the wing-shaped member 854, which is assumed by the driving time. The drive motor MT5 may be a stepping motor so that the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 can be detected.

  The intermediate member 857 is formed so that it can be fitted into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is formed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Accordingly, the intermediary member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The central design member 858 includes a central projection 858a that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the central portion toward the back side, a radial projection 858b that is provided radially outward of the central projection 858a, and a circular main body portion. From above, the design protrusion portion 858c is provided.

  The central protruding portion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protruding portion 849 in a posture in which the radial protruding portion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip portion from the back side of the circular member 847. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing in the fastening screw to be inserted.

  In addition to the function as the design portion, the design protrusion portion 858c can be brought into contact with the wing-shaped member 854 and function to adjust the rotation mode of the wing-shaped member 854. That is, when the rear surface of the design protrusion portion 858c and the front surface of the wing member 854 are arranged in close proximity to each other, the increase in resistance during rubbing is used to stabilize the stopping posture of the wing member 854. Can be planned.

  Thereby, as the drive control mode of the wing-shaped member 854, the drive mode in which the rotation continues for a long time and the drive mode in which the rotation of about one rotation is intermittently generated (rendering an irregular operation at the start of rotation). In the latter drive mode, it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the wing-shaped member 854.

  Description will be given by returning to FIGS. 79 and 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by meshing with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. A rack member 862 and a fall prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from dropping from the vertical slide member 820.

  The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a pitch circle radius longer than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a, and the gear teeth and the teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840. The large-diameter pinion 861b and the small-diameter pinion 861a are integrally formed.

  The rack member 862 is formed in a left-right elongated shape, and a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear capable of meshing with the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 and a side opposite to the formation position of the gear portion 862a in the longitudinal direction. And a columnar protrusion 862b protruding from the end toward the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured as gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , And the ratio to the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is 9:16. Therefore, the ratio between the lateral displacement of the rack member 862 and the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

  The cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed with an outer diameter that can be arranged inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the columnar protrusion 862b is arranged in the transmission guide portion 813. The plate thickness is set so that the columnar protrusion 862b does not fall off the transmission guide 813 even if it comes close to the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from falling off the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

  In the present embodiment, since the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by the displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the radial pinion 861b.

  Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. This makes it possible to secure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while suppressing the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 to a small value, which will be described later in detail.

  FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member made of a resin material, and has a long main body 871 that is formed in a long curved shape and is open on one side, and the long main body 871. A supporting hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the lengthwise direction of the same, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 arranged in proximity to the supporting hole 872 and formed in the same direction so that electric wiring can be arranged. , A plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion to the other wall portion at the open end of the elongated main body portion 871 and a resin mold for forming the claw portions 874 can be extracted. And a circular projecting portion 876 that projects from the vicinity of the other end of the elongated body portion 871 in the longitudinal direction in a circular cross section parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872.

  The long main body 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided through the wiring arrangement hole 873 and guided to the open side is arranged, and is provided with a narrowed portion 871a having a short width in the middle thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the lengthwise direction of the lengthy main body 871 and is guided to the outside from the other end in the lengthwise direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

  The narrowed portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 to the extent that no disconnection occurs and prevents the electrical wiring from being excessively displaced. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electric wiring arranged on the open side portion of the elongated main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

  The support hole 872 is formed in such a size that the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) can be inserted therethrough, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

  The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes when crossing the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, it is possible to reduce the amount of positional deviation of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electric wiring as the wiring arm member 870 rotates.

  The claw portion 874 prevents the electric wiring arranged so as to be accommodated on the open side of the long body portion 871 from falling off the long body portion 871. Further, since the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 having the minimum area, the electric wiring is opposite to the open side of the long main body 871. It is possible to prevent the material from coming out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

  The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be arranged in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886. And a path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape whose one side is opened, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion, so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the back side at positions separated in the vertical direction. A path passing through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

  That is, the route forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a that projects to one side at the edge portion, and the wall portion 882a is cut off to form an upper opening portion 883 of the route and a lower end of the route forming member 882. The opening portion 884 that is formed in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows a connector for electrical wiring to be inserted therethrough, and from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 in a range that does not overlap the prevention plate 881 in the left-right direction. The extended portion 885 that is extended, the guide recess 886 that is recessed in the shape of a long groove in a range that does not overlap the extended portion 885 in the left-right direction, and the guide recess 886 that is below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. The prevention plate 881 side is provided with a columnar projection portion 887 protruding in a columnar shape, and a female screw formed at a tip end of which a fastening screw inserted in the prevention plate 881 is screwed.

  A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the rear surface side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the left-right direction due to the displacement, has the wall portion 882a closest to the front surface side. At the position (position near the displacement lower end), the wall portion 882a enters the back side (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that constitutes a path along which the electric wiring is guided, at a position near the lower end of displacement. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from abutting or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the electric wiring and the arrangement of the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap in a front view.

  In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the route of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening 883, and among the displacement of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement of the route of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is extended portion 885. And the prevention plate 881. Further, the widthwise length of the route of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total widthwise length of the long main body 871 and the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. As a result, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling off the guide recess 886.

  The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the columnar protruding portion 887 to the back side.

  The guide recess 886 connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, the connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. With.

  The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting the displacement of the electric wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

A displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89.
86 to 89, the manner in which the displacement rotation unit 800 changes its state from the production standby state to the production upper end state is shown in time series.

  86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). 89 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, and FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a displacement rotary unit 800 in LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line in FIG. 89 (a).

  In FIG. 86, the production standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the upper detection sensor SC8 and the horizontal slide member 840 is the displacement path. 88 shows a middle right end state arranged at the right end of FIG. 88. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the production upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 shows the middle right end state and the production upper end state. The left end state in the middle of being disposed at the left end of the displacement path between is shown, and in FIG. 89, the production upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

  86 (a), 87 (a), 88 (a) and 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical projection. The outer shape of the portion 887 is shown by an imaginary line, and the other shape portions are omitted so that the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end portion of the base plate 810.

  86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b), and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is shown by an imaginary line, and regarding the lateral slide member 840, A circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 is illustrated for the purpose of illustrating only the lateral displacement width.

  Also, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 according to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then to the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. The horizontal slide member 840 is guided through the enclosed space, and details of the displacement will be described later.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically reciprocally displaced. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the production standby state (see FIG. 86). In the production standby state, since the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

  Further, in the production standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to be retracted from the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840, it is possible to avoid limiting the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 to the lateral position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent on the left and right sides.

  The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward from the production standby state and the detected plate portion 825a is arranged in the upper side detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the middle right end state based on the output of the upper side detection sensor SC8.

  In the right end state on the way, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the ascending direction and the right direction from the production standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is merely displaced in the ascending direction and the posture is maintained.

  That is, in the middle right end state, since the circular protruding portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The front-rear distance between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the production standby state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the production standby state to the midway right end state is executed without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. It As a result, it is possible to avoid the collision between the members due to the shift of the displacement timing, which tends to occur when the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are both displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched according to the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but it is displaced in the left-right direction beyond the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813.

  This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the two-stage pinion 861 has the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 as teeth. Are combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is set to 9:16, so the left and right positions of the transmission guide portion 813 are set. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by the left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount of (4) by a constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78).

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the middle left end state, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced laterally outward as much as in the production standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

  In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the midway right end state to the midway left end state, the circular protruding portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is formed in the connecting recess 886c formed on the rear side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 that is disposed and serves as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is shortened as compared with the production standby state.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the lateral slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 in the front-back direction. Further, the reverse (the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction view after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 does not occur) is established during the downward displacement.

  Accordingly, even if the displacement timing of the horizontal slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870 are deviated, it is possible to avoid the situation where the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 collide.

  The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end portion (outer end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is only vertical movement and posture change in the front-back direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer end portions that are difficult to be noticed by the player, and thus the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 are guided. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the field of view of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), in the period until reaching the effect upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the circular protruding portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is The support protrusion 829, which is disposed in the rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connection recess 886c of the guide recess 886 and serves as a support point of the wiring arm member 870, and the circular protrusion 876 ( (See FIG. 84), the distance in the front-rear direction is maintained in the minimum state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 configured to be capable of changing its posture according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 is used to arrange the electric wiring DK2 at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position. By making it possible, there is an advantageous effect that a space for disposing the constituent members can be secured.

  For example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the rear, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the arrangement of the lateral slide member 840 in the production standby state is set to the right side (the left and right inner side). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the rightward (leftward and rightward inward) position of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is downsized to avoid contact, etc. May need to be dealt with. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 decreases.

  Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom in arranging the components on the back side of is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric winning object 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning port 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 in particular. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc. tends to be low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by the wiring arm member 870, so that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is prevented from being limited and the game is played. It is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of freedom of arrangement of the components on the back side of the board 13.

  That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged on the front side so that the electric wiring DK2 is arranged on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840. It is avoided that the displacement of (1) is limited by the electric wiring DK2.

  In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced left and right inward, and at the upper position where the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged to the rear side so that the electric wiring is formed. The DK2 is placed towards the rear, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the members arranged on the game board 13 as a structure such as a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

  The state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The state change of the electric wiring DK2 here means a change of the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

  In the electric wiring DK2, the upper portion (the side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding portion DK2b extends vertically and is not preferably curved. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 into the front side of the columnar protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so that the rigidity is higher than that of the lower winding portion DK2b where winding displacement occurs. The higher is preferable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the portion that undergoes winding displacement.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2, thereby avoiding occurrence of rubbing between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

  Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the time of starting the downward displacement can be oriented vertically downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the columnar protruding portion 887.

  Of the electric wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial expansion / contraction manner along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. Is composed of.

  In the electric wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is displaced in a manner of radially expanding and contracting along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar projecting portion 887. Configured to be possible.

  That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is different from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In this embodiment, the planes are orthogonal to each other, and the planes where the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 occurs are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. It is configured to pass through 873.

  The electric wiring DK2 is restrained from being displaced by the portion of the wiring arm member 870 arranged inside the long main body 871 being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

  From this, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 according to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

  First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion which is wound counterclockwise in a front view around the columnar protrusion 823 from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to where it is guided to the tip.

  The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 being the limit, and the production standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). In, the wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or at a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electric wiring DK2 in the production standby state can be reduced.

  When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, whereby the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled and the inner side in the radial direction around the cylindrical protrusion 823 is centered. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the excess length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. This makes it possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side to push the upper winding part DK2a, and the upper side is wound outward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The part DK2a is displaced. At this time, the upper winding portion DK2a is provided outward (the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844) from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844, which is provided with a guide piece 844a that descends and inclines toward the left. The upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

  Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from a position that hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 in a left side view (a direction from the left and right outer sides) around the columnar protruding portion 887 (of the columnar protruding portion 887). It means a portion including a portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction up to a portion arranged in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

  The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a being the limit, and the widest radial standby state (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or at a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electric wiring DK2 in the production standby state can be reduced.

  When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upwardly from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, whereby the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protruding portion 887. This makes it possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and is moved downward in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is located between the columnar protruding portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (column portion). It is possible to prevent the lower winding portion DK2b from entering the upper portion of the protruding portion 887) and to appropriately push the lower winding portion DK2b along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

  In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the displacement range lower end position of the horizontal slide member 840. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being limited by the disposition of the horizontal slide member 840, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is attached to the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). (See) can be displaced by fully utilizing the front and rear width.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a large space below the wiring arm member 870 for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b, so that the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be made sufficiently long, and the wiring arm member 870 can be provided. The allowable vertical displacement amount can be increased.

  FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of the window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of streams whose front side is opened from the resin member. The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed in the shape of a road and is disposed below the rear surface side of the base plate 60.

  The ball downflow unit 150 is formed to be able to receive a ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 near the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The second receiving channel 152 is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and which is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 151 from the rear side in a mode of being connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151. The flow path member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 that protrude inward from the inside of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the downward direction of the sphere are provided.

  The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right walls at intervals of about the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

  Functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. In the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153, in addition to the function of guiding the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 to a ball discharging path (not shown), entering the second winning opening 640 There is a function of improving the effect by making the game balls afterward visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting passage of a ball near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not look at the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually seeing the ball flowing down the first receiving flow path 152. For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice a situation in which the payout has not been made due to a problem on the gaming machine store side.

  In addition, as described below, it is clear that the sphere has entered the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. Therefore, the position of the detection sensor is set to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1 or the like. Alternatively, the payout timing of the prize balls and the hold display timing may be delayed.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is an intermediate flow path LM1 that is visually recognizable in a front view on the inside in the left-right direction of the guide path DL1 through which the ball that has deviated from the second winning opening 640 flows down. 27)).

  Similarly to the guide flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be capable of guiding vertically downward while displacing the sphere to the left and right in zigzag. That is, since the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the sphere flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to have the same flow-down mode, the sphere in the path on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game. Even when visually recognizing, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

  Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is the information directly connected to the player's profit, and the information on the nail (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. This is a part where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur depending on the state.

  In this embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and a ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, whether the ball easily flows down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during the right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. different.

  Unless a ball that has not entered the second winning opening 640 flows down the guide route DL1 and enters the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side of the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving when performing a right-handed game, It is discharged from the game area through the outlet 71 and does not serve the player's profit (useless ball).

  From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond to each other. In addition, the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when attention is paid to the guide route DL1 than when attention is paid only to the second winning opening 640 because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

  Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency at which the ball flows down the guide route DL1 is confirmed, and the frequency of the ball entering the second winning port 640, the frequency of occurrence of a dead ball in the right-handed game, and the like are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game in consideration of the above.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the sphere flowing down the guide path DL1 and the sphere entering the second winning opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the frequency of entering the second winning port 640 is high, and promote the continuation of the game.

  On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning port 640 and has been discharged from the game area, so it flows down vertically as it is, and the specific winning port 65a in front view. When it flows down to a position overlapping with, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, which may hinder the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by allowing the sphere to flow inward in the left and right directions by the first receiving passage 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the sphere can reach a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in a front view. To prevent (see Figure 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view, near the lower edge of the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view, and the display region. The ball is made to flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, since the sphere guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, attention is paid to the display of the third symbol display device 81. A player who does not pay attention to the right-handed route can be made aware of whether or not a ball has entered the second winning port 640.

  This allows the player to recognize whether or not there is a ball in the second winning port 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when the eyes are turned off from the third symbol display device 81 for seeing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player misses the display, which is a comfortable game. Can be provided.

  The sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows downward diagonally leftward on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the ball flowing down can be extended. This makes it easy to increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

  In addition, by ensuring the left-right width of the flow path of the sphere to be long, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 can easily intersect. This makes it easier for the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving flow path member 153 to come into view of the player.

  92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering unit 160 and the decoration unit 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering unit 160 and the decoration unit 170. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 95, the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be capable of contacting the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. The upper support member 162 formed of an impermeable resin material for aligning the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 in a manner of pressing the lower side portion of the light guide plate 161 formed of a light transmissive resin material from the rear side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fastened, a spherical flow channel constituent member 164 fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 to form a spherical flow channel and formed of a light-transmissive resin material; A plurality of left and right side supporting members 165 which are formed of the resin material and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 by pressing both left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. And a horizontal substrate unit 166 that is formed in a vertical shape and is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of passing through the upper side of the upper support member 162 and extending to the front side of the center frame 86. The vertical substrate unit 167 is arranged along the left inner wall of the center frame 86 from the front side and is fastened and fixed.

  The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 formed of a light-transmissive resin material and arranged in the center of the center frame 86 near the upper left and right sides, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 formed of a light-transmissive resin material. At the front side of the right side frame portion of the center frame 86 on the right side of the first decoration member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material and the second decoration member 174 disposed on the front side of the left side frame portion of the center frame 86. And a third decorative member 177 arranged.

  The first decoration member 171 has a horizontally elongated rectangular center decoration member 172 configured to be fastened and fixed to the central portion thereof, and a blank member 173 configured as a separate member as a blank portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10. Equipped with.

  As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 is provided with a horizontally long groove portion 171a having a horizontally long groove shape on the back side. The laterally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the decorative substrate of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 can be arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of an opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper portion of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect waiting state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the front side position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front side position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is opened. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

  With reference to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the laterally elongated groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In addition, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 are referred to as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as an LED is arranged on the front and back sides on the front end side of the decorative board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted in the vertical direction along the arrows D1a and D1b. The light that has reached the reflection shape portion 171b formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated wedge on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a on the back side of the first decorative member 171 can be visually recognized conspicuously.

  Thereby, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the mode of the light emission effect (light emission range or light emission shape) visually recognized by the player depending on the formation range or the formation shape of the reflection shape portion 171b. Can be made to differ and can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the lower surface in which the LEDs are arranged on the upper surface. It is arranged in two horizontal rows, a row corresponding to the upper and lower rows and a row parallel to the row and formed on the back surface side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the lateral groove 171a, and the rear row on the lower surface is arranged outside the lateral groove 171a.

  With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the upper row and the lower row in the upper row can irradiate the reflective shape portion 171b with light, and the LEDs arranged in the lower row in the lower surface can emit different light. It can be irradiated with light.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

  The LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 have upper support members 162 arranged between the front and rear two rows. Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs in the front and rear two rows can be separated by the upper support member 162.

  The horizontal board unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. This makes it possible to clearly separate the light radiated to the display area side and the light radiated to the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

  The central decoration member 172 is arranged at the front and rear positions similar to the reflection-shaped portion 171b, while the front and rear surfaces are formed as flat surfaces. With this, even when light is emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166, it is possible to avoid strong reflection of light and maintain visibility.

  In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decoration member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec. So-called different spec) is displayed by the number of the star shapes. It is configured to be possible. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a member different from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 having different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 is replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

  The margin member 173 is configured as a member different from the first decorative member 171, and has a shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate different from the shape formed in the reflection-shaped portion 171b (in the present embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed so that the appearance of reflected light is different from that of the reflection-shaped portion 171b.

  FIG. 97 is a partial front enlarged view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is emitted in the vertical direction of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflection-shaped portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection and refraction, and shines. On the other hand, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is not reflected mainly but is transmitted through most of the light and travels as it is, so that the light that reaches the margin member 173 is visually recognized as slightly dark.

  This allows the shape of the margin member 173 to be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166 travels in the up-down direction, and thus emits light in an arbitrary shape when viewed from the front. You can make it visible as if you were. In other words, it is possible to visually recognize the LED as if the LED is arranged on the back side.

  The second decorative member 174 is provided with a shielding member 175 that is a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) having low transparency and is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Accordingly, it is possible to make the back side of the second decorative member 174 less visible.

  Thereby, the game area (particularly the left side portion) formed on the front side of the base plate 60, and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in the front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81 before and after). Can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

  The third decorative member 177 has a three-dimensional hexagonal decorative pattern formed three-dimensionally on the front side and a three-dimensional hexagonal portion arranged on the back side displaced in the front-rear direction. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 that are formed in a single pattern.

  Similar to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material and is arranged in a space arranged between the light guide plate 161 arranged portion of the center frame 86 and the guide path DL1. It

  Accordingly, it is possible to perform a stereoscopic visual effect rather than a planar visual effect between the light guide plate 161 arranged portion and the guide path DL1. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to execute a deep light emission effect.

  For example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, which position of the front-back direction of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the light is irradiated in front view. Whether it gets brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the rear side is illuminated with the player's eyes.

  In the present embodiment, the third pattern display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800 and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the back side. The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the types of light effects, as compared with the case where light is emitted from the fixedly arranged light emitting means such as LEDs toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178.

  Further, for example, when light is applied to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the front-back direction position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the light is applied in front view. Which position of becomes brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the rear side is illuminated with the player's eyes.

  In the present embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). From the arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a part of the light directed to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 among the lights emitted from the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the extent to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on the display effect mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, a game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It is possible to easily avoid that the color of light visually recognized by a person becomes purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily made visible independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the spheres flowing down the sphere flow-down unit 150 are configured to be visible in a front view, and all the spheres are configured to flow down along the same path. However, the sphere flow-down unit of the second embodiment is described. At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after being fired is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the sphere falling unit 2150 is different from the sphere falling unit 150 described in the first embodiment in that it is formed so as to descend downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left. And a third receiving flow channel 2155 that is formed in a size that allows the balls to flow down.

  The third receiving flow passage 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has an inclination angle set to be gentler than that of the first receiving flow passage 152, and the lower end (left end) thereof is an inclined portion 2155a set to the left side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. And a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a in a front view.

  The falling speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the falling speed of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 due to the shallow inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the arrangement of the inclined portion 2155a is near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in a front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of view for a long time.

  Thereby, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while visually observing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, the attention to the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without a sense of discomfort.

  The guide of the sphere to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152, and along the second receiving flow path member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152. The switching means switches between the downward flow in the first direction D21 and the downward flow in the second direction D22 along the third receiving passage 2155.

  In the present embodiment, the protrusion resistance 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the downflow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, when the next sphere reaches the lower end of the first receiving passage 152 while the sphere flows down the second receiving passage member 153, the sphere is guided to the third receiving passage 2155. .

  Such a situation is likely to occur when a plurality of balls continuously enter in a short period of time, for example, a plurality of balls successively enter the second winning opening 640. Therefore, by visually observing the situation where the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can recognize that a plurality of balls have continuously entered the second winning opening 640.

  The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening / closing plate configured to be able to switch between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which the ball is restricted by using a driving unit such as a solenoid is provided in the ball downflow unit 2150. It is also possible to arrange an electromagnet capable of generating a magnetic force at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and use the generated magnetic force as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the sphere to flow down. The route may be switched.

  According to these methods, not only can the flow path of the sphere be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also the sphere can be stopped or the sphere can be reversed. Unlike the ball flowing down the game area, changing the flow path of the ball entering the second winning opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game result, so a ball using magnetic force as described above. It is possible to switch the flow path of the.

  As described above, when switching the flow path of the sphere in the device using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the sphere flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22. it can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning opening 640 and the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

  For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the case where the lottery by the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path is obtained. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot when the player visually recognizes that the ball is flowing down 2155.

  In this case, the player's line of sight is most easily gathered at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152 which serves as a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 2150 (game). It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere which has already been discharged from the area.

  As described above, the fact that the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 means that the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, or the expected value of the jackpot in the lottery due to entering the second winning opening 640. Suggests a high.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired when the passage of the sphere is determined. .

  As described above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the production standby state (see FIG. 38) to the firing standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. take time. On the other hand, whether or not the granular member 320 is to be fired is determined at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time before the ball reaches the discharging portion 2155b. The flow-down time is used to control the injection device 400 to change its state.

  As a result, the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay that is expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving passage 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. Compared with the case where the control is performed as described above, it is possible to easily match the flow-down of the sphere with the firing timing of the granular member 320.

  For example, there is a case where the oil adhering to the sphere adheres to the first receiving flow path 152, which causes a decrease in the flow velocity of the sphere. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 may be fired before the sphere reaches the third receiving passage 2155, and the effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the sphere has passed, the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired at the same time, so that the player can see until the sphere reaches the third receiving passage 2155. It is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects, that is, after focusing the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, executing a powerful effect that spreads to the area of the light guide plate 161 by firing the granular member 320. it can.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the sphere flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially seen from the front. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the above-described series of effects without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

  In addition, you may make it combine the control which does not fire the granular member 320, when a sphere passes the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a big hit occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, the probability of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit may be controlled to increase.

  In this case, it is possible to increase the types of effects after the balls have been guided to the third reception flow passage 2155, and thus the player for the third reception flow passage 2155 at the stage when the balls have been guided to the third reception flow passage 2155. It is possible to avoid a reduction in the attention of the.

  In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, it is possible to improve the attention to the subsequent display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  A detection sensor having the same function as the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, you may arrange | position in the location which the ball which entered into the specific winning opening 65a can pass through. In this case, the effect of firing the granular member 320 can be executed at the passage timing of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the profit given to the player is more advantageous when the game ball passes.

  The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrically and discretely distributed, but in the rendering member 3700 of the third embodiment. In the radial enlargement / reduction displacement, it is possible to form a section which is not symmetrical. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 according to the third embodiment. It should be noted that the difference between the scaling unit 3600 and the first embodiment lies only in the effect member 3700, and the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged at a midway position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement / reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, five shield design members 760 are adopted, which is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shield design members 760, the lower two and the upper left 1 While the sheets are similarly radially expanded and displaced, the upper one sheet and the upper right one are still in a collective arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotary plate 3730. The rotary plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotary plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some of the guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the rotating plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a, the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b, and the adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b.

  The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same circular arc shape from the connecting portion with the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b (a guide hole 733 adjacent to the clockwise direction or It is formed so as to rapidly approach the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

  That is, in the displacement mode in which the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c is expanded and displaced in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjustment connecting portion 3733c. The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 guided by the guide does not undergo radial expansion displacement while being guided in the same circular arc shape as the large diameter circular arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be displaced. The action caused by the displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, by arranging the shielding design member 760 asymmetrically, the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be displaced from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 deviates to the lower left position by that amount.

  As a result, on the effect member 3700, a load in the direction for correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in front view is generated by its own weight. By this load, it is possible to cause the effect member 3700 to change its posture in the rotation direction about the front-rear direction axis. Therefore, the shielding design member 760 is moved in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the effect member 3700 and in the rotation direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

  Accordingly, a direction (i.e., a direction) not planned only from the shapes of the functional plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotary plate 3730, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59), which are members for displacing the shielding design member 760 (that is, , The rotation direction), the shielding design member 760 can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different from each other, and the other shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same, and the small diameter arc portion 733a and the large diameter arc portion 733a are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same in the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

  Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is set to the collective arrangement state or is arranged at the enlarged displacement end position in the radial direction. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is kept displaced and it is possible to prevent a defect from occurring.

  An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time but individually performed has been described, but the purpose is to avoid collision with other configurations. .

  In the present embodiment, a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration is adopted, and the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are simultaneously controlled so as to be executable. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be enlarged and displaced in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is displaced downward.

  In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the rendering member 3700 and the radial displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the rendering member 3700 returns, so that the rendering member 3700 is shown in FIG. 99. It is possible to cause a posture change of a rotation reverse to the rotation direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

  In this way, since rotational displacements in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radial expansion of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for the radial expansion / contraction of the shielding design member 760. While adopting the above, as a result, it is possible to make a complicated motion in which a displacement in the rotational direction is added. As a result, the effect produced by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

  The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the production standby state to cause the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 to be displaced at the same time has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the disposition of the linear motion member 410, the disposition of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a time change of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  It should be noted that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective configurations, but shows the guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, the descending displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side, and thus the player is not obstructed by the lid member 480, The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12A and FIG. 38).

  In this situation, by reciprocating the linear motion member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (slightly displaced) and made visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the direct acting member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  Therefore, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, so that the control can be facilitated.

  In addition, in the mode in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (smallly displaced) and visually recognized by the player in this manner, the load (fatigue) applied to the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. You can

  Note that the mode in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (finely displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to vibrate the collision member 420. In this case, it is preferable that the other vibrating device is disposed below the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent other vibration devices from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the production standby state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is started. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the disposition of the linear motion member 410, the disposition of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a time change of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  It should be noted that FIG. 102 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective configurations, but shows the guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is fired, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (refer to an angle of about 290 degrees).

  Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed and retained on the upper side of the lid member 480. Although it may be possible that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape with the rotation axis as the center. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotating shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480.

  When the driving of the drive motor MT1 in the forward rotation direction is continued while the granular member 320 remains on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retreat side (the small diameter side in FIG. 102) and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

  Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the speed is increased, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved and the granular member 320 can be fired.

  In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right central portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing is performed in the left and right directions. It can be visually recognized as the master.

  That is, the launching direction of the granular member 320 can be changed between the firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is normally rotated and the firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, it is possible to provide variations in the firing direction of the granular member 320, and it is possible to improve the effect of production.

  The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiating device 330 and the second light irradiating device 340 each include a flat substrate and irradiates light in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction has been described. The 1st light irradiation device 6330 and the 2nd light irradiation device 6340 are provided with the electric-decoration board | substrate arrange | positioned in bending. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. The direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the first light irradiation device 6330, in addition to the decorative substrate 332, the front end is close to the front end of the decorative substrate 332, and the rear end is the decorative substrate. The second electric decoration substrate 6334 is arranged so as to be tilted in a posture of being separated from the 332.

  The second electric decoration substrate 6334 includes a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so that light can be emitted from at least the front side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easier to direct light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of making the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310 shine.

  The second light irradiation device 6340 is arranged in a tilted manner in addition to the decorative board 342, with the rear side edge part close to the rear side edge part of the decorative board 342, and the front side edge part away from the decorative board 342. The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided.

  The second electric decoration substrate 6344 includes a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged so that light can be emitted from at least the back side surface. With this light emitting means, it becomes easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, the displacement rotation unit 800, etc., and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

  The arrangement of the illuminated substrate is not limited to this. For example, only the second decorative boards 6334 and 6344 may be adopted, the decorative boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, and other combinations may be adopted. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second illumination boards 6334 and 6344, or the light may be emitted from both sides.

  Further, for the purpose of making the direction of light irradiation oblique, a device in which the attitude of the light emitting means can be changed may be configured without adopting a method of increasing the number of decorative substrates. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged at the intersecting positions of the decorative boards 332 and 342 and the second decorative boards 6334 and 6344 so that light irradiation is possible.

  A board box A100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, the schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  104 is a rear view of a pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of a board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the board box A100.

  The arrows F and B, the arrows L and R, and the arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 indicate the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100, respectively. Note that the same applies to each of the following drawings, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 that cannot be opened (caulking structure). The main control unit is provided with a sealing unit A400 that is connected by the sealing unit A400, a box cover A200 connected by the sealing unit A400, and a sub-cover A500 that is disposed at an end of the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

  A rotary shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is an axis for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is in the lateral direction (arrows U and D) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). Direction) and is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  In addition, the rotation axis A410 is, in a front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) (opposite to the first connection wall portion A220 with a covering portion A270 described later interposed therebetween, and an arrow). It is arranged on the R direction side). It should be noted that the rotation axis A410 may be disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), which is opposite to the one side in the longitudinal direction (direction of the arrow L).

  A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main control device A110. The main controller A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 on the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same other configuration except the presence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other description will be omitted.

  The switch device A120 is operated (turned on) when the operating portion A122 is pushed in from the initial position and turned off when the operating portion A122 is released (the operating portion A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used as an input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in the pressing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on), and the main control is performed based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110.
Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted / removed at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “off position”), and the inserted key A140 at the off position is rotated (rotated right in the present embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as “on”). The key-operated selector switch is operated (turned on) when the key A140 is turned (turned left in this embodiment) and turned off when the key A140 is turned off. It is configured as a changeover switch).

  In this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to about 90 degrees. Further, in the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted / extracted in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be extracted in the on position.

  Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (performs RAM erasure), and the key device In a state in which A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 is exemplified as a mode that functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”), as described later. .

  Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is connected in an unopenable manner, the main controller A110 (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device A130) is operated. Requires the substrate box A100 to be opened, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the board box A100 of the present embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and the labor can be suppressed. Details will be described later.

  Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation part A122, the inserting direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The switch device A120 and the key device are protruded, and the legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into the holes opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) and the part projecting to the back side is soldered. A130 is arranged on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  In this case, an external force (for example, a force for displacing the operating portion A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (inserting direction)), the plane including the arrows U and D, and the arrows L and R is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130. When force is applied to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). While the tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, the compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed by the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may be broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may be peeled off, which may lead to disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 employs a means for solving such a problem. Details will be described later.

  Main controller 100 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display on the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

  Here, a method of changing the setting using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

  First, with the power of the pachinko machine A10 turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position while the pachinko machine A10 is being operated. Turn on the power. As a result, the setting mode is started and the setting is changed every time the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed.

  In the present embodiment, the first to sixth six values are defined as the set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by pushing the operation unit A122, the set values are changed from the first value to the first value). 6 sequentially, and when the operating portion A122 is pushed in from the state of being set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

  The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device. The set value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

  The information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, for example, the amount of information that can be displayed can be secured (large) as compared with the case of using a 7-segment display. As a result, the operation state can be easily grasped, and the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed. In addition, by also using the device (third symbol display device 81) for displaying information about the game, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The set value may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third symbol display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

  After changing the desired setting value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. As a result, the setting change mode is ended (the set value is confirmed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed upon the detection, and the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is activated.

  After changing the desired setting value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position (that is, in the state in which it is kept in the on position). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 while the key A140 of the key device A130 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is activated.

  In addition, in the setting change mode, RAM erase is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 at the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, the timing when the key A140 is placed in the off position, and the like. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set appropriately.

  Further, in the setting change mode (that is, in the state where the setting value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 remains untouched. When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being placed in the off position, the normal mode is not started and an error state is displayed, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

  Next, to confirm the set value set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the on position, and then power the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. As a result, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value is activated, and the set value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  The display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display device and not on the other. Alternatively, neither the third symbol display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

  In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed upon the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

  In the setting confirmation mode, by turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10 and turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position, The normal mode with the set value is started.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (determined), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. Examples of the predetermined mode include a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) is blinked at regular time intervals.

  Also, four 7-segment displays can be displayed side by side by placing four, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively, and the setting value is displayed in the latter two digits (two digits) (for example, the first value is "01" and the second value is " 02 ", ..., And the sixth value is displayed as" 06 ").

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) that constitutes the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

  108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a plate shape of a substantially oblong rectangular shape in front view, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 from the back side (direction of arrow B). Mainly includes a wall portion (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, a left wall portion A204 and a right wall portion A205 that connect the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) that are erected toward each other and are formed in a plate shape. In preparation for this, the wall portions A201 to A205 form a box-like shape with the back side open. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is molded using a resin molding die.

  The upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205 are provided with two steps on the standing tip surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side). The step has a first surface (first step) formed on the inner space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) and a second surface on the outer side (opposite the inner space) of the first surface. A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is smaller), and the surface on which the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is mounted (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). Referred to as)).

  The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. At four corners of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the respective wall portions A201 to A205 are connected), fastening holes A206a having internal threads threaded are provided as recesses. To be done.

  Therefore, the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) makes the outer edge side of its front face abut on the seat surface A206, and the screw ASC (FIG. 7) inserted through the insertion hole A112 of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b) are screwed into the fastening holes A206a, so that they are fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and are attached to the board box A100. It is stored.

  A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 with a predetermined interval. The engaging piece A207 is provided with a base portion standing upright from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and extending in one direction (direction of arrow R) from the standing tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape that is bent into an approximately L shape from the extended portion and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as described later.

  A part of the front wall portion A201 is formed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side (arrow B direction). The recessed portion is a plate-like operation wall portion A210 that is located rearward of the front wall portion A201 (to the side of the main controller 110), and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is a front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by a plate-shaped wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

  That is, the outer surface on the front surface side of the board box A100 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is located on the side closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and operated. It is formed from the second region formed by the wall portion A210.

  The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in a front view (the length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to the length dimension in the arrow U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are elongated) and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

  The operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (on the side of the rotation axis A410 of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B).

  The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to incline (decrease incline) in a direction closer to main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, on the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space continuous with the space on the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed, and the first connection wall portion A220 and The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded as a space that is a combination of the spaces on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to about 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the expansion of the space on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210 and the securing of the space inside the board box A100.

  The second connection wall portion A230 is one side on one side in the lateral direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 is the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side in the (direction side) is a wall portion that connects to the front wall portion A201, and is arranged in a posture that is substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

  The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for allowing the operation portion A122 to project to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and a main control device A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

  The opening A250 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (substantially square in front view in the present embodiment), and is substantially in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrows L and R directions). It is located in the center. A guide wall A251 is provided upright around the opening A250 from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operating portion A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). This is a part for controlling (tilt) and is formed in a frame shape of a substantially square shape in front view surrounding the opening A250, and its inner peripheral surface is formed so as to be smoothly continuous with the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

  In the present embodiment, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is higher than that of the operation wall portion A210, which is higher than the tip end of the operation portion A122 pushed to the operation position (position to be turned on). The tip is located at a lower position (the tip of the operation portion A122 is projected outward (to the arrow F direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pushing operation of the operation unit A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251 and improve the operability of the operation unit A122.

  However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the leading end of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (position where it is turned on). The position may be set (the tip of the operation portion A122 is recessed inward (in the direction of arrow B) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to an inadvertent operation of the operator or a contact (interference) with another member.

  Further, the tip of the operation portion A122 pushed into the operating position (the position where the guide wall A251 is erected) from the operation wall portion A210 is substantially the same as the upright tip from the operation wall portion A210. You may set to the dimension which becomes the same height position. When the operating portion A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can be made aware that the operating portion A122 has been pushed into the operating position on the basis of such contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  The operation wall portion A210 is provided with a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) thereof. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112A), and is a cylindrical peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210. Mainly includes a portion A271 and a plate-shaped end face wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271, and a part of the tip end side of the key device A130 is housed in the internal space thereof. It

  The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a tubular shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions radially outwardly protruding from two facing portions (positions different in phase of about 180 degrees) of the base portion A271a. And part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protruding portion A271b) is formed in a generally same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (arrow F, B direction). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same shape as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion portion A271b) (that is, the shape in which two facing portions of the circle are projected outward in the radial direction). Is formed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

  The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape that extends radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a plate-like (cantilever) whose base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) is free.

  Here, the opening A260 is provided only in a region (a region necessary to allow the displacement) corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about 90 degrees for allowing the displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about 90 degrees for allowing the displacement of the portion (on the opposite side to the one side) is formed in a shape in which the phases are different by about 180 degrees and are combined.

  As a result, the end surface wall portion A272 has a circular ring portion A272a that extends radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially circular ring shape in a front view (direction of arrow B). And a square-shaped portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape in a front view (viewed by the arrow B). The square-shaped portions A272b are arranged in a posture in which they taper inward in the radial direction when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), and are formed at two positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

  Note that the key A140 has a size in which the radius of rotation of the portion on one side of the rotation center and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the rotation center are different. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a different size (radius) from the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 are provided on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are ridges extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end thereof is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

  Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge portion of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions where the phases differ by about 180 degrees.

  In addition, on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is provided at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. Are formed respectively. The display section is a section showing information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with the edge directed toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is arranged in the off position (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the key A140 with the edge directed toward one end of the second protrusion A212. A140 is arranged at the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (arranged side by side) in series (in a row) along the edge portion of the front wall portion A201.

  Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284, and these standing walls A281, A282, A283, and A284 open the openings. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, in the state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

  The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are arranged to face each other across the opening A250, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A281. The fourth standing wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first standing wall A281.

  One side of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is connected to the first standing wall A281, and the other side is connected to the lower wall portion A203. That is, the first standing wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 has one side connected to the second standing wall A282 and the other side connected to the third standing wall A283.

  The standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the openings A260 are surrounded by these standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (See (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

  The first standing wall A291 is disposed between the opening A260 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are arranged to face each other across the opening A260, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A291.

  One side of the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 is connected to the first standing wall A291, and the other side thereof is connected to the lower wall portion A203. That is, the first standing wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292 on one side and to the third standing wall A293 on the other side.

  The standing wall A290 is formed in a size that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 becomes the inner surface (straight line) of the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The outer surfaces (arcs) of the projections A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 are inscribed in the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

  The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 are the back surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing heights from the surfaces are the same, and the standing tip surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 are seat surfaces A206. It is placed at the same height as.

  Therefore, in the standing walls A280 and A290, the standing tip surfaces of the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293 are continuous with the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective standing walls A281 and A293. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (form the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing wall are installed. The standing tip surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimension (the arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is the length dimension of the first standing wall A281 (arrow L, Value in the R direction). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surfaces of the standing wall A280 (the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283), the second standing wall There is a possibility that the A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the facing portions of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A284 are connected. The deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, by disposing the fourth standing wall A284 at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume near the fourth standing wall A284 becomes large. This is equivalent to forming a part with a large plate thickness partly, and due to the difference in shrinkage ratio with other parts, forming defects in the part with a large plate thickness part and in the vicinity thereof may occur. Give rise to.

  On the other hand, the standing height of the fourth standing wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the standing height of the first standing wall A281, the second standing wall A282, and the third standing wall A283. Thereby, while the function of suppressing the deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is ensured, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced, and the molding failure due to the difference in the shrinkage rate occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, the switch A120 is tilted toward the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, and the tilt thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, the tilt of a smaller angle than in the case of making contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

  On the inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 on the standing tip side, the standing tip side (arrow B Direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a that are inclined surfaces are formed closer to the outer surface side. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) of the standing walls A 281, A 291, A 282, A 292, A 283, A 293 at the standing tips is gradually reduced toward the standing tip side, and each standing wall A 281 is correspondingly reduced. , A291, A282, A292, A283, A293, the area of the standing tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

  The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are provided on the outer surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 on the leading end side of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293. It may be provided.

  A standing wall A208 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the above-described standing walls A280 and A290, a standing wall A209 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The standing wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which plate-shaped bodies on four sides are connected and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is open, and is mounted on the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). 4)). Further, the standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape with the opposite side to the operation wall portion A210 open, and is mounted on the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at a position corresponding to. Therefore, in the state where the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208 and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

  Here, the plurality of standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 that respectively surround the plurality of objects have one or a plurality of standing walls with the height position of the standing tip end surface of the remaining standing walls. It is set at a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is set back from the height position of the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to do). As a result, even if there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed board A119 to the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). As compared with the standing wall A209, the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily attached to the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the close contact of the standing wall surrounding the object of high importance to the printed circuit board A119.

  Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111 (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a back wall portion A301 formed in a plate shape of a generally oblong rectangular shape in a front view, and upright from four sides of the back wall portion A301 toward the front side (arrow F direction). Mainly provided with a wall portion (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303) that are provided and formed in a plate shape, The respective wall portions A301 to A305 form a box shape with the front side open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

  On the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303, a plurality of engaged portions A307 are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (to the arrow D direction side).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, a phase is provided on the side opposite to the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 (arrow L side) by the extending length of the extending portion. The boxes are made to face each other at the shifted positions, and the box cover A200 is pushed toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged parts A307, and then the box cover A200 is set to the box base A300, and the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 ( Slide and displace in the direction of arrow R).
As a result, the engagement piece A207 enters the rear surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is regulated).

  Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. 113 is a main CXIII portion of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partial expansion front perspective view of control device A110.

  114 (a) is a front view of main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is a main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a). 114 (c) is a side view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114 (a).

  112 to 114, only the main ones of various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated and other illustrations are omitted to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. .

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors, transistors) mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and a circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is a conductor such as copper foil. And the through holes A112 are formed at four corners.

  The printed circuit board A119 has a front surface (a surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, a surface on the arrow F direction side) facing the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201) in a substrate box A100. Is stored in.

  In this case, of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 with which the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact (see FIG. 114). (See (a)), electronic parts are not mounted or circuits are not formed, and the regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In FIG. 114 (a), only a portion of the region where the seating surface A206 is in contact with the standing walls A280 and A290 is shown.

  The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating portion A122 so that it can be displaced (pushing operation), and a coil spring (which is provided inside the main body A123 and applies a biasing force to the operating portion A122 to return to the initial position ( (A biasing means (not shown)), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 to switch contact with the displacement of the operating portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare

  The main body A123 includes a base portion A123a that is formed in a substantially cubic shape and is mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion portion A123b that protrudes from the front surface of the base portion A123a (the surface on the arrow F direction side). The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 face each other.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a and a portion where the legs A121 protrude) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a where the legs A121 are projected) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, you may comprise so that the front surface of the protrusion part A123b and the back surface (surface in the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall part A210 may contact.

  The leg A121 is projected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed board A119) of the base A123a in the main body A123, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The key device A130 includes a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the inner cylinder A132a to rotate with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a matching key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is provided inside. And a contact body whose contact is switched according to the state of the cylinder portion A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

  The main body A133 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has a base portion A133a that holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof and two locations (positions that differ in phase by approximately 180 degrees) on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A133a. ), A pair of protrusions A133b protruding outward in the radial direction, and an end A133c forming an end face on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base A133a.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and a portion from which the legs A131 protrude) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 where the legs A131 are projected) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

  The end face of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position (arrow B direction side) one step lower than the end face (face on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end A133c. A circular opening in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. .

  When main controller A110 is housed in substrate box A100, a part of the front end side (direction of arrow F) of main body A133 is housed in the internal space of covering portion A270.

  Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value that is equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is covered. It is formed to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, so that the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is located on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

  Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (the end surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. The front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 may be in contact with each other.

  The leg A131 is projected from the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The support A134 has a base portion A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center and the main body A133 (the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b) is inserted into the opening, and two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided, and the metal plate-like body is bent to be integrated. Is formed.

  The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is provided in a protruding manner on the extending front end surface of the extending portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 to be self-supporting by inserting the leg A134b1 into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

  A gap may be provided between the extended front end surface of the extended portion A134b (the surface on the arrow B direction side) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side). That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the amount of the gap.

  On the other hand, the extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a and the extension length of the reinforcing portion A134c may be the same. That is, the extended tip end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extended portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and it is possible to more firmly prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

  Further, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent into a substantially V shape or a substantially S shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It may be configured to. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since the soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement with the hole of the leg A134b1, soldering may be performed. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

  In the leg A134b1, the width dimension (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and B, the lateral dimension in FIG. 114 (b)) is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped body that constitutes the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The shape of the printed circuit board A119 into which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, it is possible to prevent the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connection portion with the extended portion A134b) from being deformed or broken.

  However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the leg A134b1 may have a square cross section.

  Further, since the reinforcing portions A134c are formed on the two opposite sides of the support A134, the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a can be restricted. As a result, the rigidity of the support A134 as a whole can be increased and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be improved, so that the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more firmly regulated (suppressed).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

  115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the on position. 116A is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 116A, and FIG. 116A is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 when viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. It is a partially expanded side view of the board | substrate box A100 in the arrow CXVIb direction view.

  117 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the section line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is a board taken along the section line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115 (a). 118A is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118A is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115A, and FIG. 118B is FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of substrate box A100 in cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

  FIG. 119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the section line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is a board taken along the section line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of a box A100.

  117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and to facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown and a single hatching is added to the cross section to schematically show the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Diagrammatically.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the board box A100, the covering portion A270 is provided so as to project from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is provided so as to project therefrom. An opening A260 is formed in an end face wall portion A272 forming a tip end face (a face on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of foreign matter such as wire to reach the opening A260.

  For example, when it is difficult for an illegal person to see the opening A260 due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of the foreign matter such as wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire is inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the wall portion A210 to reach the opening A260 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 is provided so as to project from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of foreign matter such as wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. The tip of the foreign substance such as the wire can be abutted against the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

  The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the leading end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the front end side of the key device A130.

  This makes it possible to bend the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130. That is, when a foreign substance such as wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 through the opening A260, a path through which the foreign substance such as wire passes (a gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c, and the peripheral wall portion A271). A path formed by a gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b), and a wire or the like passing through the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c by bending the tip of a foreign substance such as wire. It is possible to form a wall on which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially columnar main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension (the lateral dimension in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) of the support A134 is the inner diameter dimension (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271). (Left-right dimension of)) is set to a larger value.

  As a result, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the support A134 can face the inner surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 through the opening A260, a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (formed by a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b). The wall on which the tip of a foreign material such as wire abuts (the path of a foreign material such as a wire passing through a gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b, that is, the support A134 The upper surface. Further, for foreign matter such as wire that hits the upper surface of the support A134 and the traveling direction is changed, the standing walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and a base portion A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

  As a result, the circumferential outer surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b and the circumferential inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b can be made to face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 through the opening A260, a path through which the foreign substance such as wire passes (the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b causes a circumferential direction). The tip of foreign matter such as wire passing through the gap between the wall (peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the projection A133b) along which the tip of the foreign matter such as wire abuts along the circumferential direction. It is possible to form, in the path, a wall which is abutted against, that is, a circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b and a circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the protrusion A123b can face the inner surface of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surfaces of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 through the opening A250, a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210, the operation portion A122, and the protrusion A123b). A wall formed by bending a path formed by a gap between them and a tip of a foreign matter such as a wire abutting (a wall where a tip of a foreign matter such as a wire passing through a gap between the guide wall A251 and the operating portion A122 abuts, that is, The upper surface of the protruding portion A123b, and for foreign matter such as wire that has collided with the upper surface of the protruding portion A123b and the traveling direction has been changed, passes through the inner walls of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall portion A203. Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

  As described above, the covering portion A270 has the internal space, and a part of the leading end side (one end side, arrow F side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the front end side of the key device A130.

  As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140 (the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to an inadvertent or rough operation of the operator on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, a collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, or the like, When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, and the tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted).

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from breaking or bending, the leg A131 coming off from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder peeling. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) and the disconnection or contact failure of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  An end surface wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip (on the arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the end surface wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which foreign matter such as wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and improperly acting on the main controller A110.

  In particular, in the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, the rectangular portions A272b extend radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding tip end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270 is opened only in the area in which the displacement of the key A140 is allowed (the area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140), and the protruding portion of the covering portion A270 is formed. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) are end surface wall portions A272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert foreign matter such as wire into the opening A260. Further, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end surface wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if foreign matter such as wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign matter such as wire will pass through. It's hard to do.

  As described above, in order to make the opening A260 into a different shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other and combined together), the end wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which the pair of rectangular portions A272b protrudes from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. It is formed in various shapes. In this case, the end surface wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) is a cantilever having a plate shape with a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free). The shape can be simplified and the moldability can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed on the covering portion A270, and the end face wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the peripheral wall portion A271 on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) is the opening A260. Even if it is a configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. You can (regulate).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (the arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end face wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). Can be abutted. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 tilts due to the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (cover portion A270) can be suppressed.

  Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b and the circumferential inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b face each other. (See FIG. 118 (a)).

  Therefore, for example, due to an inadvertent or rough operation of the operator on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, a collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, or the like, When an external force in the rotation direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) is changed to the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side). ), The rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be restricted.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from breaking or bending, the leg A131 coming off from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder peeling. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) and the disconnection or contact failure of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  Here, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation on the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted in the key device A130, or the operation unit A122 when the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, due to a collision of another member with the key A140 or the like, an external force is applied to the operation portion A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the inserting direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). When actuated, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 may be tilted, and their abutment may deform and damage the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270). .

  On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these standing walls A280 and A290 have their standing tip surfaces ( The surface on the arrow B direction side is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

Thereby, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) to improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210, and also to support the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 (deformation suppression). The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as means.
As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

  Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the standing walls A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (controlled). That is, not only the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also the standing walls A280 and A290 share the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress the tilt thereof, and the load is correspondingly shared. It can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if foreign matter such as wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The standing walls A280 and A290 can be made to function as walls against which the tips of foreign matter such as wire abut (walls that restrict the further movement). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

  The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118 (b)). That is, an area AS1 in which the standing tip surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290, the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203, and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119 contact each other. , AS2 have a substantially rectangular frame shape and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

  Therefore, the path for foreign matter such as wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (separated) by the standing walls A280 and A290. That is, even if foreign matter such as wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, it is prohibited to move out of the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203. You can As a result, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

  The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 stand (function as ribs. Not only can improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210, but also do not depend on the direction of the external force applied to the operation portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R are Even when an external force in any direction within the plane including the force is applied), the function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be surely exhibited. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

  The first standing wall A291 is arranged so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position. The three standing walls A293 are arranged so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the standing wall A290 can efficiently exhibit a function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270.

  That is, among the external forces in the directions parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, when the external forces in the directions U and D or the directions L and R act on the key A140, the standing wall is installed. The load received by A290 (the load resistance that standing wall A290 should exhibit as a support portion) is maximized, while an external force is applied in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the arrow U and D directions or the arrow L and R directions. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 is rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the external force escapes by the rotation, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 serves as a support portion). Load capacity) should be low. As a result, by setting the posture of the standing wall A290 to the above-described arrangement, the standing wall A290 can efficiently exhibit the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

  Since the standing walls A280, A290 (the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the rigidity of the box cover A200 is used to make the standing walls. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 through the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  The printed circuit board A119 has a surface on which electronic components are connected by soldering, which is a surface facing the box base A300 (opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with the regions AS1 and AS2 (see FIG. 114 (a)), no electronic component is mounted or a circuit is not formed, and the region AS1 is not formed. , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

  Therefore, the standing tip surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the standing walls A280 and A290 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the printed circuit board A119 and the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can surely function as walls against which tips of foreign substances such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abut.

  The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 are provided with the tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, and thereby the standing tips. The area of the surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure on the standing tip end surface that is brought into contact with the printed board A119, and to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted between the printed board A119 and the standing walls A280 and A290.

  In this case, since the tapered surfaces A280a, A290a are formed on the inner surface (the surface facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) of the standing walls A280, A290 on the standing tip end side, the formability is improved. At the same time, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

  That is, the shape of the standing walls A280, A290 is reduced by reducing the area of the standing tip surface by the inclined surfaces (taper surfaces A280a, A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the standing tip side (direction of arrow B). The fluidity of the resin in the molding die can be secured by making the change gradual. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, grooves having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( 117 (a) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of the foreign substance such as the wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to pass (penetrate) between the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 are provided on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. One ends of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 or the protrusion portion A271b) (Fig. 115 (a) and Fig. 115 ( See b)).

  Accordingly, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 function as ribs for increasing the rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each of the ridges A211 and 222 is utilized to further prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from tilting. It is possible to surely suppress the damage of the covering portion A270.

  In addition, on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is provided at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. (“ON” and “OFF”) are respectively formed. This allows the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 to have a function as an instruction line for indicating a position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface of the key A140 in the off position (the surface to be gripped by the finger). (A surface having a narrow width along the outer edge of the key A140) (a position facing the end surface of the key A140) (see FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second ridge A212 has a covering portion A270 (of the peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is set to the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface on the arrow U direction side (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ), The first ridge A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), and is turned on. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the above, and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (the arrow L direction) in which the end face on the arrow L direction side is brought into contact with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272), the The second ridge A212 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a portion (the end surface of the key A140 is in contact with the end surface of the key A140) from which the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger). It is possible to efficiently reinforce the portion to be formed) by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the covering portion A270.

  Note that the external force in the opposite direction to that described above (the force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) acting on the key A140 in the off position can be suppressed by the second connection wall portion A230 (FIG. 115 (a )), The external force in the opposite direction to the above-described case (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) acts on the key A140 in the on position can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). (See (b)).

  That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions). The direction side) is open (the connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (on the side of the first connection wall part A220) with respect to the center of the operation wall part A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions), and is located from the key device A130 to the third part. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

  Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall portion A240, the hands of the worker and other components on those space sides collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is indicated by the arrow D. An external force that displaces in the direction or in the direction of arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 on the side that suppresses the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to such an external force (the side that receives the key), it is possible to reduce material costs and ensure rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

  As described above, the rectangular portion A272b of the end face wall portion A272 is arranged at two positions having different phases by approximately 180 degrees, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (direction of arrow B). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (outer edge, edge forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the rectangular portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the shape in front view is formed as a scalene triangle).

  Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has a side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 (the surface to be gripped with a finger). Is longer (larger) than the key A140 in the off position, and the rectangular portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall A220 (opposite side of the key A140) is the grip surface of the key A140. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the is shortened (smalled) (see FIG. 115 (a)).

  Therefore, in other words, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has a length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the grip surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the ON position. Is shorter (smaller), and the rectangular portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension on the side (outer edge) on the side facing the grip surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall portion A240, the hands of the worker and other components on those space sides collide with the key A140, and the key A140. Where the external force that displaces the arrow D direction or the arrow L direction is likely to be applied, according to the rectangular portion A272b in the present embodiment, the side of the key A140 on which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is applied is received. Since the length of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the rectangular portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilt of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the surface pressure and suppress damage to the rectangular portion A272b.

  The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is located on the side closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall. It is formed from the second region formed by the portion A210, and the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

  As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (first area formed by the front wall portion A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first area and the second area are connected. The steps (the first connecting wall portion A220, the second connecting wall portion A230, and the third connecting wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared with the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first area), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased for a person who commits an illegal act. It is difficult to visually recognize the openings A250 and A260, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as wire into the opening A260.

  Here, in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110, the board box A100 has a distance to the main control device A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space). )) Must be secured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far away from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

  In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily secure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250 and It is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire from A260 into the inside of the board box A100. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, work is performed on a step (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) that connects the first region and the second region. The operator's hand interferes with the operation and interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined (downward inclination) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. The space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210 can be expanded by the amount of the inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall A220). As a result, operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (directions of arrows L and R) in the other direction (arrows U and D) orthogonal to one direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the direction of the arrow B). It is formed as a region of a substantially rectangular shape (horizontally long rectangle) in a front view, which is larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b)).

  The key device A130 is arranged such that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is the posture along the other direction (directions of arrows U and D) described above (see FIG. 115 (a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position has a surface gripped by a finger in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key A140 in a front view (direction of arrow B). Has a longitudinal direction along the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  As a result, a space can be secured on the side desired by the surface of the key A140 in the off position to be gripped by the finger (right side and left side in FIG. 115 (a)). Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted in the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, the finger (eg, thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region with each other (the first connection wall). It is possible to suppress interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (on the side of the first connection wall A220) with respect to the center of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L and R), as described above. As described above, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (rotated from the off position to the on position or vice versa), the key A140 is It is possible to prevent the fingers different from the grasped fingers from interfering with the step (the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) that connects the first region and the second region. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  For example, when gripping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and the thumb, the little finger or the ring finger can be arranged using the space secured by the descending inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and the off position to the on position. When the key A140 is operated (rotated), the little finger and the ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the descending inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

  Further, when the key A140 in the ON position is gripped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger or the ring finger is formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and the key device A130 is operated. Arranged by utilizing the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by locating the wall portion A210 (second region) on one side from the longitudinal center. Therefore, when the key A140 is operated (rotated) from the off position to the on position, the little finger or the ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above. it can.

  In the switch device A120, the position of the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating portion A122 in the initial position (the standing height from the operating wall portion A210) is the protruding portion of the covering portion A270. It is set to a position (small dimension) lower than the position (the standing height from the operation wall portion A210) of the tip end surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface on the arrow F direction side). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interference between the operation unit A122 and the finger when operating the key A140.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall portion) on both sides of one side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow R direction side 9) in the longitudinal direction. Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side in the lateral direction (arrow U direction side), while on the other side in the lateral direction (arrow D direction side). Has no connection surface.

  Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, this opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the external space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (insertion into the key device A130, withdrawal from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is held. Use the above-mentioned open space (external space) as a space for placing and displacing (moving) a finger (pinkie or ring finger) that is different from the grasped finger (for example, thumb and index finger). You can As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the board box A100 has a distance from the main control apparatus A110 in consideration of heat radiation from the main control apparatus A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). It is necessary to secure the distance (internal space).

  In this case, a step (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) that connects the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are the front wall portion A201 (first region) and The operation wall portion A210 (second region) is formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210.

  That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are connected. By making it non-inclined (by making only the first connection wall portion A220 to be inclined downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for dealing with heat radiation from the main control device A110.

  Thus, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the other (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, it is possible to suppress the interference with the fingers. Is an operation wall portion A210 (second region) in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and is one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) from the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). ), The key device A130 is arranged in close proximity.

  The third connection wall portion A240 is formed by forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220). The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 during manufacturing can be prevented from colliding with the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

  FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, and illustrates a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. Note that in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) is omitted and The reference numerals are shown only for the main components.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, the hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side provided with the as an opening / closing axis.

  Here, in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening / closing axis, the release angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, about 90 degrees). In the case where the opening angle can be secured), the worker stands in a position facing the front of the substrate box A100, and the operator operates the switch device A120 and the key device in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIGS. 115 to 119). The A130 can be operated and its operability can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, the opening angle can be secured only at about 45 degrees, and the opening causes the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to enter the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12). 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured even when it is necessary to operate the key device A130 by inserting a hand from between 12.

  That is, in the board box A100, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the arrow R and L directions in FIG. 115A) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). And a short direction (arrows U and D directions in FIG. 115 (a)) toward a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis), and one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115 (a)). It is arranged in such a manner that the (L direction side) is located on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

  Thereby, when the hand is inserted between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the substrate box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second region), A space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall part A240 is formed on the thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb (that is, the operation wall part A210 (second region) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the key device is formed). A space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (on the side of arrow R) secured on the front side of the operation wall A210 by arranging A130 on one side of the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region)) Can be placed using.

  With such a state, the operation unit A122 can be operated (pushed) with the switch device A120 by the thumb or the index finger, and when the key device A130 is rotated with the key A140. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger that hold the key A140, a space secured by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

  The above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed in a state in which the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be located on the front side (front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  With the inner frame 12 opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the board box A100 is further opened to the front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening / closing axis. Is also good. As a result, the worker can stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 and the switch device A120 can be operated in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIGS. 115 to 119). The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

  In this case, various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, main controller A110 (input / output port 205) are connected through openings AOP1 to AOP8. The other end (connector) of an electrical connection line whose one end is connected to the 1 symbol display device 37, the 2nd symbol display device 83, the 2nd symbol holding lamp 84, and FIG. 4) is respectively connected.

  Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of the plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) work associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. There is a risk of deterioration of sex.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line of which one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to the (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected, or both connection and disconnection are mixed). ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is secured to the main control device A110 and fraud can be suppressed. Is the other electrical connection line (the payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110. The workability is improved (the versatility is ensured) by allowing the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 even if the electrical connection line to be operated is released (pulled out) from the main control device A110. ) Can be planned.

  That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (the front side in FIG. 120) using the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis, in order to rotate the main control device A110 (main control to the electrical connection line is performed). It is necessary to release (pull out) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

  Therefore, unless all the electrical connection lines are connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is set at a predetermined position (switch device) in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed. It is necessary to rotate the A120 and the key device A130 to a position where it is easy to operate, and then reconnect the electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

  Particularly, when the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, an extension line is interposed and released (pulled out). It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to main controller A110, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) It is unnecessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 with an electrical connection line) via an extension line.

  As a result, it is possible to arrange the main control device A110 at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are easily operated, while suppressing labor, and workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described. However, the end surface wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 protruding from the back surface thereof. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  121 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIB in FIG. 121 (a). Is.

  121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only a portion viewed in cross section is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121, on the end surface wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment, a ridge A2273 is provided so as to project from the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side). The ridge A2273 is a portion (ridge) that extends in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is an outer edge of the end face wall portion A2272 (a bulge-direction tip that projects radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge).

  In detail, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A133 of the key device A130, and is the range along the outer edge of the square part A272b (position). A range between positions AP1 and AP3 including AP2, and a range between positions AP4 and AP6 including position AP5) and one side (radially inward from the peripheral wall A271) across the square portion A272b. Is set to a range (a range between positions AP3 and AP4) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a on the side where the overhanging dimension is large), and in this range (a range between positions AP1 and AP6) It is formed continuously.

  The projecting dimension from the rear surface of the end surface wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value gradually increases toward the position AP2, and gradually decreases toward the position AP1 from the position AP2, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the projecting dimension is gradually changed to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6. The position AP6 has the same value as the position AP4. Is set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (protruding dimension).

  In this way, the protrusion A2273 is provided on the end surface wall portion A2272 so that the rigidity of the end surface wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R), and the key device A130 is tilted. When the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end surface wall portion A2272, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the rear surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (end portion A133c of the main body A133). It is possible to reduce the gap between the front face of FIG. 8A and the front face of FIG. 4A and prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the substrate box A2100 through the gap.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 that is the same as the rear face of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front face of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing interval between them. Therefore, the protruding tip (the arrow B direction side) of the ridge A2273 is brought into contact with the front surface of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

  This eliminates a gap between the rear surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c of the main body A133), and foreign matter such as wire is inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, at the positions AP2 and AP5, since the protruding dimension of the protruding strip A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the rectangular portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever) with the outer edge side being free is used. Then, the ridge A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and in the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly adhered to the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the board box A2100 through the gap between the back surface of the end surface wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

  Further, as described above, the protruding tip (the direction of the arrow B) of the ridge A2273 is brought into contact with the front surface of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130. Even if the end surface wall portion A2272 is erroneously pushed in the inserting direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being deformed in the inserting direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the end surface wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) from being damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (the arrow R direction side) than the center of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions). The switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the substrate box A3100 (box cover A3200). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of a board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122B illustrates a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122 (b), for simplification of the drawing and easy understanding, only main components are schematically illustrated.

  Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the formation position of the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 (cover portion A270, key) in the operation wall portion A210. The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) are different, but the other configurations are the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center of the box cover A3200 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L side), and the operation thereof is performed. Three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

  An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (a covering portion A270) and an opening A250 (a guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. To be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the arrow L direction side).
That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

  Here, the board box A3100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a first position (arranged at the time of game) arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12. Position (see FIG. 120) is displaced (rotated) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the front surface of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front surface side of the pachinko machine A3010 (second position). That is, the position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is set in the range of about 180 ° up to FIG. 122 (b).

  As a result, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the information about the setting change and the setting value). )be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while confirming the display (information), it is possible to easily understand the operation states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120), and therefore fraud is not performed. (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrow). It is possible to displace (rotate) the substrate box A3100 to a position in which a desired posture (in the present embodiment, both faces are substantially parallel to each other) is desired in the B direction). The angle formed by the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is preferably set in the range of approximately 0 ° to approximately 45 °.

  That is, the board is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed at the same time. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture in which the hand goes around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010. .

  As a result, it is possible to more easily perform the operation of operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the information about the setting change), which improves the operability and makes a mistake in the operation. Can be achieved more reliably.

  As described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center of the box cover A3200 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L side), and the operation wall portion A210 has the switch device A120 and the key. A device A130 is provided.

  Accordingly, the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. When the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are located farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pushing operation of the switch device A120 (the operation unit A122), so that the switch device A120 is operated more frequently than the key device A130.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 that is operated more frequently than the key device A130 is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220). It is arranged. As a result, the switch device A120 that is frequently operated can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved also from this point.

  Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 according to the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 has the above-described second position (the position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 and regulates the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, the substrate box A3100 is fixed at the second position). ) To regulate). Accordingly, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the substrate box A3100 by hand, and thus the operability can be improved.

  The restricting means uses the magnetic force of the magnet (adsorption force) to fix (hold) the substrate box A3100 at the second position (the force exceeding the adsorption force acts to cause the first Displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position is allowed), and a protrusion member disposed at the protrusion position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring) is provided at the protrusion position. The protruding member engaged with the board box A3100 arranged at the second position and restricts the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the protruding position). When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of (1), displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is allowed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrow U, D direction) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is The pachinko machine A4010 is arranged in a posture along the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123B shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is shown in dashed lines. In addition, in FIG. 123 (b), in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, only the main configuration is schematically illustrated.

  Here, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and direction) and the number of arrangements of the rotation axis A4410, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotation shafts A4410 that project from the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in directions away from each other. The pair of rotation axes A4410 are located on one side in the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) of the substrate box A4100 (opposite to the operation wall portion A210, arrow U direction side), and in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (arrows). It is formed so as to project outward from both ends (in the L and R directions) along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. The pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged coaxially.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated about the rotation axis A4410 as a rotation center in a first position (arranged at the time of game) arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12. The position (the position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) is displaced (rotated) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertically moved. The second position facing upward in the direction (direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 is most extended to the rear surface side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)) is set within a range of approximately 90 °. .

  As a result, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be turned upward, and the release side (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be turned to the side where the worker is present, and the switch device A120. Also, the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can be made to face the back surface of another component arranged in the inner frame 12. Therefore, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be made to face different parts, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud (illegal operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 contacts the separate member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so that it cannot be placed in the first position. This can prevent forgetting to remove the key A140. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acquisition of the key A140 that was forgotten to be removed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located below the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), so that the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. When the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the substrate box A4100 can be subsequently displaced (rotated) by its own weight to the second position. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the substrate box A4100 cannot be arranged in the first position.

  It should be noted that when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape is such that it penetrates into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing down the sphere flow-down unit 150 is decelerated by the ridge portion 154 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an adhesive member may be provided on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow velocity of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You may.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged in the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the back side of the effect member 700, and the protrusion width to the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

  In this case, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulation device 180 to be inserted into the rear case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long. it can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by arranging the operation member 183 to be operated so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state in which the overhang width is shortened. The displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced along with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or disposing a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 occurs due to the manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operation member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, the displacement restricting device 180 is controlled to be in the restrictive release state prior to the initial operation after the power is turned on, thereby avoiding the displacement start of the scaling unit 600 while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

  Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. In addition, even if the displacement regulating device 180 is not driven, a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided, and the displacement regulating device 180 is determined to be in the regulated state by the detection sensor. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the driving of the scaling unit 600 is not started.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the rear case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the rear case 510, or a combination thereof.

  For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided in the upper surface portion of the lower arm member 630 in the effect standby state, and When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is extended, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the recessed portion provided in the lower arm member 630, thereby preventing the lower arm member 630 from being changed in the left-right direction. You can

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of the device that regulates the displacement of the expansion / contraction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the game area has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for restricting (limiting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipping. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the granular member 320 from being rubbed against the wall surface of the partition member 310, and the partition member 310 from being scratched.

  For example, shipping with the lid member 480 arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side (production standby state) prevents the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 with which the granular members 320 can come into contact at the time of shipping, and it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the granular members 320, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which cracks due to collision of the granular members 320 occur. it can.

  As another example, the granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering unit 160, is configured to be able to project into the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310, and is disposed in the internal space IE1 in the projecting state. It is also possible to provide an overhanging member configured to limit the displacement of the.

  This bulging member is configured so that it can be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and the bulging state and the non-bulging state are switched each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine store, the front frame 14 can be opened to operate the overhanging member from the front side, so that the operability of the overhanging member can be improved.

  The manner of changing the state of the overhang member is not limited at all. For example, like the displacement regulating device 180, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engaging or disengaging the claws.

  Further, as another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the internal pressure of the partitioning member 310 in a raised state. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine store, and the atmospheric pressure in the partition member 310 is lowered before the pachinko machine 10 is operated, so that the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

  Further, as another example, a resin as a material of the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder, and a magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipping. With this, at the time of shipping, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, at the time of operation, by removing this magnet, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

  The magnet is not limited to the one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be provided in a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, the magnet may be provided in the lid member 480.

  In addition, in the aspect in which the ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, the operation is performed to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, to bring the magnet close to the partition member 310 after performing the shooting effect). By disposing a production effect object, it is possible to include a production mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped (visualized as if it is floating) in the air.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 that restricts the displacement of the enlarging / reducing unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the rear case 510 is formed with an insertion hole that is bored on the same straight line as the central axis of the regulated hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged at a predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, a clerk of the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or resin rod. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

  On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the fixing tape, and it is not possible to throw away the metal rod or resin rod for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and store it. There is a need to do.

  Also, if you leave the storage of metal rods or resin rods to each gaming machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if you deliver to another store without the metal rods or resin rods, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is secured. It may not be possible. It can be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 is improved from this viewpoint.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left-right central portion 312b of the bending plate portion 312 and the back partition lower portion 314 are substantially the same has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b and the back partition lower part 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-back width between the left-right part 312a and the back partition lower part 314. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased in the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the ejected granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 and It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to a collision.

  Further, for example, the front-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the back partition lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be advanced into the internal space IE1 without slowing down the ejected granular member 320.

  Further, the front-back width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, the tapered shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it is possible to easily avoid that the partition member 310 is locally overloaded. Furthermore, by moving the taper direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular members 320 toward the front side.

  Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion protruding in a manner protruding toward the back side may be provided at a part of the front plate portion 311 where the ejected granular members 320 are expected to arrive collectively. good. The bump-shaped portion may be configured such that another member is arranged and fixed on the back surface of the front plate portion 311 or may be formed by molding so that a part of the front plate portion 311 can be projected to the back surface side. You may comprise so that a convex part may be provided in a mold.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed into a soccer ball shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which three-dimensional projections are formed). By forming the members with a certain size, a gap can be generated between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the firing effect is executed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161, and is configured to fire the granular member 320 obliquely upward and upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged at the left and right positions of the light guide plate 161, or at the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 to the diagonally front side. In addition, when disposing the injection device 400 at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the effect standby position.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a monochromatic (red in this embodiment) resin member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two-color molding or two members of different colors may be combined to form one granular member 320. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by considering the position of the center of gravity and changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

  Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited and may be one. For example, a member having a size similar to that of the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape similar to that of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the flying manner and the appearance of the granular member 320 are changed depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape properly fitted or the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the granular members 320 are arranged so as to be able to scatter in the internal space IE1 and gather on the collision member 420 by gravity has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is provided in which a biasing unit that biases the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side in the production standby state) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the biasing force of the biasing unit. May be. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

  Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose ends are fixedly arranged, and an elastic sheet partially covering the path of the granular member 320.

  The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the mode may be such that the granular member 320 and the urging means are adhered, or they are not adhered but are not separated, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. The urging means may be supported in the internal space IE1 and may be arranged apart from the granular member 320.

  Further, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can contact the granular member 320. For example, an atmospheric pressure adjusting means for adjusting the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 may be adopted as in the case where gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by raising or lowering the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1.

  For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, it is possible to easily maintain the granular member 320 below the internal space IE1, and conversely above the internal space IE1. When the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a mode of extracting gas from the inside, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

In addition, in the case of causing a pressure change, it is preferable to close the odd-shaped penetration portion 315.
It is possible to easily provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315. For example, when a flexible, thin and highly deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the odd-shaped through portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the odd-shaped through portion 315.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the linear projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion on the side facing the transmission protrusion 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position as long as the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, as long as it is in contact with the curved surface. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum urging force of.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right center portions of the collision member 420 are configured to have a curved shape protruding upward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be in the shape of a slope in which the central portion is sharp and descends in the left-right direction, or in the shape of a ridge. In this case, as compared with the curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharpness in the central portion in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deviation in the lateral arrangement of the granular members 320.

  Further, for example, it may have a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction, or may have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partitioning member 310 and is dispersed by the collision.

  In addition, when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 according to it. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is preferably formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are convex upward. This makes it easier to avoid the collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape in the side view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower half may be configured so as to project and bend in a side view. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be moved to the upper half side.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the size of the partition member 310 in front view is configured to be approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161, but the size is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partition member 310 in a front view is designed to be about the size of the visible region in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display region of the third symbol display device 81 or more. You can Thereby, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized as being overlapped with the display by the third symbol display device 81, so that the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. it can.

  In the first embodiment described above, the single collision member 420 is used as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and coordinated operation or individual operation may be performed by different drive devices.

In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the pillar portion protruding from the plate portion 422 to the back side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and contact the front transmission member 440. In this case, the abutment portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is formed in a concavo-convex shape such that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the arrangement of the pillar portion is accompanied by the rotation of the front transmission member 440. Can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be finely displaced vertically and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (finely displaced).

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by the rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited at all, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may enter by a slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the odd-shaped penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape that is recessed toward the back side, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is accommodated separately below the lid member 480 in the production standby state of the injection device 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a projecting portion that projects from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side may be formed, and this projecting portion may be capable of contacting the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally deposited, by pushing the granular members 320 by the protrusion, the deposition of the granular members 320 can be destroyed as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. . As a result, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

  The shape of the protruding portion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be scattered. In this case, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the deposited granular member 320 regardless of the position where the granular member 320 is deposited, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be destroyed.

  Further, it may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged so as to be inclined to the left and right both sides toward the evacuation-side tip of the advancing / retreating portion 481 with the left-right central portion of the entry-side tip of the overhanging portion 482 as a starting point. . In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 480 on the entry side, it is possible to apply a load to the granular member 320 in the direction of pushing the granular member 320 outward in the left and right directions.

  Further, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the slopes may be reversed, the ridges may be formed along a single sloping direction rather than the pair of sloping directions, or ridges having different slopes may be combined, or the slopes may be inclined. There may be no protrusion (a protrusion extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a protrusion extending on a plane parallel (or overlapping) with the rotation axis). The number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

  The protruding length of the protruding portion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be protruded until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480 and the protrusion length from the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is constant. Is also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protruding portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the above-described effect obtained from the shape of the lid member 480 can be obtained. Can be played by a part.

  The operation timing of the protrusion when the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480 is not limited to the time when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced to the entry side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is accommodated below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is gradually moved in the forward and reverse directions in the vicinity of a state where the front transmission member 440 is rotated by 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with the production standby state as a reference. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small increments, and the granular member 320 mounted on the collision member 420. Can be vertically displaced.

  Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. By this collision, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be changed, and the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be destroyed.

  Further, when the collision member 420 bounces up the granular member 320 (when the granular member 320 is displaced upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

  The driving motor MT1 may be rotated little by little in normal and reverse directions by controlling the driving force to be reversed in normal and reverse directions, or may be rotated in the forward direction with a short time interval. In this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 to be displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, so that the reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 can be generated.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape that extends along the same plane across the left and right sides, so that the lid member corresponding to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has an unevenness (corrugation), and the lid member leans to the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312. The distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 may be changed. Further, the entrance side end of the advancing / retreating part 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed so as to be parallel to the axis of the rotation axis O1.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be arranged on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

  In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation in which the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, a case has been described in which the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be a timing at which all of the plurality of members are displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the adopted drive motor MT1 may be slightly enlarged.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the ridge 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, when a repulsive force is generated between them, The load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, of the transmission protrusions 446, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that produces an attractive force between the linear protrusions 414 is disposed in a circumferential half portion of the linear motion member 410 that faces the protrusions 414. On the other hand, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that produces a repulsive force between the ridge portion 414 and the circumferential half portion on the opposite side is arranged so that the repulsive force causes the linear motion member 410 to move to the lower end position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load at the start of the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, because the load can be generated on the side where the contact is maintained.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted at two positions of the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460 is described. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove portion may be formed on at least one circumferential surface of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the driving force may be transmitted through the groove portion to increase the transmission target of the driving force.

  In the first embodiment described above, there is a case where it may be unclear whether or not it is the timing to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction due to the detection by the detection sensor SC4, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the disposition of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 indicates that the front transmission member 440 is in reverse rotation. It may be determined whether or not it is possible. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not the drive has gone through the firing state by driving in the forward rotation direction, so reverse rotation is possible if the firing state has not been reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the firing state is exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, linear motion slide).

  In the first embodiment described above, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different in the upper and lower sides, it is possible to prevent a problem related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. Although the case of being configured has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is larger than that of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 balance with the fact that the displacement start is accelerated due to its own weight, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are simultaneously provided in all directions to the player. It can appear as if the displacement has started.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary plate 730 is brought into contact with the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 to generate a load in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 has been described. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be arranged to apply the urging force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. good.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotary plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a unit that applies a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a unit that displaces the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be separately provided.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives a load first, and is radially outward of the first guided protrusion 743b. The case where the second guided protrusion 744b to be arranged receives a load afterward has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured to be reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b may occur at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 has been described as having two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one projection may be provided so as to project obliquely with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion and contraction displacing member 740, the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended claw portions 734 arranged outside the circumference are configured to assist the displacement of the expansion and contraction displacement members 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a protrusion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotary plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b can be pushed outward in the radial direction by the protrusion, so that the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is moved toward the discrete state side. It is possible to assist the directed displacement.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change at the displacement lower end position of the effect member 700 and loosens the degree of the attitude change of the effect member 700 allowed at the upper and lower intermediate positions is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of allowance for the posture change of the effect member 700 is increased as it goes to the displacement lower end position.

  Further, the degree of posture change is configured by increasing / decreasing the generation position of the acting force on the effect member 700, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

  That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be variable. For example, since the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip portion of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 are The contact area of can be changed.

  The degree of posture change of the rendering member 700 is not specified only by the connecting position of the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700. For example, even if the plate front surface of the main body member 601 of the lower arm member 630 facing the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 are provided with irregularities, the distance from the pressing member PC1 may be changed. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the posture change of the effect member 700 in the plate front surface of the main body member 601, or in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it becomes easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Further, the space may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the lower end of descent.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration at the connecting position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured not to change, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a resistance increasing / decreasing device that can increase / decrease the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided at the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing / decreasing the frictional resistance, a device increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it is easily configured by disposing a magnetic body in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which the arcuate hole 634 is formed) that is disposed in the vicinity as the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the effect member 700 is allowed to have a large displacement as a displacement in the expansion direction as the arrangement position moves downward, and the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed before the effect member 700 is expanded in the expansion direction. Although the case where the displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control may be performed such that displacement in the expansion direction occurs during the displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved to the left and right by displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting (displaceing inward in the radial direction) the effect member 700 while the effect member 700 is being displaced downward. It is possible to cancel the influence of the change from the long posture to the vertically long posture, and it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member 700 in the forward tilt direction.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collective arrangement state, and the state changes to the discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

  In this case, in order to avoid the collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second-layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. Further, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17, the glass unit of the second layer is inclined from the front and rear position similar to the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side toward the upper side. Is preferred.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjusting member 744 tend to be inclined due to the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a biasing unit such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744, and the postures of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are adjusted by the biasing force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily obtained.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion located above the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601, the front cover member 610 and the electrical wiring DK1 from being rubbed.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fixed by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing tool such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

  Further, the fastening position of the electric wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electric wiring DK2 arranged through the connecting position of the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the narrowed portion 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connecting position. The fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the connecting position.

  Further, the means for retaining the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the scaling unit 600. That is, the width of a portion of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed may be narrowed to sandwich the electrical wiring DK1 and limit the displacement, or the inside of the placement portion 635 may be configured. Alternatively, the electric wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as a wiring path of the electric wiring DK1.

  In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the placement portion 635 or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 arranged on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

  In the above-described first embodiment, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) in which the wiring arm member 870 approaches and separates from the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes in association with the horizontal slide member 840 being displaced on the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front, rear, left, and right planes, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up and down directions, and the wiring arm member 870 can be moved toward and away from the front, rear, left, and right planes. It may be inclined and displaced.

  In the first embodiment described above, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size relationship may be reversed, and the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may have the same diameter.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced in a spiral shape in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electric wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged separately.

  In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during the rotational displacement of the wing member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced when necessary even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Drive control can be performed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to the overhang state or the enlargement state occurs in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, when the vane-shaped member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 whose position in the front-rear direction is the same as that of the rendering member 700 is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the rendering member 700 in the discrete state, the rendering member 700. May be configured so that the state can be changed to the enlarged state.

  In this case, a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid expecting a state change of the effect member 700 from the disposition of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing-shaped member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is the same as the shape of the guide path DL1 has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends in a lateral width that is longer than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 flows down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for a ball entering the general winning opening 63, a path for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or a combination thereof. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the outlet 71.

  Further, since the respective winning openings 63, 64, 640 and 65 are arranged at arbitrary positions within the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow passage LM1 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area.
For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16 or the like). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along the path of the sphere flowing down the game area in a front view.

  Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down through the intermediate flow passage LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient if the intermediate flow passage LM1 is formed so as to be close to the left and right center sides of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the decorative board of the horizontal board unit 166 is arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction matches the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the decorative substrate may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  In addition, the entire area of the illuminated substrate is not limited to being hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illuminated substrate may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 changes by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guide hole 733 may be formed in a stepped shape so that a section in which the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 are alternately formed.

  Further, by fixing the guide holes 733 formed in a stepwise shape to a part of the guide holes 733, it is possible to displace the shielding design member 760 so as to approach or abut at different displacement loci or at different displacement timings.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiating device 6330 and the second light irradiating device 6340 arranged on the left and right of the launch effect unit 6300 are provided with a plurality of illuminated substrates has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the horizontal board unit 166 and the vertical board unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may be configured by a plurality of decorative boards. Further, the portion (left and right elongated portions) of the decoration means 170 corresponding to the laterally elongated groove portion 171a is configured to have good light transmission, and the laterally elongated groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersecting position of a plurality of decorative boards, and the intersecting portion is formed. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, light may be visually recognized through the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a.

  Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, it is not limited to the case of using a plurality of hard decorative boards. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing the flexible substrate. Thereby, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions, and the irradiation direction of light can be increased. Further, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of configurations may be reduced) regardless of whether the number of the configurations is single or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations on the key device A130 has been described, but the number (formation number) of the protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is provided in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number (number of provided) of the key devices A130 may be increased to two or more. .

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each component with respect to other components, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) of each component with respect to other components, or the arrangement of each component with respect to other components as a reference. The order of may be changed respectively. The arrangement order may be changed for all the configurations, or only some of the configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (on the side of the first connection wall A220) with respect to the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged at the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the opening A260 (key device A130) may be disposed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (on the side of the third connection wall portion A240).

  Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 (cover portion A270) has a direction in which the pair of protrusions A133b (projection A271b) is connected in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (arrow L). , R direction), the case of arranging in the arranging direction (posture, phase) orthogonal to the above is described. However, the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( Arrangement direction (posture, phase) that is parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the second region, and the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) are predetermined. The key device A130 (cover portion A270) may be arranged in the arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (greater than 0 ° and smaller than 90 °).

  Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order in which the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (the guide walls A251), and the openings A260 (the covering portions A270) are arranged in the reverse order of the arrangement of the above-described embodiments (that is, from the side closer to the first connection wall A220). ), The order of arrangement of only a part may be exchanged (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is illustrated. Be done).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided so as to project from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (the end surface wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be formed in the part. That is, it is not necessary to form it on the lower part of the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As other parts, for example, parts forming the outer surface of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, and the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. A204 or the right wall part A205, the back wall part A301 of the box base A300, the upper wall part A302, the lower wall part A303, the left wall part A304, the right wall part A305, etc. are illustrated. Similarly, as the other portion, for example, the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, or the third connection wall portion A240 is exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided so as to project from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  In this case, in the switch device A120, the length dimension of the operation portion A122 may be extended to the position where it is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. It is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 as the length of the operation portion A122 is extended.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the recess is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, from the front wall A201 Although the case where the operation wall portion A210 is located at the lower position (on the side of the main controller A110) has been described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is not limited to this, and may be provided on the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200. A portion forming a protrusion and forming a protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, operated to a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (opposite to the main controller A110)). Position the wall A210).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. The stored item is arbitrary as long as the operator is operated through the opening. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a storage item includes, for example, a connecting portion that is connected to an opening / closing lid that opens and closes an outlet for discharging the sphere from the flow path of the sphere, and the connecting portion is operated as an operator to open and close the lid. A member (structure, device) for opening and closing is exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where a push button switch or a key operation type selector switch is adopted as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this and other types are used. You may employ the operation means of. Other types of operating means include, for example, tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches, and the like.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is pushing and rotating has been described, but the operation mode is not limited to this, and it is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged so as to be operable via the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in the above-described embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, and seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation buttons are displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like a rocker switch operation button) and tilting (for example, a toggle). Like the operation lever of the switch, a mode in which the operation lever is displaced so as to incline to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum) is exemplified.

  In this case, the sliding direction of the operating element, the direction connecting both ends of the operating element that displaces the seesaw, and the tilting direction of the inclining operating element are in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to arrange the operation means in a posture in which they are parallel to each other. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operation means.

  Note that in any of the above-described operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250, A260 is set to a shape formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the operator (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Is also good.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and the end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (circular ring) in the state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130. The configuration may be such that the portion A272a or the outer edge of the prismatic portion A272b) abuts. That is, at least one of the face or the end face of the key A140 in the off position or the on position held by the finger is brought into contact with the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When rotated (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

  It should be noted that a gap between the surface and the end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the key device A130 and the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surfaces of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be allowed. That is, at least one of the above-mentioned gaps is set (the key A140 or the key device A130 is brought into contact) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged, or the solder is unlikely to be peeled off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and further preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case in which the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two circumferential positions, respectively, is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not limited thereto. , A133b may be formed at only one location or at three or more locations. Further, when forming at two or more locations, their circumferential position (phase) is arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above-described embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are intermittently formed in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto and the protrusion A271b is not limited thereto. , A133b may be continuously formed in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 are provided to project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is disposed in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is provided radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and is radially inward on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave portion that is recessed inward is provided and the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the concave portion of the key device A130. In this case, in order to cover the key device A130 with the covering portion A270 (insert the protrusion into the recess), if the recess is continuous to the end face of the base A133a (the face on the arrow F direction side) (projection). It suffices to form an opening in the end face for inserting the portion into the recess).

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to this, the protrusion is formed on the guide wall A251. May be connected.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where two ridges (first ridge A211 and second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of such formations is not limited to this. The number may be one or three or more. When forming a plurality of lines, the connection position between one end of them and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other ridges at positions where the phases of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are different from each other by about 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

  The cross-sectional shapes of the first and second ridges A211 and A212 and other ridges, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side)) ) And width dimensions (dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the height direction of the cross-section vanishing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a shape obtained by combining these. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height dimension of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (the standing dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210) is along the extending direction thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be changed along the extending direction.

  The height dimension may be gradually reduced as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 is increased. In this case, it is possible to efficiently increase the rigidity of the covering portion A270 while reducing the material cost.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotation angle of the key A140 (the phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) is set to 90 ° has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and other rotation angles (positions). Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 ° or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

  In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end face wall portion A272) is a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferable that it is formed only in (a region necessary for allowing the displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about θ for allowing the displacement of the other side (the side opposite to the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of about 180 degrees. It is formed into a curved shape.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of rotation (a distance from the center of rotation to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface to be gripped by the finger)) on one side of the center of rotation and the center of rotation. Also, the case where the size of the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side is different has been described, but the size is not limited to this. The radius of rotation on one side and the other side (from the rotation center to the end face The distances to the narrow surface) along the outer edge of the surface may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another front view shape. good. Other front view shapes include, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape of five or more pentagons, and a combination thereof.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a form in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is along the directions of arrows U and D).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part (three sides in the above-described embodiments) of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 is a connection wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion). A240) has been described, and the case where the remaining part of the outer edge (one side in each of the above-described embodiments) is not surrounded (opened) has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The entire outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall portion.

  That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 matches a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. Although the operation wall A210 is arranged (formed), the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200 do not match the outer edges of the operation wall A210.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (almost one row) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other arrangements are also possible. Examples of other arrangements include a zigzag arrangement, an arrangement dispersed in positions having no regularity, and a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Further, in the case of arranging them in a substantially series (substantially one row), the series direction may be a layout which is not parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (box covers A200, A3200), or a substantially orthogonal arrangement. May be

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are not limited thereto. One or a plurality of protrusions or ridges (ribs) may be provided upright from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of.

  In this case, the ridge (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is an end face wall when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). It is preferable that the portions A272 and A2272 are radially extended from the center (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) outward in the radial direction. In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of such ribs are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Thus, when the key A140 is pulled out, even if the key A140 engages with the edge portions of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the pulling direction of the key A140 (direction of arrow F), This is because the rigidity of the ridges (ribs) can be used to suppress damage to the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape in a front view that is continuous in the circumferential direction.
A plurality of such ridges (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, with a predetermined spacing in the radial direction). Note that it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is set back from the height position of the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119. Although the case where they are located on the separated side) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

  Further, the amount of retreat of each standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290 from the reference plane. Further, the amount of retreat of one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290 may be changed.

  In this case, it is preferable to reduce the amount of retreat of the standing tip end surface from the reference surface as the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The printed circuit board A119 is spaced apart from the abutting standing wall when the standing wall is abutted, because the region farther from the fastening hole A206a is less regulated by the screw ASC than the closer region. It becomes easier to deform (displace) in the direction in which the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened, and by reducing the amount of retreat from the reference surface of the standing tip end surface to a standing wall farther from the fastening hole A206a, This is because it is possible to easily secure close contact between the standing tip end surface of the standing wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 on all the standing walls.

  For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the standing tip end surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the standing wall A280, the standing wall A290, and the standing wall A208 are the fastening holes A206a ( Since the distance from the standing wall A209 becomes long, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above is reduced according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a in this order (that is, the standing tip surface of the standing wall A208). It is preferable to minimize the amount of receding from the reference surface.

  Further, in each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, the amount of retreat from the reference plane may be changed as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the standing tip surfaces of one standing wall A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined surfaces with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display device in the setting change mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of this. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device.
As other display devices, for example, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, etc. are exemplified.

  Further, the set value may not be displayed on either the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

  In this case, when the setting change mode is started, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, a first value) regardless of the set value before the start, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. The operator may recognize the set value based on the number of times. By illegal means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 by the hidden camera installed in the hall), it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of the set value. Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the set value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

  Although not described in each of the above-described embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the center of rotation) is provided, and When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 has a predetermined angle or more. When opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, setting change may be prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . This is because it is possible to suppress unauthorized setting changes.

  Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position with the rotation axis A410 as the center of rotation) is provided, and the board box A100 for the inner frame 12 is provided. , A2100, A3100, A4100 is detected by the second detection sensor to be opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). If the opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. It may be configured to be allowed. This is because it is possible to suppress unauthorized setting changes.

  Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 are predetermined with respect to the inner frame 12. The setting change described above may be allowed when the opening (rotation) of an angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include, for example, a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch that displaces a mechanical detection unit with opening and closing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. The case has been described in which the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not always the case. However, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the state of connection of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected). , The connection and the disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted.
In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display device of the main controller A110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. The case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is allowed (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless the predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) has been described. However, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not released from the main control unit A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if they are connected, they may be released. Also, even if the connection and the disconnection are mixed, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, a predetermined electrical connection line is the main control device). When connected to the A110 may be configured to set change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being illegally operated and the game balls being paid out.

In the eighth embodiment described above, as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, the case where the protruding strip A2273 is extended in a streak shape has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to. For example, the plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side with a predetermined interval between the positions AP1 to AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.
Alternatively, the ridge A2273 may be formed intermittently between the positions AP1 to AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.

  The range in which the protrusion A2273 or the plurality of protrusions is formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . This range may be the entire area of the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center, so that the second position (the position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. Although the case of arranging in (b) is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

  As another displacement mode, for example, the substrate box is disposed so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L and R directions) of the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced to the side opposite to the hinge 18 (arrow L direction). By doing so, the form in which the board box is arranged at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-back direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis An example is a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 as the center of rotation.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotary shaft A4410 is formed on each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one or both rotary shafts A4410 are It may be formed on the box covers A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, a divided body of the rotating shaft A4410 is formed in each of the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300, and one rotating shaft is formed from each divided body with the box covers A200, A3200 connected to the box base A300. A4410 may be formed.

  Note that the same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the box covers A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, in the state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each.

<First control example>
Next, various control contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 225. In addition, in the first control example, a part of the configuration is changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments to describe the control example, and a configuration similar to each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. The description is omitted. In addition, in the configuration used in this control example, there are some configurations in which different reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the above-mentioned respective embodiments, but this is for explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific content of the configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player is changed. Are different, and otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted, and the differences from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the points omitted in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 124, in the first control example, a first frame button 22za and a second frame button 22zb are added to the front view (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb, like the frame button 22 described above, play a role as operation means that can be operated by the player. In the first control example, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the player is configured to be able to arbitrarily select a performance mode with respect to various performances executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the first control described above. It differs from the embodiment in that the number of operating means that can be operated by the player is increased from one to three.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the frame buttons 22 are arranged on a substantially horizontal surface of the upper plate 17, whereas the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are substantially vertical surfaces of the upper plate 17. It is configured to be disposed in. Further, the frame button 22 is arranged at a position separated from the operation handle 51 (a position separated from the operation handle 51 leftward by 300 mm) in the width direction in the viewpoint of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front (the viewpoint of FIG. 124). The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at a position not separated from the frame button 22 (a position separated from the operation handle 51 to the left by 100 to 150 mm). There is.

  That is, when the player operates the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the frame button 22 is configured to be easier to operate with the left hand than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the operation button 22 arranged on the horizontal plane can be operated by moving the left hand in the direction of gravity, it can be operated by the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb arranged on the vertical plane. Is also configured to be easy to operate.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, it is possible to execute an effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the player can operate the operation means a plurality of times within one effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. are doing. In this case, by using the frame button 22 as the operation means to be operated by the player in the continuous hit effect, the player can easily participate in the continuous hit effect.

  Further, during the execution of the above-described continuous hit effect, an operation for ending the ongoing continuous hit effect is configured to be executable, and specifically, an operation means (frame button 22) operated in the continuous hit effect. By operating the operation means (the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) arranged at the separated positions, it is possible to end the continuous hitting effect on the way. With such a configuration, a player who is enthusiastically participating in the continuous hit effect, that is, a player who operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times, erroneously ends the continuous hit effect (operation means). It is possible to suppress the operation of the 1-frame button 22za or the second-frame button 22zb). In addition, the frame button 22 and the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are different in the moving direction of the left hand at the time of performing the operation, so that it is possible for the player to mistakenly operate the operating means. It can be suppressed more. Further, since the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at positions that are difficult to operate with the left hand than the frame button 22, it is possible to further prevent the player from operating the operating means by mistake. it can.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a front view showing a game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, in the configuration of the game board 13, a detailed description will be given of the control content of the game executed based on the ball shot on the game board 13. Therefore, in FIG. 125, the ball on the game board 13 is shown. Although the configuration necessary for explaining the flow-down contents of is described and the others are simplified, the same configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is actually provided.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 provided on the center of the game board 13 and on the right side of the variable display unit 80. And a right side area, and the player operates the operation handle 51 so that the fired ball has a strength to flow down the left side area (left-handed game) and the fired ball is on the right side. It is configured to be able to execute a game (right-handed game) that has strength to flow down the area.

  Two general ball entrances 63 are provided in the left area, and a first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area can enter. Then, among the balls flowing down the left side area, the balls that have not entered the general entrance 63 and the first entrance 64 flow into the outlet 71 provided at the most downstream part of the game area and are not shown. It is configured to flow down the discharge path and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the right area, there are a through gate 67, a second entrance 640, an open state associated with the second entrance 640 and allowing the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the open state. Also, the electric accessory 640a that can be changed to a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, a specific winning port 65a, and an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning port 65a There is provided a variable winning device 65 that can be changed to a closed state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the open state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, and based on the result of the lottery. Then, the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, an operation in which the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) is executed, so that the player aims at the right side area of the game board 13 , A right-handed game) is performed and a ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player can obtain many prize balls during the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the normal state where the big hit game is not executed, a game is carried out in which the ball is inserted into the first ball inlet 64, and in the big hit game state where the big hit game is executed, it can be changed by a right hitting game. It will aim at the winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the player is playing the game by changing the area where the ball is shot according to the game state.

  Furthermore, the variable winning a prize device 65 whose opening operation is executed during the big hit game is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball entered in the specific winning opening 65a can pass. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, the variable winning a prize device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball entering a ball can pass, and a ball flowing down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Then, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, so that after the jackpot game is finished, the probability state that the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a gaming state advantageous to the player (a high probability of the special symbol) State) is given.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the normal symbol lottery can be executed as a lottery different from the special symbol lottery, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the game board 13, It is structured so that the right of ordinary design lottery can be acquired. Like the special symbols, this ordinary symbol is also configured to be able to set a state in which it is easy to win a hit (high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to win a hit (low probability state), and a big symbol win in the special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game that is executed based on that is completed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be set. .

  Although details will be described later, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a universal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined period is executed. This universal figure per game is configured to be executed with different operation contents depending on the state of the ordinary symbol at the time when the universal symbol per game is executed, and the ordinary symbol per game during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. It is configured such that when the ordinary figure hitting game is executed during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol than when it is executed, the electric figure object 640a has a longer period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. are doing.

  As described above, the state of the special symbol lottery and the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example configured to be able to change the state of the normal symbol lottery are normal states as a gaming state (low probability state of special symbols, low of normal symbols). Probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), three game states can be set In the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the left-handed game is a game rather than the right-handed game. This is a game method that is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the probability variation state is a state in which it is easy to put the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the right-handed game is better than the left-handed game. This is a game method that is advantageous to the player. As described above, by changing the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, the player can play the game while operating the operation handle 51 to change the firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Also, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be settable after the jackpot game is finished, and further, as described above, is configured to allow the player to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game. , In a period in which advantageous states (big hit game state, high probability state of normal symbol) are continuously set for the player, it is possible to make a game (right-handed game) be performed with the same launch intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation handle 51 from being complicated and reduce the player's willingness to play the game.

  Next, the flow of the game when a ball is shot by each game method will be described. When the player executes a left-handed game, about 1/20 of the ball flowing down the left side area enters the general entrance 63 and about 1/20 enters the first entrance 64. It is configured to be a ball, and when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63, a privilege of paying out three balls as a prize ball is given. Further, when the balls enter the first entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and a privilege for obtaining the lottery right of the first special symbol is given. In other words, the advantage that the player enters the ball into the first entrance 64 is more advantageous than the case that the player enters the ball into the general entrance 63.

  That is, when a player executes a left-handed game and shoots 250 balls, the player can get an average of 3.5 prize balls for the 10 balls that have been shot. It is configured such that about 20 balls can be inserted into the first ball inlet 64 before the 250 balls including the prize balls are exhausted. In this way, with a ball entrance (general ball entrance 63) that can acquire only prize balls, and a ball entrance (first ball entrance 64) that can also acquire the right of special symbol lottery in addition to prize balls. By configuring to be able to execute the game aiming at, the special symbol lottery that can be obtained for the specific number of balls while lengthening the period required to exhaust all of the specific number (for example, 250) balls Since the number of rights can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively granted the special symbol lottery right in a short period of time. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the ball flowing down the left side area is configured so as not to be able to enter the second entrance 640, and therefore, it is given when the left-handed game is executed. The privilege to be given is always constant regardless of the game state.

  On the other hand, when the player executes a right-handed game, about ½ of the balls flowing down the right side region pass through the through gate 67 and avoid the ball passing through the through gate 67 or the through gate 67. About 1/2 of the sphere that has flowed down the right side region reaches the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is embedded in the game board 13 in the closed state, and the ball passes through the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and can flow down to the downstream side of the right side region.

  Then, about 1/4 of the ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the right side region (below the electric accessory 640a) enters the general ball entrance 63 provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65, and about 3 / 4 is configured to reach the variable winning device 65. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, but when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, a ball flows down on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 in the closed state, It flows into the outlet 71 as it is. In addition, when a plurality of spheres flowing down the right side region collide with each other and the trajectory of the sphere becomes irregular, a part (about 1/400) of the sphere flowing down the right side region reaches the first entrance 64. It is configured to be able to enter the ball.

  In other words, when a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, about 1/4 of the shot ball enters the general ball entrance 63 (3 prize balls), Since the ball can enter the first entrance 64 very rarely, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game. Becomes

  When the right-handed game is executed when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the game state, the game is executed with a high probability that the open period is longer than the normal state and the right side region flows down. About one half of the throwing ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640. In addition, in the present control example, since it is possible to store up to four ordinary symbol lottery rights, the rate at which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 is about 1/2. Even if it is designed to, you can continue the normal design lottery without interruption.

  When a ball enters the second entrance 640, one award ball is awarded and a privilege for acquiring the right of the second special symbol lottery is also awarded. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, by the right-handed game, the ball is the second ball entrance 640 (win ratio of about 1/2, one prize ball), and the general ball entrance 63. It is possible to enter (winning ratio ¼, 3 prize balls), and it is possible to execute a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) with almost no reduction in balls. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of nails are planted in the right side region, and the ball flowing down the right side region reaches the flow path r1 that can reach the electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a. At least the flow path r2 that cannot be obtained is formed. The sphere that has flowed down the flow path r2 is configured to be easier to enter the general ball entrance 63 than the sphere that has flowed down the flow path r1 and passed through the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, when the ball shot by the right-handed game flows down to the flow path r1 in a biased manner, the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed because the ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. In the case where the balls flow downward in the flow path r2, the balls enter the general entrance 63 which gives more prize balls than when the balls enter the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be easily performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively disadvantageous situation in accordance with the flow-down situation of the ball shot by the right-handed game.

  In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 125, the ball flowing down the left side region is configured so as not to enter the through gate 67, the second entrance 640, or the specific winning opening 65a. However, as long as it is configured so that it is more difficult to enter the ball than the ball flowing down the right side region, for example, it can pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of about 1/100 of the ball flowing down the left side region. Alternatively, the electric accessory 640a may be reached.

  Further, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the variable display unit 80 (above the outlet 71), and the balls flowing down the left side region and the balls flowing down the right side region enter the specific winning port 65a at the same ratio. It may be configured to be able to do so. When configured in this way, the jackpot game can be executed without changing the game method being executed, whether the jackpot is won in the normal state, or the jackpot is won in the time saving state or the probability variation state.

  Next, a case where a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game will be described. In this control example, when a big hit game is executed, a low probability state of a normal symbol is configured to be set. As a result, when the right hitting game is executed during the big hit game, the ball flowing down the right side area enters the second entrance 640 and efficiently enters the ball into the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that cannot be performed. In addition, it is easy to put a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game in which the ball is easy to win to the specific prize hole 65a to which many prize balls (15 prize balls) are given. It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively awarded with a prize ball.

  Therefore, when a right hitting game is played during the big hit game, most of it flows down to the downstream side of the right side region. Although the details will be described later, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be switched between an open state and a closed state by opening / closing the opening / closing door 65f. When the opening / closing door 65f is closed, a flow path through which a ball can flow is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f in the closed state, and the opening / closing door 65f is opened from the upstream side (the right side in FIG. 125). The sphere flows down to the downstream side of 65f (the left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 125). In the present control example, during one jackpot game, the opening / closing door 65f is opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. A round game can be executed a plurality of times, and a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) interval period (a period in which the opening / closing door 65f is closed) is set between round games. There is. The period required for the sphere to flow down the flow path formed on the upper surface of the closed door 65f (for example, 0.8 seconds) is longer than the interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds) described above. It is configured to be. Therefore, even if the player continuously executes the right-handed game during the jackpot game and a ball that reaches the variable winning a prize device 65 occurs during the interval period, the ball flows down on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f. While the game is being played, the next round game is started, so that the ball shot during the jackpot game can be put into the specific winning opening 65a without waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that most of the balls that have reached the variable winning a prize device 65 among the balls shot by the right hitting game during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning port 65a, Among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the total number of award balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game will vary depending on the number of balls that enter the general ball entrance 63. Therefore, it is possible to let the player pay attention to what kind of flow path the ball shot by the right hitting game flows down during the big hit game.

  When the jackpot game is over, the above-described probability variation state is set when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, while the variable winning device 65 is activated during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3, the time saving state is set.

  Here, in the probability variation state in the present control example, the probability of the special symbol lottery being a big hit as described above is high, and the ordinary symbol for which the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 67 is a lottery. The probability is also set to be high. Furthermore, the time (hereinafter, referred to as variable time) until the result of the lottery for the special symbol and the normal symbol is fixed is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the special symbol lottery is 200 times in succession after the jackpot game is over, until a lottery result other than the jackpot is obtained, and the special symbol lottery is 200 It is set to shift from the probability changing state to the normal gaming state after the jackpot has been hit other than the jackpot in succession. By thus limiting the period during which the probability variation state that is advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to motivate the player to play a jackpot and improve the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that you can do it. The period in which the probability variation state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. You may perform the transfer lottery which transfers a probability change state to a normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period which a probability change state continues by time.

  Further, in the probability variation state of the present control example, the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 640a that is driven to open when the winning symbol is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to have an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set in the probability changing state is larger than that in the normal state when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible becomes long.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes the right-handed game in the probability variation state, and the game can be efficiently executed by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. Is configured. Therefore, the right hitting game may be continuously executed during the period from the start of the big hit game to the end of the probability variation state, and the player can be provided with easy-to-understand game playability.

  On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot is the same low probability state as the normal state, but the lottery can be performed by passing through the through gate 67. The lottery probability that the ordinary symbol to be executed is a hit is set to be high similarly to the probability changing state. Further, the time (hereinafter, referred to as variable time) until the special symbols and the result of the ordinary symbols are determined is set to be shorter than that in the normal state. In addition, the time saving state in this control example is set to continue until the result of the special symbol lottery is 100 times in succession after the jackpot game, until the lottery result other than the jackpot is reached, and the special symbol lottery is 100. It is set to shift from the short-time state to the normal state after the jackpot has been excluding a big hit in succession. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the time saving state that is advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to motivate the player to play a jackpot and improve the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that you can do it. In addition, about the period in which the time saving state continues, it may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next big hit is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A transition lottery for shifting the time saving state to the normal state may be performed. Moreover, you may set the period which a time saving state continues by time. Further, the period (time saving frequency) in which the time saving state is set may be different depending on the type of the jackpot game that triggers the time saving state being set.

  Furthermore, in the time saving state of the present control example, the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 640a that is driven to open when the winning is won in the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the normal game state. It is set to have an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the time saving state is larger than that of the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball is possible becomes long.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes the right-handed game in the time saving state, and the game can be efficiently executed by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. Is configured. Therefore, the right hitting game may be continuously executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the time saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game playability.

<Regarding the variable winning device in the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 126, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, and the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. There is provided an LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover. A switching member 65h that projects the flow path formed by the body 65g and switches the flow path of the game sphere, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a flow path solenoid 65k covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back surface side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for

  FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. 127 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 127 (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 127 (b), the variable winning a prize device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 127 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 128 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 127 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second ball entrance 640 side. Is configured. Therefore, even during the time saving state (including the probability change state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being executed, and the left-handed game is immediately executed after the jackpot game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  127 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 127 (b). As shown in FIG. 127 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 128, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described below will be described.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game sphere guided from the detection opening 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. To be done.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the game state after the big hit game is a sure change state (special symbol). High probability state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a specific area for giving (setting) the probability variation state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the state of the special symbol into a high-probability state (probability change state) or a low-probability state (time saving state) after the jackpot game is over.

  In this way, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished can be changed by the flow-down route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the jackpot game. it can. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the big hit A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round. In addition, when the big hit B and the big hit C are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot A, it cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 ( It is difficult to pass). Therefore, it is possible to control the ratio of giving the probability changing state depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent an excessive disadvantage from occurring.

  In the present control example, by changing the switching control content of the switching member 65h according to the jackpot type, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 (probability variation jackpot game) and a ball rather than the probability variation jackpot game. Is configured to be able to set a big hit game (normal big hit game) that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, but is not limited to this, and for example, the switching control content of the switching member 65h is the same regardless of the big hit type. By setting and controlling the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot game to be different, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot game that is easy to make a ball (probable variation jackpot game) and a jackpot game that is difficult to make a ball (normal jackpot game) In this case, for example, the length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game (round game of the first round) and the interval period By varying the length of, it is preferable to configure the probability variation big hit game and the normal big hit game described above.

  With reference to FIG. 128 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 128B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

  The game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball won before the fifth round is won and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the big hit A is won in the fifth round.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, 15 balls for one ball is won). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. In the variable display device unit 80 provided in the substantially central portion of the game board 13, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 by projecting to the front side of the game board 13, and prevents the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the third symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the identification information (first symbol) showing the result of the special symbol lottery. Is a display means. The display content of the variable display of the third symbol is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152). As a result, since the player can visually recognize the third symbol that is variably displayed in various variably display modes, the period until the special symbol lottery result is displayed (variable display period of the special symbol) elapses. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  Further, in this control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set the variation time of different length as the variation time of the first symbol. Specifically, in the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is configured such that the variable time of a longer time is more easily set than when the result is a big hit. Then, the variation time of the third symbol which is display-controlled by the display control device 114 is synchronized with the variation time of the first symbol, so that the longer the third symbol is variably displayed, the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit. You can increase the possibility that you are doing.

  Therefore, the display control device 114 serves as a third symbol variation that is variably displayed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81, to fuel the length of the variation time of the third symbol variation that is being executed. The variable display mode, that is, the variable display mode showing whether or not the third symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand the variation time of the third symbol variation, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the variation display of the third symbol with a longer variation time. it can.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be briefly described. In this control example, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of third symbols, and three symbol rows, left, middle and right, are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Each symbol row is formed by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (variation). Is displayed). Then, each of the variably displayed symbol rows is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order (for example, left, right, and middle order), and at a time when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, the player can visually recognize a predetermined number. It is configured to notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery by the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed at the position (effective line).

  Specifically, when a third symbol of the same type as the third symbol in each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line, that is, "7.7.7" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When stopped and displayed, it is configured to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

  Further, in a state in which at least one symbol column is variably displayed, a state in which other symbol columns are stopped and displayed in a combination that may indicate a big hit, specifically, a left symbol column and a right symbol column are The state is stopped and displayed at "7", and the state where the middle symbol row is being variably displayed, that is, the state where the third symbol can be stopped and displayed in the combination showing the big hit is the "reach state", and the player It is configured to execute a production with an increased expectation of winning the jackpot.

  In this way, by varying the degree of expectation of jackpot winning depending on the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be executed, the contents of the variation aspect of the third symbol variation to be executed can be made interesting, and the game is It is possible to suppress monotony. In the above-mentioned example, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed at "7", and the middle symbol column is in a variable display state, that is, the third symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a big hit. When the state that can be displayed is "reach state", it is possible to suggest to the player that it is highly possible that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the third symbol variation that is being executed. It may be set to "reach state", for example, once the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned "reach state", all the symbol rows are not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row. The state that is variably displayed again may be set as the "reach state", or even if the third symbol is not stopped and displayed as a part of the combination for winning the jackpot, it is shown to the player that the jackpot expectation is high. Display mode that is predetermined for If it may be cases where the third symbol is stop-displayed in the "Reach Development" and displayed display mode) "reach state".

  In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 152) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the first symbol display device is displayed. The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In place of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be used to stop and display the third symbol. The device 81 may be configured.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 129. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 129 (b) is the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the display content typically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by the display contents being controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152), for example, three left, middle and right. The symbol row is displayed. By thus configuring the third symbol display device 81 with a liquid crystal display, various effects can be easily executed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The lower one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The third symbol (identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is each of 10 types of main symbols simulating the numbers "0" to "9". It is configured. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 152) is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (stopped display) variable display (for example, final "7/7/7" is displayed as a variable display), and the jackpot game is executed after the variable display ends. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery by the main controller 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 are displayed for each of the left, the center and the right. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom of the symbol columns L1 to L3 for variable display.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line Z1. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line Z1 with a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the first control example), a jackpot moving image showing jackpot winning is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the third symbol in the symbol row, The number of the third symbols forming each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the third symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character and a number are combined may be configured as the third symbol. . Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be varied, and for example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. By reducing or moving the variable display area to a position where the player cannot easily see it (for example, a corner of the display screen), it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changing. You may do it. Further, during the period when the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree at which the player is difficult to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the changing type of the special symbol.

  In addition, in the first control example, among the plurality of symbol rows, the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol row L2 that is finally stopped and displayed. . The specific symbol is configured in a display mode with identification information (for example, “development”) that is not used for a combination indicating a big win, and the specific symbol is stopped on the activated line Z1. By displaying, the special symbol lottery result can be informed that it is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more). Then, the variable display of each symbol row is configured to be notified again.

  With such a configuration, for example, even when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination other than the combination indicating the big hit in the previously stopped and displayed symbol rows L1 and L3, the special symbol lottery being executed is performed. Since the player can continue to have the expectation of jackpot winning until the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In this control example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the left symbol row L1 and the third symbol showing the same number in the right symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed, the middle symbol row L2 that is changing is identified. It is configured such that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a portion (for example, a portion between the numbers “0” and “9”). Thereby, since the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the variable display of the third symbol has passed the predetermined period, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variable effect.

  The conditions for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-mentioned conditions, for example, the numbers shown by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or the player may operate the operating means while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, it may be a condition that is satisfied based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the variation effect in which the specific symbol is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the variation display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance when the variation effect is set (when the variation is started).

  Further, when displaying the specific symbol, a method other than the method of interrupting the preset symbol sequence and displaying it may be used, for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol sequence. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols that indicates the special jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. If the state is done, that is, if it is a reach state, it may be configured to display the specific symbol by replacing it with the third symbol that is set before and after the specific third symbol. As a result, even if any of a plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is shown, so that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuating effect while having an expectation. .

  In this control example, two types of “big hit” and “out” can be set as the special symbol lottery result, and when a big hit is won, one big hit type is set out of a plurality of big hit types. Configured to be different, and by changing the game content of the jackpot game according to the set jackpot type, the probability variation jackpot game that the ball easily passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and the ball during the jackpot game. A normal jackpot game that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, and is configured to be executable. Then, by the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery result is notified, and the jackpot type to be set is suggested (notified) to the player. .

  Specifically, if the special symbol lottery result is set to the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", the main symbols of odd numbers "3, 7" Among them, a variable display in which any one of them is stopped and displayed in line is displayed. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display in which any of the even-numbered "4, 6, 8" of the main symbols "0-9" are aligned at the same time is performed. Further, in order to inform the player only that the jackpot is won and it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type to be set, one of the jackpot types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B” and “jackpot C” is set. Even in the case, the variable display in which any one of "1, 2, 5, 9, 0" is aligned at the same time is displayed.

  In this control example, one symbol row is configured to be formed by the above-mentioned ten main symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a symbol that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. You may provide a sub-pattern (for example, the display mode of an asterisk). Then, depending on the combination of the main symbol and the sub symbol that are stopped and displayed, it may be configured to notify the player of information other than the lottery result of the special symbol, for example, a combination of the main symbol indicating the jackpot winning. When a main symbol or a sub symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination other than the above (first stop display mode), a lottery right that can be won as a jackpot is included in the lottery right of the special symbol that is held and stored If the main symbol or the sub symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is predetermined. It may be configured to suggest that the period is longer than the period. With such a configuration, the result of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 gives the player information other than the result of the special symbol lottery being executed (the result of the judgment). Since it can be provided, in the pachinko machine 10 where the jackpot probability is set to be lower than the miss probability, only the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is missed is continuously notified, and the game motivation is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 129 (a), the description will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds, the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved symbols) of the special symbols that are reserved and stored is displayed. In this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights can be reserved and stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the stored order or the order used in the special symbol lottery It is configured so that the corresponding pending symbols are displayed. Further, it is also configured to display a comment that describes the effect contents of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm and that describes the effect result.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured so that it is easy to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) during the probability change state or the time saving state. That is, in a normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the probability variation state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the type of the hold symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be switched according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, the first special symbol is held Identification information (special figure 1 reserved symbols) indicating the number of memories (special figure 1 reserved spheres) is displayed, and if the probability change state and time saving state are set, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure) It is configured such that identification information (special figure 2 reserved symbol) indicating 2 reserved balls) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many reserve balls have been acquired corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is mainly executed in the current game state.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b). As shown in FIG. 129 (a), in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, a first display is provided in which a guide display mode for guiding the player a game method corresponding to the set game state is displayed. A region Dm1 is formed. As described above, in this control example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the left-handed game is more likely to be played by the player than the right-handed game. Advantageous, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, or the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set If there is, the right-handed game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game. Further, even during the big hit game, the right-handed game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

  In this way, in the case of having a game property in which the game method that is advantageous to the player can be changed according to the game situation (the set game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot game), the player can be changed by changing the game method. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage, but the player cannot grasp the advantageous playing method in the current situation, and the player is caused to perform the game with the unfavorable playing method. As a result, there was a problem that the willingness to play was reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the first display area Dm1 (see FIG. 129 (a)), a guidance display for guiding a game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) that is advantageous to the player at present. The mode is configured to be displayable. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in an easy-to-understand manner. In this control example, the guide display mode is hidden for the game method (left-handed game) that is advantageous in the normal state set when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, when a game situation in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, a guidance display mode (for example, a "right-handed" display mode) is displayed in the first display area Dm1 that was not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the advantageous game method has been switched.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a preliminary guidance notification mode that notifies the player in advance that the advantageous playing method will be switched before the advantageous playing method is switched to the player Is configured to be configurable. As a result, it is possible for the player to know that fact before the game method is actually switched, so that it is possible to facilitate execution of a suitable game immediately after the game method is switched.

  In this way, the notification mode (guidance display mode) for notifying the player of the game method that is advantageous to the player and the advance guidance notification for notifying beforehand that the game method that is advantageous to the player will be switched. By making it possible to display the mode and, it is possible to provide a game that does not give stress to the player.

  In this control example, when the period in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, the guide display mode is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed game is more suitable. In a state that is more advantageous than a right-handed game (for example, in a normal state), a "left-handed" display mode may be displayed as a guidance display mode.

  Further, as a mode of guiding the display content of the guidance display mode to the player, a first mode and a second mode of emphasizing and guiding the player rather than the first mode may be settable. For example, it may be configured such that an emphasized guidance display mode in which the guidance display mode displayed in the first display area Dm1 is enlarged is displayed for 2 seconds after the game method that is advantageous to the player is switched. Further, detection means for detecting the game method being executed by the player (for example, detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the left side area, and detection means capable of detecting that the ball has flowed down the right side area). Based on the detection result of the detection means, the game is not executed by the advantageous game method even if a predetermined period elapses after the game method advantageous to the player is switched, or the disadvantage game method When it is determined that the game is being executed, the above-described second mode may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to more surely cause the player to play the game with a game method that is advantageous.

  In addition, when it is determined that the game is played by a game method that is advantageous to the player in the state where the guide display in the above-described second mode is being executed, the guide display from the second mode to the first mode It is preferable that the display contents of the mode be switched. As a result, the game method is excessively guided to the player who is executing the game by the proper game method, and the effect of various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is achieved. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  In the example described above, as the guide mode for guiding the game method to the player, only the guide display mode using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, In accordance with the display timing of the guidance display mode, the voice output device 226 outputs a "right-handed" voice as a guidance voice for guiding the game method, or a lamp display device 227 is provided on the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the plurality of light emitting means may be sequentially turned on or off to perform light emission control for guiding the game method. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the game method has been switched, or the game method to be executed, even with a sense (audibility, etc.) other than visual sense.

  Further, the above-described first display area Dm1 is configured such that the display position is difficult to change with respect to the other display areas. With such a configuration, regardless of the game situation, the game method of the game to be executed is grasped only by confirming the specific portion (for example, the upper left side) of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Next, in the right front view in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol that is interlocked with the variable display of the first special symbol or the fourth symbol that is interlocked with the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed. The second display area Dm2 is formed. Like the above-mentioned third symbol, this fourth symbol is a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result of each special symbol lottery, and is configured so as to be less conspicuous than the above-mentioned third symbol. . When the special symbol lottery is executed, the fourth symbol is configured to be variably displayed in the second display area Dm2. With such a configuration, in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol variation, whether or not the special symbol lottery is being executed even when the effect using the entire main display area Dm is executed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with movable means (performance effect) that is movable so as to cover at least a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, as in the above-described embodiments. However, the above-mentioned second display area Dm2 is formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at a position that does not overlap with the movable range of any movable means (difficult to do). Therefore, even when the movable means is moved during the change of the third symbol, the player can be easily notified of the change display mode of the fourth symbol.

  Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 129 (b), the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are shown in such a size that the player can visually recognize them. It is formed in a difficult size. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, when a production using the entire display screen is executed as the variation production of the third symbol, or a movable movable accessory for production provided in the vicinity of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a falling accessory 700 or a rotating accessory). 840 (see FIG. 7)) is movable, and the size of the display areas of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 is reduced, corresponding to the case where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered, The display position may be changed or may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful production without a feeling of strangeness.

  Furthermore, in place of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the fourth symbol that is dynamically displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol outside the third symbol display device 81. You may comprise so that a design may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbols corresponding to the respective symbols at the same locations as the decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to execute the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of each symbol which is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding effect contents in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 145, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be specifically described. First, with reference to FIG. 130 to FIG. 132, the content of the operation effect that causes the player to operate a plurality of operation means (frame buttons 22) will be described.

  Conventionally, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and the effect mode is gradually changed according to the number of operations on the operation means during a predetermined period during which a specific effect is executed. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect). In such a continuous hit production, the production mode is generally configured to be changed stepwise, and when the production mode is changed to a specific production mode, the production mode is changed to a case where the production mode is not changed to the specific production mode. Also, it is configured so as to obtain a production result that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine capable of executing such a continuous hit effect, the player can motivate the player because the effect mode of the effect to be executed can be changed by the player positively operating the operation means. You can participate in the game. However, the effect mode set in the continuous hit effect is set in advance according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so, for example, when the player is missed in the special symbol lottery, the operation means is operated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Even if is operated, the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is not set. Also, when the production content is set so that the expectation that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is higher as the production mode is changed during the continuous striking, the special symbol lottery is missed. It is necessary to execute the continuous hit effect that is difficult to change in the effect mode in the continuous hit effect executed at that time.

  In this case, even if the player operates the operation means a plurality of times within a predetermined period in which the continuous hit effect is executed, a period in which the effect mode is not changed continues and the motivation to operate the operation means decreases. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in this control example, in the case where all the effect modes set in the continuous stroke effect, that is, the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation on the operation means, the subsequent operation means are changed. According to the operation content of, the continuous hit effect can be ended without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period in which the continuous hit effect is executed. With such a configuration, the player is allowed to perform a continuous hitting effect in which the effect mode is not changed for a long time, and the player's willingness to play, and thus the willingness to operate the operating means, is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Next, the effect contents of the continuous hit effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be specifically described. FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a start screen for continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in this control example, as a continuous hit effect, an effect in which the main character 801 fights a plurality of enemy characters 802 is executed, and the number of enemy characters 802 is changed according to the operation on the frame button 22. It is configured so that the production that reduces the

  First, when the continuous hit effect is executed, “100” is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode indicating the number of the enemy characters 802, and the display area HR2 prompts the user to operate the frame button 22. A button 803, which is a display mode, and a time gauge 804 for indicating a period of continuous hit effect (a period in which an operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined) are displayed. More specifically, the button 803 is an operation mode (indicated by a down arrow in the figure) indicating a pressing operation as an animation that prompts the player to press the frame button 22, and the button 803 is in a normal state (non-operation state). It is displayed as an animation having an operation mode in which the pressed state (operation state) is repeated.

  Here, the enemy character 802 is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), a strong enemy character 802a with a horned head and a normal enemy character 802b are displayed. ing. In the present control example, the privilege (the result of the special symbol lottery, the type of variable effect executed after the end of continuous hit effect) given according to the remaining number of enemy characters displayed in the display area HR1 is advantageous to the player. It is configured such that it can be suggested whether or not it is a thing, and as the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 displayed in the display area HR1 is smaller, it is configured such that the advantageous privilege is more likely to be given to the player. Furthermore, when the remaining numbers displayed in the display area HR1 are the same, it is possible to suggest the advantage degree of the privilege given to the player, also by the type of the enemy character 802 displayed corresponding to the remaining numbers. I am configuring.

  Specifically, it is configured such that defeating the strong enemy character 802a is more likely to give advantageous advantages to the player than when the strong enemy character 802a remains. With such a configuration, the player sees the continuous stroke effect while expecting to reduce the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 in the continuous stroke effect and further expecting that the specific enemy character 802 is defeated. , The production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the character 801 is equipped with a sword 801k as a weapon for defeating the enemy character 802, and by swinging the sword 801k, an effect of reducing the remaining number of the enemy character 802 is executed. The display mode of the sword 801k is configured to change as the variable mode of the continuous hit effect approaches the upper limit value (maximum variable value). Specifically, it is configured so that the player can recognize that the sharpness of the sword 801k is gradually falling. In other words, the sword 801k is a suggestion means that enables the player to predict how many enemy characters 802 can be reduced at the maximum in the present repeated hit effect.

  With such a configuration, when a specific number (for example, 10) of enemy characters 802 are displayed in the middle of the repeated hit effect, the remaining number of enemy characters 802 can be determined by looking at the display mode of the sword 801k. It becomes possible to predict whether or not can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the effect result of the continuous hit effect and enhance the effect.

  The display form of the time gauge 804 is variable according to the elapsed time of the continuous hit effect, and the remaining time area 804b indicating the remaining period of the continuous hit effect is variable from the left end of the time gauge 804. Is displayed. Then, as the remaining time area 804b decreases, the elapsed time area 804a is increased and displayed on the time gauge 804. With this configuration, the player can view the elapsed time (the display mode of the elapsed time area 804a) and the remaining time (the display mode of the remaining time area 804b) in the entire period of the continuous hit effect. Can be grasped at. In addition, in this control example, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is not displayed as a numerical value. That is, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is set for the player based on the elapsed time from the execution of the continuous hit effect and the variable status of the display mode of the time gauge 804 displayed in the display area HR2. It is structured so that it can be grasped by experience.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the length of the period set as the repeated hit effect. Further, even when different lengths of time are set as the period in which the continuous striking effect is executed, it is only necessary to change the variable mode of the time gauge 804, and the processing related to display control can be simplified. In this control example, the player visually recognizes the display ratio of the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b as the display mode of the time gauge 804 so as to grasp the effect period of the continuous hit effect. However, in addition to this, for example, as information indicating a ratio with respect to the display area of the time gauge 804, for example, a value of “100” at the left end of the time gauge 804 and “50” at the center of the time gauge 804. , And a value of “0” may be displayed at the right end of the time gauge 804. Thereby, the display ratio of the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b in the time gauge 804 can be easily informed to the player.

  In this control example, the remaining time area 804b is variably displayed at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time area 804b is large, that is, the left end side of the time gauge 804. When the remaining time area 804b is displayed up to when the remaining time area 804b is smaller, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the right end side of the time gauge 804, the remaining time per unit time is longer. The reduction degree of the region 804b may be increased. As a result, as the remaining time of the continuous hit effect decreases, the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b can be delayed, so that the continuous hit effect can be executed without giving up to the end.

  Further, for example, when the remaining time area 804b is large, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is displayed up to the left end side of the time gauge 804, when the remaining time area 804b is small, that is, the right end side of the time gauge 804. The remaining time area 804b may be configured so that the degree of decrease per unit time is smaller than that when the remaining time area 804b is displayed. The length of the period until the end may be set in advance, and the remaining time area 804b may not be displayed at the timing when the period has elapsed, and the decrease degree of the remaining time area 804b may be accelerated or delayed. You may perform display control like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period in which the continuous hit effect is set, and thus to immediately operate the frame button 22 (operating means) immediately after the continuous hit effect is executed. be able to.

  The description will be continued by returning to FIG. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment “defeat an enemy with continuous button hits” is displayed as a display mode indicating that the continuous hit effect has been started. As a result, the player can easily be notified of the execution of the continuous hit effect and the operation content to be executed during the continuous hit effect, so that the player can easily participate in the continuous hit effect.

  Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, a display screen as shown in FIG. 130 (b) is displayed. FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed after the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130 (b), when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times during the continuous hit effect, the number of enemy characters 802 decreases according to the number of operations, and the preset value (maximum The effect that the number of the enemy characters 802 is reduced to the variable value) is executed. In FIG. 130 (b), a continuous hit effect in which "3" is set as the maximum variable value is shown, and the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is three on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the enemy character 802 indicating “” and the characters “remaining 3” indicating the number of remaining enemy characters 802 are displayed in the display area HR1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), since the display mode of the enemy character 802 has reached the upper limit value (maximum variable value), the sword is suggested to indicate that the display mode will not change any more. As a display mode of 801k, a display mode in which the blade is tattered is displayed.

  Even if the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value, the player is not notified immediately after that that the maximum variable value has been reached, and the display area HR2 indicates The display of the time gauge 804 showing the effect period of the continuous hit effect and the display of the button 803 are continuously displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player, who is performing the continuous hit effect, play the game while expecting that the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is more variable.

  The variable degree of the effect mode of the continuous hit effect in this control example is configured such that the maximum variable value tends to be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the smaller the maximum variable value is (the display area HR1 is displayed. The smaller the number of remaining enemy characters 802 to be played), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

  Then, the display result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in different display modes according to the number of the enemy characters 802 at the time of ending the continuous hit effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), when the number of enemy characters 802 (the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the repeated hit production is "0", the special symbol lottery for this time In the sub-display area Ds, the character “Large chance” indicating that the result of “is highly likely to be a big hit” is displayed (see FIG. 131 (a)). Although the possibility is lower than ", the character of" chance "that the result of the special symbol lottery remains a big hit is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131 (b)), and" 10-89 ". In the case of “,” “??????” is displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to enthusiastically perform the game in order to further reduce the number of the enemy characters 802 during the continuous hit effect.

  Further, when the number of enemy characters 802 (the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the repeated hit production is "90 to 100", it means that the player is not actively participating in the repeated hit production. Therefore, as the effect result of the continuous striking effect, not the special symbol lottery result, but the character “more consecutive striking !!” that prompts participation in the continuous striking effect is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a result, the player who forgets to operate the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect or who cannot understand the operation can be informed again of the content of the game to be executed during the continuous hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the frame button 22 when the continuous hit effect is executed next.

  In addition, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the end condition of the continuous hit effect is satisfied, and the continuous hit effect is generated. It is configured such that the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed before the effect period of is ended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), when the end condition is satisfied in the state where the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3), the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804 remains. At, the same effect result as the effect result of the continuous hit effect executed when the remaining number of enemy characters 802 is “3” (see FIG. 131 (b)) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. To be done.

  With this configuration, the maximum variable value of the continuous hit effect that is being executed this time can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the effect period of the continuous hit effect ends. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed before the effect period of the continuous hit effect has elapsed, the remaining effect period (remaining period of the time gauge 804). The effect different from the continuous hit effect is executed according to the operation on the frame button 22 until () is passed. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 even when the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed early.

  Further, in this control example, in a part of the case where the ending condition is satisfied in the state where the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3), as a special effect result, as shown in FIG. 132 (b). The performance is executed. FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the special effect result is set as the effect result of the continuous hit effect.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows the above-described maximum when the end condition is satisfied in the state where the effect mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value (3) as the effect result of the continuous hit effect (see FIG. 130 (b)). The special effect result in which the chase effect in which the variable value (3) is further changed is executed, the number of the enemy characters 802 is reduced to 0, and the character “great chance” is displayed in the sub display area Ds is shown. In the display area Dm, the character “Chase after occurrence” is displayed, and an animation in which the character 801 makes an additional attack on the enemy character 802 and defeats the remaining enemy characters 802 is displayed. Then, the characters "remaining 0" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the button 803 is hidden in the display area HR2, and the player is informed that the effect mode will not change even if the frame button 22 is pressed further, and the timing at which the chase effect is executed is notified to the player. A time gauge 804 is displayed to notify the user.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to display the effect result of the continuous hit effect before the effect period of the continuous hit effect has passed, that is, the pachinko machine having an end condition other than the elapsed time as the end condition of the continuous hit effect. In the machine 10, by making it possible to display an effect result which is different from usual in a part of the case where the end condition is satisfied, the player is motivated to end the continuous hit effect under various end conditions. Can participate in.

  In addition, in the present control example, as described above, as a condition for ending the continuous hit effect, the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (8 times) after the effect form of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value, in addition to the elapse of the effect period. It has an end condition (shortened end condition) that is satisfied when the above condition is satisfied, and the special effect result is displayed in a part of the case where this shortened end condition is satisfied. As a result, in the case where the continuous hit effect is executed, the special effect result is more easily executed by the player who enthusiastically operates the frame button 22 than by the player who enthusiastically does not operate the frame button 22. be able to.

  In this control example, the shortening end condition is established according to the number of times the player has operated the frame button 22, but the frame button 22 is more effective when the player operates the frame button 22. It may be configured such that the shortening end condition is more easily satisfied than when the button is not operated. For example, after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value, a predetermined operation is performed every time the frame button 22 is operated. The lottery may be executed, and when the lottery is won, the shortening end condition may be satisfied. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player to more easily operate the frame button 22 than when the player does not operate much. In addition, in this case, the shortening end condition is satisfied immediately after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value (after the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value and then the first operation on the frame button 22). Therefore, it is possible to satisfy the shortening end condition without causing the player to predict the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect being executed.

  In addition, in the above-described control example, the end condition can be satisfied after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the effect of the continuous hit effect. When the mode can be changed to three or more effect modes, it is configured such that the end condition of the continuous effect can be satisfied before the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. May be. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the first effect mode (first effect mode) in the continuous hit effect is being executed, it is possible to change to the next effect mode with a probability of about 1/2. The variable lottery (first lottery) to be performed is executed, and the end lottery (second lottery) is executed to end the continuous hit effect with a probability of about 1/100. When the variable lottery (first lottery) is won before the end lottery (second lottery), the effect mode is changed to the second effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the semi-variable value). When the frame button 22 is operated in the state where the continuous hit effect is being executed in the second effect mode, the first lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and the second lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10. Run. That is, it is configured such that it is easier to win the second lottery when the continuous hit effect is executed in the second effect mode than when the continuous hit effect is executed in the first effect mode. The effect mode of the continuous hit effect may be changed according to various kinds of lottery results executed based on the operation on the frame button 22 in.

  In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit effect, the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed when the first condition is satisfied, and the continuous hit effect is achieved when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The second striking effect is executed in advance by configuring so that the second condition is more easily satisfied than the first condition as the staging effect of the consecutive striking effect is changed. While it is difficult for the player to predict the maximum variable value that has been set, it is possible to execute continuous hit production in a variety of production modes based on the operation on the frame button 22.

  Also in this case, the maximum variable value in the continuous hit effect is set in advance, and when the maximum variable value is reached, the effect mode is not changed even if the first lottery is won, and the second lottery is selected. It is sufficient to continue the continuous striking effect without changing the effect mode until winning. Further, when the first lottery is won in a state where the maximum variable value has been reached, the process of increasing the winning probability of the second lottery may be executed without changing the effect mode. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the period during which the second lottery is not won from being unnecessarily lengthened during the continuous hit effect.

  In the above-described example, both the first condition and the second condition are configured to be established according to the result of the predetermined lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is used as in the present control example. At least one of the first condition and the second condition may be satisfied depending on the number of times the (operating device) is operated. In this way, according to the condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit effect, and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit effect. By setting the conditions that are satisfied with each other, and by varying the effect mode of the continuous hit effect or setting the end timing of the continuous hit effect according to how well each condition is satisfied, the continuous hit effect is generated at any timing. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the effect mode of No. 1 is variable or at which timing the continuous hit effect ends, so that the effect of effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, the more the effect mode is changed during the continuous hit effect, the more likely it is that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Without, for example, even if the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the continuous hit effect, if the effect form of the continuous hit effect does not change, it is a big hit in the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to notify that there is a high possibility that the player has won. With such a configuration, even when the state in which the production mode is difficult to change is set during continuous hit production, the player can entertain the production mode to the end. Further, when the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in the effect mode that is not changed from the initial state, the effect result this time is the effect result executed because the frame button 22 is not operated, or the frame button It is possible to make it difficult for a nearby player to grasp whether or not the result is an effect based on the result of operating 22.

  Further, when a plurality of effect modes that can be set during the continuous hit effect are facilitated and a variable condition for varying the effect mode during the continuous hit effect is satisfied, one of the effect modes is selected from the plurality of effect modes. In the gaming machine that can be set randomly, a specific effect mode may be set more easily when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when it is out of alignment. With this configuration, since it is possible to make the number of times of varying the effect mode during the continuous hit effect and the expectation of the jackpot win unrelated, it is possible for the player to reach the last moment when the continuous hit effect ends. On the other hand, the frame button 22 can be operated eagerly.

  In this case, if the upper limit value is set for the number of times the effect mode is changed during the continuous hit effect, and the number of times the effect mode is changed during the continuous hit effect reaches the upper limit value, the maximum value in the first control example It may be configured to execute the same processing as when the variable value display mode is changed. As a result, by actively operating the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the variable number of the effect mode is the upper limit with the remaining period of the continuous hit effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) remaining. When the value is reached, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the repeated hit effect.

  Next, the display content of the icon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a region where icon display can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 133B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the icon display effect is started.

  In the present control example, it is possible to display a plurality of types of icons at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, where the icons are displayed, and an icon display effect in which the display order is random (icon Display notice) is configured to be executable. The result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player according to the place where each icon is displayed in this icon display effect and the type of the displayed icon.

  In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, a place where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of effect pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol. However, when the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance is used, there is a problem that the data amount of the effect data stored in advance increases in accordance with the number of effect patterns.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the icon display effect is executed, the icon display effect can be executed in a mode in which a plurality of lottery results are combined. That is, instead of pre-storing the effect pattern data indicating a series of effect contents in the icon display effect, the effect contents are determined for each part of the icon display effect, and the icon display is performed in the effect mode in which the determined contents are combined. It is configured to execute the performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the icon display effect in various effect modes by using the effect data having a limited data amount.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when determining the effect mode of the icon display effect, the number of icons displayed by the icon display effect this time, the display order of the icons, and the display position of the icon are separately set. Is selected by the lottery, and the icon display effect is executed in an effect mode in which the respective selected contents are combined. That is, for example, when the number of displayed icons is four, the type of icon displayed first, the type of icon displayed second, the type of icon displayed third, the fourth type The icon type displayed in is selected, and the display location where the first icon is displayed, the display location where the second icon is displayed, the display location where the third icon is displayed, and the four The display location where the eye icon is displayed is selected.

  Furthermore, regarding the display location of the icon, the same display location is configured so that it can be selected in duplicate, and if the same display location is selected in duplicate, the latter icon will not be displayed. I am configuring. With this configuration, it is possible to display the number of icons different from the number of icons selected as the effect mode of the icon display effect, so simply execute the icon display effect by combining a plurality of effect contents. It is possible to execute the icon display effect in a wider variety of effect modes than in the case of performing, and the effect effect can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), in this control example, five places, that is, regions 811a to 811d, are preset as places where icons can be displayed in the icon display effect. Then, when the icon display effect is executed, a suggestion mode that suggests the location where the icon is displayed is displayed with respect to the five locations of the areas 811a to 811d.

  FIG. 133B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the suggestion mode is displayed in the icon display effect. As shown in FIG. 133 (b), when the icon display effect is executed and the suggestion mode is displayed, the area 811a and the area 811b are the display positions where the icon may be displayed in the icon display effect this time. , A display mode (circle in the figure) indicating the area 811c is displayed. Then, the region 811a is displayed in a highlighted display mode (double circle in the figure) for indicating the region where the icon is displayed next (first) among the regions displayed in the suggestion mode.

  In this way, when the icon display effect is executed, by displaying the suggestion mode suggesting the place where the icon is displayed before the icon is actually displayed, the icon is displayed to the player. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the display presentation. Further, in this control example, a display portion (specific display portion) is provided in which the icon is more likely to be displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when it is out of alignment. Therefore, when the specific display portion is suggested as the suggestion mode, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special symbol jackpot is won.

  In this control example, a plurality of display locations are displayed as the suggestion mode displayed in the icon display effect. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the display location where the icon is displayed in the icon display effect executed this time without suggesting the display order. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, specifically, in which display order the icons are displayed.

  In addition, in the present control example, the icon is always configured to be displayed in the display position displayed in the suggestion mode, but the display position in which the suggestion mode is displayed is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the icon is displayed more easily than the display portion that is not displayed, and when a plurality of display portions are displayed in the suggestion mode, the icon is displayed at a part of the plurality of display portions. It may be configured not to be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, a flow in which an icon is actually displayed in the icon display effect will be described. FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and FIG. 134 (b) shows all icons in the icon display effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case of.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the icon 812a initially displayed as the icon display effect is displayed in the region 811a displayed in the highlighted display mode in FIG. 133 (b). In this control example, the area in which the icon is displayed in the main display area Dm is destroyed, and the icon 812a is displayed after the animation in which the icon pops out from the inside, so that the area 811a is displayed. The mode, that is, the display mode showing the area in which the icon is displayed is different from the display modes showing the other areas.

  Then, the area 811c is displayed in a highlighted manner for suggesting the display location where the icon will be displayed next, and the area 811c is not displayed in the suggested manner on the display screen shown in FIG. 133 (b). The area 811d is displayed in a suggestive manner. Thus, as the icon display effect progresses, even after the icon display effect is executed, by adding the information regarding the order in which the icons are displayed in the icon display effect and the information about the display location where the icon is displayed, It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the final result of the icon display effect.

  Further, since it is possible to grasp the content of the suggestion mode while grasping the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to enjoy the icon display effect in a composite manner. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (a), the most common "quadrilateral" is displayed as the icon display mode, which is the first icon display mode. There is. In this control example, the easiness of being displayed is different for the type of icon displayed in the icon display effect, and the icon of the type that is difficult to be displayed is more than the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is out. It is configured so that it is easier to display in the case of a big hit. As a result, in the icon display effect, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the number of displayed icons and the display location but also in the displayed type.

  In addition, the expected degree of jackpot winning can be changed based on the combination of the icon display location and the icon type, and the expected degree of jackpot winning can be changed based on the combination of the number of displayed icons and the icon type. The expected degree of jackpot winning may be varied based on the combination of the icon types. As a result, as the continuous hit production progresses, that is, since the production result can be predicted while grasping the type and display location of the icon actually displayed, it is possible to make the player more interested. There is an effect.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the diagram shown in FIG. 134 (a), icons are displayed in all of the four regions (regions 811a to 811e) displayed in the suggestive manner. Specifically, the second icon displayed is the area 811c adjacent to the area 811a, and then the icons are displayed in the order of 811b and 811d. In the example shown in FIG. 134 (b) of this control example, the display order of the icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d, and the area 811a has a “quadrangular” icon type. The icon 812a, the area 811b has an icon type “diamond shape” icon 812b, the area 811c has an icon type “circular” icon 812c, and the area 811d has an icon type “V sign shape” icon. 812d is displayed.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the case where the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery is “V sign shape” icon 812d is more than the case where the big symbol is not won (the case where the big symbol is missed). It is configured to be easily displayed. Then, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing and at which display place this "V sign shape" icon 812d is displayed, the icon type, the display place, and the display order are separated. It is configured to be able to execute icon display effects that are selected independently and are combined with each other. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the effect contents of the icon display effect.

  In this control example, each icon displayed in the icon display effect is configured to be continuously displayed until the icon display effect ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the icon once displayed is It may be configured to be erased after a lapse of a predetermined period, for example, it may be configured to erase the previously displayed icon after the next icon is displayed. With such a configuration, while suppressing the occurrence of a period in which no icon is displayed during the icon display effect, the effect result of the icon display effect can be obtained unless the icon display effect is continuously watched. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

  Next, another pattern of the icon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when icon display portions are set to overlap as icon display effects. The icon display effect shown in FIG. 135 is the same as that in FIG. 134 (b) described above, except that the number of icon displays and the icon type are the same, and only the icon display order is different. Specifically, in FIG. 134 (b) described above, the display order of the icons is set to the area 811a, the area 811c, the area 811b, and the area 811d, whereas in FIG. 135, the icon display order is set. The area 811a, the area 811c, the area 811a, and the area 811c are set in this order.

  In the present control example, when the display positions of the icons are selected in duplicate, only the icon type corresponding to the display order selected earlier is displayed. Therefore, an icon display effect is executed in which the third icon (the “diamond-shaped” icon 812b) and the fourth icon (the “V sign-shaped” icon 812d) that have been selected as icon types are not displayed. It will be. As a result, internally, it is possible to display four icons and also to display the "V sign shape" icon 812d, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Despite being in a state where it is possible to execute the icon display effect to show that it is high, only two icons are displayed as the effect mode of the icon display effect that is actually executed, and the degree of expectation of jackpot winning The icon display effect is displayed in which only icon types that are not high are displayed.

  Therefore, since it is possible to complicatedly set the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to provide the effect in which it is difficult for the player to predict the game result. In addition, as an icon display effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is out, only two icons can be displayed internally, and only the icon type that does not have a high expectation of jackpot winning is displayed. Even when the icon display effect to be displayed is executed, the player may think that the icon display effect in which only two icons are displayed is executed because the icon display parts in the icon display effect overlap. be able to. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with a sense of expectation for a big hit until the icon display effect is completed.

  Note that, according to the example shown in FIG. 135, when the icon display parts in the icon display effect are overlapped, the previously set icon is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is set later. It may be configured to display the selected icon, or provided with a determination means capable of determining the type of the icon whose display location is duplicated, and configured to display the icon determined to be the icon type that is easy to be selected. Alternatively, it may be configured to display an icon determined to be an icon type that is difficult to select. Alternatively, a fused icon may be generated by fusing icons having overlapping display locations, and the fused icon may be displayed.

  Next, the content of the delay effect in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. In this control example, the frame button 22 is operated by the player, and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the operation result, and the voice output is made to correspond to the change mode. The production (operation production) for outputting a sound from the device 226 is configured to be executable. Furthermore, when the operation effect is executed, a predetermined delay condition (for example, a delay condition that is satisfied when the determination unit that determines whether or not to execute the delayed effect is determined to execute the delayed effect) is satisfied. With respect to the operation on the frame button 22, it is possible to execute a delay effect that delays one or both of the variable timing of the display mode and the audio output timing.

  The delay effect described above makes the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the content of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, sound effect for outputting a sound). This is because only the player who notices the discomfort can understand that the delayed effect has been executed. It has been used in recent years as an effect that indicates that.

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low as long as the player uses the advantageous privilege as a production with a high probability, and even if the game is played all day, it is only executed once or twice. It was a thing. As described above, in the case of a delayed effect whose execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. Preparation data dedicated to delay effect is prepared in advance with display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of, and voice data including voice corresponding to the waiting period until the voice effect is executed. However, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the case where the delayed effect is executed, the standby period can be set after the frame button 22 is operated until the effect corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22 is executed. The operation effect is configured to be executed when it is determined that the set standby period has elapsed. That is, the timing at which the operation effect is executed is delayed from the operation timing of the frame button 22.

  With this configuration, the delayed effect can be executed without providing the effect data dedicated to the delayed effect. In addition, in the present control example, it is possible to set standby periods having different lengths as standby periods from when the frame button 22 is operated to when the operation effect is executed. In addition, in the present control example, the above-described waiting period can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect. That is, when the delay effect is executed, the length of the delay period of the display effect and the length of the delay period of the sound effect can be made different. In this way, it is possible to set a plurality of delay timings in the delay effect and increase the variation of the delay effect simply by changing the length of the waiting period, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  First, an example of the operation effect executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an operation effect is executed, and FIG. 136 (b) is an example of a display screen displayed as an effect result of the operation effect. It is the figure which showed. First, when the operation effect is executed, a treasure box 810 is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 136 (a), and "Open the treasure box with the button PUSH! The comment is displayed. Then, in the display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm, a button 803, which is a display mode for prompting an operation on the frame button 22, and a time gauge 804 for indicating a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively accepted. And are displayed. The display mode displayed in the display area HR2 is the same as the display mode in the continuous hit effect (see FIG. 130 (a)) described above, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next to the figure simulating the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of FIG. 136 (a), a schematic diagram showing the state of the frame button 22 and the voice output device 226 is shown, and FIG. 136 (a) In the situation, a schematic diagram showing a situation in which the frame button 22 is not operated and a situation in which the sound indicating the effect result of the operation effect is not output from the sound output device 226 is shown.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 after the operation effect is executed, the treasure box 810 displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is opened as shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the effect result is displayed from the inside. "Chance" is displayed as a result display mode 810a for indicating. Then, the comment “Chance !!” is also displayed in the sub display area Ds. The state shown in FIG. 136 (b) is a state in which the frame button 22 has been operated, and a voice (“packer”) indicating the effect result of the operation effect is being output from the voice output device 226. The display mode that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 from the area HR2 has been deleted.

  As described above, if it is a normal operation effect, the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect (during which the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the time gauge 804), and immediately after that, the operation is performed. As a result of the effect, a sound (“packer”) indicating that the treasure box 810 is opened is output at a timing corresponding to the display effect in which the treasure box 810 is opened and the variable situation of the display mode in the display effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect having a sense of unity with the sight and the hearing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the content of the effect when the delay effect is executed with respect to the operation effect (when the delay pattern is set) will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated when the delay pattern is set for the operation effect, and FIG. 137 (b) is FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation effect.

  First, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state in which the delay pattern is set for the operation effect, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), a voice indicating that the box 810 is opened from the voice output device 226 ( Although “packer” is output, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is a display mode displayed when the operation effect is executed and the frame button 22 is not operated (FIG. 136). The effect of continuously displaying (see (a)) is executed. When the delay period (0.8 seconds) set as the current delay pattern has elapsed, the display mode (see FIG. 136 (b)) showing the effect result of the operation effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (b). It is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, the delay pattern described in FIG. 137 described above is a delay pattern in which the display effect is delayed by 0.8 seconds and the audio effect is delayed by 0 seconds (not delayed). By executing the delayed effect in this way, it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect that is uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect situation after the display mode shown in FIG. 137 (b) is displayed is the same as the effect situation when the delayed effect is not executed (see FIG. 136 (b)), the player It is necessary to determine whether or not the delayed effect has been executed within a short period in which only the sound effect is executed without the display effect being executed, and the player can watch the effect contents of the operation effect. .

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 137, since the sound is output from the audio output device 226 immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (because the audio effect is executed), the frame button 22 is properly operated. Although it is possible to inform the player of the fact that it has been done, the present invention is not limited to this, and a delay pattern may be set for both the display effect and the sound effect as the delay pattern of the operation effect. good.

  In the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the frame button 22 is actually already pressed, but the button 803 and the time gauge 804 are continuously displayed in the display area HR2. I am configuring. Then, as in the case where the frame button 22 is not operated, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed. That is, the display mode in which the remaining time area 804b is reduced is displayed. That is, the display mode when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed. In this way, when the frame pattern 22 is operated when the delay pattern of the operation effect is set, the same display mode as that when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a production mode that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness as a production mode during the delay period without using a new production. Further, even when a delay period having a different length is set, it is only necessary to change the length of the period during which the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continued.

  Here, for example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state where there is almost no remaining effect period of the operation effect (the period indicated by the remaining time region 804b of the time gauge 804) (specifically, a state of less than 0.8 seconds), and a delay occurs. When the pattern is set, the remaining effect period of the operation effect becomes 0 during the delay period, so that the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. There is a problem that you can not.

  Therefore, in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the present time is in the delay period, and when the remaining effect period of the operation effect becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the time is in the delay period, and in the delay period. If it is determined that there is, a specific effect is configured to be executable.

  Next, the effect contents of this specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents of the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 138, when the specific effect is executed, a comment of “due to delay” for notifying the player that the current delay time is in progress is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the center of the main display area Dm, a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is displayed around the closed treasure box 810, and a special effect (in the figure, around the button 803 displayed in the display area HR2 is also displayed. (Displayed with a star) is displayed. In addition, since the effect period of the operation effect is 0 at the timing when this specific effect is executed, the time gauge 804 without the remaining time area 804b is displayed. Then, in accordance with the execution timing of the specific effect, the voice output device 226 outputs the sound of “chance” as a sound mode based on the result of the special symbol lottery targeted for the current operation effect. This voice mode is variable based on the result of the actual special symbol lottery, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, a voice for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (for example, chance, If the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the voice (for example, delay occurrence etc.) to inform the player that the delay effect is being executed is output. It may be configured so that it can be easily output.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the timing of operating the frame button 22 during the operation effect. In addition, in the present control example, when the effect period of the operation effect (effective period in which the frame button 22 can be operated) elapses during the set delay period, the above-described specific effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the delay period, the delay period may be reset when the effect period of the operation effect has elapsed and the effect result of the operation effect may be displayed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to use new effect data, and the length of the delay period can be made more complicated.

  In addition, the execution condition of the above-described specific effect may be separately provided. For example, when the remaining period of the effect period of the operation effect is a predetermined period or more, the execution condition that is satisfied when the delay period is set is provided. Alternatively, the special effect may be configured to be executed only in the operation effect executed during the change of the special symbol in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

  Although an example of the delay effect in this control example has been described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, the effect mode of the delay effect is not limited to the above-described content, and the voice effect is executed rather than the display effect. The delay pattern may be set so that the timing is delayed. Further, in this control example, when the delay pattern is set for the operation effect executed within one special symbol variation period, the operation effect of the delay pattern is completed within the special symbol variation period However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the delay pattern is set, the operation effect may be executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, when the pre-determination process for pre-determining the winning information of the special figure reservation newly acquired during the execution of the operation effect is performed, and the result of the pre-determination process is the result of jackpot winning, It is preferable that the delay pattern is set. In addition, the delay period set as a delay pattern can be set up to the specific timing of special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol hold that resulted in the pre-determination result that the jackpot is won in the pre-determination at the longest, so that the player It is possible to execute a delay effect with a surprising length. In addition, when the delayed effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, the same operation effect may be executed as the effect corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation in which the delayed effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the effect result of the operation effect that is executed after the delay period has elapsed without causing any discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144, the effect contents of the collective effect and the battle effect will be described. In the present control example, as the effect for showing the special symbol lottery result, the variable effect corresponding to the variable period of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be executable. Further, as one of the variation effects, a variation display effect using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable. Then, as one of the variable display effects, a collective effect and a battle effect are executable.

  In the present control example, as the variable display effect executed within the special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery, the collective effect is executed in the first half period of the variable display effect, and the latter half of the variable display effect During the period, the battle effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect result of the collective effect. In this way, by varying the effect mode executed in the second half period according to the result of the effect executed in the first half period of the variable display effect, the variable display effect continuously executed for the predetermined period. You can keep watching.

  First, of the variable display effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the contents of the collective effect executed in the first half period will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141. The collective effect is an effect for collecting a plurality of characters (friend characters), and the battle effect in the second half period is executed in an effect mode according to the number of the friendly characters gathered in this collective effect. In this control example, when the number of teammate characters gathered in the group production is large, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is more likely to be a big win than when the number is small. Therefore, when the collective effect is executed, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting to collect more friendly characters.

  In the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface (main display area Dm) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the collective effect is executed. Each of the symbol columns L1 to L3 that are variably displayed in the display area Dm is variably displayed with the third symbol corresponding to a different type of ally character. And, in the 3rd design corresponding to the ally character in the 3rd design which is displayed as a stop during the collective production (a concept that includes a temporary stop display that seems to have stopped apparently, and the stop display described below is also the same) If is included, an effect indicating that the team characters who have been stopped and displayed are gathered is executed.

  The number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the collective effect differs depending on the effect period of the collective effect, and the third symbol stops when a longer effect period is set as the effect period of the collective effect. It is configured to be displayed more times. In this way, by configuring the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed to be variable according to the collective effect to be executed, how many ally characters can be acquired (collected) is played. Since it can be made difficult for a person to understand, a game can be played while expecting that more ally characters will gather until the group production is finished.

  Further, in the present control example, different types of teammate characters are set for each of the variably displayed symbol rows L1 to L3. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which display mode each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed. Further, in this control example, the number of ally characters set for each symbol row is different, and specifically, for the middle symbol row L2, another symbol row (left symbol row L1, right symbol). It is configured such that more ally characters are set than in the symbol row L3).

  With this configuration, the player views the collective effect while strongly conscious of the fact that the third symbol corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed for the symbol sequence in which many ally characters are set. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of production. For example, the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed as a set effect is set to two times, and one type (character 1) in the left symbol column L1 and one type (character 2) in the right symbol column L3 are middle symbols. When two types (characters 3 and 4) of ally characters are set in the row L2, in order to collect 4 types (characters 1 to 4) of ally characters in the present variation effect, the first time At the 3 symbol stop display timing, at least the character 3 or the character 4 needs to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column L2, and the ally character does not need to be stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which ally character is stopped and displayed in which symbol row at which timing, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

  Next, the specific effect contents of the collective effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the collective effect is started, and FIG. 139 (b) shows the ally characters that can be acquired in the collective effect. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the displayed display screen, and FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when an ally character is acquired in the collective effect. [Fig. 7] is a diagram showing an example of an end screen of collective effect.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), when the collective effect is executed, the display mode of the third symbol set in the symbol columns L1 to L3 is changed, and the third symbol in the left symbol column L1 is stopped and displayed. A left preliminary symbol display area 900a for displaying a preliminary symbol is formed so as to be attached to the left third symbol display area 901a. Similarly, a middle preliminary symbol display area 900b for displaying a medium preliminary symbol is formed so as to accompany the third symbol symbol display area 901b in which the third symbol of the medium symbol column L2 is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol column L3. A right preliminary symbol display area 900c in which the right preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to be associated with the right third symbol display area 901c in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the characters “large” in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, the characters “collection” in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c On the other hand, when the character "GO" is stopped and displayed, the collective effect is started, and the character "COMMON PRODUCTION START" indicating that the collective effect has been executed is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 139 (a) displays the start timing of the collective effect, and the preliminary symbols for indicating that the collective effect is started are stopped in the respective preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c. Although the displayed display screen has been described, each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c may be used for other effects, for example, an effect (continuous effect) that spans continuously varying effects. ) Is executed, each preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, the character "in continuation") for indicating that the continuous effect is being performed in each preliminary symbol display area 900a to 900c, You may comprise so that each preliminary design may be stopped and displayed by the display mode (for example, the character of "probably changing") for showing the game state currently set.

  In addition, a preliminary symbol may be used as an effect to fuel whether or not the collective effect is executed, and for example, a preliminary symbol in each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c corresponding to the stop display timing of each symbol row L1 to L3. When the display is stopped, the left preliminary symbol display area 900a that is first stopped and displayed is "Large", and the right preliminary symbol display area 900c that is next stopped and displayed is the stop symbol of "Mix", and the last is displayed. It may be configured to stop and display the preliminary symbol of "X" in the intermediate preliminary symbol display area 900b that is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the enjoyment that makes the player predict whether or not the collective effect will be executed, depending on the stop display mode of each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

  In this control example, at the start timing of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139 (a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal display mode. The preliminary symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display mode of the third symbol. With this configuration, as the display control when the collective effect is started, there is no need to use a dedicated stop display control for the third symbol or a dedicated third symbol type, and the processing load of the display control Can be reduced.

  In this control example, the player can understand that the collective effect is started by configuring that the third symbol is also stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the stop display timing of the preliminary symbol indicating the start of the collective effect. Although it is configured so that it can be facilitated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to stop and display only the preliminary symbol while the third symbol is variably displayed. With this configuration, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display timing of the third symbol, so that the collective effect can be started at various timings. Further, it is not necessary to execute the stop display control for stopping the display (temporary stop) of the third symbol in accordance with the start timing of the collective effect, and the processing load of the display control can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, the display screen showing the start of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139 (a) can be displayed at a plurality of timings, and is executed, for example, next to the special symbol change being executed. When the collective effect is executed from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, the preliminary symbol is stopped in the display mode indicating the start of the collective effect at the stop display timing of the third symbol corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation being executed. Displayed, when performing the collective effect in the special symbol variation in execution, so that the preliminary symbol can be stopped and displayed at a plurality of timings during the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the effect period of the collective effect. In FIG. 139 (a), since the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific timing during the variable display of the special symbol variation, the display area Dm1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm is shown. The fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation is variably displayed.

  Next, when the collective effect is started, a display screen of the collective effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (b). When the collective effect is started, the display area HR5 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. The display area HR5 is a display area in which the acquired (collected) teammate characters are displayed, and an acquirable display frame corresponding to the maximum acquirable number of teammate characters according to the effect mode of the collective effect to be executed. (In the figure, seven display frames are indicated by dotted lines). At the time point shown in FIG. 139 (b), since no ally character has been acquired, the acquired ally character is not displayed in the display area HR5.

  By thus forming the display area HR5 and displaying the acquirable display frame and the already acquired ally characters, the player is informed in advance of how many ally characters can be acquired at the maximum in this set production. Therefore, it is possible to easily evaluate the effect contents of the collective effect. Further, since the number and types of already acquired teammate characters can be displayed as a history, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect. In addition, a display area HR6 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired in the current collective effect and the number of already acquired ally characters are displayed as numerical information. 139 (b), the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired is “7”, and the number of acquired ally characters is “0”. "0/7" is displayed as the information display mode indicating the situation.

  When the collective effect is executed, a display mode dedicated to the collective effect is set as a display mode of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. Specifically, the third symbol in the display mode corresponding to each ally character and the third symbol in the display mode not corresponding to the ally character are configured to be stopped and displayed. Then, the third symbols that are variably displayed in the respective third symbol display areas 901a to 901c are stopped and displayed before the preliminary symbols that are variably displayed in the respective preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

  In FIG. 139 (b), in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c, the third symbol (displayed as "?" In the figure) in a display mode not corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed, In the middle third symbol display area 901b, as the third symbol of the display mode corresponding to the ally character, the third symbol of the display mode imitating "bird" is stopped and displayed. At this point, as described above, since the preliminary symbols are being variably displayed, it is in a state where the ally character stopped and displayed in the third symbol in the collective effect has not been acquired, but it indicates that the ally character is to be acquired. When the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode, the teammate characters to be acquired are informed in advance.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number and type of teammates that will be acquired if the teammates are successfully acquired in the collective production. Thus, the effect contents of the collective effect executed this time can be informed in stages. Further, while the collective effect is being executed, in the state where a plurality of display modes corresponding to the teammate characters are displayed in the third symbol, the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that acquisition of the teammate characters has failed. , It becomes possible to stop and display the third symbol corresponding to the ally character that cannot be actually acquired. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect that effectively uses the image data of the third symbol, which is the display mode dedicated to the collective effect.

  After that, when the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the teammate character is acquired, the display screen shown in FIG. 140 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 140 (a), as a display mode of the preliminary symbol indicating that the ally character is acquired, "Large" in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, "collection" in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, right preliminary symbol display area 900c The character "Go" is stopped and displayed. Then, as a collective effect, in the sub-display area Ds as a guide display indicating that a teammate character (tri-chara) corresponding to a display mode simulating "bird" that has already been stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b is acquired. The comment “Tori GET !!” is displayed.

  In addition, in the display area HR5, a simple display mode imitating “bird” is displayed in the fifth display frame from the top in order to show the acquired teammate character. Here, in the present control example, a predetermined order is given in advance to the acquirable ally characters, and corresponds to the order given in advance among the plurality of display frames displayed in the display area HR5. The ally characters acquired at the position are displayed. That is, in the state of the display area HR5 shown in FIG. 139 (b), the player is informed only of the total number of teammate characters that can be obtained in this collective effect, but as shown in FIG. 140 (a). When one teammate character is acquired, it is possible to allow the player to predict the type of teammate character that can be acquired in the collective production being executed, depending on the location of the display frame in which the acquired teammate character is displayed. Become.

  Therefore, as the collective effect progresses, it is possible to predict the effect mode of the collective effect in more detail, so that the player can be continuously interested in the content of the effect to be executed.

  In this control example, the shapes of the respective display frames displayed in the display area HR5 are all the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the ally characters corresponding to the respective display frames can be predicted. The shape of the display frame may be changed to some extent. Further, it may be configured to display supplementary information that can predict the ally character corresponding to each display frame. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the enjoyment that allows the player to predict the type of teammate character that can be acquired in the present collective production immediately after the collective production is started.

  Further, in the present control example, as described above, the ally characters acquired are arranged to be displayed at the positions corresponding to the order given in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ally characters are acquired in the order of acquisition. It may be configured to be displayed side by side, or if the possibility of being jackpot-winning in the special symbol lottery is different depending on the type of ally character that has been acquired, in the order of high jackpot winning possibility, The acquired teammate characters may be displayed side by side.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the player is notified of the total number of ally characters that can be acquired in the collective effect being executed in the display area HR5 immediately after the collective effect is started. Without limitation, the player is informed of only a part of the total number of ally characters that can be acquired in the collective production that is being executed, and the number of display frames displayed in the display area HR5 is increased as the collective production progresses. By doing so, it may be configured to increase the number of teammate characters that can be acquired in the group production. As a result, even if the number of ally characters that can be acquired is notified shortly after the collective effect is executed, the number of notifications may be increased in the middle of the process, resulting in a decrease in game motivation. Can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, the timing for acquiring the teammate characters, that is, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times in a “large group” within the production period of the collective production. Then, after the teammate characters have been acquired a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the preliminary symbols are displayed in a display mode different from that of the “large set”, the collective effect ends.

  In FIG. 140 (b), as shown in the display areas HR5 and HR6, the state in which four ally characters of “elephant”, “dugong”, “bird”, and “bear” have already been acquired have been acquired. In this case, “4/7” is displayed as the information display mode. Then, the third symbol indicating "?" In the left third symbol display area 901a, "Boar" in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and "Rhino" in the right third display area 901c is stopped and displayed, and left preliminary. "Large" is displayed in the symbol display area 900a, "X" is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and "comparative" preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c.

  In other words, while each preliminary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, each third symbol is stopped and displayed, and after encouraging the player to obtain "boar" and "rhino" as ally characters, in the order of left, right, and middle. The preliminary symbols displayed in a stopped state are displayed as "Large" and "Go", and after emphasizing that an ally character can be acquired, the "cross mark" is finally displayed in a stopped state. Even in the case of performing an effect to end the collective effect in this way, by making it difficult for the player to predict to the end whether the collective effect will be completed or whether a teammate character will be acquired and the collective effect will continue. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (b), in the collective effect in this control example, one of the display modes (“large”, “cross mark”, “match”) of the preliminary symbols for notifying that the collective effect is finished The section is the same as the display mode (“Large”, “Collection”, “Go”) when acquiring the teammate character, but is not limited to this, for example, to notify that the collective production is finished In order to notify the end of the collective effect, the display mode of the preliminary symbol is set to a display mode (for example, "E", "N", "D") that is completely different from the display mode when the teammate character is acquired. It may be configured such that a continuous display mode (for example, “E”, “?”, “D”) in which the display mode of the preliminary symbols and a part of the display modes are different can be displayed.

  In this case, when "E" is stopped and displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a during the collective effect, it is decided that the ally character cannot be acquired, and whether or not the collective effect ends. Only the player will be interested. That is, it is possible to provide an advantageous effect result to the player, even if the effect result does not increase the teammate characters. Therefore, when performing a collective production in which only a limited number of ally characters can be acquired, it is possible to increase the number of times the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  When the preliminary symbols are configured to be stop-displayable in the continuous display mode, the display control may be executed so that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the state where the third symbol is not stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case where the above continuous display mode is continuously stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), a display mode (“Large”, in which the preliminary symbol to be stopped and displayed next acquires an ally character It is preferable to configure such that the stop display is performed (the possibility that the stop display is increased) becomes “collection” and “combination”. With this configuration, when the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, not only the collective effect is continued, but also the expectation of acquiring the teammate character can be increased, so that the collective effect of the collective effect is improved. The staging effect can be further enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the stop display mode of the preliminary symbols is notified that the collective effect is completed, the next display using the ally characters acquired in the collective effect is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment of "battle start" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the execution of the effect. Then, the battle effect is executed. The content of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144.

  Here, in the present control example, when the collective effect is executed, various effect contents are independently selected, and the collective effect is executed in an effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined. are doing. As a result, compared to a case where effect data (image data) is provided for each effect pattern executed in the collective effect, it is possible to execute a collective effect rich in variations using less effect data.

  Specifically, the types of friendly characters that can be displayed in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3 are preset, and the friendly characters are acquired during the collective effect according to the variation pattern in which the collective effect is executed. The number of times to do is preset. Then, the total number of ally characters to be acquired in this set production and the type are independently selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery (type of variation pattern command).

  Therefore, for example, the number of ally character types set only for one symbol row is larger than the number of ally character types to be acquired in the current collective production, rather than the number of times ally characters are acquired during the collective production. It may occur. In other words, when various effect contents are independently selected and a predetermined effect is executed in the effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined, a combination of infeasible (difficult) effect contents is There is a problem that it will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the result obtained by combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents is a feasible effect mode, and it is impossible (difficult) in the result of the judgment. When it is determined that it is the effect mode, the exclusive effect is executed, and the result of combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents can be provided to the player without a sense of discomfort. With such a configuration, compared to a case where effect data (image data) is provided for each effect pattern executed in the collective effect, a variety of collective effects can be created without any problem by using less effect data. Can be provided to.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the content of the above-mentioned exclusive effect will be described. FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion screen suggesting a last acquisition chance in the collective production, and FIG. 141 (b) is an example of a display screen showing results of the last acquisition chance in the collective production. It is a figure.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the result obtained by combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents is a feasible effect mode, and it is determined that the effect is an impossible (difficult) effect mode. As a special effect executed when it is determined, the last acquisition chance effect is configured to be executable. In this last acquisition chance effect, the effect of acquiring the ally character is executed regardless of the variable display and the stop display of the third symbol, and among the ally characters set to be acquired in advance, the figure 139 and an effect for acquiring a teammate character that could not be acquired with the effect contents of the collective effect described above with reference to FIG. 140 are executed.

  Specifically, after the end screen of the collective effect shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), the third symbol is displayed in a swinging manner. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Getting started, GET chance" is displayed as a guide display mode suggesting that the last acquisition chance effect is executed. When the variable display of the third symbol is restarted in the state shown in FIG. 141 (a), the last acquisition chance effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the end screen of the collective effect (FIG. 140). The effect of acquiring the teammate character that has been stopped and displayed in (b) is executed. Furthermore, a teammate character that is not stopped and displayed on the end screen of the collective effect (see FIG. 140 (b)) is additionally displayed, and an effect of acquiring the teammate character additionally displayed is also executed.

  When the last acquisition chance effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), as the effect results of the collective effect including the effect result of the last acquisition opportunity effect in the display area HR5 and the display area HR6, “elephant” and “jugong” are displayed. , “Rhino”, “Tori”, “Bear”, and “Boar”, a total of 6 teammate characters have been acquired, and “6/7” is displayed as the information display mode. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as the guide display mode for guiding the number of teammate characters acquired in the last acquisition chance and the effect to be executed after the collective effect, "2 GET in the last! Start of battle". Is displayed.

  In this way, by making it possible to execute the last acquisition chance effect, when a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined to execute a collective effect, the combination result is provided without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can do. In the example of the effect described above with reference to FIG. 141, the last acquisition chance effect is executed after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) that indicates that the last acquisition chance effect is executed. Although an example is shown, after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) that suggests that the last acquisition chance effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again to give the last acquisition chance effect. The composition effect is configured to end without executing.

  As a result, when the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) that suggests that the last acquisition chance effect is executed, the game is performed while making the player interested in whether or not the last acquisition opportunity effect is executed. Can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 144, the contents of the battle effect will be described. This battle effect is an effect that is executed after the collective effect is completed, and an effect corresponding to the result of the collective effect, that is, the number of teammate characters acquired in the collective effect is executed. In this battle production, the production in which the teammate characters acquired in the group production execute a battle with the enemy character is executed.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the battle effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 142 (a), a battle effect executed after the above-described last acquisition chance effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the battle effect is executed, a display area HR7 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the number and type of teammate characters acquired in the previously executed collective effect. As a display mode capable of distinguishing between and, 6 ally characters including "elephant", "dugong", "rhino", "bird", "bear", and "boar" are displayed. A display area HR8 is formed above the display area HR7, and "attack count 6 times" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of battles to be executed in this battle effect. That is, in this battle production, the player is informed that the battle production is performed in which the six teammate characters acquired in the collective production individually battle with the enemy characters. In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the effect contents of the battle effect in advance, the progress of the battle effect can be properly determined, and the easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

  An enemy character (boss character) 910 of the battle effect is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and a physical strength gauge 911 indicating the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is displayed in the vicinity (lower side) of the enemy character (boss character) 910. This physical strength gauge 911 is configured by a numerical value display mode (indicated by “1000” in the figure) showing the current physical strength value (HP) numerically and a gauge display mode shown by a gauge, and the gauge display mode remains. The remaining HP display mode 911a indicating the physical strength value (HP) and the consumed HP display mode 911b indicating the already consumed HP are displayed (see FIG. 142 (b)).

  Then, the physical strength gauge 911 indicates that the remaining physical strength value (HP) is full as a guide display for the player to easily understand how much the remaining physical strength value (HP) is. “MAX”, “200” indicating that the remaining physical strength value (HP) is a predetermined value, and “0” indicating that the remaining physical strength value (HP) is 0 are displayed. Then, in accordance with the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced in the battle performance, the remaining physical strength value is used as a guide display for guiding the player to the performance mode executed after the battle performance and the expectation of jackpot winning. If (HP) is reduced to a predetermined value (200), "SP reach" indicating that SP reach with a higher jackpot expectation is set after the battle performance, and the remaining physical strength value (HP ) Becomes 0, that is, when the boss character 910 is defeated in the battle production, "large chance" indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is displayed.

  With such a configuration, the effect result of the battle effect and the subsequent game content can be associated and grasped, so that the player can be provided with an easily understandable effect. Further, even if the boss character 910 is not defeated in the battle production, it is possible to let the player know in advance that the expectation level of the jackpot win will be increased by reducing the remaining physical strength value (HP) to a predetermined value. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

  In the battle effect executed in this control example, basically, an attack effect in which one teammate character attacks the boss character 910 is executed, and either a weak attack or a strong attack is executed as the teammate character's attack pattern. Is configured. The physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is decreased by the minimum unit (for example, 100) when the weak attack is executed, and the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is decreased by the minimum unit (for example, 100) when the strong attack is executed. , 100), for example, 200).

  Here, the effect contents of the attack effect in which the teammate character attacks the boss character 910 in the battle effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (b) and 143 (a). FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a weak attack effect is executed, and FIG. 143 (a) is a display displayed when a strong attack effect is executed. It is a figure showing an example of a screen.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), when the attack effect is started in the battle effect, the attack is sequentially performed from the ally character first acquired in the collective effect among the ally characters displayed in the display basin HR7. Attack performance is executed. Then, the display mode indicating the teammate character used for the attack effect is deleted from the display area HR7, and the display area HR8 displays "remaining 5 times" in which the number of remaining attacks is subtracted. In FIG. 142 (b), "Tori" is performing a weak attack as the ally character 820, and "-100" is displayed in the display area HR9, which indicates the physical strength value of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (weak attack). At the same time, the numerical display mode of the physical fitness gauge 911 is subtracted from "900" and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b correspond to the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, "900". It is displayed in the displayed manner. In the sub-display area Ds, "attack of birds !!" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the current attack is a weak attack. The display mode of the boss character 910 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be slightly variable display (represented by sweat display in the figure) with respect to the state not attacked (see FIG. 142 (a)). ing. The display mode of the boss character 910 is configured to be variably displayed in different display modes according to the magnitude of the physical strength value reduced (consumed) in one attack effect and the remaining physical strength value. By variably displaying the display mode of the boss character 910 in this manner, it is possible for the player to visually understand the effect contents of the battle effect, so that the player can be provided with an easily understandable effect.

  Next, the content of the heavy attack effect executed after the attack effect shown in FIG. 142 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 143 (a). As shown in FIG. 143 (a), "bear" is performing a heavy attack as the ally character 820, and the display area HR9 shows the physical strength value of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (strong attack) "-". In addition to being displayed as “200”, the numerical display mode of the physical fitness gauge 911 is subtracted from “700” and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b are the current physical strength values (HP) of the boss character 910 “700”. Is displayed in a display mode corresponding to. In the sub-display area Ds, "Critical HIT !!" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the current attack is a heavy attack.

  Further, the display mode indicating the teammate characters used for the attack effect is deleted from the display area HR7, and the display area HR8 displays "remaining five times" in which the number of remaining attacks is subtracted. When the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 becomes 0 as a result of executing the predetermined number of attack effects in the battle effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 143 (b) is displayed. FIG. 143 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boss character 910 is subdued as a result of the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), as the final attack effect (sixth attack effect) in the battle effect, the “sai” of the ally character 820 executes a strong attack, and the health value (HP) of the boss character 910 is 200. Due to the decrease, the effect display in which the boss character 910 is subdued is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the battle effect, if the boss character 910 cannot be defeated, a different effect is executed depending on the remaining physical strength value (HP), and the remaining boss character 910 is configured to be executed. When the physical strength value (HP) is 200 or less, the effect display in which the boss character 910 escapes is executed as shown in FIG. 144 (a). Further, when the remaining physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is larger than 200, a counterattack effect in which the boss character 910 makes a counterattack is executed, the battle effect is terminated, and the corresponding special symbol variation is also stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the present control example, as a production mode of the battle production, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a joint battle production (see FIG. 144 (b)) in which a plurality of teammate characters simultaneously attack the boss character 910 is configured to be executed. are doing. In this case, the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910, which is reduced by one attack effect, becomes larger than that of the heavy attack, which is an effect advantageous to the player. For example, in the battle effect start screen shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the number of attacks executed in the battle effect is displayed less than the number of ally characters participating in the battle effect, the above-mentioned joint battle is performed. It is configured to suggest that the performance will be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the content of the pseudo off effect will be described. In this control example, in order to be able to continuously execute the special symbol fluctuation, the right to execute the special symbol fluctuation (lottery right of the special symbol lottery), a storage that can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (4) Have means. Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure hold) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during execution of the special symbol change, the lottery right (special figure hold) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different according to the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation of the longer variation time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed, and obtain a new lottery right while the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means reaches the upper limit. It can be suppressed.

  Specifically, in the present control example, the number of special symbol reservations stored and stored is 0, and when the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is out, the special symbol reservation number is 0 or more. It is configured such that the variation pattern with the variation time of 14 seconds is more easily set than when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in a large amount is too large. When a variation pattern having a variation time of 14 seconds is set, a variation effect of 14 seconds indicating that the special drawing lottery result is out of order is executed.

  That is, when the variation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the number of special figure reservations is 0 is the variation effect for 14 seconds described above, the effect result of the variation effect is Before being displayed, there is a problem that the player is easily discriminated that the result of the special symbol lottery this time is out of order, and the motivation for the game is lowered.

  In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of effect modes of fluctuation effects corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 14 seconds, but in this case, the result of the special symbol lottery Since the effect data for the fluctuating effect for indicating that it is out of order is increased, a new problem arises that the data amount of the entire fluctuating effect increases. Furthermore, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in a state where the number of special symbol reservations is 0 is a plurality of variation times (for example, 14 seconds, 16 seconds, 18 seconds) It is also possible to configure to make it easier to select, but in this case, with the load on the control process for selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation, and the type of variation time to be set increases. However, there is a problem that a load is applied to the variable display process of the special symbol and the variable display process of the third symbol.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the variation of 14 seconds described above It is configured so that the performance can be executed. That is, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not out of the question, it is determined by executing the above-described 14-second fluctuation effect that the player has determined that the 14-second fluctuation effect is being executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery may be a big hit, so even if the player understands that the 14-second fluctuation effect is being executed, the player's willingness to play may decrease. Since there is no such change, it is not necessary to configure a plurality of types of effect modes of the change effect corresponding to the change pattern having the change time of 14 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data amount of the entire variation effect. In addition, since the special pattern lottery executed when the number of special figure reservations is 0 does not need to be configured so that a plurality of variation time variation patterns are selected, Along with the load on the control process for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation, the variation display process of the special symbol and the variation display process of the third symbol are accompanied by an increase in the type of variation time that is set. It is possible to prevent the problem of hanging.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150, the flow of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146, the flow of the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 130 to FIG. 132, this continuous hit effect is an effect that is executed using a part of the effect period of the variable effect that is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) by the player, an effect (operation effect) in which a specific display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed is executed. is there.

  Specifically, for example, as a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) executed by the main controller 110, a special symbol fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set is executed (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), The variation effect is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in an effect period (60 seconds) of a length corresponding to the variation time (60 seconds) of the special figure variation (see FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the production mode of the fluctuating effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 includes the continuous hitting effect, the player for the frame button 22 for 10 seconds from the time point 10 seconds after the fluctuating effect is started. A button valid period (operation valid period) for validly discriminating the operation (pressing) is set (see FIG. 146 (c)), and the continuous striking effect is executed in correspondence with the operation valid period (FIG. 146 (d- See 2)).

  In this continuous hit effect, the display mode (in FIG. 130 (a), the display mode of the enemy character 802 and the display mode of the display area HR1) is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period. Production is executed. This display mode indicates to the player whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, an effect that facilitates jackpot winning (SP reach) or jackpot winning) is given after the end of the continuous hitting effect. In the control example, the upper limit value (maximum variable value) in which the display mode is changed during the continuous hitting effect is set based on the result of judgment of the corresponding special figure variation (result of the big hit lottery).

  In the example shown in FIG. 146, the number of times of operation of the frame button 22 is set to 20 as the maximum variable value (upper limit of 20 times), and if the frame button 22 is operated 20 times during the operation valid period, the display mode is further displayed. Does not change. In addition, in the present control example, after the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period reaches the maximum variable value, the operation of the frame button 22 is further continued, and when the end condition is satisfied, the continuous hit effect is produced. The timing for displaying the results can be shortened. In the example shown in FIG. 146, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated after reaching the maximum variable value reaches 8 times The end count is set to 8 in order to set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 146 (d) and FIG. 146 (e), the operation content of the player for operating the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect period and the effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 146 (d) shows a flow of the effect executed when the ending condition is not satisfied during the operation valid period, and FIG. 146 (e) shows when the ending condition is satisfied during the operation valid period. It shows the flow of the effect to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (d), after the continuous hit effect is executed, until the frame button 22 is operated 20 times, the effect in which the display mode is changed according to the operation on the frame button 22 is executed. (Period A). After that, during the period in which the number of operations on the frame button exceeds 20 and the number of operations on the frame button 22 is 21, 22, and 23 times (period B), the number of operations on the frame button 22 reaches the maximum variable value. Since it exceeds the limit, the display mode is not changed. Then, when the continuous hit effect is completed (when the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes 0), the resulting effect for 10 seconds is executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the end condition is satisfied by the end of the continuous hit effect (by the remaining period of the operation valid period becoming 0), that is, to the frame button 22 in the continuous hit effect. When the number of operations of is 28 times, the result effect is executed. In this case, since the result effect is executed with the operation valid period remaining, the player operates the frame button 22 during the period (period C) to change the display mode displayed as the result effect. Alternatively, a lively production is performed in which a light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the pachinko machine 10 emits light in order to make the result production lively, or a voice is output from the voice output device 226.

  As described above, in the present control example, if the end condition is satisfied based on the operation on the operation means in the period in which the continuous hit effect is executed, the continuous hit is performed before the end condition based on the elapsed time is satisfied. The effect is ended, and the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed. With such a configuration, when the continuous hit effect is executed, the player operates the operation means for changing the display mode of the continuous hit effect and the operation for shortening the effect period of the continuous hit effect. It is possible to cause the player to operate the operation means eagerly.

  Further, in this control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous stroke effect, by setting a limit on the variable content (variable number) in the continuous stroke effect, the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested by the variable content of the continuous stroke effect. It is configured to be possible. Therefore, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, an effect in which the number of times the display mode is changed is small (according to the example of FIG. 130 (a), the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 is hard to decrease) is executed. In this case, if the effect period of the continuous hit effect is fixed, a period in which the display mode does not change when the operating means is operated in the continuous hit effect continues for a long time, and the player operates the operating means. There was a problem that the motivation decreased.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since the end condition is satisfied after the variable number of display modes in the continuous hit effect reaches the upper limit (maximum variable value), the effect period of the continuous hit effect can be shortened. The occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed. Further, in the present control example, the operation content for operating the operation means for changing the display mode in the continuous stroke effect and the operation content for establishing the ending condition are the same, and therefore, for the player. The end condition can be satisfied without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, in the present control example, even if the effect period of the continuous hit effect is shortened, the operation effective period is not shortened, so that the operation effective period is set unlike the case where the continuous hit effect is ended based on the lapse of time. It is possible to execute the effect (effect indicating the result of the continuous hit effect) that is executed after the continuous hit effect during the period in which the dedicated operation effect is performed. That is, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect to be executed next, according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied (the end condition that is satisfied over time, the end condition that is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means).

  In this control example, the operation for changing the display mode during the continuous hit effect and the operation for ending the continuous hit effect are the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), but not limited to this. Alternatively, different operations may be set. Further, as the operation content of the operation means that is effectively determined during the operation effective period, not only whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), but for example, the period of time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed The length (so-called long press) may be determined, or the pressing interval at which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed may be determined. Further, it may be configured to determine a period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed, that is, the player selects an operation of not pressing the frame button 22.

  In this way, by configuring a plurality of operation contents to be discriminable and discriminating as the operation contents for the operation means, it is possible to set different effect modes according to the operation contents executed by the player, The interest of the game can be improved. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed without an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) during the continuous hit effect, it is determined that the operation unit has been operated, and the display mode is displayed. May be configured to be executed, and then the processing for establishing the ending condition may be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

  Further, it may be configured such that the ending condition is satisfied unless the player presses the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, one second) during the continuous hit effect. In this case, if the frame button 22 is not pressed even once after the continuous hit effect has been executed, the end condition of the continuous hit effect is satisfied without changing the display mode. Therefore, the continuous hit effect is executed. It is possible to provide a suitable game to a player who does not want to play. In addition, even for the player who operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, the end condition may be satisfied midway (before the maximum variable value is reached) unless the frame button 22 is continuously operated. The player can motivate the frame button 22 to be operated.

  Furthermore, in this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is preferable to execute a guidance display that guides the player in an easy-to-understand manner when the ending condition is satisfied. It is good to display a comment "If you continue for more than 1 second, the continuous stroke production will end" and a time gauge showing the remaining time until the end condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous hit effect from ending at a timing that is not intended by the player.

  In the control example described above, only one end condition is set as the end condition for ending in the state where the operation valid period remains, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of end conditions may be set. May be. In this case, for example, the end condition that is likely to be established may be changed according to the effect state of the repeated hit effect. For example, when the remaining period of the operation valid period is 5 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is pressed. If the end condition that can be satisfied when the button is not pressed is easily satisfied, and if the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than 5 seconds, the end condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is pressed is easily satisfied. Good to configure.

  Further, the content of the end condition may be changed according to the display mode displayed as the continuous hit effect, for example, the display mode when the maximum variable value is reached is the first display mode (the remaining number is 50 or more). The case may be configured such that it is less likely to be established than in the case of the second display mode (the remaining number is less than 50) in which the remaining number is smaller than in the first display mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ending condition to be satisfied when the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 is large. Therefore, a period that makes the player think that the display mode can be changed in the continuous hit effect is set. It can be made longer and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Next, the flow of the button effect (delay effect) described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138 will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

  When the effect period of the variable effect is 60 seconds and the button effect is set as the effect mode, the button effect period of 15 seconds is set 10 seconds after the variable effect is started (FIG. 147). (See (a)). This button effect period is formed of a 10-second button effective period (operation effective period) and a 5-second effect period.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, this button effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period. In the case where the display effect in which (for example, the treasure box 810) is changed and the sound effect in which the sound (for example, “packer”) is output from the sound output device 226 are executed and the delay effect mode is not set. In the case of (normal button effect), the display effect and the sound effect are executed in synchronization (at the same timing), and when the delay effect mode is set, the display effect and the sound effect are shifted in timing. To be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 147 (b), the flow of the effect when the normal button effect is executed will be described. When the button effect is executed as shown in FIG. 147 (b), as shown in FIG. 136 (a), a button operation suggestion display that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed. This button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed until the player operates the frame button 22 (period A). When the player operates the frame button 22, the display effect and the sound effect are simultaneously executed, and the operation result display (see FIG. 136 (b)) showing the effect result of the button effect ends the button effect period. The period (period B) is displayed continuously. After that, the variation effect is executed (period C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147 (c), in the case where the delay button effect is executed, the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is just before the end of the operation valid period, specifically, the delay period ( For example, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the operation valid period ends (for example, a timing 0.5 seconds before the operation valid period ends) when 0.8 seconds has elapsed, Explain the flow. As shown in FIG. 147 (c), when the button effect is executed, the effect is executed in the same effect mode as the normal button effect. Then, if the player operates the frame button 22 0.5 seconds before the button valid period (operation valid period) ends, a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set and 0. After 8 seconds, the display effect and the sound effect are executed.

  Here, in the present control example, when the operation valid period remains after the delay period elapses, the button operation suggestion displayed before the frame button 22 is operated during the 0.8 second delay period. The display mode of the effect is configured to be continuously displayed. That is, in the present control example, when the delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, the display control device 114 is configured to delay the execution timing of various effects based on the operation of the frame button 22 by 0.8 seconds. Since the timing for setting (outputting) the display command of is delayed, the display control device 114 receives the display command, that is, 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated. Since the information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated cannot be received, the display mode of the button operation suggesting effect is continuously displayed.

  With this configuration, when the delayed effect is executed in the button effect, it is not necessary to separately set a display command to display the display mode corresponding to the delayed period, and the delayed effect is executed. It is possible to reduce the control processing for. In addition, since it is possible to execute various delay effects by simply setting different delay periods, it is possible to reduce control processing for executing the delay effects. Further, in the present control example, since the delay period can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect, more various delay effects are executed by combining the effect modes of each effect. be able to.

  It should be noted that, when the normal button effect described above, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated, it is shown that the display effect and the sound effect are executed without setting the delay period. The delay period may be set to 0 second. With this configuration, when the button effect is set, the same processing is executed when the normal button effect is set and when the delayed button effect is set. Therefore, the processing is performed depending on the type of the button effect. Since the button effect can be set without changing the contents, the control process can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 147 (c), the description is continued. In the example shown in FIG. 147 (c), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period is 0.5 seconds, and the operation effective period ends (0.8 seconds) during the delay period (0.8 seconds). Therefore, if the button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed during the delay period, the remaining period display area 804b of the time gauge 804 disappears during the delay period, and an unnatural impression is executed. There was a problem that it would end up. On the other hand, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation valid period ends (passes) during the delay period, a special effect (see FIG. 138) is given during the delay period (period D). It is configured to run.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the delay period is set during the button effect and the operation timing of the frame button 22, so that the frame button 22 is motivated by the player. Can be operated. In this control example, the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is set in advance, that is, whether or not the button effect is executed as the fluctuating effect executed this time at the time when the fluctuating effect is executed, and whether or not the delay period is set. , And when the frame button 22 is operated during the button effect, it is configured to execute the effect based on the content of the button effect that has been determined in advance, but not limited to this, for example, The presence / absence of the button effect is determined only when the variable effect is executed, and the presence / absence of the delayed effect and the delay mode (delay target, delay period) are determined when the frame button 22 is operated during the button effect. In this case, for example, a plurality of operations can be performed with respect to the button effect, and the execution probability and the delay mode of the delayed effect are determined according to the operation content executed during the button effect. Different It not may be determined configured to be able to.

  Specifically, the delay period is set more easily when the player performs the second operation than when the player performs the first operation, or the delay period is set based on the first operation. The case may be configured to increase the possibility that the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit, as compared to the case where the delay period is set based on the second operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the expectation and the execution frequency of the delayed effect different according to the operation content executed by the player.

  In this control example, a period of 5 seconds (5 seconds in the latter half of the button effect period) is provided as a result display period during which the operation result display for displaying the effect result of the button effect is displayed, and during the operation effective period. The frame operation button 22 is operated to display the operation result display until the result display period elapses after the effect result is displayed. Thus, by configuring the result display period to be longer than the longest period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), the operation valid Even when the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the period and the longest delay period is set, the period in which the operation result display is displayed can be secured, so that the player can easily perform the effect. You can

  In this control example, since the effect mode of the delayed effect is set before the button effect is executed, even if the same delayed period is set, the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is set. The display period of the operation result display varies depending on the operation timing of. Therefore, for example, when a specific animation display is performed as the operation result display, it is necessary to change the display mode of the animation according to the length of the display period of the operation result display. In other words, as a display mode of the operation result display, for example, when an animation of 1 second is executed, if the display period of the operation result display is other than a multiple of 1 second, the operation result display ends during the animation. As a result, the effect of production may be lowered.

  In this case, a method of performing control for extending or shortening the display period of the operation result display according to the timing when the animation being executed ends is conceivable. As a result, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation is ended. However, if the length of the display period of the operation result display is changed, the effect period of the variation effect executed after the display period of the operation result display must also be changed, and the variation effect as a whole is changed. There was a risk that the production of the sound would feel uncomfortable.

  In order to solve such a problem, for example, at the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the remaining period of the operation valid period or the remaining period of the button effect is determined, and based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the length of the delay period. Specifically, a basic delay period (a delay period set in advance as a variation effect) is set according to the operation timing of the frame button 22 so that the display period of the operation result display is a multiple of 1 second. The correction delay period may be added and set. With this configuration, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation is ended. Moreover, since a different delay period is set depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as another method, for example, when an animation is being executed at the timing when the display period of the operation result display is finished, the remaining animations are overlapped and executed while executing the fluctuating effect. Is also good. In this case, since the player is more interested in the variation effect that is newly executed than the animation, the area in which the animation is displayed is smaller than that during the display period of the operation result display, and the transparency of the animation is higher than that of the animation. It may be configured to execute the rest of the animation while performing display control such as increasing.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147, since the delay effect can be executed in the middle period of the special symbol variation, even when the delay period is set by the delay effect, the set delay is set. Regardless of the length of the period, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the variable display so as to stop and display the display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation, for example, the special symbol When the delay effect can be executed in the fluctuation effect executed immediately before the fluctuation stop timing, the delay effect may be executed across the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation.

  In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation (stop timing of the fluctuation effect), it is determined whether or not the delay period is set, and when the delay period is set, Until the delay period elapses (end), the display of the special symbol fluctuation may be stopped or displayed, or the display may be controlled not to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol lottery). In this case, after the special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, if it is determined that the next special symbol fluctuation will be executed, the predetermined period from the start of the next special symbol fluctuation is used. By executing the variation effect (delay effect) to show the last special symbol variation lottery result, if the next special symbol variation is not executed, use the standby period until the demo screen is displayed. Execute the variation effect (delay effect) to show the lottery result of the special symbol variation, and when the jackpot game is started, use the period until the first round game is started (opening period) It may be configured to execute the variation effect (delay effect) for indicating the last lottery result of the special symbol variation.

  In addition, the length of the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (fixed display period) may be configured to be longer than the longest period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period. In this case, Fixed display of a period (1.8 seconds) that is the sum of the minimum period (for example, 0.3 seconds) required to confirm and display the special symbol and the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as a delay period. It may be set as a period. In addition, the fixed display period of the special symbol fluctuation may be configured to be long only when the delay effect can be executed as the fluctuation effect.

  As described above, when performing delayed production using another production period (next variation display period, standby period, jackpot game period, fixed display period), the actual game contents executed during that production period Should be displayed so that the player can grasp. As a result, the player can understand the actual contents of the game, and it is possible to prevent the unintended game from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, a flow of effects executed in the collective effect (see FIGS. 139 to 141) and the battle effect (see FIGS. 142 to 144) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 148, this control example is configured to execute the collective production and the battle production during one variation production period, and according to the length of the variation production period, that is, the variation pattern. , The production period of the collective production (the number of times the production for acquiring a character is executed) is defined in advance. Further, a plurality of execution timings of the collective effect in the variable effect can be set, and as shown in FIG. 148 (a), when the collective effect is executed from the start timing of the variable effect, the previous special symbol fluctuation Display mode showing the result of the variation effect corresponding to (special figure variation first time), that is, the "large set" is stopped and displayed as the stop display aspect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special figure variation The special symbol variation (second special symbol variation second time) in the effect mode is started (when the variable effect is started), and the collective effect is executed. With such a configuration, as compared with the case where the collective effect is executed from the middle of the second special effect variation (see FIG. 148 (b)), the timing for ending the collective effect is the same, that is, In the case where the battle production and the various reach productions in the same period are executed in the second special production, the production period of the collective production can be different.

  In this case, for example, at least before the special figure variation second time is executed, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure variation second time is determined in advance based on the winning information, and the result of the preliminary determination In the case where is a big hit, it is preferable that the effect mode shown in (FIG. 148 (a)) is easily set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, in addition to the configuration in which the start timing of the group production is made different, it is preferable that a plurality of end timings of the group production can be set. When the collective effect is executed from the start timing of the variable effect as the variable effect, and when the collective effect is executed from the midway timing of the variable effect as the variable effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation having the variable time of 90 seconds. Thus, it is preferable that the collective effect of the same length (the number of times the effect for acquiring the character is executed) is executed. With such a configuration, when the collective effect is executed, the player can be interested in the length of the variable effect period, and the same effect of the collective effect can be changed in different variable effect periods. It is possible to use it for an effect, and it is possible to simplify the control processing for executing the variable effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a flow of setting the content of the battle effect will be described. In this control example, the group effect and the battle effect are configured to be executable using one special symbol variation (special symbol variation) period. That is, it is configured to determine the effect result of the battle effect and the effect result of the collective effect according to the result of the one special symbol lottery. That is, when the special figure fluctuation is started (when the fluctuation effect is started), the effect mode of the battle effect is determined.

  Specifically, the battle period (number of attacks) and the effect result (enemy HP, remaining HP) are determined as the effect mode of the battle effect based on the change pattern (change time) for which the variable effect is determined. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the collective production and the battle production in the production mode corresponding to the production result of the battle production.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the production mode of the battle effect may be determined after the end of the collective effect based on the effect result of the collective effect. In this case, for example, in the case where the number of characters that can be acquired in the collective effect is changed according to the operation result of the operation means during the collective effect, the number of characters that can be acquired during the collective effect can be changed. Even when configured, the battle effect corresponding to the collective effect can be suitably executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a flow of the pseudo out effect (see FIG. 145) will be described. In this control example, in the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, in order to prevent the period in which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed from continuing for a long time, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is out It is configured such that a specific deviation variation pattern in which a fluctuation time of (14 seconds) is set is selected, and a specific deviation effect (14 seconds) is executed as a variation performance corresponding to the specific deviation variation pattern. (See FIG. 150 (a)).

  However, in the specific deviation effect, the fluctuation effect in which the third symbol does not reach the reach state is executed for a predetermined period, and before the fluctuation effect ends, the fluctuation effect currently being executed is the specific deviation effect. It was something that the player could easily understand. That is, there is a problem that the player is easily discriminated that the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the special figure reservation number is 0 is out, and the motivation for the game is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation of 14 seconds or more is selected, a part of the variation time is used to execute the above-described specific deviation effect. It is configured (see FIG. 150 (c)). Further, when the variation pattern having the variation time of 28 seconds is selected, the specific deviation effect is configured to be executed twice (see FIG. 150 (b)).

  In the present control example configured in this manner, even when the player determines that the specific off-effect has been executed, the timing at which the effect result of the specific off-effect is displayed and the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is difficult to predict whether or not the displayed timing matches. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is missed until the specific missed effect is finished, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 145, when the special deviation effect is executed at a different stop display timing of the special symbol lottery (the first special deviation effect in FIG. 150 (b), FIG. In (c) specific deviation effect), the third symbol is configured to swing (temporarily stop) and displayed, but the invention is not limited to this, and a specific deviation effect that is executed when deviation of 14 seconds The same effect data may be used to execute the same effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), in the case where the specific deviation effect is executed twice during one special figure fluctuation period, for example, in accordance with the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation for 14 seconds is performed. When the effect (the first specific deviation effect) is set and it is determined that the first specific deviation effect is finished, the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is determined, and when the determination result is 14 seconds or more, It may be configured to execute the variation effect (second specific deviation effect) for 14 seconds again.

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to previously store the effect data for 28 seconds in which the specific out-of-specification effect is executed twice, so that the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced. In addition, by allowing the setting process of the variation effect corresponding to one special figure variation period to be set a plurality of times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), while the variation effect of the first half period is being executed. Since it is possible to change the effect mode in the latter half period based on the effect condition established in (1), it is possible to enhance the effect effect.

  Further, as described above, by using a configuration in which the setting process of the variation effect corresponding to one special figure variation period can be set a plurality of times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), FIG. In the case of setting the variable effect that becomes the flow of, first, only the variable effect of 30 seconds in the second half period (normal hit effect) and the interrupt effect of 16 seconds in the first half period are determined, and the interrupt effect is being executed. In a case where a predetermined effect condition (for example, a new special figure holding ball has not been acquired) is satisfied, it is preferable to set the specific off effect. With this configuration, the special figure holding ball is 0 when the special figure change is started, and the special figure change is started even when the execution condition of the specific deviation effect is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the execution of the specific deviation effect when a new special figure hold is acquired at the time point 16 seconds have elapsed from the above.

<About the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the flow of the game in this control example will be described. FIG. 151 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as shown in FIG. 151, as a game state, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) and a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, normal) High probability state of the symbol), and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) are configured so that three types of game states can be set, and the initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped) In this state, or in the state after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (pressed), the normal state is set.

  Then, during the normal state, a game mainly performed by the first special symbol lottery executed by inserting the ball into the first ball inlet 64 is executed. In the normal state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/300, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) Or "big hit B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected. When "big hit B" is selected, the big hit game (probability change big hit game) that allows the ball to easily pass to a specific area (probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the big hit game is executed, and "big hit A" When is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to a specific area (probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game is executed.

  Then, when the ball passes a specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this probability change state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) reaches 200 times, or when the jackpot is won, the ending condition is satisfied, and the game state shifts to another game state. Specifically, in the state where the probability change state is set, if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 200 times, the game state becomes the normal state by the time the 201st special symbol lottery is executed. Will be migrated. In this control example, the process of transitioning the game state from the probability variation state to the normal state, that is, the process of transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal symbol of the normal symbol The process of shifting to the low probability state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 201st special symbol lottery is the special symbol. High probability state, it is good if it is not executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, for example, immediately after executing the 200th special symbol lottery (at the start of the 200th special symbol fluctuation) Alternatively, the process may be moved to immediately before the execution of the 201st special symbol lottery (the execution condition of the 201st special symbol lottery is satisfied, but the timing when the special symbol lottery is not executed).

  Furthermore, the timing of shifting the probability state of the special symbol and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal symbol may be different, for example, the high probability of the special symbol immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed. Only the state may be shifted to the low probability state, and after the result of the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be shifted to the low probability state. By configuring in this way, during the 200th special symbol variation period, it is possible to be in a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state.

  Since the probability change state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be in an open state by a game per ordinary figure than a normal state which is a low probability state of a normal symbol, and a game mainly on the second special symbol lottery. Is executed. In the probability change state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/100, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, "bonus C" is the jackpot type. To be selected.

  The "big hit C" is a big hit type in which a probability variation big hit game of 16 rounds is executed. That is, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the probability of executing the probability variation jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, in detail, in the present control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the 6 round game is always executed, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the 16 round game is always executed. To be done. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

  Next, a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) will be described. If you win the "big hit A" in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, or if you can not pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variation big hit game , Time saving state is set. This time saving state is configured to disappear when the number of special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100 times or when the jackpot is won before reaching 100 times. . In other words, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished (if you win the jackpot A), the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the jackpot game is finished (time saving. 100 times is set).

  During this time saving state, since it is a gaming state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set similarly to the above-mentioned probability variation state, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened, and a game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. It becomes a state. Further, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as the normal state. Therefore, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed as compared with the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower jackpot probability than the probability changing state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as the probability changing state. That is, in terms of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability changing state. In this control example, the probability change state and the time saving state are configured so that the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, during the probability change state. The variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed and the variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state are made different, for example, during the probability variation state, the variation time is shorter than during the normal state. The special symbol variation may be configured to be executable.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 152, main controller 110 is equipped with MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main controller 110, the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device 83 are executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 153, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, and the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, out-of-reach out-of-reach type, out-of-reach type), variation type counter used in variation pattern selection CS1 and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 187). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the lottery right (reserved ball) of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol Special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing lottery rights (holding balls) are provided respectively, and first special symbol and second special A special symbol holding ball execution area common to the symbols is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation are adjusted in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a sphere passes through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the gate 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 599) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 599 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 599). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 599, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 599. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 187).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 155 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the acquired per first random number counter. When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the first random number table 202a is a low probability of a special symbol (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability that the special symbol is a big jackpot than the low probability (a special symbol). The period (which is a high probability state of) and the value (number) of the random numbers that are jackpots are set to be different.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 155 (a)) for high probability of special symbols and the first per random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols (see FIG. 155 (a)) Provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at a timing.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Become. In this control example, three types of "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C" are set, and one of them is determined by the first hit type counter C2. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 599. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are two random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "0, 1" is the first per random number for low probability. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 600, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “2/600 (1/300)”. Becomes

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are six random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value "0-5" is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. . In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 600, and the total number of random number values for jackpots is 6, so the probability of jackpots for special symbols is "6/600 (1/100)". Becomes

  In the present control example, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. It is configured such that the same random number value is specified by the numerical value. With such a configuration, for example, when "0" is acquired as the value of the first random number counter C1, the gaming state when executing the jackpot determination using the value of the first random number counter C1 Regardless, you can win the jackpot. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to win the jackpot is acquired when the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and the reserved ball of the special symbol is obtained. Since it can be easily distinguished before the special symbol lottery is executed, the suggestive effect for suggesting that the jackpot will be determined later can be executed without knowing the game state, and the effect of the effect can be achieved. Can be increased.

  It should be noted that the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability does not overlap with the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the special symbol has a high probability. It may be configured. In this case, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), a random number value determined as a big hit (the value of the first random number counter C1) ) Are different, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol. Therefore, than when you specify the random number that is determined as a big hit at the time of high probability of the special symbol (high-probability state) and the low probability of the special symbol (low-probability state), the jackpot is illegally assigned. It is possible to suppress the act that is done.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And as shown in FIG. 155 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b for determining the big hit type, the data table referred to in association with the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data table to be referred to corresponding to the lottery is defined.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (b). FIG. 155 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big hit type set when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and the type of the special symbol and the acquired first hit type. Different jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) are selected based on the value of the counter C2.

  In this control example, the game content (the number of rounds) of the big hit game and the game state set after the big hit game are configured to be different according to the set big hit type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, who is playing the game aiming for the jackpot win, interested not only in the jackpot win but also in the jackpot type to be set. Further, in the present control example, it is configured such that a privilege having a different degree of advantage is given to the player depending on the type of jackpot that is set. As a result, the player can be more interested in the jackpot type to be set.

  Next, the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 155 (b). The type of the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol lottery (symbol type) will be, In the case of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the big hit type "big hit A" is "50 to 99". The jackpot type “jackpot B” is defined in each range. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type “big jackpot C” is defined regardless of the acquired first hit type counter C2 value.

  When "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 6 rounds, and the big hit game (normally 6R big hit game) in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area (V winning hole) during the big hit game is executed. It And, if the ball does not win V during the big hit game, after the big hit game, a special symbol lottery with a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 100 times. In order to set the game state (100 times / hours) which continues until, the value of the hour / hour counter 203u is set to "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "0". On the other hand, when the ball wins V during the big hit game, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is a gaming state that continues until 200 times of special symbol lottery is executed ( In order to set the latent probability 200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "0", and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "200".

  In other words, the above-mentioned "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the normal big hit game is executed in which the ball is hard to pass through the specific area (V winning hole) during the big hit game, and when the game is normally executed. Does not allow the ball to pass through the V winning opening during the jackpot game. However, when an illegal game during the jackpot game, for example, a game in which the structure in the variable winning device 65 is destroyed and the ball is forcibly V-winned is executed, the ball is hit during the jackpot game of "jackpot A". May pass through a specific area (V winning opening). In this control example, when a ball is won by an illegal game, the player is more likely to play the game than the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) which is the most advantageous game state for the player. It is configured to set a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) as a disadvantageous game state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on the player who has executed the illegal game.

  Further, as a penalty imposed on a player who has executed an illegal game, for example, a fraudulent fluctuation pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation executed when a latent state is set. Also, for example, when a game state (for example, a latent state) that cannot be set when a normal game is executed is set, a variation pattern of 10 minutes variation time is selected. It may be configured to. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being efficiently executed for the player who has executed the illegal game.

  In this control example, the ease of passage of the ball to the V winning opening is made different according to the type of jackpot game to be executed, but no matter what type of jackpot game is being executed, When the ball enters the specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the ball enters the V winning opening during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set after the jackpot game is over.

  When "big hit B" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 6 rounds, and the big hit game (probability variation 6R big hit game) in which the ball easily passes the specific area (V winning hole) during the big hit game is executed. It And, if the ball wins V during the big hit game, the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is a game state that continues until 200 special symbol lottery is executed (probability variation). In order to set (200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "200" and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "200". On the other hand, if the ball does not win the V prize during the big hit game, after the big hit game, a special symbol lottery with a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 100 times. In order to set the game state (100 times / hours) which continues until, the value of the hour / hour counter 203u is set to "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "0".

  When "big hit C" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 16 rounds, and the big hit game (probability variation 16R big hit game) in which the ball easily passes the specific area (V winning opening) during the big hit game is executed. It And, if the ball wins V during the big hit game, the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is a game state that continues until 200 special symbol lottery is executed (probability variation). In order to set (200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "200" and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "200". On the other hand, if the ball does not win the V prize during the big hit game, after the big hit game, a special symbol lottery with a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 100 times. In order to set the game state (100 times / hours) which continues until, the value of the hour / hour counter 203u is set to "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to "0".

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is such that one of the three types of jackpots is determined by the type of the special symbol that is won the jackpot and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Is configured. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different jackpot types that are selected when the determination result is a big hit, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol The jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, that is, the jackpot type in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed, is more easily selected than when the jackpot is won in the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the lottery is being executed.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured so that it is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 described above determine a rough change mode. Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, a short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, super reach, etc. The display mode is determined. Then, based on the variation mode determined by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the third lamp display device 81 displays the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. 3 The reach type of the symbol and the detailed pattern variation mode are determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 187) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) that stores the random number value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 156, in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a normal table 202d1 used in a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state) and a high probability state of a normal symbol (time saving state, probability changing state) The time / probability change table 202d2 used is defined, and the variation pattern is selected using the corresponding data table according to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to be executed efficiently, as compared to the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The variation pattern having a shorter variation time is selected more easily when the variation pattern is selected using the time saving / probability variation table 202d2 than when the variation pattern is selected using the usage table 202d1. .

  In this control example, the variation pattern is selected using the same data table (time saving / probability variation table 202d2) when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and when the probability variation state is set. With this configuration, the player is not able to understand the currently set gaming state based on the selected variation pattern. Then, the player is made to understand the game state currently set by various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  If the high probability state of the normal symbol is set rather than the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is limited to this if the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be selected using different data tables for the time saving state and the probability variation state. Further, compared with the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the case where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is sufficient if the special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed, for example, Of the various variation patterns defined in the data table (normal table 202d1) used when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is higher than the variation pattern having the longest variation time. Among the various fluctuation patterns defined in the data table (time saving / probability variation table 202d2) used when is set, the fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time may be defined longer. .

  The details of selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later will be described in more detail. In the main control device 110, the win / fail judgment result, the number of holding balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type Based on the value of the counter CS1, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super-reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are decided, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the decision contents is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the contents of various tables defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d used when the main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 157 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. In the normal table 202d1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbols, and the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202d2. In the time saving / probability variation table 202d2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a value with the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

  In this control example, the fluctuation pattern is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 or the first hit type selection table 202b. The variation patterns may be defined in association with the jackpot types selected by.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. The value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated in each timer interrupt process in this control example, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. Further, this second random number table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)) is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which a normal symbol is in a normal state), and a probability of being a normal symbol from the time of the low probability. High probability time (period of time saving state of normal symbol) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers included in each is set differently.

  Here, in the present control example, in the normal figure per game executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 125) associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open state. The game to be executed is executed. That is, normally, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the closed state that restricts the ball from entering the second ball inlet 640, the second ball is inserted when the game is executed as a universal figure. The normal game is executed so that the ball can be changed into an open state that allows the ball to enter the mouth 640. With this configuration, it is possible to change the ease with which the balls enter the second entrance 640 depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, depending on the result of the normal symbol lottery, the frequency at which the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be changed, so that the ordinary symbol is executed independently A lottery and a special symbol lottery can be associated with the game.

  Further, in this control example, the game contents of the game per ordinary figure are configured to be different according to the set game state, and specifically, a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. In the case where the universal figure hitting game is executed, the ball enters the second entrance 640 than the case where the ordinary figure hitting game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured so that a game can be executed per ordinary figure.

  More specifically, when a normal figure hit game is executed in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a long hit is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened with an opening time of 4 seconds. , When the normal symbol hit game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the short hit is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened with the opening time of 0.2 seconds. I am configuring. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is easier to win in the normal symbol lottery than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and Since it is possible to easily enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in the winning game, it is possible to cause the player to eagerly perform the game for executing the second special symbol lottery.

  In addition, in this control example, in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, only the short hit is configured to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases when winning per figure, it may be configured so that the above-mentioned long-winning per-universal-game per game is executed, or it is executed in a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. In a part of the winning game, the above-mentioned short-game hitting per game may be executed. In addition, in the present control example, there are two kinds of game types of the per-universal-game per short game and per-long per game, but three or more per-universal-game per game type may be set.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 187).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 152, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 153, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 187) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 186). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a), in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the above-described first random number table 202a (see FIG. 155), first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 155), and A random number table 202c per 2 (see FIG. 155) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game (for example, operation scenario data of the jackpot game), programs, and the like, in addition to the above.

  For example, in the operation scenario data of the jackpot game, the game operation content during the jackpot game is defined in the data table in association with the determined hit type, and based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table. It is configured such that the movable control of various devices (variable winning device 65 and the like) during the jackpot game is executed.

  Also, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, as shown in FIG. 154 (b), a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, and operation counter 203k A notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203p, a probability variation valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, a time saving counter 203u, and other memory. It has an area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and in each of these areas, The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored are shifted. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the holding area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four times the lottery right of the first special symbol lottery executed based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). This special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, during the special symbol fluctuation, or during the jackpot game, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a new first special When the lottery right of the symbol middle line is acquired, 1 is added until the maximum value of 4 is reached. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed.

  The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a holding sphere number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the holding balls based on winning in the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. As a result, the special display 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display holding ball number managed by the special design 2 holding ball number counter 223b is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls displayed in the actual variable display has deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and holds the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and 1 is added to the maximum value 4 each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding spheres for variable display increases. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary is acquired, The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the ball enters (passes) the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. ) Or not. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (passed) the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as V prize), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 191). . On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1202 in FIG. 190), and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the probability variation counter 203t is set to 200 and then turned OFF. It is set (see S1205 in FIG. 190). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that it has passed, the probability variation setting flag 203h May be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203h described later has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of spheres that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (flowed down in a specific area) in one round (one round of jackpots in this control example) during a big hit game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by incrementing it by 1 when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 (wins V). In addition, after executing the determination processing as to whether the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and that the winning of the specific winning opening 65a has been detected. Based on this, it is updated by adding one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is for counting (counting) the operation time of various devices (opening / closing door 65f, switching valve 65h) that are variably controlled during the jackpot game, and specifically, a flow path solenoid (probability change). This is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the solenoid 65k is turned on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 5 rounds in the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoids 65k are set in the jackpot B and the jackpot C based on the start of 5 rounds. Set on for 5 seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set as the start data of 5 rounds in the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the big hit B and the big hit C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" in the present control example) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, a value corresponding to 1 second is set in the notification counter 203m at the end timing of the fourth round (10 balls won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 each time the jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (see S904 in FIG. 188) is executed. Based on the value of the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described process for outputting the voice.

  With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the fifth round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, as will be described later in detail, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. Since the passage solenoid 65k operates in the fifth round, if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the fifth round is finished, the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display. Therefore, during the interval period, the player is informed to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed content, and divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In addition, in the present control example, by notifying the third symbol display device 81 to be shown, the switching member 65h is configured to divert the player's attention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so as to look at it. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like during the four rounds and informing the player to read it with a mobile phone. In the present control example, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed, the above-mentioned distracting effect is executed for the longest time (5 seconds from the start of five rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player determines the jackpot type of the jackpot game of this time based on the length of the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a ball-shedding period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed after one round is completed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that the ball is out of the ball. While the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. Is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for discharging the ball won in the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is completed and the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. Is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. It If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch. The configuration may not be set to. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being improperly added.

  The probability variation valid flag 203q is when the game ball passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3) after the switching member 65h switches the ball to a specific area (probability variation switch 65e3) that cannot be distributed (in case of V winning). ) Is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (V winning) is valid. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3).

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. The probability variation valid timer 203r can determine the period necessary for the switching member 65h to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 normally after the switching of the specific region (the probability variation switch 65e3) to an arrangement in which the sphere cannot flow down. In the present control example, the time required for the ball reaching the switching member 65h to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the certain area (probability variation switch 65e3) is passed thereafter (V winning), it is determined to be incorrect and it is determined to be passed. do not do.

  As a result, the ball is illegally put into a specific area (probability change switch 65e3) (V prize), the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3, or the magnetic sensor is passed by radio waves or the like. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, which causes false detection.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning a prize device 65 in one round. The discharged number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharged number match.

  The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for indicating a state where a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. This probability variation counter 203t is set to a value after the jackpot game is over, based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3) during the jackpot game (see S1203 in FIG. 190). Then, each time the special symbol lottery is executed (variation time of the special symbol fluctuation elapses, each time the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed), the value set is subtracted by 1. Also, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the big hit game, so that it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the big hit game.

  In this control example, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set, and based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted, and the probability variation counter 203t. When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, but not limited to this, for example, the next big hit game Until it is executed (until the big hit), the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the probability variation counter 203t may be set to "10000".

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (fluctuation). Although only the condition to be subtracted is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning), or the ordinary symbol lottery The value of the probability variation counter 203t may be subtracted even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning per special universal figure).

  Furthermore, the value set in the probability variation counter 203t may be different based on the winning jackpot type and the passing state of the ball to the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3), or the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted. Similarly, the value of the probability variation counter 203t may be configured to be subtractable under conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, or when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t is satisfied, the probability variation counter 203t. A plurality of values of may be subtracted at one time. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special symbol continues, so that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol can be watched without getting tired. You can

  Further, in this control example, as a condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (fluctuation). Although only the conditions are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted, for example, when an ending condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied. You may comprise. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning), or of the ordinary symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special public figure), the value of the probability variation counter 203t may be subtracted, or the ball may be a specific entrance (for example, The value of the probability variation counter 203t may be subtracted based on the fact that the player has entered the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the like.

  In addition, in the present control example, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is configured to be decremented by one, but a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 203t are collected (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that has been satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed so that the value of the probability variation counter 203t becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the probability variation counter 203t. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the probability variation state will continue, and to make the player interested in the game in the probability variation state.

  Further, the condition for ending the probability variation state may be different depending on the content (big hit type) of the condition for setting the probability variation state. As a result, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The time saving counter 203u is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is set. At the time saving counter 203u, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot game is over (see S1205 in FIG. 190). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the big hit game, so that it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set, and based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted, and the time saving counter 203u. When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, and is configured to shift to the low probability state of the normal symbol, but is not limited to this, for example, the next big hit game Until the is executed (until the jackpot is won), the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the time saving counter 203u may be set to "10000".

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u, the value of the time saving counter 203h based on the number of special symbol lottery (fluctuation) Although only the condition to be subtracted is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted, for example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning), or the ordinary symbol lottery The value of the time saving counter 203u may be subtracted even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning per special universal figure).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203u is decremented by one, but a plurality of values of the time saving counter 203u are collected according to the type of the end condition that has been satisfied (for example, 2). The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed so that the value of the time saving counter 203u becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203u. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state continues, and to make the player interested in the game during the time-saving state.

  Furthermore, the condition for ending the time saving state may be different depending on the content (big hit type) of the condition for setting the time saving state. As a result, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 152, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 185) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) under the condition. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), a variation effect pattern selection table 222a, a continuous hit effect selection table 222b, a random display selection table 222c, a delay effect selection table 222d, and a collective effect selection table 222e. , And a battle effect selection table 222f are stored.

  The variation effect pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set respectively corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a fluctuation value of 1 is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection not shown.

  Here, the contents of the variation effect pattern selection table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation effect pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 160A, the variation effect pattern selection table 222a is referred to when the variation pattern command (normal variation pattern command) selected by the main control device 110 using the normal table 202d1 is received. The time reduction / probability variation reference that is made when the variation pattern command (time reduction / variation pattern command) selected by the main control device 110 using the normal effect pattern table 222a1 and the time reduction / probability variation table 202d2 is received. And an effect pattern table 222a2.

  In each effect pattern table, various effect data corresponding to the variation pattern command (fluctuation time) selected by the main control device 110 is defined, and the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is defined. It is used when selecting the effect contents.

  Next, the contents of the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the normal effect pattern table 222a1, the type of the normal time variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of corresponding special symbols held, and the acquired first effect Various effect patterns (variable effects) are defined in correspondence with the value of the counter 223p1. Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 160 (b), for the sake of convenience of description, there is a range indicated as "various reach effects" as an effect pattern, but this is actually according to the acquired first effect counter 223p1. It indicates that different types of effect patterns are defined.

  More specifically, the contents defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described. The hit / miss determination result is “hit (big hit)”, and the type of the received variation pattern is “type A (60 seconds)”. When the number of pending special symbols is “0”, regardless of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, “pseudo-off effect” is used as an effect pattern, and the number of pending special symbols is “1 to 3”. In the case of “,” “various reach effects” according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223p1 are defined. Moreover, when the type of the received variation pattern is “type B (90 seconds)” and the number of holding of the corresponding special symbols is “0 to 3”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is “0 to 149”. "Various reach productions" are defined in the range of "", and "series accessory productions" are defined in the range of "150 to 198".

  Here, when the "pseudo off effect" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect including the specific off effect for 14 seconds (see FIG. 145 (a)) is executed. With this configuration, since the number of reserved special symbols is "0", the result of the special symbol lottery is finally a big hit, while making the player think that the non-specification effect has been executed. It is possible to provide the player with a production result indicating. Therefore, even if the 14-second specific deviation effect that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is missed, the lottery result can leave the possibility of a big hit, so the content of the variable effect that is executed Thus, it is possible to prevent the result of the special symbol lottery from being grasped in advance.

  In addition, when "series accessory effect" is selected as the effect pattern, an effect using a plurality of effect devices included in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. Although a detailed description of this effect device is omitted, it is a movable means (a member for effect that operates using an electric drive source) provided in the pachinko machine 10, and effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Is a device that is movable from at least a first position to a second position that is different from the first position. Some of these effect devices require execution of a preparatory operation (for example, an operation for moving to a standby position) in advance in order to actually move them to different positions. Therefore, as in this control example, it is possible to surely execute the preparatory operation by setting as the effect pattern of the variation effect. It should be noted that, for the effect device requiring the preparation operation, an effect pattern for executing only the preparation operation may be provided other than the case where the effect is actually executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from previously ascertaining whether or not the effect using the effect device is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation operation.

  In the case where the judgment result is “out”, the type of the received variation pattern is “type D (14 seconds)”, and the number of holding of the corresponding special symbol is “0”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 Regardless, as the production pattern, "specific deviation production" is acquired when the type of the received variation pattern is "type E (28 seconds)" and the number of holding of the corresponding special symbol is "0 to 3". Regardless of the value of the first effect counter 223p1, as the effect pattern, "second non-specific effect", the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0". In the case of "~ 3", "various reach effects" according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of corresponding special symbols to be held If is "0-3", get In the case of "various reach effects" according to the value of the first effect counter 223p1, the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the corresponding number of reserved special symbols is "0 to 3" In the range of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 of "0 to 194", "various reach effects" are defined, and in the range of "195 to 198", "series accessory effect" is specified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the time reduction / probability variation effect effect pattern table 222a2 will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time reduction / probability change effect production pattern table 222a2. As shown in FIG. 161, in the time reduction / probability variation effect pattern table 222a2, the type of time saving time variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the number of corresponding special symbols held, and the acquired first effect counter Various effect patterns (variable effects) are defined in correspondence with the value of 223p1. Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 161, for convenience of description, there is a range indicated as "various reach effects" as an effect pattern, but this is actually a different type depending on the acquired first effect counter 223p1. Shows that the effect pattern is defined. Also, regarding the detailed contents that are defined, if the normal production pattern table 222a1 (see FIG. 160 (b)) described above is different from the specific distribution numerical value and the corresponding production pattern is different. However, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous hit effect selection table 222b is a continuous hit effect executed when "continuous hit effect" is selected as the variable effect pattern selected by the variable effect pattern selection table 222a based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110. This is for selecting a rendering mode, and includes an upper limit number selection table 222b1, an end number selection table 222b2, and a rendering result selection table 222b3.

  It should be noted that this "continuous hit effect" is included in the effect patterns described as "various reach effects" in the variable effect pattern selection table 222a described above with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. The production of the production content described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132 is executed.

  First, the contents of the upper limit number selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the upper limit number selection table 222 b 1. The upper limit number selection table 222b1 is referred to when selecting the number of operations (upper limit number) of the frame button 22 required to change to the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the continuous hit effect.

  Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is “win (big hit)” and the reach type is “SP reach”, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2 is “0 to 39”. In this case, “20” is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "0 body". When the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2 is "40 to 198", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "5 bodies".

  When the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is “win (big hit)” and the reach type is “super reach”, the upper limit number of times is “irrespective of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2. 15 "is selected. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

  Here, the case where the final variable mode is "11 to 40 bodies" is a case where a specific numerical value is not determined when selecting the mode of continuous hitting performance, and only a possible range is selected. When this “11 to 40 bodies” is selected, when the operation command for the frame button 22 is received on the display control device 114 side, the variable mode being displayed is set within the range in which the variable mode currently displayed does not revert. It is configured such that it is determined whether or not the variable is made, and when the determination is won, the variable mode is made variable within the range described above. As described above, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 so as not to determine the details of the effect mode of the continuous hit effect, it is possible to give variations to the effect mode of the continuous hit effect that is actually executed.

  When the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is “out” and the reach type is “SP reach”, “15” is selected as the upper limit number of times, regardless of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2. . In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "5 bodies". When the reach type is “super reach”, “15” is selected as the upper limit number regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies". When the reach type is “other than reach”, “10” is selected as the upper limit number of times, regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies".

  Next, the contents of the end count selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the end count selection table 222b2. The end number selection table 222b2 is for selecting an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the continuous hit effect after the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect reaches the upper limit number of times. In the present control example, as the ending condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the continuous hitting effect, it is possible to set the operation number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated, and FIG. ), The different number of finishes is defined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the set upper limit number, and the acquired value of the third effect counter 223p3.

  FIG. 163 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect result selection table 222b3. The effect result selection table 222b3 is a data table used when selecting the effect result of the continuous hit effect, and is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery, whether the effect period of the continuous hit effect is shortened, and the set upper limit number. It is regulated that different effect results are selected.

  The random display selection table 222c has a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the effect icon storage area 222c1 and the display order selection table 222c2. , A permutation storage area 222c3, a figurative aspect selection table 222c4, and a display number selection table 222c5.

  The effect icon storage area 222c1 is a storage area in which information corresponding to various icons used in the random display effect is stored. Here, the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), the effect icon storage area 222c1 is formed by sequentially arranging six areas, that is, a first area za1 to a sixth area za6.

  Then, one icon information is stored for each area. Specifically, the first area za1 has "square" icon information, the second area za2 has "triangular" icon information, and the third area za3 has "square" icon information. "Round shape" icon information is stored in the 4th area, "diamond shape" icon information is stored in the 5th area, and "V sign shape" icon information is stored in the 6th area.

  In this control example, icon information is stored in each area formed in the icon storage area 222c1, and each area is ordered. Then, when determining the effect mode of the random display effect, the icons are displayed according to the order of the respective areas of the icon storage area 222c1. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect according to a predetermined rule while giving the icon display content randomness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the effect contents are completely randomly set, it is possible to easily execute the effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In FIG. 164 (b), although only one area range (first area za1 to sixth area za6) is described as the effect icon storage area 222c1, it is actually stored in association with each area. Although it has a plurality of area ranges with different icon information, description thereof will be omitted for convenience of description. As described above, the effect icon storage area 222c1 is provided with a plurality of area ranges, and when the effect mode of the random display effect is selected, the area range to be used is made different, so that the random effect effect is greatly changed. Can be performed easily. For example, of a plurality of area ranges, provided with specific icon information that is stored only in a part of the area range, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, select the area range where the specific icon information is stored. It may be configured to make it easier. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot simply by displaying the icon corresponding to the specific icon information.

  Further, the icon information stored in the area range (first area za1 to sixth area za6) of the effect icon storage area 222c1 may be switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, as a predetermined switching condition, a switching condition that is satisfied when a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a clocking means capable of timing the current time on the pachinko machine 10 ( For example, the RTC) is mounted, and it is executed based on a switching condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 13:00) is reached, an operating means that the player can arbitrarily operate, and an operation on the operating means. In the pachinko machine 10 having the effect selecting means capable of selecting the effect mode of the effect, it is preferable to provide a switching condition established based on the operation of the operation means by the player. As a result, even if only one area range is provided, it is possible to make a variety of variations in the presentation mode.

  The display order selection table 222c2 is a data table used when selecting the display order of the icons to be displayed in the random display effect, and is an icon (first icon) first displayed in the random display effect. This is for selecting which area of the storage area 222c1.

  Here, the contents of the display order selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display order selection table 222c2. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in the display order selection table 222c2, based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the fourth effect counter 233p4, a different area (first area) corresponding to the head icon. za1 to sixth area za6) are selectable.

  In this control example, when the area (first area za1 to sixth area za6) corresponding to the head icon is selected, a predetermined order (first area za1 (A), second area za2 (B)) is selected from the area. , ..., the sixth area za6 (F), the first area za1 (A), ... are displayed in this order. Therefore, when “A” is selected as the top icon and when “C” is selected, the same display mode is displayed at the time when the first icon is displayed in the random display effect. Become. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the icons continuously displayed in the random display effect, specifically, the display mode of the second icon displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 164 (c), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is possible to make it easier to display the "V sign shape" icon as the leading icon than when it is out of alignment. Is configured as follows. Further, the ratio of selecting “C” is increased. Therefore, during the random display effect, the “V sign shape” icon is more likely to be displayed when the big hit is won than when the big hit is not won. Therefore, the “V-sign shape” icon is a specific icon that has a high jackpot expectation only when it is displayed.

  The permutation storage area 222c3 is a storage area in which information regarding the position where the icon is displayed is stored in the random display effect. In this control example, a plurality of orders (permutations) in which icons are displayed in the random display effect are prepared in advance, and when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, the icons are displayed along the selected permutation. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect according to a predetermined rule while giving the icon display order randomness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the effect contents are completely randomly set, it is possible to easily execute the effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), effect data (permutation data) corresponding to permutation A to permutation D is stored in the permutation storage area 222c3, and a display mode selection table 222c4 described later is displayed. The permutation data selected using is read out.

  Here, the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 165 (b). FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4. The ideographic mode selection table 222c4 is a data table used when selecting the icon display position in the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. 165 (b), the result of the special symbol lottery and the display order selection table 222c2. On the basis of the type of the top icon selected by using and the value of the fifth effect counter 223p5. It is configured such that different permutation data is selected. Then, the permutation data selected using this display mode selection table 222c4 is read from the permutation storage area 222c3, and is determined as the effect mode of the random display effect.

  The display number selection table 222c5 is a data table used when selecting the number of icons displayed in the random display effect. The contents of the display quantity selection table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display number selection table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 166, the display number selection table 222c5 is defined such that a different number is selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the sixth effect counter 223p6, and the result of the special symbol lottery. Each value is defined so that a large number can be selected more easily when the jackpot is a jackpot than when the jackpot is not a jackpot.

  With such a configuration, the more the many icons are displayed in the random display effect, the higher the expectation of the big win. As described above, in the random display effect in this control example, since a plurality of effect elements are independently selected and the effect mode in which the selection results are combined is determined, a small amount of effect data is generated. It is possible to increase the variation of the production mode by using the effect.

  Further, when selecting each effect element, whether or not the big hit is won is included in the selection condition. Therefore, even in the combined effect mode, the effect mode can be determined in a balance based on whether or not the big hit is won. For example, as for the icon to be displayed, the “V sign shape” icon is set to be displayed more easily at the beginning in the random display effect when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, Since it is set so that the number of icons displayed in the random display effect can be increased, in the random display effect that is executed, the case where the jackpot is won is more complex than the case where the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the “V sign shape” icon.

  The delay effect selection table 222d is a data table used when selecting the effect mode of the delay effect to be executed when the delay effect is determined as the variable effect pattern. The delay effect length and the target of the delay effect are selected. It is for selection.

  Here, the contents of the delay effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the delay effect selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 167, the delay effect selection table 222d defines different delay types corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7.

  In this control example, a plurality of delay periods (times) can be selected when the delay effect is executed. And, the expectation of jackpot winning is different depending on the length of the delay period. That is, as the player has more experience in playing, it becomes possible to gradually determine the presence or absence of the delayed effect due to the relationship with other effects. Therefore, in the present control example, it is configured to give a difference to the delay period in the delay effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player who can determine that the delay effect is executed with the enjoyment of determining the delay type.

  Further, in this control example, the presence or absence of a delay effect and the delay period can be set for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed simultaneously. This makes it difficult to compare the execution timing with the surrounding effects.

  As described above, when the delayed effect is executed, if different delayed effect modes can be set for each of the simultaneously executable effects, normally, the effect includes a plurality of simultaneously executed effects. The production data of 1 was used as the delay production. That is, the effect data including at least the effect information corresponding to the delay period set for each effect and the effect information during the delay period is used.

  In other words, the appearance data for the player is set with the production data corresponding to the same timing (for example, the start timing of the special symbol variation) regardless of the presence or absence of the delayed production that the production is executed with a delay of the predetermined timing. After performing the effect based on the effect data during the period, the effect to be delayed is configured to be executed. When configured in this way, since the effect including the delayed effect is executed using the effect data that is started at the start timing of the special symbol variation, it is possible to easily execute the effect without deviation. It was possible to enhance the effect.

  However, since it is necessary to prepare in advance the effect data corresponding to the effect contents of the delay effect, there is a problem that the effect data amount increases only by slightly changing the delay period. On the other hand, in the present control example, it is configured to delay the timing of setting the effect data to be the target of the delay effect, that is, the timing of setting the display command related to the delay effect by the voice lamp control device 113. There is. Therefore, when the delay period is made different, it is only necessary to change the value of the timer (delay timer 223s) for measuring the delay period of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The collective effect selection table 222e is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the collective effect, and as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the character information indicating the characters used in the collective effect is stored. It has a character storage area 222e1 and a character number selection table 222e2, which is a data table used when selecting the number of characters that can be acquired in the collective effect.

  The battle effect selection table 222f is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the battle effect, and as shown in FIG. 169 (a), selects the physical strength value (HP) of the enemy character used for the battle effect. When selecting the HP selection table 222f1 used when performing the battle, the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used when selecting the physical strength value (HP) of the enemy character that finally remains in the battle production, and the battle content of the battle production And a battle mode selection table 222f3 to be used.

  Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b, the ordinary holding sphere number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, effect selection information storage area 223h, operation effect flag 223i, pressed flag 223k, press count counter 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect counter group. 223p, upper limit number setting area 223q, end number setting area 223r, delay timer 223s, continuous notice setting flag 223t, continuous notice counter 223u, continuous notice flag 223v, round number counter 223x, and other memory area 223z. To have.

  The special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the first is held in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of holding balls such as when a prize information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the second special symbol suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, when a prize information command is received, or It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b. Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted. When it is done, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or a holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b (see S2207 of FIG. 195). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are updated, The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223a after storing, or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b, a display holding sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved sphere number symbol corresponding to the value of the sphere number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223a is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b is the main. The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  Normally reserved sphere number counter 223c is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b, except that the target is changed from the special symbol to the ordinary symbol. However, since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 of FIG. 195), the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S2602 in FIG. 199). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 (see S2102 of FIG. 195). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variable display of the third symbol, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special type stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when turning off (see S2613 in FIG. 199). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to first area). 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to ordinary symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a starting prize for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special-winning random number counter C1 acquired according to the starting prize, From each value of the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn (whether winning, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and various predicted information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In addition, when the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 is detected, from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in accordance with the passage, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the passage is drawn by lottery. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (in the case of prize information of special symbols, win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern, ordinary symbol) In the case of the winning information of No. 2), the winning or winning) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas corresponding to the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) in which the entrance is detected, or the normal symbol ( Among the vacant areas of the first area to the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information (whether winning, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning occurs, various information predicted corresponding to the starting prize, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b In addition to the setting means for setting the prize information command, when the prize information command is received, various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command are included. A configuration may be provided in which a determination unit that determines whether or not various pieces of information (winning information) match. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

  In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing at which the prize information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided, and in addition to the timing at which the starting prize is won, a periodical notification is given. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from a time saving state to a normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (or A configuration may be used in which the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the winning information command stored in the storage means at the time of stop). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetching effect) using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f.

  In the present control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a prefetching effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (prefetching effect) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player is given to each reserved ball before the variable display is started. It can make you expect a big hit. It is also possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  The state setting area 223g has a current game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and a game state before a predetermined period (for example, if the present is a big jackpot game, a game state at the time of winning the jackpot). This is a storage area that is set (stored).

  In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), information indicating the game state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. In addition, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), when it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is set immediately before. It is configured to be set (stored) as the set game state. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect executed after the jackpot game is finished, according to the game state set at the time of jackpot winning. Further, for example, even in the case of a jackpot of the same jackpot type, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, if the game state executed after the jackpot game ends can be changed, during the jackpot game It is possible to predict the game state set after the jackpot game on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and execute the effect during the jackpot game to suggest the prediction result.

  The effect selection information storage area 223h is an area for temporarily storing the content (effect mode) selected as the variable effect pattern, and is an effect mode executed in the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199). Various effect modes set in the setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are stored. Then, when the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, or when the effect mode being executed is changed, it is read in order to grasp the effect mode of the currently set (executed) variable effect. Be done. In the effect selection information storage area 223h, the effect mode of the variable effect (past effect mode) for the already executed special symbol lottery, the effect mode of the variable effect currently being executed, and the prize information storage area 223f are stored. It is configured to temporarily store the effect mode (scheduled effect mode) of the variable effect that is scheduled to be executed for the winning information, and the effect mode for up to five special symbol lottery is planned as the past effect mode. As an effect mode, it is possible to store an effect mode corresponding to up to four winning information.

  With this configuration, for example, when selecting a new effect mode, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the effect mode set (executed) in the past. In this case, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the present variation effect is a big hit, by intentionally configuring an effect mode that overlaps with the effect mode set in the past, It is advisable to increase the expectation degree of the jackpot win when the same effect mode is continuously set. As a result, if the same effect mode is normally set continuously, a novel effect is not executed, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced by increasing the jackpot expectation. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. Further, in this case, as a notifying means for notifying the player that the same effect mode has been continuously set, for example, a display mode such as "same reach" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure like this. This allows the player to be informed easily that the same effect mode has been continuously set.

  Further, it may be configured to set an effect mode different from the effect mode set in the past, or may be configured to sequentially set a plurality of effect modes having a story. In this way, by setting the effect mode related to the effect mode set (executed) in the past, it is possible to make the player easily interested in the effect to be executed, so that the player can It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operating means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is a thing.

  This pressed flag 223k indicates that the frame button has been pressed during the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (when the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0) in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 208). It is set to ON when it is determined that the button has been pressed (operated) (see S3404 in FIG. 208). Then, the operation effect management process (see S2111 of FIG. 210) is referred to (S3609 of FIG. 210). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is turned off (see S3610 in FIG. 210).

  Thus, the pressed flag 223k is provided as a storage means for temporarily storing that the operating means (frame button 22) has been operated during the operation valid period, and the pressed flag 223k has already been operated by the operating means. When it is set (set to ON) in a situation indicating that the operation has been performed, by configuring so as not to accept a new operation to the operation means, the operation effect executed based on the operation to the operation means Can be reliably executed.

  Further, since it is possible to prohibit the operation of the new operation means from being accepted only by setting the pressed flag 223k to ON, the operation means (frame button 22) is operated and then the operation is performed. It is possible to easily change the period until the performance is executed.

  The number-of-presses counter 223m is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, and the operation effect being executed is a continuous hit effect, that is, the number of times of operation on the frame button 22 (press In the case of an operation effect in which the effect mode is variable based on the (number of times), the number of operations is measured.

  The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period set during the operation performance, and when the operation valid period is set, a value indicating the length of the operation valid period set this time is set. Is set. Then, the set value is subtracted as time passes. When the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0, the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

  The effect counter group 223p is for counting the random number values to be referred to when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in this control example, and has a plurality of random value counters. Specifically, it has eleven kinds of counters from the first effect counter 223p1 to the eleventh effect counter 223p11, and when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, various effect modes are selected using a special effect counter. To be done. By thus configuring the effect mode of the fluctuating effect by using different counter values, a plurality of effects can be generated in one main process, that is, at intervals shorter than the cycle in which the effect counter value is updated. Even if the process of selecting the effect mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a plurality of effect modes from being selected by referring to the same counter value.

  The various effect counters are counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199. Although illustration is omitted, every time the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the update contents of the various effect counters are updated so as to be difficult to synchronize. Specifically, the value of each effect counter is updated by a different prime number by one update process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily randomly set the effect contents to be executed in various effects in which the effect mode is selected using the effect counter.

  In addition, in the present control example, it is configured to select various effect modes by using the values of the counters whose values are independently updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect counters of the effect counters may be selected. A predetermined calculation process may be performed on the value, and the effect mode may be selected using the value indicating the calculation result. With this configuration, the number of effect counters can be reduced.

  In addition, in this control example, the production effect to be executed is configured so as to have no law in the production performed by configuring various production modes by using the value of the production counter whose value is independently updated. Although it is increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the same effect counter value may be used to select a plurality of effect modes. With such a configuration, it is possible to select the effect mode while giving a rule to a plurality of effect modes, and it is possible to easily provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

  The upper limit number of times setting area 223q is an area in which the number of times of operation on the frame button 22 until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous stroke effect is displayed is stored. In the determining process, the upper limit number selected using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous striking effect has reached the upper limit.

  The number-of-ends setting area 223r is the number of times the frame button 22 needs to be operated from the time when the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect is displayed until the effect period of the continuous hit effect is shortened (ended). Is a region where is stored, and the number of finishes selected by using the number-of-terminations selection table 222b2 in the process of determining the production mode of the continuous stroke production is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect. As a result, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous striking effect has reached the end number.

  The delay timer 223s is a timer that measures the delay time set as the delay effect.

  The continuous notice setting flag 223t is a flag indicating that the received winning information includes information indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, and that the continuous notice effect is to be executed from the variation effect to be executed next. It is set to ON when the received winning information includes information indicating that the continuous announcement effect is executed.

  Then, it is referred to when the variation display process for setting a new variation effect is executed.

  The continuous announcement counter 223u is a counter for indicating the number of times of the fluctuating effect that continuously executes the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is set to ON in the winning information related process (see S2210 of FIG. 196). When it is done, a value indicating the number of times until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is executed is set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the variation effect is completed. As a result, it is possible to easily understand the status of the continuous announcement effect being executed.

  The continuous notice flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous notice presentation is completed. It is referred to in the winning information related process (see S2210 of FIG. 196), and while the continuous notice flag 223v is set to ON, that is, during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice setting flag is not newly set to ON. I am configuring.

  The round number counter 223x is a counter for measuring the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and a value is added when a new round is started during the jackpot game. Then, when the jackpot game is over, it is reset to 0.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored as a character ROM 234.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or designates it by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored at the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first starting opening 64a is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 212).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 172). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", an image showing it is stopped of the variable effect. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any concern that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images showing "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 128) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 provides the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first starting opening 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric symbol is usually a big hit and the electric accessory is opened, and the ball is the second starting opening. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set as time passes. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) corresponding to the background mode by the rear surface type, the player selects one of the backgrounds by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 174) is the The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. It is possible to create, because in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 175). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 175).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 175, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 175, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 172 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 211). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7505 in FIG. 223 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 213 (b)), and When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 213 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 213 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 213 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7401 in FIG. 223 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 223 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) in which the instruction content of the image drawing for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 213 (b )), The pointer update processing (see S7205 of FIG. 222) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 176), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 173, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing one frame of the image based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 213 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 of FIG. 220). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7613 in FIG. 224). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7614 in FIG. 224). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 177 to 192. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 599, 99, 599, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with the entry into the first entrance 64a (starting prize) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S205), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of S207 is executed, the processing of S213 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired. Yes (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is 1 Subtracting (S210), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set a holding ball number command (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 180. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common for the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b Based on, a special symbol lottery is conducted. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process (S213) ), It is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the values of the probability variation counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u are set to 0. (S218), and the start of the big hit is set (S219). Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the big hit (S216: No), the game state update process (S221) is executed. The game state update processing (S221) will be described later with reference to FIG. 179. Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the game state update processing (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the game state update processing (S221). This game state update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and subtracts the values of the probability variation counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u. Is a process for executing the process to be performed and updating the game state based on the subtracted value.

  In the game state update processing (S221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203t that has been subtracted is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S353: Yes), it is the timing to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this processing is terminated.

  In the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 155 (b), as long as the game is played normally, when the predetermined value (200) is set in the probability variation counter 203t, the same is true for the time saving counter 203u. The value (200) is set. Therefore, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 in the process of S352, the value of the time saving counter 203u is also 0, and thus the state command indicating the normal state is set.

  Note that, in FIG. 179, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is determined to be 0, the state command indicating the normal state is set, but not limited to this, for example, the probability variation counter 203t is configured. The value and the value of the hour / hour counter 203u are updated, both values are updated, each updated value is determined, the current game state is determined, and the state command indicating the game state based on the determination result is displayed. It may be configured to set. With this configuration, for example, a state command indicating a gaming state (latent probability state) in which the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 can be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355). When it is determined that it is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S35: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u subtracted in the processing of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S357: Yes), the state command indicating the shift to the normal state is set (S358), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S357, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S357: No), this processing is directly terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. 180 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" lottery (judgment determination) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0 (whether the game state is during the probability variation period (high-probability game state)) (S302). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and thus the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per random number table 202a for high probability corresponding to the type of special symbol (see FIG. 155 (a)) Then, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 600 stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, six random numbers "0 to 5" are set as the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol in the probability variation game state (special game state), and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these values. When the random number that is a hit is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 155 (a)) for low probability corresponding to the type of special symbol Then, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 600 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability one by one. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol in the normal game state (low probability game state), two "0, 1" are set, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 and these hits When the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a big hit of the special symbol (that is, the value of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per random number table 202a). (S305), if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S305: Yes), the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202d, and the special symbol of three types is a big hit (big hit. Among the A to C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is the big hit A, and is in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is a big hit B, in the case of a big hit of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", it is judged as a big hit C (FIG. 155 (b )reference).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Although detailed description is omitted, the stop type (reach type or presence / absence of reach) of the symbol variation is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Although illustration of the relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is omitted, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, normal reach, “51 to 250” If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern of super reach is determined.

  In the variation pattern, main control device 110 determines a variation time until the result of hit determination is notified, and notifies voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the judgment. Even if the main controller 110 is in the display mode of the out-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-display mode not to be the reach display mode as long as the variable time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for dislodging, various types of "short deviating", "long deviating", "disconnecting normal reach", and "disengaging super reach" are defined. Various "normal reach" types and "super reach" types are defined as variation patterns common to the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 that is being set, the variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is confirmed, and the stop type selection counter Based on the value of C3, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N) of the sphere number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are displayed. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, regarding S407 to S412, in each of the processes of S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first winning opening 64 is only changed to the process for winning the second starting opening 64b. Since similar processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 and stored as a reserved ball, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter are also stored. Each value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the empty holding area of the corresponding special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first special random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter similar to the first special symbol for the second special symbol By obtaining each value of C3, the variation type counter CS1, the random number can be executed by using a common random number in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so even the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit. Probability can be constant.

  After executing the processing of S412, the prefetch processing is executed (S413), and the present processing ends. The details of the prefetching process (S413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 182. Based on the above, the process of previously determining each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

  In the present control example, the value of each counter is selected based on the ball entered, but it may be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203, since there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the respective counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the win / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball can be acquired, and the counter not related to the win / fail judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be kept while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the prefetching process (S413) which is one of the processes in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413).

  In the prefetch process (FIG. 182, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S451). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball entry) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball From the storage area 203b, the respective values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the changing type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning are acquired (S452).

  Next, the lottery results indicated by the acquired values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 are selected as the first random number table 202a and the first hit type selection. Predetermination is performed with reference to the table 202b and the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 155 (a), (b), and FIGS. 156 to 158) (S453), and the judgment result, the hit type, the stop type, and the variation type are set in advance. A winning information command including information for indicating the determination result is set (S454), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 177), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is larger than 1 (S508). In the process of S508, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is larger than 1 (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the second random number for high probability. Based on the table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the value for the low probability time Based on the random number table 202c per 2 (see FIG. 155 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0”, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of “1 to 239”, the normal symbol is out. To determine.

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S511), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S511: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol “◯” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of position (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514), and if the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S514: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S514, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), This process ends. In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol (time saving state), compared to the low probability of the normal symbol (normal state), the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds". Therefore, the lottery frequency of ordinary symbols becomes high. Therefore, since the winning frequency in the lottery for the normal symbols is increased, the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, and the ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. It becomes a state.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the game state of the normal symbol is configured so that the normal state is set when the special symbol is hit in the big hit. With such a configuration, during the big hit that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state of the normal symbol also becomes an advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player. Also, the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol big hit period) and the electric accessory 640a is easy to open period (ordinary symbol hit period) overlap, the variable win that is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the opening of the electric accessory 640a hinders winning of a ball into the device 65.

  Explaining the above contents in detail, when the electric accessory 640a is provided in the first flow path through which the balls flow down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 640a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the balls flowing down the first flow path will win the electric accessory 640a, and there is a problem that the balls cannot be fully won in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, an electric accessory 640a is arranged below the variable winning device 65 (downstream side) and flows down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open). It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by using a configuration that makes it easier to win the variable winning device 65, but in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is limited.

  On the other hand, in this control example, since the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state (normal state) during the big hit of the special symbol, the electric accessory 640a becomes difficult to open during the big hit period, and the above-mentioned problem is solved. can do.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S517). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S518, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is finished, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, when the variable display which is currently being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. It is determined (S519). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S520), and the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1. If determined (S520: Yes), "1 second × 2 times" is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. And transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S520, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S520: No), as the opening time and the opening count of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, “0.2 seconds × 1 time” is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the process of S523, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the present process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), determines whether or not the ball passes through the through-gate 67, and if the ball passes, the second win is achieved. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S603). : No), the present process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 of FIG. 187. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the status command is transmitted based on the long-time release flag 203i (S808). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S810), and execution of various effects is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 181) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the number-of-holding-ball command set. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process and the prefetching process (see FIG. 182) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processes of S521 and S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in FIG.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) ends, the first symbol display device In the display mode set by the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) or the process of S308, which ends the variable display executed in 37, the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed at 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 185 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S801). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

  In the jackpot control process (S904), first, it is determined whether it is a timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). When it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol is the start timing (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this processing is ended.

  The opening command may be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing this, for example, when a big hit in the left-handed game, the time until the big hit starts is lengthened, and when it is a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the big hit starts Can be shortened. In the present control example, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit in the left-handed game, a sufficient time to switch to the right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. This can reduce the operational burden on the player.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S1003). In the process of S1003, the game information regarding the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read and a determination is made.

  As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the big hit (S1003: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1003: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004).

  When it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005). This jackpot operation setting process (S1005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 189. However, the process corresponding to the opening action scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 65, and the switching member 650h). Operation process) is executed.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1005) which is one of the jackpot control processes (S904 in FIG. 188) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S1005) is executed, first, of the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot this time, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set to be released. The operation scenario is read (S1101). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the processing of S1101 (S1103), and the winning number counter 203j is reset (S1104). A round number command is set (S1105). After that, this processing ends.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is a jackpot game (round game) that performs an opening operation for the first attacker (V winning device 650) and a second attacker (variable winning device 65). The big hit game (round game) that executes the opening operation is configured to be executable, and the above-described processing of S1102 is one round of the round game that opens the first attacker (V winning device 650). It is defined only in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the round game of eyes. Therefore, when executing a round game other than that, a scenario in which the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k is opened to the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge passage 650e2) Is not defined, the process of S1102 is skipped.

  In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes in FIG. 188), a round for indicating that a new round game is executed The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress status for the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to display which round of the round game is currently in progress.

  In the present control example, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the configuration is not limited to this. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 side is provided with means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game, and how many rounds is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side. May be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k (S1006). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1006: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S1007). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1008). As for the ending timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (the tenth round in the case of jackpot A) ends, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this control example) is the ball throwing time. 3 seconds), it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing. When it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF (S1009), the ending process is executed (S1010), and the present process is ended.

  Here, details of the jackpot end process (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1010).

  When the ending process (S1010) is executed, first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201), and it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to 200 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and the presence / absence of V winning is set in the time saving counter 203u (S1204), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S1204.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), then the winning process is executed (S1011). Here, the winning process (S1011) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1011).

  In the winning process (S1011 of FIG. 191), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1401). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has been passed. When it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). Then, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process of S1404 is executed.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set to be closed (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407), and the process of S1408 is executed. Since the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is out of ball after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). . When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412).

  Then, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the ball has not passed the V switch 650e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF (S1414), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1415), and then this processing ends. Here, since the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, if the sphere remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed the V switch 650e3, the special symbol Can be controlled such that the high probability state of is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). When it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1416 that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1417).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the updated probability variation valid timer 203r has reached the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419), and the probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1420). . Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410.

  As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 until the probability variation valid timer 203r reaches the upper limit value. You can set the state. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from being illegally passed by passing the ball through the V switch 650e3.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1011 of FIG. 191) is finished, an abnormal process is then executed (S1012), and this process is finished. Here, the abnormality processing (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1012). The abnormality process (S1012) is a process for monitoring whether the V switch 650e3 is illegally passed.

  In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether it is the round valid period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharged number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). Then, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated because the ball is out of the time period (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1507).

  If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Then, the process of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the V winning device 650 and prevent the V switch 650e3 from passing the game ball.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process is ended.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Unit 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 210. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is on, the power-up processing of S2119 (see FIG. 194) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 194), the power-off process in S2119 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2119 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2118 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2119, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 194). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2119 is executed, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command capable of determining whether or not the symbol is normally hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. You can

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are already cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is performed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2101 this time has been executed (S2101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2113 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2114, the variable display setting process of S2115, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. That is, by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, the command determination process is performed. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later is set (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, the special lamp 1 holding ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 223b, and the process of turning on the holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the normal holding ball number counter 223c Is done.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2108), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 209.

  When the process of S2110 ends, the operation effect management process is executed (S2111). This operation effect management process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 210, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect is determined according to whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated. The process for changing is executed.

  After the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), operation control of various effect movable auditors provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various movable objects for effect is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22), the game result during the jackpot game, and the like. Since it is executed according to the content of the operation scenario of the movable movable object for use, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the process of S2112 ends, the counter updating process is executed (S2113). In this counter updating process (S2113), a counter (timer) for timing information necessary when executing various effects, for example, a process for updating the value of the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

  When the process of S2113 ends, the command determination process is executed next (S2114). This command determination processing (S2114) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 195. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199.

  When the process of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are both turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the command determination processing (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 194) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination processing (S2114: FIG. 195), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2003), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this processing ends. .

  In the process of S2204, when the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received (S2207). When the number of holding balls command is received (S2207: Yes), the number of holding balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 holding ball The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2208), and this processing ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223b. Is stored. Further, when the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary reserved ball number counter.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2207, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command is received (S2209). When a prize-related command is received (S2209: Yes), prize information-related processing is started (S2210), and this processing is ended. The details of the winning information-related process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but the winning command output from the main control device 110 (the winning command corresponding to the special symbol, the winning command corresponding to the normal symbol) Based on the, the prize information included in the prize command is pre-determined, the process of executing the effect (prefetch effect) based on the result of the pre-determination, and the process of temporarily storing the result of the pre-determination are executed. To be done.

  In the process of S2209, when the winning-related command is not received (S2209: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot-related command is received (S2211), and when it is determined that the command is received (S2211: Yes). , Jackpot-related processing is executed (S2212), and this processing ends. The jackpot-related processing (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2211, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command is received (S2213: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2214), and the process is hunted. This stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command is not received in the process of S2213 (S2213: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the winning information related process (S2210) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the winning information-related processing (S2210). The winning information-related process (S2210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the winning information-related process (S2210), first, the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2301), and the hold display mode is determined based on the winning / deciding result included in the read winning information (S2302).

  Then, a display command for indicating the hold display mode determined in the process of S2302 is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304), and when it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is ON (S2304: Yes), this process is terminated and the continuous notice is being issued. When it is determined that the flag 223v is off (S2304: No), the presence / absence of continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning information read in the process of S2301 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306). If it is determined that there is no continuous announcement effect (S2306: No), this processing is ended as it is, and if it is determined that there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306: Yes), the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is set to ON ( (S2307), the number of times until the special figure variation corresponding to the target winning information is set to the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2308), and then this processing is ended.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process (S2212 of FIG. 197) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S2212). This jackpot-related processing (S2212) is executed by the command determination processing (see S2114 of FIG. 195) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is related to the winning (big hit, small hit) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

  In this control example, the third electric auditors article 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left side area of the game board 13 is opened when the big hit C is won by the special symbol lottery and when the small hit is won. When the winning game (left hitting game) to be executed is executed and the jackpots A, B, D, and E are won by the special symbol lottery, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. The hit game (right hit game) is configured to be executed, and in the big hit related process (S2212 of FIG. 197), a display command for displaying information about the hit game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The processing and the winning effect that varies depending on the type of winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

  When the jackpot-related processing (S2212 of FIG. 197) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S2401). If it is determined that the command is the opening command (S2401: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S2402), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the round number command (S2403), and it is determined that it is the round number command. In the case (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 223x (S2404), the display round number command is set based on the value of the round number counter 223x (S2405), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S2403, when it is determined that the command received this time is not the round number command (S2403: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2406), and it is determined that it is an ending command. In the case (S2406: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2407), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2408), and this processing ends. Also. When it is determined that the ending command is not received in the process of S2406 (S2406: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the V passage command (S2409), and when it is determined that the command is the V passage command. (S2409: Yes), the V effect command is set (S2410), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the V-passing command is not received in the process of S2409 (S2409: No), this process is directly terminated.

  Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2214) will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). In this stop process (S2214), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation stop timing of the special symbol is executed.

  When this stopping process (S2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is larger than 0 (S2501). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 or less (S2501: No), the process proceeds to S2505. When it is determined that the value of the continuous notification counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501: Yes), the value of the continuous notification counter 223u is decremented by 1 (S2502), and then whether the value of the continuous notification counter 223u is 0 or not. Is determined (S2503). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2505. When it is determined that the value of the continuous notification counter 223u is 0 (S2503: Yes), the continuous notification flag 223v is set to OFF (S2504), and the process proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2505), and then this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 199), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore, in S2612. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set to It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604). When it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is ON (S2604: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to OFF. Then, (S2609), the flag 223v during the continuous notice is set to ON (S2610), and the process proceeds to S2608.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is off (S2604: No), it is then determined whether the continuous announcement setting flag 223v is on (S2605). When it is determined that the flag 223v during the continuous announcement is turned on (S2605: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the acquired variation pattern and the continuous announcement effect (S2611), and the process proceeds to S2608. In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the flag 223v for which notice is continuously given is off (S2605: No), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a (FIGS. 160 (a) and 160 (b)) is set based on the obtained variation pattern. The variation effect pattern is selected with reference (2606). Next, an effect mode setting process is executed (S2607), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. It is set to do so (S2608). The contents of the effect mode setting process executed in the process of S2607 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although illustration is omitted, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2612.

  In the process of S2612, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2612). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2612: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2612: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2613), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2614). Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2615), and the process proceeds to S2616.

  In the process of S2616, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2616). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled. After the processing of S2616 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the effect mode setting process (S2607) which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 199) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode setting process (S2607). In this effect mode setting process (S2607), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is executed.

  When the effect mode setting process (S2607) is executed, it is first determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S2701). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability change state. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S2701: No), the time saving / probability variation effect setting process is executed (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2706. Details of the time saving / probability change effect setting process (S2707) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current state is the normal state (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation effect pattern selected this time has an operation effect (S2702). If determined (S2702: Yes), the operation effect setting process is executed (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. Details of the operation effect setting process (S2703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2702, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern selected this time does not include the operation effect (S2702: No), it is then determined whether the variation effect pattern selected this time includes the battle effect (S2704). If it is determined that there is a battle effect (S2704: Yes), the battle effect setting process is executed (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706. The detailed content of the battle effect setting process (S2705) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern selected this time does not include the battle effect (S2704: No), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process is executed. finish.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the content of the operation effect setting process (S2703). In this operation effect setting process (S2703), a preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

  When the operation effect setting process (S2703) is executed, first, the type of operation effect is extracted (S2801), it is determined whether the current operation effect is the continuous hit effect (S2802), and it is determined that it is the continuous hit effect. In the case (S2801: Yes), the continuous hit effect setting process is executed (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2807. Details of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2801, when it is determined that the continuous hit effect is not generated (S2801: No), it is then determined whether the current operation effect is the delayed effect (S2804), and when it is determined that the delayed effect is effected. (S2804: Yes), the delay effect setting process is executed (S2805), and the process proceeds to S2807. Details of this delay effect setting process (S2805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that the effect is not delayed (S2804: No), the process corresponding to the other operation effect type extracted is executed (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807.

  In the process of S2807, the operation valid period is determined based on the selected variation effect mode (S2807), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the content of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803).

  When the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, a win / fail judgment result and reach type are extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S2901), and the extracted win / fail judgment result, reach type, and second effect counter Value of the upper limit number and the final variable mode are determined using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 162 (b)) (S2902). Next, a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number is set in the upper limit number setting area 223q (S2903), and the number of end times is referred to with reference to the extracted hit / miss determination result, the determined upper limit number, and the value of the third effect counter. The end count is determined using the selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 163 (a)) (S2904), and a value corresponding to the determined upper limit count is set in the end count setting area 223r (S2905). Next, referring to the extracted hit / miss determination result and the determined upper limit number of times, the effect result is determined (S2906), the effect mode of the continuous hit effect corresponding to various determination contents is set (S2907), and effect selection information storage Information regarding the effect mode set in the area is stored (S2908), and thereafter, this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805).

  When the delay effect setting process (S2805) is executed, first, a win / loss determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3001), and the extracted win / loss determination result and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7 are referred to. Then, the delay effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 167) is used to determine the delay period and the delay target (S3002), and the information regarding the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3003). After that, this process is terminated.

  In this control example, as described above, the contents of the delay effect and the delay target are set at the start of the fluctuation, and the start timing of the delay effect is set in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 208) described later. Although it is configured to be set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start time may be set as the start timing of the delayed effect. With such a configuration, more delayed effects can be executed, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  Next, the content of the battle effect setting process (S2705) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the content of the battle effect setting process (S2705). In this battle effect setting process (S2705), first, a win / fail judgment result and a fluctuation time are extracted based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S3101), and the extracted judgment result, the fluctuation time, and the eighth effect counter are extracted. Value of the character number selection table 222e2 (see FIG. 168 (c)) to determine the number of renderings and the number of characters (S3102), and based on the determined number of characters, the current rendering The character to be used in step S3103 is determined (S3103), and the character storage area 222e1 (FIG. 168 (b)) is referenced, and the symbol row arrangement information of the determined character type is compared with the number of times of presentation (S3104). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol row in which the number of characters is determined to be greater than the number of presentations (S3105). If it is determined that there is a symbol sequence in which the number of characters that is greater than the number of appearances is determined (S3105: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the last acquisition chance is determined (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. If it is determined that there is no symbol string for which the number of characters that is greater than the number of appearances is determined (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

  In the process of S3107, the effect mode of each effect is determined (S3107), the effect mode of the collective effect corresponding to various determination contents is set (S3108), and the information related to the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored. (S3109), the second half battle effect setting process is executed (S3110), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the content of the battle latter half effect setting process (S3110) executed in the battle effect setting process (see S2705 of FIG. 204) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second half of the battle effect setting process (S3110). In the latter half of the battle production setting process (S3110), first, the number of characters to be acquired in the collective production is read from the production selection information storage area 223h (S3151), the result of the judgment is judged, the number of characters, and the value of the ninth production counter. And the HP selection table 222f1 (see FIG. 169 (b)) is used to determine the HP value of the battle opponent (S3152). By referring to the value of the production counter, the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 (see FIG. 169 (c)) is used to determine the remaining HP value (S3153), the judgment result and the determined HP value of the battle opponent. And the value of the 11th effect counter, the battle number is determined using the battle mode selection table 222f3 (see FIG. 170) (S3154). Next, based on the determined HP value and the remaining HP value, a reduced HP value to be reduced in the second half of the battle is determined (S3155), and each battle production is performed based on the determined number of battles and the reduced HP value. Attack mode is determined (S3156), a production mode of continuous hit production corresponding to various determination contents is set (S3157), information regarding the production mode set in the production selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3158), and this processing is performed. To finish.

  Next, the content of the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (S2707) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving / probability change effect setting process (S2707). In the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (S2707), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is ON (S3201). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is on (S3201: Yes), the present process ends. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is off (S3201: No), then it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202). When it is determined that the acquired variation pattern does not have the random display effect (S3202: No), this processing is ended as it is. When it is determined that the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202: Yes), a random display effect setting process is executed (S3203), and this process ends.

  Next, the content of the random display effect setting process (S3203) executed in the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (see S2707 of FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203). In the random display effect setting process (S3203), first, a win / loss determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3301), and the extracted win / loss determination result and the value of the fourth effect counter are referred to, Using the display order selection table 222c2 (see FIG. 164 (c)), the effect icon (first icon) to be displayed first is determined (S3302), the extracted hit / miss judgment result, the determined first icon, and the fifth effect. By referring to the value of the counter, the permutation is determined by using the display mode selection table 222c4 (see FIG. 165 (b)) (S3303), and the extracted hit / miss determination result and the value of the sixth effect counter are referred to. Then, using the display number selection table 222c5 (see FIG. 166), the number of display of the effect icon is determined (S3304), and it corresponds to various determination contents. Set the representation embodiment of the random display effect (S3305), stores information about representation embodiment set to effect selection information storage area 223 h (S3306), followed by terminating the present process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the execution of the notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107: see FIG. 208), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S3401: No). , And this processing is finished as it is. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is in the valid period (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S2703 of FIG. 201), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n, and the operation effective timer 223n. It is determined whether or not the value of indicates the operation valid period.

  In the processing of S3402, when it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (S3402: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3403), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is ON. (S3403: Yes), and this processing ends. When it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3403: No), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3404), and the operation content corresponding to the set operation valid period is read ( (S3405), and then it is determined whether or not the operation content is a continuous hit effect (S3406). When it is determined that the continuous hit effect is produced (S3406: Yes), the value of the pressing number counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S3407), and the process proceeds to S3411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the operation content is not the continuous hit effect (S3406: No), it is then determined whether the operation content is the delayed effect (S3408). When it is determined that it is a delay effect (S3408: Yes), a value corresponding to the delay period is set in the delay timer 223s (S3409), and then it is determined whether the audio mode of the delay effect content this time is a delay. (S3413). When it is determined that the voice mode is not delayed (that is, normal) (S3413: No), the voice command corresponding to the effect mode of the delayed effect is set (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the audio mode of the delay effect content this time is delayed (S3413: No), the above-described processing of S3414 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3408, when it is determined that the operation content is not the delayed effect (S3408: No), the process corresponding to the other operation content is executed (S3410), and the process proceeds to S3411. In the process of S3411, the operation mode corresponding to the current frame button operation is determined (S3411), the display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3412), and then this process ends.

  In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which the variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is satisfied based on the frame button 22 being operated (pressed) once, but the invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or operation means having a plurality of operation methods is provided, The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated by a specific operation method.

  Further, in this control example, the fact that the operating means has been operated is indicated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the operating method for the operating means. Alternatively, it may be configured to show different operation results, and the effect mode of the operation effect may be changed according to the type of the operation result.

  Further, in this control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means).

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined. Although it is configured as described above (see S3411 in FIG. 208), other configurations may be used.

  Specifically, the operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively discriminated is set within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, a storage unit that stores the set length of the operation valid period and a calculation unit that calculates the remaining period of the operation valid period based on the value of the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation unit is operated are provided. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

  With such a configuration, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time when the operation means is operated), so that various effects can be provided to the player. Can be provided.

  In addition, one operation valid period is determined from a plurality of operation valid periods, and the operation valid period setting means that can be set within the production period of the display effect, and the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operating means is operated. It is also possible to provide a calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation valid period based on the value of. With such a configuration, different operation effective periods can be set for the display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the set operation effective period length and the timing of operating the operation means. According to the calculated progress rate of the operation valid period, that is, the length of the entire operation valid period as 100, the rate of the period that has already elapsed (or the period that has not elapsed) calculated as a percentage (%), The operation mode to be executed can be different.

  Thereby, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing with reference to the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that the player is provided with various effects. be able to.

  Furthermore, the operation mode is not set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, but is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". That is, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, in the case where the length of the operation valid period can be set to 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds is set. When the operation means is operated at 3 seconds when the setting is made (remaining time 3 seconds) and when the operation means is operated at 7 seconds when the setting is 14 seconds (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between and, different operation modes are set.

  Further, in any of the above-mentioned examples, since the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation valid period and the same operation difficulty level is set, the operation is performed when the same operation mode is set. It is necessary to define the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the effective period but also on the set length of the operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

  In this case, if the length of the operation valid period is set to be variable to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the above-mentioned data table will be significantly increased, and the data capacity will be compressed. . On the other hand, as described above, by configuring the operation mode by using the percentage value, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation effective period. Therefore, the operation mode is selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for doing so.

  In addition, as the dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into “1% to 50%” and “51% to 99%”, "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%", "41% to 50%", "51% to 60%", "61% to 70%", and "71" % -80% "," 81% -90% ", and" 91% -99% "are provided with a second sorting means, and based on whether or not a predetermined condition such as a special symbol lottery result is satisfied. Determining means for deciding which sorting means to use is provided, the dividing means determined by the deciding means divides the percentage value calculated by the calculating means, and selects the operation mode based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration in which the operation mode executed thereafter is changed in accordance with the operation timing of the operation means, for example, a pachinko machine as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. It is advisable to use an effect in which the effect movable accessory provided in 10 is moved. Accordingly, the operation effect can be executed without having to worry about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display unit.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special figure variation effect. A process for replacing an effect based on a normal symbol lottery (general drawing effect) is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501). If it is determined that the variation effect being executed does not include an operation effect (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3511. When it is determined that the variation effect being executed includes the operation effect (S3501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is 3 seconds before the operation effective period (S3502). If it is determined that it is three seconds before the operation valid period (S3502: Yes), a display command for indicating that the operation valid period is set is set (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3511. When it is determined that it is not three seconds before the operation valid period (S3502: No), it is then determined whether it is the start of the operation valid period (S3504). When it is determined that the operation valid period is not started (S3504: No), the process of S3505 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3506. When it is determined that the operation valid period has started (S3504: Yes), a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period set this time is set in the operation valid timer 223n (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. .

  In the process of S3506, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is larger than 0 (S3506). When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3506: No), the process proceeds to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is larger than 0 (S3506: Yes), the value of the delay timer 223s is decremented by 1 (S3507), and then it is determined whether the value of the subtracted delay timer 223s is 0 or not. It is determined (S3508). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted delay timer 223s is not 0 (S3508: No), the process proceeds to S3510. When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3508: Yes), the start of the corresponding delay effect is set (S3509), and the process proceeds to S3510. In the process of S3510, another liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3510), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S3511, other liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3511), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during the period in which the operation effect is being executed.

  When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S3601). Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3601: No), this processing is ended as it is. When it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S3601: Yes), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is decremented by 1 (S3602), and then the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 or not. It is determined (S3603). When it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not 0 (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is on (S3604). When it is determined that the shortening flag is on (S3604: Yes), the shortening flag is set to off (S3605), and the process proceeds to S3606. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3604: No), the process of S3605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3606.

  In the process of S3606, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is larger than 0 (S3606). When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3606: No), a display command is set to indicate that the operation valid period has ended (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. When it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is larger than 0 (S3606: Yes), a display command for extending and displaying the display screen showing the operation valid period is set (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. To do.

  In the process of S3609, it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609). When it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3609: No), the process proceeds to S3623. When it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3609: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3610), the value of the pressing number counter 223m is read (S3611), and then the pressing is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3612). When it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3612: Yes), the value stored in the upper limit count setting area 223q is compared with the value of the press count counter 223m (S3613), Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the pressing number counter 223m match (S3614). When it is determined that the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the pressing number counter 223m match (S3614: Yes), a display command for indicating that the upper limit number has been reached is displayed. The setting is performed (S3515), and the process proceeds to S3620. When it is determined that the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q does not match the value of the pressing number counter 223m (S3614: No), the value stored in the ending number setting area 223r The value of the number counter 223m is compared (S3616), and it is determined whether the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the value of the press number counter 223m match (S3617). When it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press count counter 223m match (S3617: Yes), the value of the press count counter 223m is reset (S3618), and the shortening flag is set. Is set to ON (S3619), and the process proceeds to S3620. When it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r does not match the value of the press count counter 223m (S3617: No), the processes of S3618 and S3619 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3620. .

  On the other hand, in the processing of 3612, if it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223m is 0 (S3612: No), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is on (S3621). When it is determined that the shortening flag is ON (S3621: YES), the specific effect is determined (S3622), and the process proceeds to S3623. When it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3621: No), the corresponding button effect is set (S3620), and the process proceeds to S3623.

  In the process of S3623, a display effect command corresponding to each of the set effect modes is set (S3623), and the present process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 225. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 211) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be surely transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 212, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Also, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in this control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 223 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7402 in FIG. 223 (a)).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)), the simplified command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) indicated by is drawn. (See S6308 in FIG. 213 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 213 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. The player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, so that there is a ball (start prize) in the first starting opening 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp controller. If it is through 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213 (a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 213 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 176) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notification command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous notification. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305). 176 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S6307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop types (big hits A to D) indicated by the display stop type command are compared. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the processing of S6304. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (FIG. 214, S6302), as shown in FIG. 214, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no new unprocessed command. (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation control having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set by the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 215 (b). FIG. 215 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hits A to D) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt process (Fig. 213 (b)) is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time it is executed, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S6602). ).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S6603). Then, the process returns to S6401 of FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a big hit related command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S6408: Yes), display jackpot-related command processing is executed (S6409). Details of the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218.

  Here, the display jackpot-related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing (S6409), and processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113. Is what you do.

  In the display jackpot-related command process (FIG. 216, S6409), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701). When it is determined that there is a display opening command in the processing of S6701 (S6701: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6702), and the processing proceeds to S6703.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S6702). This opening command process (S6702) is a process executed when it is determined in the display jackpot-related command processing (see S6409 in FIG. 216) that there is a display opening command, and an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot. Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the opening command process (S6702), first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). After that, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the opening display data table (S6803), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6804), and the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805). , This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation is continued. In the process of S6701, when it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703. When the processing of S6701 or S6702 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703). In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

  Details of the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 217 (b). FIG. 217 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S6704). This round number command process (S6704) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command is received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216), and the jackpot game is being played. It is a process for displaying the effect when the number of rounds is updated on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the round number command processing (S6704), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6811). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6812), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6813). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6814), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6815), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation is continued. In the process of S6703, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), the process proceeds to S6705. When the processing of S6703 or S6704 is completed, it is determined whether or not a display ending command has been received (S6705). In the process of S6705, when it is determined that there is a display ending command (S6705: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and the process proceeds to S6707.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing (S6706). The ending command process (S6706) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the display jackpot-related command process (see S6409 of FIG. 216), and produces an effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game. It is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the ending command processing (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6851). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6852), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the ending display data table (S6853). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6854), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are turned off (S6855), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation is continued. In the process of S6705, when it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707. When the processing of S6705 or S6706 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S6707). In the process of S6707, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S6707: No), this process ends as it is. If it is determined that there is a display V effect command (S6707: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S6708), and then this processing ends.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S6708) will be described with reference to FIG. 218 (b). This V effect command process (S6708) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command has been received in the display jackpot-related command process (see FIG. 216), and the probability that a jackpot game will be awarded. It is a process for displaying an effect suggesting that it is high on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S6708), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6904), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are turned off (S6905), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no jackpot-related command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224, S7403) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. Yes (S7001). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to D), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7609 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7610. . If the specified back image type is the back image B, as described above, some of the image data corresponding to those back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear surface image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to D is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S7002 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two rear image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S4702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6412), and there is an error command. If (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 219 (b). FIG. 219 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in step S7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall person can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no error command (S6412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6414), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), And the processes of S6402 to S6414 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6414 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 172, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 215 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 215 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 220, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7251).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7251, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7252), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 220. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7301). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7302). As a result, if it is End information (S7302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7303), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7303: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7305), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7306), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7302, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 220, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates of each sprite are specified. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display. Yes (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalized display. Is set (S7210), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect changes according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on instead of off (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the finalized display effect, so that the display data table for demo is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting in the table buffer 233d (S7217) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Therefore, the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (FIG. 172) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 223 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 223 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 213 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 of FIG. 213 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) (see S7501: No in FIG. 223 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, with the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  Further, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after the image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the processing in S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is turned on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is turned off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S7711, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 176 is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  Further, in the above control example, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, is in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) And are provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident signal is used. It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends the access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scanning is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. Thereby, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 causes the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and the process of transferring to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data that is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be always stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the transfer processing of the image data by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237, but simply by specifying the address, the address can be specified. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above control example, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first provides the area after the system reset is released. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program to be executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  Further, in the above control example, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). It is also possible to provide a first program storage area in the memory, and to store a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by being connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be used. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAM has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. It may be divided and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be retained without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored in advance. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after input, before the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is confirmed. If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the image data may not be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If so, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary blackout or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

  In the above control example, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. In addition, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the control example described above, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the control example described above, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Also, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM 237a through the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, the main image at power-on and the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and are stored in the normal video RAM 236 at the power-on main image and at power-on. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. The case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the rear image and the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change, or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is defined. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 220) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image setting process (see FIG. 221) may be executed to immediately display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being flown into the ball entrance intentionally due to the flow of the ball being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp controller 113, when the voice lamp controller 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is output. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display controller 110, the display controller 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display controller 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error, thereby displaying the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is displayed as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 ms in this control example) for displaying an image of a frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the sprite after the change in the sprite. The color information specifying the color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing content of the data table. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is associated with an address that represents the time (20 ms in this control example) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above control example, in the display data table, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table is described is added. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2” ...) For identifying the additionally displayable effect. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player is selected. Although the explanation has been given for the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

  In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may define not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the control example described above, in the display control device 114, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect is A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "advance notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the control example described above, the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the control example described above, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the control example) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

  In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, the case where the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continue to display the finalized display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not attached is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image which is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above control example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control unit 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacture. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the contents to be transferred at that time. Although the case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the work image RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i to store whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above control example, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. Alternatively, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the control example described above, of the plurality of rear images, only the image data corresponding to the “rear A” is described as being resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer command of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 causes the transfer command to be transferred at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. It may control the rollers 237. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally output from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. Further, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes in color tone over time, and instead of such a back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time may appear. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above control example, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of the winning prize for the number of reserved balls. Although the case of including in the command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning the start prize is voice-lamped by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above control example, when performing the variable effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visually recognized by the player is displayed, but instead of the display of the high-speed fluctuation. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the control example described above, when the game board 13 is provided with one first starting opening 64a at which the special symbol jackpot lottery is started when the ball is entered, the case is not limited to this. Instead of one, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrances are independently detected and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided on the game board 13. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the variation effect held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  In the above control example, in the main control device 110, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased) The case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the above control example, the winning of the first start opening 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on the winning in the first starting opening 64a is a numeral in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of balls to be reserved. A mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and can be changed vertically. The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 246. The second control example includes various effect devices used in the above-described first control example (effect member 700, lateral slide member 840, and injection device 400 for injecting the granular member 320 (FIG. 5 and FIG. 6))) operation control contents will be described in detail. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that control contents relating to the above-described various effect devices are added, and is otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of various effect devices in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. The specific configuration and operating principle of the various effect devices are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the above-described first control example, different reference numerals are given to the structures (structures each having a function) configuring each rendering device, but in this control example, each rendering device is Will be denoted only by and the description will be made such that each effect device has each function described in the first control example. In addition, the names of the effect devices designated by the same reference numerals as in the first control example are partially changed, but the detailed contents are the same as those described in the first control example. It is the same as the device (structure) with the reference numeral.

  226 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, and FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the injection device 400. is there. The diagram shown in FIG. 226 (a) is a simplification of the diagram shown in FIG. 7 of the first control example, and since the specific content is the same as that of the first control example described above, Detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the pachinko machine 10, the operation unit 500 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This operation unit 500 is attached to the pachinko machine 10 so that the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 is located in the opening formed in the central portion. The effect member 700 is provided on the upper side of the operation unit 500, and the lateral slide members (rotating members) 840 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. Further, the injection device 400 is provided on the back side of the operation unit 500, that is, at a position hidden by the operation unit 500 and invisible when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front.

  The detailed operation principle is the same as that of the first control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the effect member 700 is movable so as to move downward from the standby position shown in FIG. 226. And is configured to cover about ⅓ of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when it is located at the operating position moved downward (see FIG. 8). Further, the effect member 700 is configured to be able to execute the dividing operation as shown in FIG. With such a configuration, by moving the effect member 700 from the standby position to the operation position, the player watching the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is interested in the effect member 700. By making it easier to hold and performing the division operation after the effect member 700 is positioned at the operation position, it is possible to cause the player to perform an unexpected effect while the player is gazing. , The production effect can be enhanced.

  Each of the rotating members 840 is independently movable in the vertical direction, and the rotating member 840 itself is configured to be rotatable about the center of the rotating member (see FIG. 11). In this way, by further rotating the rotating member 840 while moving the position of the rotating member 840, it is possible to execute a powerful effect for the player.

  Next, the configuration of the injection device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This ejection device 400 is a device for ejecting the granular member 320 radially upward (in the direction of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), and makes the ejection device 400 itself difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so as to be hidden by the operation unit 500. A storage area ra for storing the granular member 320 is formed in the injection device 400, and a bottom member of the storage area ra is formed in an arch shape. The bottom member is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by driving the driving mechanism 400m, and the bottom member sa is moved in the upward direction, so that the plurality of granular members housed in the housing area ra. 320 is configured to be ejected upward. Since the specific operation principle of the injection device 400 is the same as that of the above-described first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the second control example, the storage detection sensor sa is provided as a detection unit that can detect the amount (number) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra. The storage detection sensor sa is formed by a weight sensor capable of detecting the weight applied to the arch-shaped bottom surface, and whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the weight sensor. It is configured to be distinguishable. Based on the detection result by the detection means, it is possible to detect the state in which the granular member 320 ejected by the ejection device 400 is not stored in the storage area ra, for example, the state in which the granular member 320 is clogged without returning to the storage area ra. it can.

  The configuration of the detection unit that detects whether or not the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, the region through which the ejected granular member 320 passes may be divided. A detection line is formed on the number of granular members 320 that have been ejected toward the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 beyond the detection line, and from the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 to the storage area ra. The number of the granular members 320 returning to and the measuring unit capable of measuring the granular members 320 are provided, and it is possible to determine whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the measurement result of the measuring unit. You may. In addition, as in the present control example, when the member to be ejected from the ejection device 400 has a rollable shape (spherical shape), the member to be ejected by the ejection device 400 is stored in the storage area ra. An alignment path is formed on the return path, and counting means capable of counting the number of injected members rolling on the alignment path is provided. Based on the counting result of the counting means, all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. It may be configured to be able to determine whether or not it is stored.

  As described above, by configuring the state of the granular member 320 to be discriminable, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect. In other words, in a rendering device such as the rendering member 700 and the rotating member 840 whose operation is mechanically controlled based on the driving of the driving unit (motor or solenoid), the driving status of the driving unit (the number of rotations of the motor (the number of steps) ) Or the energization state of the solenoid), it is possible to grasp the current state (position) of the rendering device. However, for the granular member 320 ejected by the ejection device 400, the ejection device 400 ejects the granular member 320. The timing to be performed can be grasped by determining the driving condition of the drive mechanism 400m, but it is difficult to determine at what timing the ejected granular member 320 is to be stored again in the storage area ra. That is, the area reached by the ejected granular members 320 is changed according to the ejection direction and the degree of collision between the ejected granular members 320, and the momentum of the ejected granular members 320 weakens, and As a result, when it falls downward, it collides with each member provided in the ejection region of the granular member 320 or is clogged in the gap between the members, so that there is a delay in the timing of returning to the storage region ra. I was afraid. Further, the electrostatic attraction generated by the collision or contact of the granular members 320 may cause the granular members 320 to be adsorbed, which may delay the timing of returning to the storage area ra or may prevent the granular members 320 from returning.

  Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, in order to solve the above-described problems, the state of the ejected granular member 320 is determined, and based on the determination result, the granular member 320 is next. The timing and the content for executing the effect using are configured to be variably controllable. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the effect of injecting the granular member 320 from being executed by the injection device 400 in a state where the granular member 320 is not stored in the storage area ra and the production effect to be reduced.

  Further, in the second control example, the determination value for determining the number (quantity) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra as abnormal is changed according to the operation content (operation purpose) of the injection device 400. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the abnormality from being excessively determined by the abnormality determination, which makes it difficult for the injection device 400 to execute the effect of ejecting the granular member 320, and reduces the effect of the effect. it can.

  Further, in the second control example, in a part of the state where all the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, by intentionally executing the effect of ejecting the granular members 320 by the injection device 400, all the granular members 320 are stored. The granular member 320 is configured to be stored in the storage area ra. In this way, since the action control used for the presentation can be used to attempt the action of normalizing the storage state of the granular member 320, the action control content for the injection device 400 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227 to FIG. 229, the content of the effect using each effect device executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. Note that FIGS. 227 to 229 are diagrams for simply explaining the flow of the production using each production device (the production member 700, the rotating member 840, the injection device 400), and the detailed configuration is omitted. However, since the specific structure and operation principle are the same as those of the above-described first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  227 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the effect member 700 is located at the operation position, and FIG. 227 (b) is a state where the effect member 700 is located at the operation position. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the ejection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is ejected in a state in which the dividing operation is being performed in step 1. FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a state where the effect member 700 moves to the standby position and the granular member 320 returns to the storage area ra, and FIG. 228 (b) shows a rotating member. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the state which the injection device 400 drives and the granular member 320 is ejected in the state which 840 is driving.

  In this control example, a series of accessory effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 can be executed. In this series of accessory effects, first, the first effect of moving the effect member 700 to the operation position is executed (see FIG. 227 (a)), and thereafter, the injection device 400 is driven while the effect member 700 is divided. A second effect (see FIG. 227 (b)) is executed, and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, a third effect (see FIG. 228 (b)) in which the operation of the rotating member 840 and the driving of the injection device 400 are executed. And are configured to be executable.

  In this way, by executing the effect in which a plurality of various devices are interlocked with each other, it is possible to execute a powerful effect having a sense of unity for the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), by driving the injection device 400 in accordance with the division operation of the effect member 700, it is possible to give an illusion that the granular member 320 is protruding from the inside of the effect member 700. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present control example, the operation status of the injection device 400 (recovery status of the granular member 320) is configured to be discriminable during execution of the series of accessory effects, and the operation status of the injection device 400 (the granular member 320 When it is determined that the (collection status) is in a predetermined abnormal state, only the effect display executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the ejection device 400. The effect mode is configured to be variable to the effect of executing (see FIG. 29). With this configuration, the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 are in a state where the granular member 320 is protruding. It is possible to minimize the deterioration of the effect of the series of character effects, while suppressing the occurrence of the situation where various members are damaged by moving the

  Here, with reference to FIG. 230, a flow of a series of accessory effects will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart schematically showing the states of various devices of the pachinko machine 10 in the case where a series of accessory effects are executed, and FIG. 230 (a) shows the main controller 110, 230 (b) is a voice lamp control device 113, FIG. 230 (c) is a liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 230 (d) is a projectile accessory (ejection device) 400, FIG. 230 (e). ) Is a timing chart schematically showing the situation of the falling accessory (production member) 700, and FIG. 230 (f) schematically showing the situation of the rotating accessory (rotating member) 840 over time.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), in the present control example, the series of character effects described above is executed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation (for example, fluctuation time of 90 seconds) executed by the main controller 110. Is configured as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 230 (c), the variation effect display of the third symbol is executed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the start of the special symbol variation, After that, 45 seconds after the variation effect display is executed, the series of accessory effect displays corresponding to the series of effect effects are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (b), when performing a series of accessory effects, it is necessary to perform a preparatory operation for the launch accessory 400 in advance, and 5 seconds before execution of the series accessory effect ( Preparation control is executed with 5 seconds as a preparation period from the time when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of special symbol fluctuation). When the preparation control is executed, the launching accessory 400 executes a preparatory operation (see FIG. 230 (d)), and then the launching accessory 400 and the falling accessory 700 are synchronized with the start timing of the series of accessory effects. Performs the operation (see FIG. 226 (b)). Then, when the first operation of the firing accessory 400 ends, a preparatory operation (an operation of moving from the firing position to the standby position) is performed toward the next operation, and the standby period is set until the execution timing of the second operation. It

  Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the operation of the falling accessory 700 ends, 60 seconds elapses after the change effect display is executed, the rotating member 840 starts the operation, and the launching part matches the timing. The second operation of the object 400 is executed. In this way, the effect effect can be enhanced by executing the operation control for each effect device so that the operation timing of the shooting accessory 400 matches the operation content of the falling accessory 700 and the rotating member 840. .

  Here, as the preparatory operation of the projectile accessory 400, the driving process for moving the projectile accessory 400 to the standby position (see FIG. 227 (a)) and the determination of whether or not the condition of the granular member 320 is normal are determined. And the determination process to perform. Then, when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normal (normally stored in the storage area ra), the next operation of the projectile accessory 400 is configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the projectile accessory 400 is configured to operate a plurality of times within a series of performance periods, but during the plurality of projectile object 400 operating periods, There is a waiting period. This waiting period is provided as a period during which a part of the preparatory operation can be executed again when the preparatory operation is not normally completed. Specifically, at the end timing of the preparation period, it is determined whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, and when it is determined that all of the granular members 320 are not stored, a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) It is configured such that it is possible to perform a process of determining again whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra at intervals.

  As described above, the granular member 320 fired by the projectile accessory 400 moves irregularly in the firing area (emission area), and therefore the time spent returning to the storage area ra may vary greatly depending on the case. It will be. Therefore, the process of determining whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra can be executed a plurality of times at different timings, and even if a slight error occurs, the second operation of the projectile accessory 400. Is feasible. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate execution of a series of accessory effects and enhance effect effects.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when the storage state of the granular member 320 is determined to be abnormal during the preparation period of the projectile accessory 400, and the standby period elapses, an abnormality occurs. When the determination is continued, the execution of the effect for operating the projectile accessory 400 is stopped, and another effect is executed. With such a configuration, even if the effect using the launching accessory 400 cannot be normally executed, it is possible to execute a series of accessory effects without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, of the operation control of the projectile accessory 400, the content of the operation control when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (at the time of startup). In this control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the operation confirmation of various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. In this way, the operation check of various effect devices is executed at the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, before the opening of the game hall where the game using the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the various production devices, for example, when it is determined that the operation is abnormal due to a defect of the drive mechanism (motor, solenoid, drive gear, etc.) Therefore, it becomes possible to carry out the repair without causing any trouble to the player who is playing the game.

  As shown in FIG. 231, when the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 is executed at power-on, first, the granular member monitoring for determining whether or not the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra. The process is executed (see FIG. 231 (b)). In this granular member monitoring process, it is determined whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor sa shown in FIG. 226 (b). Then, based on the determination result of the granular member monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the current storage status is abnormal (see FIG. 231 (c)).

  In this control example, in the abnormality determination for determining whether or not the determination result of the granular member monitoring processing is abnormal, the rank of the abnormality determination is changed according to the timing (situation) at which the abnormality determination is executed. ing. Although the details will be described later, the storage amount of the granular members that are determined to be abnormal is made to differ according to the abnormality determination timing (situation).

  In the abnormality determination first performed in the operation confirmation process for the launching accessory 400 when the power is turned on, the abnormality determination having the highest determination level (high level A) is performed. In this high level A abnormality determination, it is determined as "normal" only when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is the determination result that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, and other than that. If it is a determination result, it is configured to determine "abnormal". Then, when it is determined to be "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, the execution of the initial operation process at power-on is interrupted, and the abnormality notification process of notifying the abnormal state to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent secondary damage from occurring due to the initial operation process continuing in a state where the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal.

  Then, when it is determined to be “normal” in the abnormality determination performed at the first timing of the initial operation process, next, the preparatory operation and the firing operation are performed as the drive control of the firing accessory 400. Then, after a waiting period of 3 seconds, the second abnormality determination is executed. In the second abnormality determination, the abnormality determination having the highest determination level (high level B) is executed next to the above-described high level A abnormality determination.

  In this high-level B abnormality determination, if the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is the determination result that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, it is determined as “normal” and within a predetermined amount. Error LV1 indicating that the error (for example, error is 10%) is “retry”, abnormal LV2 indicating that the error is equal to or larger than a predetermined amount (for example, error is larger than 10%), or In the case of an abnormal LV3, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the content of operation control in the case of using the launching accessory 400 as an effect of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in the case of executing a series of accessory effects) will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the projectile accessory 400 (during a series of accessory effects). In the present control example, similarly to the above-described initial operation process, even when a series of accessory effects is executed, the abnormality determination for various devices used for the effects is executed. Then, the effect contents of the series of accessory effects are changed according to the result of the abnormality determination. Further, by changing the determination level of the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, the production using the launching accessory 400 is easily executed in the series of accessory productions.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, a description will be given of a rendering mode of the series accessory production executed according to the abnormality determination result of the launch accessory 400 in the series accessory production. FIG. 233 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow of effects executed in the series of accessory effects. In this control example, as shown in FIG. 232, two abnormality determinations are performed during the series of winning effect productions (first abnormality determination having a determination level of medium level and second abnormality determination having a low determination level). In the case where both are determined to be normal, as shown in FIG. 233 (a), in the first half of the target production period of the series of character effects, the first firing effect of the firing character object 400 and the falling character object 700 are obtained. And the fall effect of is executed. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the second firing effect of the firing accessory 400 and the rotation effect of the rotating member 840 are executed. In the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, effect display corresponding to a predetermined series of effect effects is executed.

  On the other hand, in the first abnormality determination, when it is determined to be “abnormal (for example, abnormal LV2)”, the granular member 320 is not normally stored in the storage area ra, and a shooting role as a series of character effects. Even if the object 400 is operated, the effect of the effect is lowered, and as shown in FIG. 233 (b), an effect mode different from that in the normal state (see FIG. 233 (a)) is set. Specifically, the execution of the first shooting effect of the shooting accessory 400 is stopped, and as the effect using the falling accessory 700, a specific drop effect is set instead of the normal drop effect. Then, thereafter, regardless of the result of the second abnormality determination that is executed, even in the latter half of the series of accessory effects, the execution of the second launch effect using the launch accessory 400 is stopped and the rotation effect using the rotating member 840. Is executed.

  Since the effect period of the specific drop effect is set longer than the effect period of the normal drop effect, the interval from the end of the effect of the drop accessory 700 to the start of the effect of the rotating member 840 is normal. It is configured so as to be shorter than the series of character effects performed in step 1. That is, in the normally executed series of accessory effects, the projectile accessory 400 is configured to be driven according to the operations of the various effect devices (falling accessory 700, rotating member 840). It was necessary to provide a predetermined period of time for the object 400 to drive normally.

  On the other hand, in the performance mode of the series character effect shown in FIG. 233 (b), since the launch character 400 is not driven, even if the effect period of the fall character 700 is lengthened, the player feels uncomfortable. There is nothing. Further, since the timing of performing the effect of the rotating member 840 is the same as that at the normal time (see FIG. 233 (a)), it is possible to make the control processing contents common between the normal time and the abnormal time. Can be reduced.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 233 (b), when the result of the first abnormality determination is determined to be "abnormal", shooting is performed during a series of character effect production without considering the result of the second abnormality determination. Although it is configured to set the effect mode in which the accessory 400 is not used, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be “normal”, the second emission of the launch accessory 400 is performed. You may comprise so that performance may be performed. That is, when the first abnormality determination of the series character effect is determined to be “abnormal”, for example, the granular members 320 are biasedly stored in the storage area ra, and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is not normally determined that the falling accessory 700 is present, or if it is determined as "abnormal" because the granular member 320 is caught in the falling accessory 700, an effect using the falling accessory 700 is executed as a series of effect effects. By doing so, all the granular members 320 may be normally stored in the storage area ra. Therefore, the second launch effect of the projectile accessory 400 may be executed based on the result of the second abnormality determination. As a result, it is possible to easily execute the effect using the projectile accessory 400.

  Next, a description will be given of a rendering aspect of the series of winning effect production when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of winning effect production. FIG. 233 (c) is a diagram schematically showing a performance mode of a series of accessory effects when it is determined to be "mild abnormality" in the second abnormality determination.

  When the same determination as "normal" is made in the first abnormality determination, the first firing effect and the drop effect, which are the same as the series of accessory effects at the normal time, are executed. After that, when it is determined in the second abnormality determination that it is a “mild abnormality (for example, abnormality LV2)”, a delay period is set, and after the delay period elapses, retry processing for executing the abnormality determination again is executed. . Then, when the result of the abnormality determination executed in the retry process is "normal", the same operation control as in the normal time, that is, The second firing effect of the firing accessory 400, the rotation effect of the rotation member 840, and the effect display executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are simultaneously executed based on the delay period elapsed timing.

  In other words, the execution timing of the second half effect in the series of accessory effects is delayed by the period (retard period) in which the retry process is executed. Then, during the delay period, the specific display is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without executing the operation control of the various effect devices. By configuring in this way, the display contents of the effect display that is continuously displayed during the execution of the series of effect effects, and the operation contents of the various effect devices whose execution timing is variable depending on the presence or absence of delay are misaligned. It is possible to prevent the rendering effect from decreasing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, for example, in the pattern shown in FIG. 233 (c), when the result of the second abnormality determination is “abnormal”, the continuous display with respect to the display content of the specific display is performed. The second specific display of the content is displayed, and a series of accessory effects in which the various effect devices do not operate are executed. With this configuration, it is possible to finish the series of accessory effects by using the effect display that does not give a feeling of strangeness to the display content of the specific display. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data corresponding to the operation control contents of various special effect devices corresponding to the special abnormality determination result.

  Next, a description will be given of a rendering aspect of the series of winning effect production when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of winning effect production. FIG. 233 (d) is a diagram schematically showing a performance mode of a series of accessory effects when it is determined as "abnormal (for example, abnormal LV3)" in the second abnormality determination. When the determination result of the second abnormality determination is the abnormality LV3, the special operation effect is executed without executing the retry processing as shown in FIG. 233 (c). In this special operation effect, the player sets an operation effective period during which the operation means (frame button 22) can be operated, and the player operates the operation means within the operation effective period. It is an effect of operating one of them.

  In other words, based on the fact that the abnormality is determined to be "abnormal", the operation of various effect devices is stopped as the operation scenario for the series of accessory effects, and instead, an operation effect used as another effect is incorporated. I am configuring. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to operate various effect devices by operating the frame button 22 during execution of a series of accessory effects in which the effect devices are operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the production mode is set because the launch accessory 400 is determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in comparison with the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 152). The configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are different from each other. Specifically, a decorative accessory motor for driving various effect devices. The difference is that the groups Mz are connected. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The decorative accessory motor group Mz includes various motors and solenoids for driving the dropping accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the projectile accessory 400, and the like, and its specific configuration and operation. Since the principle is the same as that of the above-mentioned first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that an accessory action table 222aa and an abnormality determination table 222ab are added, and is otherwise the same. Is. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory operation table 222aa is the operation content (operation scenario) for various decorative accessories (falling accessory 700, rotating member 840, launching accessory 400, etc.) used for the variation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. ) Are stored in the data table, and the operation scenario is defined for each of the various decorative ornaments in association with the operation content to be executed, and the operation scenario corresponding to the operation content to be executed is The read operation is performed and the operation based on the read operation scenario is executed.

  Here, the contents of the scenario defined in the accessory action table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 236 (a). FIG. 236 (a) is a schematic diagram showing various scenarios defined in the accessory action table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 236 (a), the accessory operation table 222aa is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (at the time of startup) in addition to the operation scenario referred to when executing the variation effect. An operation scenario referred to at the time of initial operation is also specified.

  Specifically, the initial operation scenario 222aa1, the launching accessory preparation operation scenario 222aa2, the launching agent first operation scenario 222aa3, the launching agent second operation scenario 222aa4, the falling auditors operation scenario 222aa5, the rotating auditors operation scenario 222aa6. Is stored.

  Next, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to when determining how much the granular member 320 fired by the projectile accessory 400 has returned to the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400, The determination result of the abnormality determination is configured to be different according to the error from the normal value. In this control example, the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra is set to "10", and an error occurs each time the number of the granular members 320 stored decreases by one. It is configured to be discriminated in increments of 10%.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), when the error (%) is "0", the determination result is "normal", and when the error is "10%", the determination result is "abnormal LV1." , The error is "20% to 30%", the determination result is "abnormal LV2", and the error is "40% or more", the determination result is "abnormal LV3". As described above, the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra is determined stepwise by determining the current state step by step Can be easily changed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 235 (b). FIG. 235 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that an accessory delay timer 223aa and an effect level storage area 223ab are added, and is otherwise the same. Is. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory delay timer 223aa is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation control of the launch accessory 400 is delayed, and when the operation control of the launch accessory 400 is delayed, a predetermined delay period (2 seconds). ) Is set (see S3909 in FIG. 243). Then, the value is updated each time the accessory effect management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) is executed, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process for determining the abnormality of the launch accessory 400 again. It is executed (see S3810 in FIG. 244). Then, during a period in which the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, that is, during the delay period, operation instructions to various effect devices other than the launch accessory 400 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are also delayed. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to delay the operation instruction to the other various performance devices by the same length as the delay period set for the operation control of the shooting accessory 400, and thus the shooting accessory It is possible to easily execute the operation control with a sense of unity with respect to various rendering devices including 400. Further, even when the processing for extending the delay period of the projectile accessory 400 on the way can be executed, operation is performed on other various effect devices until the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa becomes 0. Since no instruction is output, it is possible to facilitate the operation control with a sense of unity with respect to various effect devices including the launching accessory 400.

  In addition, in the present control example, in addition to various effect devices, the process of instructing the display control content regarding the display effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be delayed. Without limitation, a performance device that outputs an operation instruction may be provided regardless of the length of the delay period set for the projectile accessory 400. By providing such an effect device, by discriminating the operation content of the launching accessory 400 from the operation content of the effecting device, it is possible for the player to know that the operation control of the launching accessory 400 has been delayed. It can be easily notified.

  The effect level storage area 223ab is a storage area in which the effect level set according to the effect mode of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is temporarily stored. In this control example, before performing the effect using the launching accessory 400, that is, the launching effect of shooting the granular member 320 toward the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227 (b)). It is necessary to execute a preparatory operation for lowering the bottom member of the projectile accessory 400 to the preparatory position. Since the preparatory operation is performed by driving the drive mechanism 400m (see FIG. 226 (b)), when the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m is driven, the launch effect is executed. Before the game starts, it is difficult for the player to provide an unexpected performance because the player knows that the shooting performance will be executed.

  Therefore, in this control example, only the preparatory operation can be executed even when the shooting effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether or not the launch effect is executed even if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m is driven, and thus it is easy to provide the player with an unexpected effect. be able to.

  Then, in the present control example, when the effect for executing the preparation operation of the launching accessory 400 is set, the effect set this time is an effect mode in which only the preparation operation is executed, or an effect for executing the shooting effect. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not it is a mode and determine the effect level according to the determination result. Specifically, the effect level 1 is determined in the case of an effect in which only the preparation operation is performed, and the effect level 2 is determined in the case of an effect in which a shooting effect is executed, and the effect level is stored in the effect level storage area 223ab (FIG. 241). S3705, S3706).

  The effect level stored in the effect level storage area 223ab is referred to when the abnormality level is determined using the abnormality determination table 222ab. In this way, an effect of executing only the preparatory operation, that is, an effect in which the operation of the firing accessory 400 is not controlled even if the result of the abnormality determination is “normal” is executed, and the emission effect is executed. By changing the determination result of the abnormality level by the abnormality determination depending on the effect to be performed, for example, because only the preparation operation was performed, the firing effect was not executed, or the result of the abnormality determination was "abnormal". , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the launch effect has not been executed.

<Regarding Control Processing Content of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 246, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, in the first control example described above, the startup process 2 (see FIG. 193) is replaced by the startup process 2 (see FIG. 237), and the main process (see FIG. 194) is replaced by the main process. The process 2 (see FIG. 239) is replaced with the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200), and the effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) is replaced with the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 209). Instead, the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (see S2160 in FIG. 245) is replaced with the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210), and the operation effect management process 2 (see S2161 in FIG. 246) is executed. , Otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the startup process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the startup processing 2. As shown in FIG. 237, the startup process 2 is different from the above startup process (see FIG. 193) in that an initial operation process (S2051) is added.

  Specifically, when the startup process 2 (see FIG. 237) is executed, the same processes of S2001 to S2010 as the startup process (see FIG. 193) described above are executed. Then, when the process of S2010 is completed, the initial operation process is then executed (S2051), the interrupt permission is set thereafter (S2011), and the present process is ended. The details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but a decorative rendering device included in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example (for example, a falling accessory 700, a rotating member 840, a projectile accessory 400). ) Is a process for executing the operation confirmation. That is, in the second control example, the operation check of various effect devices can be executed during a period (startup period) until the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the main process becomes loopable. . Then, if an abnormality occurs during the operation confirmation of the various effect devices, the startup process 2 is not ended and the abnormality notification to the outside is executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to know that the various decoration devices are out of order when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, various devices that are out of order while the player is playing the game. It is possible to prevent the player from performing the effect and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. Moreover, in the recent pachinko machine 10, a plurality of effect devices are configured to be operation-controlled, and the operation control contents are configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state, it is rare that all of the operation control contents set for the various effect devices are executed, and, for example, normal operation due to disconnection or the like. Even if an impossible production device occurs, if the production for controlling the operation of the production device is not executed, it is not possible to grasp that the production device is out of order, and in some cases, what There was a problem that it was left in a disconnected state for days. On the other hand, in the present control example, when the start-up process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the operation control for operation confirmation is executed for various effect devices, and therefore, the effect is produced. It is possible to prevent overlooking for a long time that the device is out of order.

  Next, the contents of the initial operation process (S2051) executed in the startup process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 237 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the initial operation processing (S2051). In the initial operation process (S2051), a process for performing an operation check of the decoration effect device (for example, the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the launching accessory 400, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a process that is looped until all the operation confirmations are completed. In addition, in FIG. 238, the processing content regarding the operation confirmation of the shooting accessory 400, which is the characteristic configuration of this control example, is described in detail, but the processing regarding the operation confirmation is similarly executed in other effect devices. ing. Similarly for other effect devices, detailed description of the process regarding the operation confirmation is omitted.

  When the initial operation process (S2051) is executed, first, the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is read from the accessory operation table 222aa (S2081). Then, the operation control corresponding to the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is executed (S2082). Here, in the initial operation scenario 222aa1, an operation scenario is defined such that operation control is sequentially executed for each rendering device, and it is determined that the result of the operation confirmation of one rendering device is normal. In this case, the next operation confirmation of the production device is executed. By independently controlling the operation of each effect device in this manner, it is possible to prevent the effect devices from being buffered and damaged.

  Furthermore, when the operation confirmation of all the rendering devices is completed normally, the operation confirmation is performed so that the plurality of rendering devices are simultaneously operated with the combination used in the actual rendering. In this case, the operation scenario for production stored in the accessory operation table 222aa is read and the operation control for each production is executed. In this way, by performing the operation confirmation by using the operation control of the content that is actually executed in the production, whether or not the operation instruction is appropriately output to the plurality of production devices, or the plurality of productions When the devices are driven at the same time, it is possible to confirm the operation whether an excessive power value is not output, and it is possible to further reduce the frequency of occurrence of malfunction of the effect device during the game.

  In this control example, the initial operation process is executed by using the operation scenario for the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario actually used for the performance is used for the initial operation process. May be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of operation scenarios for operating the effect device.

  In addition, in this control example, the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is defined so that the operation control is sequentially executed for each effect device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of operation ranges in which the operation ranges cannot overlap. The contents of the initial operation scenario 222aa1 may be defined such that the operation control is executed redundantly for the effect device. As a result, the time spent for the initial operation processing can be shortened.

  When the process of S2082 is completed, it is next determined whether the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 is completed (S2083), and when it is determined that the operation control of the projectile accessory 400 is not completed, that is, another effect. When the operation control of the device is being executed, or when the operation control of the launching accessory 400 is being executed (S2083: No), it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the rendering device other than the launching accessory 400. If it is determined that the abnormality has not occurred (S2084) (S2084: No), the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is updated (S2085), and it is determined whether the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates the end. However, if it is determined that the contents do not indicate the end (S2085: No), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S2082 and repeated until the initial operation scenario 222aa1 ends. And executes the processing of S2082~S2086. Then, in the processing of S2086, when it is determined that the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 has the content indicating the end (S2084: Yes), the present processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2084, when it is determined that the effect device other than the shooting accessory 400 has an abnormality (S2084: Yes), a notification indicating an abnormality of the accessory is executed (S2091) and the processing is looped. . With this configuration, the initial operation process does not end in the state in which the accessory abnormality has been notified. In this case, the hall staff confirms the notification indicating the abnormality of the accessory, removes the cause of the abnormality of the accessory, and then turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again. That is, since the hall staff needs to perform the work in order to normally operate the pachinko machine 10 that has been determined to be abnormal in the accessory, the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably brought into a normal state.

  In this control example, the initial operation process is executed without fail when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined operation condition is satisfied. When the power is turned on in this state, the startup process 2 may be terminated without executing the initial operation process (S2051). With such a configuration, for example, when the player needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again during business hours due to a trouble that occurs during the game, the initial operation process can be skipped. You can Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly returned to a state in which the player can play.

  Returning to S2083, the explanation is continued. In the process of S2083, when it is determined that the content of the initial operation scenario this time is the content for completing the operation of the launching accessory 400 (S2083: Yes), 3 seconds have elapsed from the completion of the operation of the launching accessory 400. If it is determined (S2087) that 3 seconds have not elapsed (S2087: No), the process of S2087 is repeatedly executed until 3 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that 3 seconds have elapsed in the process of S2087 (S2087: Yes), the detection result of the detection sensor (the storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S2088), and the acquired detection result is used to detect an abnormality. The abnormality level is determined by referring to the determination table 222ab (S2089).

  Then, in the process of S2089, it is determined whether or not the abnormality level is 1 or more (S2090), and when it is determined to be 1 or more (S2090: Yes), a notification indicating abnormality of the accessory is executed (S2091). ), Loop the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormal level is not 1 or more (normal) (S2090: No), the process proceeds to S2085 described above.

  Next, the contents of the main process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the main process 2. This main process 2 is different from the above-described main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 194) in that a character effect production management process (S2151) is newly added, and a liquid crystal production execution management process (S2110). The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is replaced with the operation effect management process (S2111), and the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed. Further, the difference is that the contents of the process executed in the command determination process (S2114) and the variable display setting process (S2115) are partially changed. Others are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the main process 2 is executed, the same processes of S2101 to S2109 as the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 194) are executed, then the accessory effect management process (S2151) is executed, and then the liquid crystal effect execution management. Processing 2 (S2160) and operation effect management processing 2 (S2161) are executed. When the process of S2161 is finished, the same processes of S2112 to S2120 as the main process described above (see FIG. 194) are executed, and this process is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the content of the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) executed in the command determination process (see S2114) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. This effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is different from the above effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the accessory effect is added. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is executed, first, the same processes of S2701 to S2705 and S2707 as the effect mode setting process (see S2607 of FIG. 200) described above are executed. When the processes of S2704, S2705, and S2707 are finished, it is next determined whether or not the variation effect pattern selected this time has a character effect (S2751), and when it is determined that there is a character effect (S2751: Yes). ), A character effect setting process is executed (S2752), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, when it is determined that there is no character effect (S2751: No), the process of S2706 is executed as it is, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the content of the accessory effect setting process (S2752) executed in the effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 of FIG. 240) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory effect setting process (S2752). This accessory production setting process (S2752) is for performing processing for setting the production mode of the accessory production, and sets the operation scenario of the accessory production corresponding to the selected variation production pattern. When setting an effect mode corresponding to an effect using the projectile accessory 400, a process of setting the effect level is executed. The effect level set in the accessory effect setting process (S2752) is referred to when the abnormality determination of the launch accessory 400 is executed.

  When the character effect setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the type of character effect included in the variation effect pattern selected this time is extracted (S3701), and the ejected character 400 is extracted as the extracted character effect type. It is determined whether or not a character effect using is included (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the accessory effect using the launch accessory 400 is included (S3702: Yes), the effect content of the launch accessory effect is determined (S3703). Then, it is determined whether the projectile accessory effect extracted this time is a launch accessory effect for which only the preparation operation is performed or a launch accessory effect for which the launch effect is executed (S3704).

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the shooting accessory effect is to execute only the preparation operation (S3704: Yes), the effect level 1 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that not only the preparatory operation, that is, the shooting effect is also executed (S3704: No), the effect level 2 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the present control example, as the character effects using the launch character 400, it is possible to execute a launch character effect that executes only the preparation operation and a launch character effect that performs the preparation operation and the firing operation. ing. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance that the firing operation will be executed when the preparation operation is executed.

  Further, in the present control example, it is configured to set different effect levels for the launch accessory effect that executes only the preparation operation and the launch accessory effect that performs the preparation operation and the launch operation. The degree of abnormality determination is configured to be different depending on the level. Specifically, when the launching accessory effect for executing the preparatory operation and the launching operation is set, the launching accessory 400 is set more than when the launching accessory effect for performing only the preparatory operation is set. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine that the situation is abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate execution of the firing operation using the firing accessory 400.

  On the other hand, when the launch operation using the launch accessory 400 is not executed and the launch accessory effect in which only the preparation operation is executed is executed, it is easy to determine that the situation of the launch accessory 400 is abnormal. Since it is configured, it is possible to properly execute the abnormality determination of the launching accessory 400 without reducing the frequency of performing the launching operation using the launching accessory 400.

  In addition, in the present control example, when it is determined that the condition of the launching accessory 400 is abnormal, it is possible to execute another accessory effect without using the launching accessory 400. Therefore, in the case of executing the launching accessory effect for performing only the preparation operation of the launching accessory 400, if it is determined that the condition of the launching accessory 400 is abnormal, another accessory effect is executed. This means that it is possible to substantially improve the effect effect compared to the accessory effect in which only the preparation operation is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 241, the description will be continued. In the process of S3707, the action scenario corresponding to the type extracted as the present character effect is read from the character action table 222aa (S3707), the read operation scenario is set (S3708), and the effect corresponding to the set operation scenario is set. The mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3709), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the type of the accessory effect this time does not have the launch effect effect (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 to S3706 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3707. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the accessory production management process (S2151 of FIG. 242) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory production management process (S2151). In the character effect management process (S2151), as various management processes executed during the character effect, an abnormality determination process executed during the character effect and a case where a value is set in the character delay timer 223aa. The process is executed.

  When the character effect management process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a character operation scenario is set, that is, the character effect is currently being generated (S3801), and the character operation scenario is set. If it is determined that it has not been performed (S3801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the character action scenario is set (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the character delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3802). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (0) (S3802: No), the set accessory operation scenario is updated (S3803). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently set accessory operation scenario includes an accessory operation scenario corresponding to the launch accessory 400 (S3804), and it is determined that there is an accessory operation scenario corresponding to the launch accessory 400. (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether the content of the current operation scenario is the abnormality determination timing (S3805), and when it is determined that the abnormality determination timing is (S3805: Yes), the production abnormality determination process is executed. (S3806), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3804, when it is determined that the accessory operation scenario of the launch accessory 400 is not set (S3804: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S3805 that it is not the abnormality determination timing (S3805: If No, the operation control corresponding to the operation scenario is executed (S3807), and this processing ends.

  Further, in the process of S3802, the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, that is, the abnormality determination process for the projectile accessory 400 has already been executed, and as a result of the determination, the delay process for delaying the accessory effect is executed. If it is determined that a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa (S3802: Yes), the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is updated ( Subtraction) (S3808), and it is determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa after the subtraction is 0 (S3809). Here, when it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is 0 (S3809: Yes), since it is the timing when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance abnormality is performed in order to execute the abnormality determination again. The determination process is executed (S3810), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3809, when it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is not 0 (greater than 0) (S3809: No), this process is directly terminated. When it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0 in the process of S3809, the processes of S3802, S3802, S3808, and S3809 are repeatedly executed, and the operation scenario related to the accessory effect that is currently set is executed. The updating process (S3803) is not executed. That is, when the value of the character delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, the character effect does not proceed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect production from being executed during the delay period, the effect timings of the plurality of effect productions being deviated, and the effect being reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the contents of the during-production abnormality determination processing (S3806) executed in the accessory production management processing (see S2151 of FIG. 242) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the production abnormality determination process (S3806). In this production-during abnormality determination process (S3806), abnormality determination is performed in a character effect (for example, a series of character effects) in which the projecting accessory 400 is used. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 232, an abnormality determination of the "medium level" as the determination level executed before the first firing accessory 400 is operated as a series of accessory effects, and the second firing. Abnormality determination of the "low level" determination level performed before operating the accessory 400 and abnormality determination of the "high level" determination level performed after the second operation of the firing accessory 400 are performed. It

  When the production abnormality determination process (S3806) is executed, first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S3901), and the abnormality determination table 222ab is currently referred to based on the acquired detection result. The abnormal level of is determined (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the current abnormality determination timing is the first abnormality determination timing (the timing at which the abnormality determination of which the determination level in FIG. 232 is "medium level" is executed) (S3903).

  In the processing of S3903, when it is determined that it is the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the processing of S3902 is “2” or more (S3904), and “2” or more. If it is determined to be (S3904: Yes), the effect mode indicating the specific effect without using the launching accessory 400 is determined (S3905), the operation scenario corresponding to the launching accessory 400 is reset (S3906), and the winning combination is performed. A notification command indicating a physical abnormality is set (S3907), and this processing ends.

  That is, at the timing of the first abnormality determination, that is, at the abnormality determination timing executed before the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is executed, the amount of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is less than 80%. It is configured to determine that the condition of the projectile accessory 400 is abnormal in the case of. As a result, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect when the effect using the launch accessory 400 is executed. Further, in this case, as the specific effect without using the launching accessory 400, for example, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), the operation scenario of the falling accessory 700 is rewritten to have a longer effect period than the normal falling effect. Since the specific drop effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the series of accessory effects from being lowered.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, if it is determined that the present is not the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: No), then the second abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination of the determination level in FIG. 232 is “weak level”) is performed. It is determined whether it is the execution timing) (S3908). If it is determined in the process of S3908 that it is the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: Yes), it is then determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" (S3909), and "2". If it is determined to be (S3909: Yes), a value indicating 2 seconds is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa (S3910), and a display command indicating a display mode during the delay period is set (S3911). The process ends.

  In the process of S3909, when it is determined that the level is not "2" (S3909: No), it is determined whether the abnormal level is "3" (S3912), and when it is determined that the level is "3". (S3912: Yes), the effect mode indicating the second specific effect without using the launching accessory 400 is determined (S3913), the operation scenario corresponding to the launching accessory 400 is reset (S3914), and a notification indicating an abnormality in the accessory is made. A command is set (S3915), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S3908, when it is determined that it is not the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: No), the third abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination of the determination level “high level B” in FIG. 232) is then executed. It is determined whether it is the timing (S3916). When it is determined in the process of S3916 that it is the third abnormality determination timing (S3916: Yes), it is then determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is larger than "1" (S3917), and "1" is set. If it is determined that it is larger than "(S3909: Yes), a notification command indicating abnormality of the accessory character is set (S3918), and this processing is ended. This third abnormality determination timing corresponds to the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the launching accessory 400 ends, so even if it is determined here that the accessory is abnormal, the operation corresponding to the launching accessory 400 is performed. The scenario is never reset. On the other hand, in the process of S3917, when it is determined that the abnormal level is not higher than "1" (S3917: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the content of the second effect-during abnormality determination processing (S3810) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect-during abnormality determination processing (S3810). The second performance-during abnormality determination processing (S3810) is executed in the accessory production management processing (S2151) described above with reference to FIG. 242, and the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is updated to 0. If it is, that is, the process is executed at the timing when the delay period elapses, and the result of the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 is the predetermined result, the abnormality determination (retry processing) is performed again after some time. This is the process to be executed when performing.

  In this second performance-during abnormality determination processing (S3810), first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S4001), and the abnormality level is determined by referring to the abnormality determination table 222ab (S4002). Then, it is determined whether the determined abnormal level is "normal" or the abnormal level "1" (S4003), and when it is determined that the "normal" or the abnormal level is "1" (S4003: Yes), This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal level is not the normal level or the abnormal level is “1”, that is, the abnormal levels are “2” and “3” (S4003: No), the second specific effect without using the launching accessory. Is selected (S4004), the operation scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S4005), the notification command indicating abnormality of the accessory is set (S3918), and this processing is ended.

  If the result of the second performance-during abnormality determination process is normal, the operation scenarios for the various performance devices are updated again after the delay period elapses, so that a series of preset series is set across the delay period. The production of character effects will be resumed. On the other hand, when the result of the second performance-due abnormality determination processing is abnormal, a new performance mode (second specific performance) is set when the delay period elapses, and the performance corresponding to the second specific performance is a combination role. It is executed in the second half of the production.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. The liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) does not execute various processes related to the liquid crystal effect in the state where the accessory delay timer 223aa measures the delay period, in contrast to the above-described liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). The difference is that a process for doing so is added, and the same process is executed other than that. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3551), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), All processing is skipped and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (0) (S3551: No), the same processes of S3501 to S3511 as the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above are executed, and this process ends. .

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161). This operation effect management process 2 (S2161) does not execute various processing related to operation effects in the state where the accessory delay timer 223aa measures the delay period, in contrast to the operation effect management process (S2111) described above. The difference is that a process for doing so is added, and the same process is executed other than that. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3651), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), all This process is ended by skipping the process of. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (0) (S3651: No), the same processes of S3601 to S3624 as the above-mentioned operation effect management process (S2111) are executed and this process is terminated.

  As described with reference to FIG. 245 and FIG. 246, in the present control example, when the delay period is set to execute the abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 again, the effect contents are also applied to other effects. Is configured so that no updates are performed. That is, when the delay period is set, not only the effect on the projectile accessory 400, but also other effects are delayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the effect by each effect device from being shifted in the effect (a series of accessory effects) with a sense of unity using a plurality of effect devices.

<First Modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 249, a modified example of the button repeated hit effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example will be described. The continuous hit effect in the above-described first control example is the operation for changing the effect mode (variable operation) and the continuous hit effect after the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value (the effect mode that does not change any more). Both the operation for shortening the production period of (shortening operation) is configured to be a pressing operation on the frame button 22, and for the player who positively operated the frame button 22 multiple times, After displaying the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value of the continuous hit effect to be executed, the continuous hit effect can be ended (shortened) without continuing the useless effect period, so that the player is positive. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  On the other hand, the continuous striking effect in the present modified example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variable operation and the shortening operation described above can be executed with different operation contents. That is, in the above-described first control example, since the variable operation and the shortening operation are configured to be executed with the same operation content (operation content of pressing the frame button 22), the effect mode of continuous hit production is While the shortening operation can be executed only after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, in the present modified example, the variable operation and the shortening operation are executed with different operation contents, and therefore continuous hitting is performed. The shortening operation can be executed before the effect mode of the effect is changed to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value.

  Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing during the period in which the continuous hit effect is being executed, to execute the shortening operation. Further, similarly to the above-described first control example, since the maximum variable value can be set differently according to the repeated hit effect to be executed, the effect mode is the maximum variable value (the effect mode that cannot be changed any more. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing that is changed to).

  FIG. 247 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a start screen of the button repeated hit effect in the present modification. The same elements as those of the display mode displayed in the continuous hit effect in the above-described first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 247 (a) shows a display screen on which a continuous striking effect (aura effect) that can be varied in a maximum of 5 stages (Lv5) is executed as the consecutive striking effect. The aura effect in which the value is set to the third stage (Lv3) is shown. That is, in the aura effect this time, even if the player performs the variable operation a plurality of times, the player can only change the variable up to the third stage (Lv3).

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), when the aura effect is executed, an effect 851 that is a variable mode of the aura effect is displayed around the character 801, and a variable information display mode indicating the current variable stage in the display area HR51. “Lv1” is displayed as. This variable information display mode is for indicating to the player the degree of change of the effect 851 based on the variable operation, and a higher stage is displayed as the aura effect progresses (as the effect 851 changes). is there. In this way, not only the display mode of the effect 851 but also the current variable level is displayed as a numerical value, so that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Then, in the display area HR2, a button 803 and a time gauge 804 showing the same contents as those in the above-described first control example are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the continuous hit effect (aura effect) game being executed this time. As a guidance display mode for indicating the content, a comment of "store energy by hitting buttons repeatedly" is displayed.

  Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 a plurality of times during execution of the aura effect and the variable aspect of the effect 851 reaches the second stage, the variable aspect reaches the second stage as shown in FIG. 247 (b). A display mode indicating that this has been done is displayed. Further, a display area HR52 is formed, and a shortening operation guide display indicating that the shortening operation can be executed is displayed to the player. A button 852 simulating the first button 22za is displayed in the display area HR52 as a guidance display mode for indicating the operation content of the shortening operation. Then, an arrow indicating the operation method for the button 852 is also displayed.

  At this point, since the operation valid period indicated by the time gauge 804 has not elapsed, the display area HR2 displays a display mode indicating that a variable operation can also be accepted. On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a notification display mode for notifying the player that it is possible to continuously select the variable operation or the short operation for the player. As a comment is displayed, "Choose more energy by repeated hits or release by pressing the first button".

  In this way, during the aura effect that is a continuous hit effect, a period during which both a variable operation (pressing operation on the frame button 22) and a shortening operation (pressing operation on the first button 22za) can be operated is provided, and the game is played. It is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect mode of the operation effect by configuring the person to select which operation to perform. That is, when the shortening operation is executed while the maximum variable value is not reached during the aura effect, the effect result of the aura effect is displayed without displaying the variable mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol lottery referred to when setting the production mode (maximum variable value) of the aura production (continuous hit production).

  In the present modification, the shortening operation is completed by executing the pressing operation once for the first button 22za. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, the effect result according to the degree of change of the effect 851 by the aura effect at that time is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the display mode of the effect 851 displayed at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect, and the effect is determined according to the determination result. The display mode of the result is different.

  For example, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248 (a) is displayed. FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is executed after the variable mode (effect 851) of the aura effect is changed to the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), when the shortening operation is performed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is reached, it is indicated in the sub-display area Ds that the shortening operation is performed after the maximum variable value is reached. The comment “Nice timing !! This time Lv3 was the upper limit” is displayed as a notification display mode for notifying the user. As a result, the player can easily grasp the maximum variable value set for the aura effect executed this time, and avoid the situation where the aura effect is continuously executed without executing the shortening operation. You can understand what was done.

  In the main display area Dm, the character "chance" is displayed as a result display mode 851a showing the effect result of the aura effect this time. Since the display content of the result display mode 851a is the same as that of the continuous hit effect of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the display area HR2 is hidden, and the button 852 imitating the first button 22za and the time gauge 804 are displayed in the display area HR52. In this modified example, as described above, when the continuous hit effect is executed, the player is caused to execute an operation for different operation means between the variable operation and the shortening operation. Then, when the shortening operation is executed, during the subsequent operation valid period (during the remaining period displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation means operable by the player is the operation means capable of executing the variable operation ( The frame button 22) is switched to the operation means (first button 22za) that has performed the shortening operation.

  As shown in FIG. 248 (a), by hiding the display area HR2 and displaying the time gauge 804 in the display area HR52, during the operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means in the continuous striking effect is effectively determined. The operation means to be operated by the player (the type of operation means that is effectively determined) can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in this way, the annoyance of operating the frame button 22 again after the shortening operation is performed by switching the operation means that the player can operate in the remaining period after the shortening operation is performed. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is not the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248 (b) is displayed. FIG. 248 (b) is an example of display contents displayed when the shortening operation is performed in a state where the aura effect variable mode (effect 851) is a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. It is the schematic diagram shown. As illustrated in FIG. 248 (b), when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is not reached, that is, when the shortening operation is performed at the variable value Lv2, the maximum variable value is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a notification display mode for notifying the player that the shortening operation has been executed in a state where the power has not been reached, a comment “insufficient power !! Must have saved more energy ...” is displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the variable mode can be changed more in the aura effect executed this time.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the character "?" Is displayed as the result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. That is, as the effect result of the aura effect, the preset effect content (display mode) is the effect content when the maximum variable value is reached, so the shortening operation is executed before reaching the maximum variable value. In this case, the preset effect contents are not displayed as the effect result of the aura effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the effect result of the aura effect.

  On the other hand, the player whose display screen is shown in FIG. 248 (b) is difficult to grasp the maximum variable value set in the aura effect this time from the display mode, but at least, Since it is possible to easily understand that a value higher than the variable value (Lv2) at the time when the shortening operation was executed was set as the maximum variable value, it is possible that a higher value was set as the maximum variable value. You can enjoy the later production with a sense of expectation. Furthermore, for a player who does not like the continuous hit effect, the state in which the effect that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 multiple times is continuously displayed for a predetermined period can be eliminated by executing the shortening operation. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play an arbitrary game.

  In the continuous hit effect (aura effect) of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 248, when the timing of executing the shortening operation is early, that is, when the variable mode of the continuous hit effect does not reach the maximum variable value, It is configured so that an appropriate performance result is not displayed. Therefore, when the continuous hit effect is executed, in order to display the appropriate effect result, the timing of executing the shortening operation may be delayed, and only the variable operation may be executed. In this case, there has been a problem that the shortening operation is not executed even though the maximum variable value has already been reached, and the operation valid period elapses without changing the variable mode, resulting in a reduction in the effect.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the variable mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the guide effect that prompts the player to perform the shortening operation is configured to be executable. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's motivation for games is reduced because the period in which the variable mode of the continuous hit effect is not changed for the player continues for a long time.

  The effect contents of this guide effect will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the guide effect is executed. In FIG. 249 (a), when the same aura effect as in FIG. 247 (a) is executed, the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value “3”. In this state, the display screen when the remaining period of the operation valid period is 1 second is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value “3” and the remaining period of the operation effective period becomes 1 second, In the display area Ds, a comment “It may be better to press the first button” is displayed as a guide effect mode for prompting the user to operate the first button 22za, and is displayed in the display area HR52. The button 852 that is present is enlarged and displayed. This allows the player to understand that the currently displayed variable mode is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily perform the shortening operation by the time the operation valid period elapses (by the time the period displayed on the time gauge 804 elapses).

  In this modification, as the execution condition for executing the above-described guidance effect, a time elapsed execution condition that is satisfied when the remaining period of the operation valid period in the aura effect becomes a predetermined period (1 second) is set. However, without being limited to this, when the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated reaches a predetermined number after the end condition in the above-described first control example, that is, the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value is displayed. The operation result execution condition that is satisfied may be set.

  Also, even in the state where the guidance effect shown in FIG. 249 (a) has been executed, if the operation effective period of the aura effect has elapsed without the player performing the shortening operation, the operation shown in FIG. 249 (b) is performed. The display screen shown is displayed. FIG. 249 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the shortening operation is not executed during the aura effect. As shown in FIG. 249 (b), when the shortening operation is not executed in a state in which the variable mode (effect 851) is changed by the variable operation, the comment “stored energy has disappeared” in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed and the result display mode 851a (see FIG. 248 (a)) indicating the effect result of the aura effect is not displayed, and the result effect that the aura effect ends is executed.

  With such a configuration, when the aura effect is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the game in an attempt to execute the shortening operation. In this modification, the result display screen shown in FIG. 249 (b) is displayed when the shortening operation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the aura effect In the state in which the variable mode (effect 851) is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, when the operation valid period elapses without executing the shortening operation, a display screen showing an appropriate effect result. (See FIG. 248 (a)), and performing the shortening operation in a state where the aura effect variable mode (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. Alternatively, the display screen shown in FIG. 249 (b) may be displayed only when the operation valid period has elapsed. With this configuration, in the aura effect, it is appropriate for the player who operates the frame button 22 (executes the variable operation) while expecting the variable mode to change until the operation effective period elapses. Since it is possible to provide various performance results, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 259. In the above-described first control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute all the execution management of various effects for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the specific timing arrives in the effect period of various effect effects executed corresponding to the change time of the special symbol change, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and the effect device are driven. It has been configured to output a command for instructing execution of the effect to various solenoids for.

  In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 centrally manages the execution timings of the various effect devices, whereby it is possible to cause the various effect devices to execute the effect without error, and to provide the effect with a sense of unity. be able to.

  However, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 tends to increase the number of various effect devices or output a production execution instruction in a complicated manner to the various effect devices in order to enhance effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, if the execution management of all the effects is executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 increases, and for example, the process directly related to the game result, Specifically, the process for displaying the stop of the third symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the process for displaying the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the display for notifying the player that the game state is switched. There is a risk that the processing will be delayed and the player's willingness to play will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which is a control device for displaying various effect images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, has a function of managing execution effect. This is different from the first control example described above in that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced by doing so. The other technical ideas are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third control example, when setting the display variation pattern command by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 side can set the display timer management command for managing the elapsed time. are doing. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the timer management command, it manages the duration of the target production with a timer, and when the duration managed by the timer ends, the end of the duration is notified. The display end command shown is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives the display end command output from the display control device 114, determines that the continuation period has ended, and sets a command for an effect executed based on the end of the continuation period. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to have a measuring unit (timer) for measuring the elapsed time, and whether the elapsed time has passed in the voice lamp control device 113. It is not necessary to constantly execute the process for determining. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the third control example, whether or not a specific display mode is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period managed by the display control device 114 by the timer (in the specific display mode, Whether or not the corresponding image data is used) is configured to be discriminable, and when the display end command described above is set, information indicating whether or not a specific display mode is displayed is also settable. .

  Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the command indicating the display of the special hand display mode is output from the display control device 114, and based on the determination result, the effect mode of the effect executed after the end of the continuation period It is configured to be variable. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the effect command for various effect devices with the content (effect mode) according to the execution content (display result) executed by the display control device 114. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period in which the duration is set, the display control device 114 receives a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is capable of variably controlling the display form among various effect forms set by the voice lamp control device 113.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode in the effect (for example, continuous hit effect) executed outside the control of the voice lamp control device 113, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. Note that the present control example is different from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode 233ba is added to the work RAM 233, and is otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect timer 233ba is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the timer management effect included in the timer management command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the duration time of the timer management effect at the timing when the timer management effect is executed. The value corresponding to is set. Then, the value of the timer is updated each time the V interrupt process executed in units of 20 milliseconds is executed, and when the value of the timer is updated to 0, it is determined that the end timing of the timer management effect.

<Regarding the control processing contents of the third control example>
Next, the control processing contents in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 259. In the third control example, a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are included in the third control example. The difference is that a part is changed, and the other is the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 254. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example is the same as the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, instead of the command determination process (see S2114 of FIG. 195). The difference is that the variable display setting process 3 (see S2165 of FIG. 253) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see S2115 of FIG. 199) in the process 3 (see S2164 of FIG. 251), and is otherwise the same. Is. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 3 (S2164). This command determination process 3 (S2164) is added to the above-described command determination process of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) when a display end command output from the display control device 114 is received. They are different in that they are the same, and are otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the stop command is not received (S2213: No), it is then determined whether the display end command is received (S2251), and when it is determined that the display end command is received ( (S2251: Yes), the end command reception process is executed (S2252), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display end command has not been received (S2251: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the content of the end command reception processing (S2251) executed in the command determination processing 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the content of the end command reception process (S2251). In this end command receiving process, a process for setting various effect modes is executed based on the elapsed time managed by the display control device 114.

  In the end command receiving process (S2251), first, the corresponding effect selection information is read from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S4101). In the process of S4101, the information regarding the timer management effect stored in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 of FIG. 254) described later is read. As a result, the end command output from the display control device 114 is associated with the timer management effect set by the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the information included in the display end command received this time is extracted (S4102). In the processing of S4102, the corresponding timer management effect type and a specific display indicating that specific image data (effect data) is displayed as the image data (effect data) displayed during the effect period of the timer management effect. Information and period information indicating the duration of the current timer management effect are extracted.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the specific display information is included in the information read in the process of S4102 (S4103), and if it is determined that the specific display concession is included (S4103: Yes), the information is read in S4101. The specific information is additionally updated in the effect selection information (S4104), the ending effect command corresponding to the additionally updated effect selection information is set (S4105), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific display information is not included in the process of S4103 (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped, and the end time effect command corresponding to the effect selection information read in S4101 is executed. The setting is made (S4105), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165) will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165). This variable display setting process 3 (S2165) differs from the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) in that a process for setting a display variation pattern command is executed in a subroutine. Other than that, it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variable display setting process 3 (S2165), first, the same processes of S2601 to S2607 and S2609 to S2611 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 of FIG. 199) are executed, and then the display variation pattern command setting process. Is executed (S2651). When the process of S2651 is completed, the same processes of S2612 to S2616 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 of FIG. 199) are executed, and this process is completed.

  In the display variation pattern command setting process executed in the process of S2651, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect pattern selected this time is set, and the display control device 114 performs timer management (time lapse management). The process of setting the command for is executed.

  Here, the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see S2165 of FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651).

  In the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651), first, it is determined whether the variation production pattern selected this time includes a timer management production (S4201). The timer management effect is an effect that causes the display control device 114 side to manage the passage of time, and for example, an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of the variable effect period in which the variable effect is executed is applicable. Mainly, when the timer management effect is finished, another effect is executed based on the display result displayed during the timer management effect. The specific content of this timer management effect will be described later.

  In the process of S4201, when it is determined that there is a timer management effect (S4201: Yes), the execution timing of the timer management effect and the display timer management command indicating the duration are set (S4202), and the effect selection information is stored. Information regarding the current timer management effect is stored in the area 223h (S4203), the display variation pattern command is set (S4204), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is not determined that the timer management effect is present, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect pattern selected this time does not include the fluctuation effect corresponding to the timer management effect (S4201: No), The processing of S4202 and S4203 is skipped, the above-described processing of S4204 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, regarding the flow of the variation effect using the timer management effect, for example, in the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the player activates the frame button 22. The case where the effect executed during the effect period (10 seconds) in which the operable valid period is set as the timer management effect is specifically described.

  When setting the variation effect pattern command for which the continuous hit effect is executed, in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), the execution timing of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (after the variation effect starts A display timer management command indicating 10 seconds later (see FIG. 146 (c)) and a duration of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (10 seconds (see FIG. 146 (c))) is set (FIG. 254, S4202). At this time, the content of the effect selected this time and the effect mode of the effect (various reach effects) executed after the timer management effect is finished are stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h. By storing in the effect selection information storage area 223h in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the timer management effect has ended, the control process to be executed next (the effect of the effect to be executed next). (Contents) can be easily read, and the processing load can be reduced.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display timer management command set by the voice lamp control device 113, a continuous hit effect is generated in accordance with the execution timing of the timer management effect based on the information included in the display timer management command. It starts (see FIG. 130 (a)). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit production, a pressing command indicating that the player has operated (pressed) the frame button 22 is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and is displayed. In the control device 114, the variable mode in the continuous stroke effect is determined based on the received press command, image data (effect data) corresponding to the determined variable mode is created, and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. .

  In this case, as shown in the upper limit number selection table of the first control example (see FIG. 162 (b)), when the effect pattern that defines only the predetermined range as the final variable mode is selected, The display control device 114 may be configured to execute control for changing the variable mode within a range that does not deviate from the predetermined range and in which the currently displayed variable mode proceeds.

  With such a configuration, the rule according to the result of the special symbol lottery, that is, only the range that can be displayed as the final variable mode is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, and the detailed variable mode is determined within the range. Since it can be executed by the display control device 114, the processing load of the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  Then, when the effect period of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) elapses, the display control device 114 displays the end information indicating that the timer management effect has ended and the display information indicating the display contents of the variable mode at the end of the effect period. And a display end command including the above are set and output to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, based on various information included in the display end command output from the display control device 114, based on the information stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h, various types to be executed after the continuous hit effect is finished. The effect mode of the effect is determined, and various commands for executing the determined effect mode are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and the various effect devices.

  Further, in the display end command output from the display control device 114, specific display information indicating that the specific variable mode is displayed during the continuous striking effect period (for example, corresponding to the upper limit value of the range determined as the final variable mode). Only when the information indicating that the display mode has been displayed) is included, the effect mode of various effects to be executed after the continuous hit effect is determined as a specific effect mode different from normal, and the determined specific effect mode is executed. The various commands for output are output to the display control device 114, the voice output device 226, and various effect devices.

  In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the start timing and duration of the timer management effect to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 can execute the time management of the timer management effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load of control processing relating to the variation effect in the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the information (command) indicating that the timer management effect has ended is configured to be received from the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the information (command), the effect to be executed after the timer management effect has ended. Since it is configured to determine the effect mode and to instruct the various devices included in the pachinko machine 10 to perform an effect, the sound lamp control device 113 does not have to perform the time management of the timer management effect. It is possible to instruct production execution to various devices at appropriate timing without deviation, and to prevent the production execution timing of various devices from deviating and the production effect from decreasing. You can

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the timer management performance time-controlled by the display control device 114 is configured to be determined by the display control device 114. ing. Therefore, compared with the case where the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined during the timer management effect in the voice lamp control device 113, the load of the control process relating to the variable effect in the voice lamp control device 113. Can be reduced.

  Further, the display end command indicating that the timer management effect has ended includes information regarding the display mode determined by the display control device 114 (information for indicating the display mode displayed at the end of the timer management effect). It is configured to output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the effect mode of the effect to be executed after the end of the timer management effect, based on the information included in the display end command. Since it is configured, it is possible to enhance the effect that the sound lamp control device 113 can set the effect mode corresponding to the effect result of the timer management effect executed and managed by the display control device 114.

  Next, the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259. The control processing content of the display control device 114 in the third control example is replaced with the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)), instead of the control processing content of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above. V interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 255) is replaced with command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214), and command determination processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) is executed. is there. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the V interrupt processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt processing 3. This V interrupt process 3 is different from the above V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)) in that a process for updating the effect timer 233ba is added, and is otherwise the same. .. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third control example, similar to the first control example described above, the MPU 231 performs V The interrupt process 3 is configured to be executed. That is, the V interrupt process 3 is a control process that is periodically executed. Therefore, by updating the value of the effect timer 233ba in accordance with the execution of the V interrupt process 3, the display control device 114 can execute appropriate time management using the effect timer 233ba.

  In this control example, the V interrupt processing 3 is used to execute the update processing of the effect timer 233ba, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if any time can be measured, for example, The display control device 114 may be provided with a time measuring means, and the elapsed time may be configured to be measurable based on the time measuring result of the time measuring means. The elapsed time may be configured to be measurable.

  In the V interrupt process 3, first, the same processes of S6301 to S6309 as the V interrupt process of the above-described first control example (see FIG. 213 (b)) are executed, and then the effect timer update process is executed ( (S6351), the present process ends. The effect timer update process executed in S6351 is a process for updating (subtracting) the value set in the effect timer 233ba. The effect timer 233ba measures an effect period (duration period) of the timer management effect, and a value corresponding to the effect period of the timer management effect is set in accordance with the timing at which the timer management effect is executed. The value is updated (subtracted) every time the interrupt processing 3 is executed (every 20 milliseconds). Then, when the value of the effect timer 233ba becomes 0, the effect period of the timer management effect ends.

  Next, the contents of the command determination processing 3 (S6352) executed in the V interrupt processing 3 (FIG. 255) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 3 (S6532). In this command determination processing 3 (S6532), processing for executing the push command processing (S6452) and the timer setting processing (S6454) is added to the above-described command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214). The same processing contents that are the same except the above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 3 (S6532), first, the same processes of S6401 to S6413 as the above-described command determination process (see S6302 of FIG. 214) are executed. Then, in the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412), then it is determined whether there is a push command (S6451), and if it is determined that there is a push command (S6451: Yes), Press command processing is executed (S6452), and the process proceeds to S6401.

  Here, the pressing command determined in the processing of S6451 means that the player operates the frame button 22 within an operation valid period in which it can be effectively determined that the frame button 22 has been operated. It is a command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 has been operated within the operation valid period, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation on the frame button 22. By the command set in the voice lamp control device 113 when the frame button 22 is operated during the effect (timer management effect) in which the process for variably determining the displayed display mode is performed by the display control device 114. is there.

  When receiving the press command, the display control device 114 executes a process (press command process) for varying the effect mode of the timer management effect. In this way, the push command is set not only when the player operates the frame button 22 but only when the information that the display controller 114 has operated the frame button 22 is required. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, the processing for variably setting the aspect of the effect being performed based on the operation on the frame button 22 is performed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the process performed by the display control device 114. Since it has an effect to be executed, it is necessary to determine whether or not the pressing command is set by the voice lamp control device 113. However, for example, an effect being executed based on an operation on the frame button 22. When the process for variably setting the mode of (1) is executed only by the display control device 114, it is preferable to set the pressing command each time the operation on the frame button 22 is executed. Further, instead of setting a pressing command each time the frame button 22 is operated, information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is accumulated for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and the predetermined period elapses. In such a case, a pressing command including operation number information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is operated may be set based on the accumulated information.

  With this configuration, a slight error occurs in the variable timing of the effect mode for each operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the number of commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is changed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, for example, based on the number of times the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within a predetermined period, one operation on the frame button 22 is performed, such as an operation effect in which the display mode after the predetermined period has elapsed is changed. It may be used when executing an operation effect without changing the display mode based on the above.

  In the case of performing such an operation effect, for example, a variable mode that changes in response to an operation on the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, a variable gauge display that rises each time the frame button 22 is operated). It is preferable that the sound lamp control device 113 can set the display mode and the display mode after a predetermined period can be set by the display control device 114. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 while varying the display mode each time the frame button 22 is operated. The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine that the frame button 22 has been operated. The pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of frame buttons 22 (operation means) may be configured to be discriminable, and the control device that executes the operation discrimination may be different according to the type of the operation means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the content of the press command processing (S6452) executed in the command setting processing 3 (see S6352 of FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the content of the press command processing (S6452). In the press command processing (S6452), processing for changing the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the press command processing (S6452), first, it is determined whether or not the current continuous hit effect is being produced (timer management effect is being generated) (S7801), and if it is determined that continuous hit effect is being performed (timer management effect is being effected) (S7801: Yes), and then, it is determined whether or not the display mode is variable (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined whether or not the currently displayed display mode is the upper limit set as the final variable mode of the continuous hit effect (a situation in which the display mode cannot be changed any more).

  In the process of S7802, when it is determined that the variable state (the display mode being displayed is variable) is determined (S7802: Yes), the variable determination is executed (S7803), and the process of S7803 is executed. Image data based on the determination result of the variable determination is created (S7804), the created image data is set as effect image data (S7805), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7801, when it is determined that the continuous hit effect (timer management effect) is not being performed (S7801: No), or when it is determined that the variable state is not in the process of S7802 (S7802: No), This process ends without creating new image data.

  The effect image data set in the process of S7805 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, and switching control is performed so as to be displayed when the display timing in the display data table corresponding to the timer management effect is timed. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can execute the process for changing the display mode.

  Next, the contents of the timer setting process (S6454) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 of FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer setting process (S6454). In this timer setting process (S6454), the process for setting whether to execute the timer management effect and to set the effect timer 233ba is executed.

  In the timer setting process (S6454), first, the timer management command received this time is analyzed (S7901), the timer set timing included in the timer management command is set (S7902), and the timer period included in the timer management command is managed. The timer is set (S7903), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the effect timer updating process (see S6351 of FIG. 259) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 255) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the content of the effect timer updating process (S6351). In the effect timer updating process (S6351), a process for updating the value of the effect timer 233ba set in the timer setting process (see S6454 of FIG. 258) is executed.

  When the effect timer updating process (S6351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0 (S8001), and it is determined that the value is not greater than 0, that is, the timer management effect is not being performed. In the case of (S8001; No), this processing is ended as it is. In the process of S8001, the value of the effect timer 233ba is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the timer management effect is being performed (S8001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 233ba is updated (S8002), and after the update. It is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003). In the process of S8003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is not 0 (greater than 0) (S8003: No), this process is ended as it is during the effect period of the timer management effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003: Yes), it is the end timing of the timer management effect. Executed as end process.

  First, in the processing of S8004, it is determined whether or not there is a specific image display during the effect period (S8004), and if it is determined that the specific image display is present (S8004: Yes), a specific command indicating the specific image display is created. (S8005), an end command indicating that the value of the effect timer 233ba has become 0 (timer management effect has ended) (indicating the end of the effect timer) is created (S8006), and a display end command including each created command Is set (S8007), and this processing ends.

  Further, in the process of S8004, when it is determined that the specific image is not displayed during the effect period (S8004: No), the process of S8005 described above is skipped. The processing moves to S8006.

  As described above, in the third control example, by causing the display control device 114 to execute a part of the management process related to the effect which is centrally managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The processing load of can be reduced.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned example, although the effect executed during the variable effect of the third symbol is targeted, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a demo screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 may be configured to manage the display period of various display modes that are executed during the demo standby or during the big hit game in which the big hit game is being executed.

  In this case, for example, the sound lamp control device 113 displays it on the display control device 114 in order to properly inform the player of information relating to the game result, such as the timing at which the variation effect is executed and the timing at which the variation effect is stopped. Information indicating a waiting period until the display control device 114 executes the specific effect at the timing of outputting the production command, information indicating the effect period of the specific effect, information indicating the effect contents of the specific effect, and the specific effect. It is configured to output an effect management command including information indicating an effect discard condition that is not executed, and when the display control device 114 receives the effect management command, starts measurement of the waiting period and until the waiting period elapses. It may be configured to execute the specific effect when the effect discard condition is not satisfied during the period.

  Specifically, at the timing when the fluctuating effect of 30 seconds is executed, the standby period is 40 seconds, the effect period is 10 seconds, and an effect management command including at least information of "start of new fluctuating effect" as the effect discard condition. To set. In this case, when the next fluctuating effect is immediately executed after the 30-second fluctuating effect is finished, that is, in the state where the special figure reservation is secured, the effect discard condition is set before the waiting period elapses. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the state where the special figure reservation is not secured, the special effect may be executed because the standby period may elapse without the effect discard condition being satisfied.

  As described above, in the case where the specific effect is executed during the standby period in which the variable effect is not executed, the information related to the specific effect is output to the display control device 114 in advance in accordance with the timing of outputting the command related to the variable effect. By enabling the display control device 114 to execute the management process of the specific effect, it is possible to aggregate the timings of outputting commands from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the voice lamp control device 113. The processing load of can be reduced.

  Furthermore, whether or not to set (output) the above-described production management command can be set regardless of the variation production pattern, that is, the processing for setting the variation production pattern and the processing for setting the production management command are independent. It may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect command corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern having a fluctuation time of longer than 40 seconds and the effect management command are simultaneously output to the display control device 114, the standby period Since the fluctuating effect is executed for a period longer than (40 seconds), the effect discard condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the specific effect can be surely executed.

  Further, in the example described above, "start of new variable effect" is provided as the effect discard condition, but other effect discard conditions may be provided, for example, three new variable effects are generated during the waiting period. It is possible to provide an effect discard condition that is satisfied when the above process is not started. In this case, since it is necessary to start the variation effect a plurality of times during the waiting period, for example, a large amount of special figure holding balls are stored, and the player is motivated to play a game in order to maintain a state in which a short variation time is easily selected. be able to.

  As the specific effect executed by the above-described example, for example, a function (so-called setting function) in which a plurality of stages of setting values can be set and the degree of advantage of the player is changed according to the set values is set. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 that has the specific effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the set value that has been set, the specification including the effect mode in which the player can predict the currently set game state. Production, and a specific production including a production mode in which the player can predict the end condition (the number of special symbol lottery, the number of jackpots) until the game state advantageous to the player (for example, the probability variation state) is finished It is good to configure like this. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this case, a suggesting (notifying) means for suggesting (notifying) the length of the set waiting period, and a guide means for guiding the player about a game method that does not satisfy the effect discard condition. It is preferable that the player is provided so that the condition under which the specific effect is executed can be discriminated by the player.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265. In the first control example described above, in order to make it possible to continuously execute the special symbol fluctuation, the right to execute the special symbol fluctuation (lottery right of the special symbol lottery) is stored with a predetermined number (4) as an upper limit. Having a possible storage means, even if the lottery right of special symbol lottery (special figure hold) is acquired during execution of the special symbol variation, the lottery right (special figure hold) is stored in the storage means. You can Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously executed. It was possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different according to the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. Specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (the number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute the special symbol variation of the longer variation time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed, and obtain a new lottery right while the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means reaches the upper limit. It was possible to suppress that.

  In addition, in the first control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is selected, It is configured so that the fluctuating effect can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a win and it is not a win, by executing the above-described 14-second fluctuation effect, the player's willingness to play the game, who has grasped that the 14-second fluctuation effect is being executed. It was possible to suppress the decrease of the.

  However, in the above-described first control example, the specific variation effect that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of place, even when the result of the special symbol lottery is a hit, is executed by a game. It is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand the lottery result, but since the variation pattern is selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the specific variation effect is executed for the player who is playing the game for a long time. In this case, the expectation level of the jackpot winning is easily predicted, and there is a fear that the willingness to play may be lowered. That is, the variation time of the special symbol variation in which the above-described specific variation effect is executed is selected in order to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed when the special symbol holding sphere number is 0, Since it is necessary to select at a predetermined frequency when the number of special figure holding balls is 0, it is expected that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit when the specific variation effect (pseudo specific variation effect) is executed. It is difficult to increase the degree, and it is not possible to increase the degree of expectation of jackpot winning for the specific variation effect, and there is a fear that the willingness to play may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is different from the first control example described above in that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selectable before the special symbol lottery is executed. As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery is not predicted by the player due to the change effect pattern executed corresponding to the selected change pattern, so that the player's willingness to play is suppressed from decreasing. be able to.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of special symbol reserved balls) when the special symbol variation is started. Specifically, when executing the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), the variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 number of reserved balls), and the second When performing a special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation), it is configured to select a variation pattern based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 number of reserved balls). Then, when the corresponding special figure reservation number of balls is 0, a variation pattern having a variation time of 14 seconds is selected according to the same technical idea as the first control example described above.

  With such a configuration, the player does not predict the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation effect pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, so that the player's willingness to play decreases. While suppressing the occurrence, when the special symbol reservation sphere number is 0, it is possible to shorten the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, when the lottery condition is satisfied after the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern (variation time) selected based on the special figure reservation number of balls (after a predetermined time has elapsed) ), The special symbol lottery is configured to be executed, and based on the result of the lottery, the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is variable. Thereby, the variation effect executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be ended with the effect result indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, finally, the player can be notified of the result of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the variable mode of the variation effect is configured to be different based on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, in the case where the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed is a predetermined period or more (10 seconds or more), the effect contents in the variation effect are made variable. If it is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds), the effect contents of the fluctuating effect are not changed, but only the display mode showing the effect result of the fluctuating effect being executed is changed.

  With such a configuration, the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the change of the special symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
First, an electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 260. The fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd (see FIG. 260) is used instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156), and other than that. Are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd. This fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202cd, the normal state 4 table 202cd1 used when the game state is set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and a time saving state (special symbol Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbol), or probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) 4 table 202cd2 for probability reduction / probability variation, which is used when set Have

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260 (b), the contents defined in the normal 4 table 202cd1 will be described. FIG. 260 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 4 table 202cd1, according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. It is configured such that different fluctuation patterns are selected. This normal 4 table 202cd1 is, regardless of the type of the special symbol, that the result of the special symbol lottery is not seen when selecting the variation pattern with respect to the normal table 202d1 of the first control example described above The major difference is that the same variation pattern is selected.

  Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the corresponding special symbol holding ball number (holding ball number) is "0", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149". For example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds (normal variation A) is selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 (normal variation B) is selected for the range of “150 to 198”.

  Further, for the range in which the number of reserved balls is “1,2” and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 49”, the fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds in fluctuation time (normal fluctuation C) is selected, For the range of “50 to 149”, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds (normal fluctuation D) is selected, and for the range of “150 to 198”, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 (normal fluctuation E). ) Is selected. Further, when the number of reserved balls is “3”, the variation pattern (normal variation F) having the variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 260 (b), in the fourth control example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are based on Since the variation pattern is configured to be selected, it is possible to prevent the player from previously ascertaining whether or not the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery based on the selected variation pattern.

  Further, in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select a variation pattern of different variation time according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" By making it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than when the special figure holding ball number is larger than "0", the special symbol fluctuation ends in the state where the special figure holding ball number is "0". It is possible to make it easy to suppress the occurrence.

  Next, the contents of the time saving / probability variation 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving / probability variation 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 260 (c), also in the time saving / probability variation 4 table 202cd2, as in the above-described normal 4 table 202cd1, the reserved ball number (special figure reserved ball number) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 are displayed. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time that differs depending on the value is defined.

  At this time, it is configured such that a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to be shorter than the time reduction / probability variation 4 table 202cd2 and the normal 4 table 202cd1 described above is easily selected. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 125, in the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, in the probability variation state, it becomes a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, and thus the normal state. It becomes more difficult to reduce the number of special figure holding balls to 0. Therefore, even if the variation pattern of the short variation time is configured to be easily selected, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a long period in which the special symbol variation is not executed.

  In the fourth control example, as described above, the same data table is used to select the variation pattern regardless of the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described As in one control example, different variation patterns may be selected depending on the type of special symbol and the game state to be set.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. The fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the timing of starting the special symbol variation and the timing of executing the special symbol lottery are different, and are related to the difference. The contents of control processing are different. The other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154). This special symbol variation process 4 (S154) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process of the first control example described above (see S104 in FIG. 178), and is a special symbol variation start process executed as a subroutine. Instead of (see S213 of FIG. 180), a point to execute the special symbol variation start process 4 (see S251 of FIG. 262), and a point to add a process for executing a special symbol lottery during the variation of the special symbol. , And are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (S154), first, the same process of S201 to S212 as the special symbol variation process of the first control example described above (see S104 of FIG. 178) is executed, and then the special symbol variation start process 4 Is executed (S251), and this processing ends. The detailed content of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262.

  On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the minimum time has passed (S252), and when it is determined that the minimum time has passed (S252). : Yes), the special symbol lottery process is executed (S253), and then the same processes of S214 to S221 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 178) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is executed. finish.

  Here, in this control example, after the special symbol variation is started, when the minimum time has elapsed, it is configured to execute the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. That is, in this control example, the special symbol variation is configured to be executed before the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the determination in the process of S252 is a lottery condition determination means for determining whether or not the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, and the minimum time elapsed determined in the process of S252 is the lottery condition.

  In this control example, the minimum time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as the lottery condition, and the same time is set as the minimum time regardless of the selected variation pattern. In other words, the time that can be measured even with the shortest fluctuation time (5 seconds) that can be selected as the fluctuation pattern is set as the minimum time. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the lottery conditions according to the selected variation pattern, and the control process of the main controller 110 can be simplified.

  In this control example, as the lottery condition for executing the special symbol lottery, the lottery condition that is established based on the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation is set, but the lottery condition is set during the special symbol variation. It suffices that the remaining time discriminating means for discriminating the remaining time of the special symbol variation is provided, and the remaining period discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means is a specific condition (for example, 5 seconds). ), The lottery conditions that are satisfied may be set. In addition, when the ball launched into the game area during the special symbol change period enters the predetermined entrance, the lottery conditions are satisfied, or when the player performs any operation on the operation means. The lottery conditions may be established.

  Further, in the present control example, the same lottery condition is set regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different lottery conditions are set according to the type of the selected fluctuation pattern. You may provide the lottery condition setting means which sets. As a result, the execution timing of the special symbol lottery can be varied according to the selected variation pattern, so, for example, a lottery suggesting effect that suggests the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed, during the execution period of the special symbol variation. It becomes possible to do it. Therefore, during the period of special symbol fluctuation, it is possible to perform a novel effect of suggesting to the player the timing at which the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251). This special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is different from the special symbol variation start process (see S213 of FIG. 180) in the above-described first control example in that the process of executing the special symbol lottery is omitted, Otherwise it is the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is executed, first, whether it is the start of special symbol 1 variation (whether the type of special symbol variation executed this time is the first special symbol) is determined (S351). ). Then, when it is determined that there is a change in special figure 1 (S351: Yes), next, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is acquired (S352), and the acquired special figure holding ball number ( Based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a) and the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected and determined using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S351, when it is determined that it is not the special figure 1 variation (the special figure 2 variation) (S351: No), then, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b (N2) is acquired. (S355), the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 is used to select the variation pattern based on the obtained special figure reservation number of balls (value of the special symbol 2 reservation number of counters 223b) and the acquired variation type counter CS1. , Are determined (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and this processing ends.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 260, the variation pattern selection table 222cd of this control example is defined so that the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol variation before executing the special symbol lottery. Is configured to be selectable. Therefore, even if the player determines the variation pattern of the selected special symbol variation, the result of the special symbol lottery will not be grasped from the determination content. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In this control example, the timing of executing the special symbol lottery is set after the timing of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, but the invention is not limited to this, as in the first control example described above, After performing the special symbol lottery, it is configured to select the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, and in that case, the result of the special symbol variation is not referred to the variation using the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd1 of the fourth control example. You may comprise so that a pattern may be selected. In this case, for example, the special symbol variation is executed based on the selected variation pattern, and the variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed, and then the predetermined variation is performed. When it is determined that the output condition is satisfied, the lottery result command indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the same technical idea as that of the fourth control example is adopted. The pachinko machine 10 can be configured.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253). This special symbol lottery process (S253) is to be executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (when the minimum time has elapsed) after the special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol variation being executed. The special symbol lottery corresponding to is executed.

  In the special symbol lottery process (S253), first, it is determined whether or not the result command has been set (S371). That is, it is already determined whether or not the special symbol lottery has been executed. In the processing of S371, when it is determined that the result command has been set (S371: Yes), this processing ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being executed a plurality of times in one special symbol fluctuation.

  On the other hand, in the process of S371, if the result command is not set, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation this time is not executed (S371: No), then the special symbol hold Data of the execution area in the sphere storage area is acquired (S372), and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current game state is the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol). (S373). By the processing of S373, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0 (S373: Yes), since the current is the high probability state of the special symbol, for the high probability time corresponding to the type of the special symbol. The lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a (S374). Further, in the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S373: No), the special symbol type is low because the current is the low probability state of the special symbol. The lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability corresponding to (S375).

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S374 or S375 is a big hit (S376), and if it is a big hit (S376: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol is determined. This is set (S376), a result command for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is set (S377), and this processing is ended.

  The result command set in the process of S377 is the same as the various commands set in other processes in the external output process (see S901 of FIG. 187) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 187). It is output to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 executes processing for varying the effect mode of the variable effect that is being executed, based on the reception of the result command processing. Thereby, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol change executed before the special symbol lottery, and the effect result can be changed to the effect mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S376, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S376: No), the display mode at the time of disengagement corresponding to the special symbol is set (S378), and the lottery result is out of order. A result command for indicating is set (S379), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Contents of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265, the control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example is similar to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that the command determination process (see S2114 of FIG. 195) is executed. The difference is that the determination process 4 (see S2174 in FIG. 264) is executed, and the other processes are the same.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the timing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110 is different, and the special symbol variation is executed. After that, the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed. Therefore, the setting contents of the display mode (effect mode) of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol which is executed corresponding to the special symbol change based on the various commands output from the main control device 110 are also described above. Different from 1 control example.

  Specifically, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) of the third symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command output at the execution timing of the special symbol variation, and the process to be executed is the same, but after that, the special symbol lottery When a result command for indicating the result is received, a difference is that an effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or a process for changing (switching) the effect result is added. Thus, by changing (switching) the effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or the effect result based on the reception of the result command, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

  In addition, the variation effect executed until the result command is received is not set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player understands the lottery result based on the effect mode. There is nothing. In addition, in the variation effect executed until the result command is received, for example, a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the variation time length of the special symbol variation set this time may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to predict the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. Then, based on the prediction, it is possible to predict the timing at which the result command is received, that is, the timing at which the effect mode of the variable effect is changed based on the content of the received result command.

  When the command determination process 4 (S2174) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S2114 of FIG. 195) are executed, and the process of S2213 is stopped. When it is determined that the command has not been received (S2213: No), it is then determined whether the result command has been received (S2271).

  In the process of S2271, when it is determined that the result command is received (S2271: Yes), the result command process is executed (S2272), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has not been received (S22271: No), this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the result command processing (S2272) executed in the command determination processing 4 (S2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the result command processing (S2272). In this result command processing (S2272), when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the result command, it is determined whether or not the effect mode of the variation effect being executed is changed, and variable processing when it is changed. Is executed.

  In the result command process (S2272), first, the lottery result included in the received result command is acquired (S4301), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot win (S4302). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S4302: Yes), the remaining change time is calculated (S4303), and it is determined whether the calculated remaining change time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304: Yes), a display command for switching the set fluctuation effect pattern to the dedicated effect pattern is set (S4305), and the book is set. The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is within 10 seconds (S4304: No), the result display mode of the set fluctuation effect pattern is changed to the hit result display mode indicating the winning. A display command for switching is set (S4305), and this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol lottery this time (the lottery result included in the result command) is not the big hit (is out) (S4302: No), this process is directly performed. finish.

  In the second control example described above, a series of accessory effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 is configured to be executed according to the elapsed time of the variable display effect. It is not limited. For example, a series of character effects may be configured to be triggered by the operation of the frame button 22. That is, in the variable display effect, an operation valid period may be set in which an operation on the frame button 22 is treated as valid when a specific period has elapsed, and a series of accessory effects may be executed based on the depression of the frame button 22. In this case, the delay control in the first control example described above may be applied. That is, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected in a state where a predetermined delay condition is satisfied, the delay timer 223s is set to a delay period to delay the start of a series of accessory effects. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode. Further, instead of delaying the start of the entire series of character effects, only a part of the motions may be delayed. That is, only the start of the first operation may be delayed, or only the start of the second operation may be delayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the performance mode of the series of accessory effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, the target of the effect that delays the action of the accessory is not limited to the series of accessory effects, but an effect involving a variable operation of at least one of the various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10. If so, it may be applied to any of the effects. Further, instead of or in addition to the accessory, it may be possible to delay the start of a part or all of the light-emission mode of the production accompanied by the light emission of the light-emitting means such as a decorative LED or a lamp. With this configuration, the effect mode can be made different depending on whether the delay is performed or not, so that the effect mode can be more diversified.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 272. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example, as one kind of effect mode in the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a collective effect of an effect mode in which a plurality of characters are aggregated, and it is expected to be a big hit depending on the number of characters to be aggregated. It was designed to suggest the degree to the player.

  In addition to this, in this modified example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by a combination of characters that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the collective effect. In addition, in this modified example, as the incidental symbol that accompanies the third symbol imitating each character, the incidental symbol imitating any number of "1" to "9" is provided. In this modification, the combination of the accompanying symbols accompanying the stopped and displayed third symbol is also capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, in the present modification, it is configured such that which of the symbol columns the third symbol corresponding to each character is displayed is set after the execution of the collective effect is determined, and the execution of the collective effect is also determined for each accompanying symbol. After that, it is configured to set which of the symbol columns should be displayed. That is, the type of the character and the type of the accompanying symbol are not fixed, and each time the variable display effect accompanied by the collective effect is executed, the corresponding relationship between the third symbol and the accompanying symbol (attached to each character). The number) is variable. Then, when the third symbol and the accompanying symbol are in a specific combination, the expectation of a big hit is increased. With such a configuration, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol, the type of the accompanying symbol that is stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective effect, and the Since the game can be played while paying attention to the combination of the three symbols and the accompanying symbols, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, an effect mode of the collective effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 266 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which the teammate characters that can be acquired in the collective effect are displayed. As shown in FIG. 266 (a), in the present modification, for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129 (a)), a third symbol imitating an animal character (or a character “?”). Is displayed, and an accompanying design imitating a number is additionally displayed on the lower right side of each third design. The accompanying design is always displayed in association with the third design imitating the same character during one set presentation. That is, during the variable display of the third symbol, it is variably displayed together with the third symbol. In this modified example, a combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row at the time when this acquirable ally character is displayed, a combination of the accompanying symbols, and a combination of the third symbol, the accompanying symbols, and the stop position. In this way, the expectation level of a big hit can be suggested to the player.

  FIG. 266 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of stop symbols (chance up pattern) in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is high. As shown in FIG. 266 (b), the third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, which suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation is high. In addition, regarding the type of the incidental symbol that accompanies the third symbol of the bear, there is no difference in the degree of expectation other than the incidental symbol that imitates the number “7”. Also, regarding the types of the third symbols displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c, there is no difference in expectation. That is, as long as the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the expectation that it is a big hit is high regardless of the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol columns. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the third symbol displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Although illustration is omitted, in any of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c, as a chance up pattern different from the mode in which the third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b. On the other hand, even when the third symbol accompanied by the incidental symbol imitating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the jackpot expectation is increased. That is, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased by displaying the accompanying symbol imitating the number “7” in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1. As a result, whether or not the variable display of the chance-up pattern is executed is simply focused on whether or not the accompanying symbol imitating “7” is stopped and displayed in any of the accompanying symbol display regions 901a1 to 901c1. Since it is possible to easily discriminate, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

  In addition, in this modification, a stop type is also provided in which the jackpot is confirmed when it appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and an accompanying symbol accompanying the third symbol imitating the bear is displayed. In the case of the incidental pattern imitating "7" (when the incidental symbol imitating "7" is displayed in the middle incidental symbol display area 901b1), it is decided that the jackpot is a big hit.

  Thus, in the present modification, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective effect, and the type of the accompanying symbol, Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that is a big hit also by the combination of the third symbol and the accompanying symbol, not only whether or not the character is acquired in the collective production, but also the character is stopped and displayed. It is possible to realize the playability in which the character (and the accompanying pattern) stopped and displayed at the time point is focused on. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, in this modification, when the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, or an accompanying symbol imitating "7" in any of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. When the 3rd symbol accompanied by is stopped and displayed, the jackpot expectation becomes high, and the 3rd symbol imitating a bear accompanied by the incidental symbol imitating "7" is displayed in the middle 3rd symbol display area 901b. Although the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is hit, the combination that improves the jackpot expectation degree and the combination that the jackpot is decided are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set. For example, if only the third symbol with an accompanying symbol imitating an odd number is stopped and displayed, the jackpot expectation may be increased, or a combination of an elephant, a bear, and a rhino may be stopped and displayed. By doing so, the jackpot expectation may be increased.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the configuration of the character storage area 223e1 in the present modification will be described. In this modification, a character storage area 223e1 is provided for the voice lamp control device 113 instead of the character storage area 222e1 in the first control example. That is, the character storage area 223e1 can be overwritten (updated). More specifically, it is possible to newly set the type (character type) of the third symbol to be displayed in each symbol row in the collective effect and the type of the accompanying symbol in each collective effect. There is. Then, during the set production of 1, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the arrangement set in the character storage area 222e1. By setting the arrangement again for each effect, it is possible to always give the player a novel feeling, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult to empty.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the character storage area 223e1 in the present modification is defined in association with the range of addresses “0000H” to “000DH” in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the third area is assigned to each address. Either data indicating the type of symbol (character data) and data indicating the type of associated symbol (numerical data) are stored. As shown in FIG. 268, the address “0000H” is a storage area for storing data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column, and the address “0001H”. "Is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type of the accompanying symbol accompanying the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column. Similarly, the address “0002H” and the address “0003H” are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column, and data indicating the type of the accompanying symbol (numerical data). ) Is a storage area for storing the address “0004H” and the address “0005H”, respectively, data indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column (character data), and the accompanying symbol. Is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type, and the address “0006H” and the address “0007H” are data indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column, respectively. It is a storage area for storing (character data) and data (numerical data) indicating the type of the attached symbol. Further, the address “0008H” and the address “0009H” are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol sequence, and data indicating the type of the accompanying symbol (numerical data). Is a storage area for storing, the address "000AH", and the address "000BH", respectively, the data indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol column (character data), and the accompanying symbol It is a storage area for storing data indicating the type (numerical data), and the address “000CH” and the address “000DH” are data indicating the type of the third third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row ( This is a storage area for storing character data), and data (numerical data) indicating the type of the attached symbol.

  At the start of the collective effect, the character data and the numerical data different from each other are stored in the addresses "0000H" to "000DH" forming the character storage area 223e1, respectively. The display mode of the symbol can be set. In this modification, 7 types of character data and 9 types of numerical data are provided, while the address associated with the character storage area 223e1 is 14 addresses (7 addresses × 2). Therefore, with respect to the character data, all the characters are set in any of the symbol columns, but with respect to the number data, two numbers are left over. That is, among the accompanying symbols that imitate nine types of numbers, only seven types of accompanying symbols are set as the accompanying symbols of any of the third symbols in the collective effect of 1. In this modified example, an incidental pattern imitating the number “7” is more easily set in the case of winning than in the case of disengagement. In other words, in the case of the disengagement, it is configured such that it is difficult to set the accompanying symbol imitating the number “7”. This can improve the player's expectation for a big hit when the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 269, when character data is stored in each address of the character storage area 223e1 in the present modification, a lottery for determining which data is stored in which address is performed. The character lottery table 222e11 referred to in order to perform will be described. The character lottery table 222e11 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, in this modification, only the character data to be stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the character lottery table 222e11. The characters are arranged in a predetermined order (elephant, lion, dugong, rhino, rhino, bird, bear, boar). For addresses other than the start address, the character stored in the start address is used as the starting point. As a result, the character data is stored according to a predetermined arrangement order. For example, when a dugong is determined as a character to be stored in the head address, rhinos, birds, bears, boars, elephants, and lions are stored in the character storage area 22231 in the order of addresses. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the character data to be stored in all the addresses is determined by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 269, in the character lottery table 222e11, the type of the character to be set as the first third symbol in the left symbol column (character data to be set at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1) for each winning / decision result. ) And the value range of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269, when the hit / no hit determination result is a hit, the elephant character (character data “00H” is set for the range of the value of the 12th effect counter 223p12 of “0 to 34”. )) Are associated and defined. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be obtained by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the elephant character is 35, so the character data (00H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 17.6% (35/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the elephant is set to the head address, the third symbol imitating the elephant and the lion is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol imitating the dugong and rhino in the right symbol column. Displayed, in the middle symbol column, a bird, a bear, and a third symbol imitating a wild boar are displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in the chance pattern or the confirmed pattern).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the 12th effect counter 223p12 of “35 to 69”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be obtained by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the lion character is 35, so the character data (01H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 17.6% (35/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the lion is set in the head address, the left symbol column displays the third symbol imitating the lion and the dugong, and the right symbol column has the third symbol imitating the rhino and the bird. It is displayed, and in the middle symbol row, a third symbol imitating a bear, a boar, and an elephant is displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in the chance pattern or the confirmed pattern).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the dugong character (character data “02H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 of “70 to 92”. Since the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the dugong character is 23 out of the 199 possible random number values (counter value) of the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the character data (02H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the dugong is set in the head address, the third symbol imitating the dugong and rhino is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol imitating the bird and the bear in the right symbol column. Displayed, in the middle symbol row, a third symbol imitating a boar, an elephant, and a lion is displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 269, a rhino character (character data “03H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 being “93 to 115”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the rhino character is 23, so the character data (03H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the rhinoceros is set to the head address, the third symbol imitating rhino and bird is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol imitating the bear and wild boar in the right symbol column. It is displayed, and in the middle symbol row, a third symbol imitating an elephant, a lion, and a dugong is displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 269, the bird character (character data “04H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 of “116 to 138”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the character of the bird is 23, so the character data (04H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the bird is set to the head address, the third symbol simulating the bird and the bear is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol simulating the boar and elephant is displayed in the right symbol column. It is displayed, and in the middle symbol column, a third symbol imitating a lion, a dugong, and a rhino is displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the character of the bear (character data “05H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 of “139 to 162”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be obtained by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the bear character is 24, so the character data (05H ) Is stored at the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 12.1% (24/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the bear is set to the head address, the third symbol simulating a bear and a boar is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol simulating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the right symbol column. It is displayed, and the third symbol imitating dugong, rhinoceros, and birds is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 269, the boar character (character data “06H”) is defined in association with the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 of “163 to 1698”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the boar character is 36, so character data (06H ) Is stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 18.1% (36/199). In addition, when the character data corresponding to the boar is set to the head address, the third symbol imitating the wild boar and the elephant is displayed in the left symbol column, and the third symbol imitating the lion and the dugong is displayed in the right symbol column. Displayed, in the middle symbol column, a third symbol imitating rhinoceros, birds, and bears is displayed. That is, the bears are set in an arrangement that can be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  In this way, when the result of the hit / damage determination is a hit, the third symbol simulating a bear in the middle symbol is arranged at a rate of about 53.3%. That is, it is configured so that it can be a stop type that is greater than the chance pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, in the case where the hit / miss determination result is incorrect, the elephant character (character data “00H”) is in the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 from “0 to 19”. The lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range of “20 to 39” and is defined in association with the range of “40 to 74”. The data “02H” is defined in association with the range “75 to 109”, and the rhino character (character data “03H”) is defined in association with the range “110 to 144”. , A bird character (character data “04H”) is defined in association with each other, and a bear character (character data is defined in the range of “145 to 179”). 05H ") are defined in association, for a range of" 145 to 198 ", boars character (character data" 06H ") is defined in correspondence.

  Therefore, the ratio in which the third symbol simulating a bear is set in the middle symbol sequence (the ratio in which the character data corresponding to any of an elephant, a lion, and a boar is set in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1) is about It is 29.6%. That is, as compared with the case of a big hit, the third symbol imitating a bear is configured to be difficult to be arranged in the middle symbol row. As a result, the appearance rate of the chance pattern can be increased in the case of a big hit, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the stop symbols in the middle symbol row. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, when storing numerical data for each address of the character storage area 223e1 in the present modification, a lottery for determining which data is stored at which address is performed. The numeral lottery table 222e12 referred to in order to perform will be described. The numeral lottery table 222e12 is a kind of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, in this modification, only the character data to be stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the numeral lottery table 222e11. Then, with respect to other addresses, the number data stored in the address "0001H" is stored in ascending order of the numbers starting from the number. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the case where the numerical data to be stored in all the addresses is determined by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 270, in the numeral lottery table 222e12, the winning / non-judgment determination result, and whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is arranged in the middle symbol column, the first third symbol in the left symbol column is arranged. The type of the accompanying symbol set in the symbol (numerical data set in the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1) and the value range of the 13th effect counter 223p13 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 270, when the hit determination result is a hit, the value of the thirteenth production counter 223p13 is in the range of "0 to 24" regardless of the type of the middle symbol row. , The associated pattern (numerical data “00H”) imitating the numeral “1” is associated and defined. Of the 199 random number values (counter value) that can be taken by the thirteenth production counter 223p13, the number of random number values (counter value) associated with the accompanying design imitating the number "1" is 25, so the number The numerical data (00H) corresponding to the accompanying pattern simulating “1” is stored at the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 at a rate of about 12.6%. In addition, when the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating “1” is set to the address “0001H”, the accompanying symbols imitating “1” and “2” are displayed in the left symbol column, and the right symbol column is displayed. The accompanying symbols imitating "3" and "4" are displayed in the middle symbol column, and the third symbols imitating "5", "6", and "7" are displayed. That is, the third symbol to which the accompanying symbol imitating “7” is attached can be stopped and displayed (can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, when the hit determination result is a hit, the number “13 An associated pattern (numerical data “01H”) imitating “2” is defined in association with each other. Of the 199 random number values (counter value) that can be taken by the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random number values (counter value) associated with the accompanying design imitating the number "2" is 25, so the number The numerical data (01H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating “2” is stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 at a rate of about 12.6%. In addition, when the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating “2” is set in the address “0001H”, the incidental symbols imitating “2” and “3” are displayed in the left symbol column, and the right symbol column is displayed. The accompanying symbols imitating “4” and “5” are displayed, and the third symbols imitating “6”, “7”, and “8” are displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the third symbol to which the accompanying symbol imitating “7” is attached can be stopped and displayed (can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern).

  Similarly, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 74", the associated symbol (numerical data "01H") imitating the numeral "3", and "75 to 99". The associated symbol imitating the number "4" is defined in association with the range ", and the associated symbol imitating the number" 5 "is defined in association with the range" 100 to 124 ", The accompanying design imitating the number "6" is defined in association with the range of "125 to 174". Therefore, the rate at which the numerical data corresponding to the incidental symbols imitating the numbers “3” to “6” is stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 is the incidental symbols imitating “1” or “2”. Similarly, each is about 12.6%. Even when the numerical data corresponding to the incidental symbols imitating these "3" to "6" is set to the address "0001H", the incidental symbols imitating the number "7" are set in any symbol row. It is set as an accompanying symbol of the third symbol that is performed. That is, it is a combination that can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern.

  On the other hand, the value of the thirteenth production counter 223p13 is defined in association with the range of "175 to 186", and the associated symbol imitating the number "8" is defined, and the range of "187 to 198" is defined as the number. The associated symbol imitating "9" is defined in association with each other. Since the numbers of the random number values (counter values) associated with the numerical data corresponding to these "8" and "9" are 12 respectively, the accompanying pattern simulating the numbers "8" and "9" The ratio of the numerical data corresponding to the number stored in the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 6%. When the accompanying design imitating these "8" or "9" is set as the accompanying design of the first third design of the left design, the accompanying design imitating "7" cannot be set. The lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols (“8”, “9”) that will be the combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed, and the lottery of the incidental symbols (“1” to “7”) that will be the combination in which the chance UP pattern can be displayed By setting the ratio lower than the ratio, the jackpot expectation degree when the chance UP pattern appears can be increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, in the case where the winning / disapproval determination result is out of proportion, the selection ratio of each accompanying symbol is determined depending on whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol sequence. It is variable. That is, the third symbol imitating a bear is not set in the middle symbol sequence (“05H” is stored as character data in any of the addresses “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH” in the character storage area 223e1. If not), 14 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols simulating the numbers "1" to "5", respectively, and the values of "6" and "7" are defined. Fifteen random number values (counter values) are defined in association with the incidental patterns simulating the numbers, and 49 random number values (counter values) correspond to the incidental patterns simulating the numbers "8". 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols that are defined and attached to imitate the number “9”. That is, as compared with the case of winning, the ratio of the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols simulating the numbers “8” and “9” set to the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 becomes higher. That is, the ratio set to the combination (the combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed) that does not include the accompanying pattern imitating the number “7” is high. Therefore, when the chance UP pattern is displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, the win / no judgment result is out, and the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row (addresses “0008H”, “of the character storage area 223e1”). In the case where “05H” is stored as character data in either 000AH ”or“ 000CH ”), a random number value (counter value) is obtained for the accompanying symbols simulating the numbers“ 1 ”to“ 3 ”. Not associated. When the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers of "1" to "3" are set to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1, the addresses "0009" H, "000BH" corresponding to the middle symbol sequence. , "000DH" will be set to the numerical data "06H" corresponding to the accompanying symbol that imitates the number "7", so the third symbol imitating the bear set in the middle symbol Since there is a possibility that an accompanying symbol imitating “7” will be set in the above, this is avoided (the stop display is prevented in the confirmed pattern (see FIG. 267) despite the deviation). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, 20 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols that imitate the numbers “4” to “7”, For the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying design imitating the number "8", 60 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and the numbers corresponding to the accompanying design imitating the number "9" are defined. 59 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with the data. In other words, the lottery rate of the accompanying symbols (“8”, “9”) that are combinations in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed, and the associated symbols (“4” to “7”) that are the combinations in which the chance UP pattern can be displayed. Since it is configured to be lower than the lottery ratio, it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation when a chance UP pattern appears.

  As described above, in the present modification, the arrangement of the third symbol to be arranged in each symbol row in the collective effect and the accompanying symbol to be associated with each third symbol is separately drawn. Thereby, since the display mode can be made different for each collective effect, it is possible to realize an effect mode in which the player does not get tired. In addition, since it is possible to suggest a jackpot expectation degree by a combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed, a combination of the accompanying symbols, and a combination of the third symbol and the accompanying symbols, each time the symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the symbols is combined. You can get more attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) in the present modification will be described. This battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) is a process executed in place of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the above-described first control example, and similar to the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204). It is a process for setting various presentation modes in the battle presentation.

  In this battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271), in each process of S3101 to S3110, the same process as each of S3101 to S3110 of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. Is executed. Further, in the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271) in this modified example, an array setting process for setting a combination (arrangement) of symbols to be displayed in each symbol column is executed (S3151), and the process proceeds to S3101. And transition. Details of the array setting process (S3151) will be described with reference to FIG. 272.

  FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the array setting process (S3151) described above. In this array setting process (S3151), first, the character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269) is read, and the specified contents of the read character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269), whether or not this variation pattern is correct, and the twelfth result. Character data to be stored at the start address of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the value of the effect counter 223p12 (S4402), and the determined character data is set as the start address of the character storage area 223e1. It is stored (S4403).

  Next, an address obtained by adding “0002H” to the setting destination address for which the data has been set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4404), and the new setting destination address is stored in the previous setting destination address. Character data obtained by adding "01H" to the character data is stored (S4405). In the process of S4405, if the previously set character data is the upper limit value "06H" (character data corresponding to the boar), "00H" is stored.

  When the processing of S4405 ends, the character data is then written to all the setting destination addresses (“0000H”, “0002H”, “0004H”, “0006H”, “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH”). It is determined whether or not it is stored (S4406), and if there is a setting destination address that does not store data (S4406: No), the process proceeds to S4404. On the other hand, in the process of S4406, when it is determined that the character data has been stored in all the setting destination addresses, then the number setting process for setting the number data in each address of the character storage area 223e1. After executing (S4407), the present process is terminated. Details of the number setting process (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 273.

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the number setting process (S4407). In the numeral setting process (S4407), first, the numeral lottery table 222e12 (see FIG. 270) is read out, and the specified contents of the read numeral lottery table 222e12, the present judgment result, and the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 are read. , Numerical data to be stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the type of character data set in the middle pattern (S4502). Next, the numerical data determined in the process of S4502 is stored in the address “0001H” (S4503), and the address obtained by adding “0002H” to the setting destination address for which the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address ( S4504). Next, the numerical data obtained by adding “01H” to the numerical data stored in the previous setting destination address is stored in the new setting destination address (S4505). In the process of S4505, if the previously set numerical data is the upper limit value "08H" (the numerical data corresponding to the numeral "9"), "00H" (corresponding to the numerical "1") Stored numerical data).

  When the process of S4505 ends, the character data is then written to all the setting destination addresses (“0001H”, “0003H”, “0005H”, “0007H”, “0009H”, “000BH”, and “000DH”). It is determined whether or not it has been stored (S4506), and if there is a setting destination address that does not store data (S4506: No), the process proceeds to S4504. On the other hand, in the processing of S4506, when it is determined that the character data has been stored for all the setting destination addresses, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first control example, an animal character (or a character “?”) Is imitated for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129 (a)). Along with the display of the third symbol, the lower right of each third symbol is configured to be accompanied by an accompanying symbol imitating a numeral. Then, when the execution of the collective effect is determined, the arrangement of the characters and the associated symbols in each symbol row is separately set, so that the correspondence relationship between the characters and the numbers can be changed for each effect. I am configuring. Then, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbol, the accompanying symbols, and the stop position, etc. are suggested to the player for the degree of expectation of a jackpot. It is configured to be possible. With such a configuration, in each variable display in the collective effect, not only whether or not the character is acquired, but also the combination of the stop symbols can be paid more attention to the game so that the game can be performed. It is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the player's game.

  In this modification, only the first symbol in the left symbol column and the type of the accompanying symbol associated with the third symbol are determined by lottery, and the types of the remaining symbols are determined by lottery. Although it is configured to be arranged in a predetermined order with the type of symbols as the starting point, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the characters and numbers to be set for all the symbols may be determined by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the randomness of each symbol, and thus it is possible to further diversify the effect mode. In addition, a combination of selectable symbols may be defined in advance by a table or the like, and the selection ratio of each combination may be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the symbol combination.

  In the modified example of the first control example described above, in the variable control of the display mode of the third symbol when the execution of the collective effect is determined, based on the character lottery table 222e11 described above with reference to FIG. 269. The display mode of the third symbol is configured to be variable. That is, with respect to the types (numbers 0 to 9) of the third symbols that are variably displayed, the display mode is determined from the display mode (7 types of characters) of the type less than the number of types. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display mode of the third symbol used for the collective effect may be determined from the display modes of the number of types larger than the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed.

  Specifically, for 10 variably displayed 3rd symbols, a character storage area in which 15 types of character information are stored is provided, and among the 15 types of character information stored in that character storage area. Therefore, the display mode used for the collective effect may be determined for 10 third symbols. With this configuration, all display modes can be configured so as not to be variably displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy predicting which display mode will be determined when the collective effect is executed. Can be provided. In addition, in this case, a notification for changing the identification information of the third symbol that is being variably displayed to the extent that the player can visually recognize it, or notifying (indicating) the type of the determined display mode to the player ( Suggestion) It is good to have means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the display mode of the third symbol which is stopped and displayed to the player immediately after the collective effect is started.

  Furthermore, the same display mode may be redundantly determined as the display mode of the plurality of third symbols that are variably displayed in the collective effect. With such a configuration, even when the collective effect is executed using the display mode (character data) of the number of types less than the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed during the collective effect, all the display modes are It is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not variably displayed. In addition, by deciding only a specific display mode more than other display modes, a display mode that is likely to be stopped and displayed in the collective effect and a display mode that is difficult to be displayed in the variable effect of the third symbol in the collective effect. Can be suggested to the player.

  In the modified example of the first control example, when the execution of the collective effect is determined, the display mode of the third symbol is determined, and the collective effect is executed to the end by using the determined display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the collective effect, and the variable display is performed again, a display for redetermining (updating) the display mode of each third symbol again. The mode update process may be configured to be executable.

  With such a configuration, every time the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the collective effect, the display mode of the third symbol that can be stopped and displayed can be changed, so that the collective effect gets tired on the way. Can be suppressed. Also, the display mode corresponding to the character already acquired in the collective effect may be continuously used as it is as the display mode of the third symbol, or the player grasps that it is the display mode corresponding to the already acquired character. An acquired display mode in which the display mode is changed to the extent possible (for example, a display mode in which a character is marked with “done”) may be used, or a display mode corresponding to an acquired character may be unacquired. The display mode may be changed so as to correspond to the character.

  Further, as in the case of the modified example of the first control example described above, as a case of performing the effect using the identification information (symbol) having a plurality of information, for example, the first information (character information) given to each symbol , The second information (numerical information), the third information (information indicating a part of the information indicating the presence or absence of production success (information indicating a large set)) can be determined, the design having a plurality of each symbol After a plurality of (three) variable display of columns, three symbols that are stopped and displayed have a first benefit based on the combination of the first information and a second benefit based on the combination of the second information, Not only granting the third privilege based on the combination of the third information, but also the combination of the first information and the second information given to the specific symbol that is stopped and displayed, the combination of the first information and the third information, A combination of the second information and the third information, or the first information, the second information and the second information. May grant can be configure certain benefits based on a combination of information. With this configuration, the player is interested not only in the combination of the information given to the plurality of symbols that are stopped and displayed, but also in the combination of the information given to one symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding a variation of the icon display notice>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, various icons are arranged in various orders at a plurality of positions formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By executing the icon display notice displayed in, the player is provided with various notice contents. The icon display notice executed in the above-described first control example has an effect icon storage area 222c1 (where information indicating icon types is stored in advance in a specific order when the notice mode (effect mode) is set. 164 (b)), the head icon type is specified, and the icons are displayed in order from the head icon type (effect element 1).

  Then, also for the place where the icon is displayed, one permutation is selected from the permutation storage area 222c3 (see FIG. 165) in which a plurality of specific permutation information indicating the display order is stored (effect element 2 ). Further, the number of icons displayed in the icon display notice is determined by lottery (effect element 3).

  In this way, when one effect is executed, by setting a plurality of effect elements independently and making it possible to execute an effect that is a combination of the set effect elements, all the effect patterns that can be executed The amount of effect data prepared in advance can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect data is separately prepared in advance.

  Further, as the permutation information indicating the display order, for example, permutation information in which the same display location is selected in duplicate is configured to be selectable, and when the number of icons determined as the effect element 3 is displayed, a plurality of icons are displayed. When the content is displayed at the same display location, by providing a display rule for displaying only one of the icons, the number of icons different from the number of icons determined as the performance element 3 is displayed. The displayed effect can be executed, and the effect with more variations can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when determining the content of each effect element, the content of the effect element is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (result determination result), so the icon display notice Even though the effect mode is randomly determined, the icon display notice to be executed is an effect mode capable of suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can be interested.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, further, description will be made regarding the effect elements for executing the icon display notice with various variations. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 274, it is possible to change the size of the icon displayed in the icon display notice. FIG. 274 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the case where an enlarged icon is displayed in the icon display notice in the present modification. The icon display notice of the present modification is different from the icon display notice of the first control example in that the size of the displayed icon can be changed and the icon displayed at one display location. The difference is that display control is performed to prevent the icon from being displayed at other display locations covered by, and otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 274, as the icon display notice effect, the icon 812a initially displayed in the area 811a is displayed so as to cover (hide) the area 811b (see FIG. 133 (a)). In this case, no icon is displayed in the area 811b (see FIG. 133 (a)) in the icon display notice effect this time.

  In this way, by configuring the enlargement ratio of the displayed icon to be selectable, the area covered by the displayed icon is made different depending on the expansion ratio of the selected icon, the type of the icon, and the display location. It becomes possible. Then, the icons are displayed in the order of excluding the already covered area (non-display area) from the permutation selected as the effect element 2 described above, thereby executing a more varied icon display notice. can do.

  In addition, when the technique of the present modification is used, since the non-display area is set, it is easy to select overlapping display locations as the display order of the icons. Therefore, by combining the technique of setting the non-display area and the technique of displaying only one icon when the display locations are overlapped, the number of icons that greatly deviates from the number of icons set as the above-described effect element 3 can be obtained. It is possible to easily display the icon, and it is possible to execute a more varied icon display notice.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 275, among the configurations of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the present modification, a configuration different from the first control example described above will be described. In the present modification, as described above, the first control described above is configured so that the magnification rate of the displayed icon (the icon displayed at the beginning) can be changed when executing the effect of the icon display notice. Different from the example.

  The configuration of the ROM 222 also differs in that an enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 for selecting the enlargement ratio of the icon is provided. Other than that, the ROM 222 has the same configuration, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1. As shown in FIG. 275, in the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1, different enlargement ratios are defined in association with the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the A-th production counter 223pA. Here, the A-th effect counter 223pA is a counter capable of updating a random number value in the range of "0 to 198", like the various effect counters 223p used in the above-described control examples, and is a voice lamp. This is a counter whose value is regularly updated in a process (for example, main process) that is regularly executed in the control process of the control device 113. The value of this counter is configured to be updated with regularity so that the updated value is not synchronized with the other effect counter 223p, and since the specific configuration is the same, a detailed description thereof will be given. Omit it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production modes of various productions selected with reference to the values of the various production counters 223 from being the same combination.

  Specifically, the hit / no hit determination result is "hit (big hit)", the expansion rate "50%" is in the range of "5-99" in the range of the value of the A-th production counter pA of "0-4". Indicates the enlargement ratio "100%", the enlargement ratio "200%" in the range "100 to 149", the enlargement ratio "500%" in the range "150 to 179", and the range "180 to 198". Stipulates an expansion rate of "1000%".

  Further, the win / no judgment result is “out”, and the expansion rate “50%” is in the range of the value of the A-th effect counter pA “0-14”, and the expansion rate “100% is in the range of“ 15-164 ”. ”, The expansion rate“ 200% ”is defined in the range of“ 165 to 184 ”, and the expansion rate“ 500% ”is defined in the range of“ 185 to 198 ”.

  As described above, the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1 is referred to when selecting the enlargement ratio when the head icon is displayed, and when "50%" is selected as the enlargement ratio, The top icon is displayed in half the size of the icon display of the size (see FIG. 134 (a)). Then, when "100%" is selected, the head icon is displayed in the normal size displayed in FIG. 134 (a), and when "200%" is selected, it is double the normal size. The icon is displayed in the size of, and when "500%" is selected, the icon is displayed in the size of 5 times the normal size, and when "1000%" is selected, the icon is displayed in the size of 10 times the normal size. The icon is displayed in size.

  Here, also in the present modification example, similarly to the first control example described above, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of icons, and the type of the icon that is displayed first in the icon display notice, the display location, and the enlargement. The display portion covered by the display icon is configured to be different depending on the rate.

  For example, referring to FIG. 133 (a) and FIG. 164 (b), when the top icon is displayed in the area 811a, the enlargement ratio 500% is selected for all the icon types. Then, the area 811b is covered. When the top icon is displayed in the area 811b and the enlargement ratio is 200%, the other area (area 811a) is covered and enlarged only when the “V sign shape” icon is displayed. When the rate of 500% is selected, the area 811c and the area 811d are covered with the “rectangle-shaped” icon, and only the area 811f is covered with the “circular”, “triangle”, and “diamond-shaped” icons. The "V sign shape" icon is configured to cover the entire area. From then on, regardless of which of the area 811c, the area 811d, the area 811e, and the area 811f is displayed on the top icon, other areas to be covered may be different depending on the displayed icon type and the enlargement ratio. Is configured.

  When the enlargement ratio of 1000% is selected, the other areas are all covered regardless of the type of the top icon and the display location.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the display location where the icon can be displayed in the icon display notice based on the selection result of the location where the top icon is displayed, the icon type, and the enlargement ratio. It is possible to easily execute the icon display notice having randomness.

  Further, in this modification, when the icon of “V sign shape”, which is an icon type that is easily displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, is displayed as the top icon, other icons are displayed as the top icon. It is configured such that other areas are more likely to be included than in the case of being processed. Specifically, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that an icon with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed, the size of the “V sign shape” icon (size at an enlargement ratio of 100%) is different. It is configured to be larger than the icon. In this way, by making the reference icons of the displayed icons different in size, different regions can be easily covered when the same enlargement ratio is selected.

  In this modification, the same icon type as in the first control example described above is configured to be selectable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a specific display location (area It is also possible to use an icon type that makes it easy to cover another area only when it is displayed as the first icon in 811b). This allows the player to predict which icon will be displayed at the timing when the icon display notice is executed and the player is notified of only the position where the top icon is displayed (see FIG. 133 (b)). Can be provided.

  In the present modification and the above-described first control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), when the icon display advance notice effect is executed, the player is given a display position where the top icon is displayed first. Although it is configured such that notification is possible, the type of the leading icon may be notified first, or the enlargement ratio set for the leading icon may be notified first without being limited to this. Further, the non-display area may be informed first.

  Next, a flow of control processing in the voice lamp control device 113 when setting the effect mode of the icon display advance notice in the present modification will be described. This modified example is different from the above-described first control example in that the random display effect setting process A (see S3293 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). , Otherwise the same. Note that the basic control processing flow is the same as in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the content of the random display effect setting process A (S3293). In this random display effect setting process A (S3293), the process of determining the magnification of the icon displayed as the first icon and the process of varying the display permutation of the icons based on the determined magnification are performed. , Which is different from the above-described random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). The other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  When the random display effect setting process A (S3293) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3304 as the random display effect setting process (see S3203 of FIG. 207) described above are executed, and then the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1. To determine the enlargement ratio of the top icon (S3391), and extract the non-display area based on the enlargement ratio of the top icon and the display location and type (S3392). In the process of S3392, the non-display area (the area covered by the display of the leading icon) is extracted based on the content defined in advance in the determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a non-display area based on the extraction result of S3392 (S3394), and if it is determined (S3394: Yes), the removal permutation excluding the non-display area from the permutation determined in the processing of S3303. Is set (S3394), and thereafter, the same processes of S3305 and S3306 as the random display effect setting process (see S3203 of FIG. 207) described above are executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3393, when it is determined that there is no non-display area (S3394: No), the permutation determined in the process of S3303 can be used as it is, and thus the process of S3394 is skipped and the process of S3305 is performed. Transition.

  With this configuration, even if the type and permutation of the head icon are determined by the same pattern, by changing the enlargement ratio of the head icon, the position where the icon is displayed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of icon display notices (random display effects) using a small amount of effect data.

  In the present modification, when there is a non-display area, a removal permutation is set and the number of icons determined in the process of S3304 is displayed based on the removal permutation. Without being limited to the above, the removal permutation may not be set, and the process of not displaying the icon corresponding to the non-display area may be executed. Even in this case, a different number of icons will be displayed with respect to the determined number of displayed icons, so a variety of icon display notices (random display effects) will be executed using less effect data. can do.

<Modified example of shooting accessory production>
Next, a modified example of the effect control using the projectile accessory 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280. In this modified example, the special effect lottery (special symbol change) is configured to be executed in the demonstration effect executed in the standby state, which is a state where the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is not executed. . Then, as the operation content of the projectile accessory 400, the operation located in the preparatory operation A state and the preparatory operation B state is executed as the preparatory operation until the actual firing operation is executed, and the timing at which the demonstration effect ends (Timing at which the player inserts a ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the special symbol variation starts), the operation state of the projectile accessory is determined, and the variation effect to be executed based on the determination result. Is different from the second control example described above in that it is configured so as to be variable, and is otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the effect on the demo screen in the present modification will be described. FIG. 277 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example in which the projectile accessory 400 operates during the demonstration effect in which the demo screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 277 (a), a demo screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the projectile accessory 400 operates and the granular member 320 is ejected so as to cover the display surface. .

  In this way, by operating the launching accessory 400 during the demo screen, it becomes possible to make the player interested, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. Although a detailed description is omitted, as an operation scenario for launching the projectile accessory 400 during this demonstration effect, for example, after a specific period has elapsed since the demonstration effect was executed, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is configured such that an operation scenario for operating the launching accessory 400 in accordance with the timing at which the effect display having a sense of unity with the operation of the launching accessory 400 is displayed on the display surface of.

  In addition, when it is configured to be able to set a plurality of effect patterns during the demonstration effect, and for example, when it is determined that the abnormality is a minor abnormality (abnormal level 1) by the abnormality determination performed in the above-described second control example, The effect pattern including the operation scenario for operating the projectile accessory 400 may be easily set. With such a configuration, the granular member 320 can be normally stored in the projectile accessory 400 by the operation of the projectile accessory 400 performed during the demonstration effect, and the effect of the effect and the effect of the effect device can be improved. The optimization and the optimization can be easily achieved at the same time. Further, since the player is not playing the game while the demonstration effect is being executed, it is possible to operate the launching accessory 400 without making the player in the game uncomfortable.

  Further, when the launching accessory 400 is operated during the demonstration effect, the player can identify that the demonstration effect is being performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by a comment (displayed as "demo display" in the figure). ) Is displayed. As a result, since it is possible to inform the player that the present demonstration is being performed in an easy-to-understand manner, a new player cannot execute the game by mistakenly recognizing that the player is playing the game even though the demonstration is being performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277 (b), the effect contents when the special symbol variation is executed during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 277 (b) is a case where the special symbol variation is started before the projectile accessory 400 launches the granular member 320 as a demonstration effect and all the granular members 320 are housed in the projectile accessory 400. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents in.

  In this modified example, as the operating state of the projectile accessory 400, the preparatory operation A state for letting the player know that the granular member 320 housed in the housing area has moved downward, and the granular member 320 is fired. Therefore, a preparatory operation B state in which a reaction force is applied to the elastic member and a firing operation state in which the reaction force on the elastic member is released and the granular member 320 is fired by the restoring force of the elastic member are configured to be distinguishable. There is.

  Then, when the special symbol variation is started in the case where the projectile accessory 400 is in the launching operation state (when the ending condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied), the launching operation of the launching object 400 executed during the demonstration effect is completed. Before doing so (before the granular member 320 is stored in the projectile accessory 400), a situation in which a special symbol variation starts is started, and the player is shown to have won the special symbol lottery by being missed. Even when the variation effect is executed corresponding to the special symbol variation, the problem that the granular member 320 is located on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and gives the player an unnecessary expectation. there were.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), until the firing operation of the projectile accessory 400 ends (until the granular member 320 is housed in the storage area ra of the projectile object 400). The demonstration production is configured to continue during the period. With such a configuration, the variation effect can be executed after completing the operation of the projectile accessory 400 in the demonstration effect, so that a plurality of effects (demo effect, variation effect) are confused with each other. It is possible to prevent the production that is difficult to understand from being provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), in the state where the demonstration effect is continued after the special symbol variation is started, the display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to inform the player that the special symbol variation is being executed. That is, the player can be informed only that the special symbol variation is being executed without executing the variation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being erroneously recognized if the special symbol variation is not started even though the ball has entered the first ball inlet 64. Further, a comment of “demo effect ending process in progress” is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be informed easily that the special symbol variation has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the operation state of the launching accessory 400 will be described. 278 (a) schematically shows a state in which the projectile accessory 400 is located at the standby position (reference), and FIG. 278 (b) shows that the projectile accessory 400 is in the preparatory operation A state ( FIG. 278 (c) schematically shows the state of being positioned in the preparation A), and FIG. 278 (c) schematically shows the state in which the projectile accessory 400 is positioned in the preparatory movement B state (preparation B). It is a thing.

  First, the projectile accessory 400 at the reference position will be described with reference to FIG. When located at this reference position, the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that it can be visually recognized by the player who is playing the game.

  Then, when the operation scenario of the launching accessory 400 is set, first, the launching accessory 400 moves to the position of the preparation A shown in FIG. 278 (b). The position of this preparation A is a position where the arch-shaped bottom surface is moved downward so that it is difficult for a player who is playing the game to visually recognize the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400. . The projectile accessory 400 according to the present modification has the same configuration as the ejection device (projectile accessory) 400 according to the above-described first embodiment, and has an arch-shaped bottom surface by the operation of the drive motor 400 that is an electric drive source. Moved down.

  At the position of preparation A, since no drag is applied to the elastic member, the granular member 320 is fired from the position of preparation A to the reference position by, for example, driving the drive motor 400 in the reverse direction. It is possible to move it without doing so.

  The firing accessory 400 needs to perform the preparatory operation when the firing operation is actually executed. If the preparatory operation is performed only when the firing operation is executed, the firing accessory 400 is fired at the time when the preparatory operation is executed. There is a problem that the player can easily understand that the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, in the above-described second control example, a production pattern for performing only the preparation operation is provided, and it is not possible for the player to predict whether or not the firing operation is executed only by performing the preparation operation. Was configured into. Furthermore, since the projectile accessory 400 has a mechanism for firing the granular member 320 by the restoring force of the elastic member, the operation state shifts to the state where the preparatory operation is completed, that is, the state where a sufficient drag force is applied to the elastic member. If so, there is a problem that it is difficult to move the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position without performing the firing operation.

  Therefore, in the present modified example, the preparatory operation A that emphasizes that the preparatory operation has been performed to the player can be executed, and after the preparatory operation A is completed, the preparatory operation B (an operation of applying a drag force to the elastic member). When the effect pattern for executing only the preparation operation is set, the operation control for moving the projectile accessory 400 to the reference position after the completion of the preparation operation A is executed. are doing.

  With such a configuration, when the effect pattern for executing only the preparation operation is set, while making it possible for the player to grasp that the projectile accessory 400 has moved downward and the preparation operation has started, In addition, the preparatory operation can be completed without applying a drag force to the elastic member.

  Also, by moving the projectile accessory 400 from the reference position (see FIG. 278 (a)) to the preparation A (see FIG. 278 (b)), the granular member 320 disappears from the sight of the player during the game. Since the projectile accessory 400 is assembled to the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 277), it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the preparatory operation has been executed.

  Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, starts driving, larger vibration is generated than when the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, continuously drives. I am configuring. Therefore, when the preparatory operation is executed, it is possible to make the player know that the preparatory operation has been executed by the vibration generated from the drive motor 400m which is the drive source.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278 (c), the projectile accessory 400 positioned in the preparatory movement B state (preparation B) will be described. When the state shown in FIG. 278 (b) elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, operates again, and the projectile accessory 400 moves to the position of preparation B. Since the movement from the preparation A to the preparation B is executed in a state where the granular member 320 is already located at a position where the player cannot easily see it, the player can hardly notice it. When moving to the preparation B, a drag is applied to the elastic member of the projectile accessory 400. Then, in this state, when the drive motor 400m as the drive source releases the reaction force to the elastic member (the locking member (claw) that locks the elastic member), the granular member is restored by the restoring force of the elastic member. 320 is fired.

  In this modified example, the timing of moving from the state of preparation A to the state of preparation B in the effect of executing the firing operation and the timing of moving from the state of preparation A to the reference state in the effect of only the preparation operation. The timing is the same as the timing. As a result, whichever effect is executed, the drive motor 400m that is the drive source is driven at the same timing. Therefore, even if vibration is generated by the drive, which effect is being executed is determined. This can make it difficult for the player to predict.

  Next, the relationship between the timing at which the condition for ending the demonstration effect is satisfied and the operation status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the reference state shown in FIG. 278 (a), the operation state of the launching accessory 400 does not affect the variable effect executed after the end of the demonstration effect. Immediately after the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied, the normal variation effect is executed.

  When the ending condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation A state shown in FIG. 278 (b), the elastic member is in a state in which no drag is applied, and therefore, the effect of the projectile accessory 400 used for the demonstration effect. The operation is interrupted, the demonstration effect is extendedly displayed until the projectile accessory 400 is moved to the reference state (see FIG. 277 (b)), and then the variable effect is executed. Since the preparation A state is a state in which no drag is applied to the elastic member, the variation effect may be executed while maintaining the preparation A state. In this case, when performing the effect using the launching accessory 400 that is first executed as the variation effect, perform the rendering operation of the launching accessory 400 based on the operation scenario from the time of being in the preparation A state. You can do it.

  When the ending condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state shown in FIG. 278 (c), the elastic member is in a state where a drag force is applied, and therefore the projectile accessory without firing the granular member 320. 400 cannot be moved to the standard state. Therefore, when the condition for ending the demonstration effect is satisfied, it is necessary to end the demonstration effect while maintaining the preparation B state. However, in the preparation B state, a reaction force is applied to the elastic member. Therefore, if the preparation B state is maintained for a long time, an excessive reaction force is applied to the elastic member, so that the elastic member is restored. There is a risk that the power will be reduced and the launching accessory 400 may be broken.

  Therefore, in the present modification, when the ending condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state, the effect using the shooting accessory 400 is forcibly executed in the variable effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the preparation B state from continuing for a long time and the situation where the projectile accessory 400 breaks down.

  Next, of the control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification, the points different from the above-mentioned second control example will be described. In the present modification, in the second control example described above, instead of the character effect production management processing (see S2151 of FIG. 242), the character effect management processing B (see S2191 of FIG. 279) is performed, and the effect mode setting processing ( The difference is that performance mode setting processing B (see S2697 in FIG. 280) is executed instead of S2607 in FIG. 200), and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the accessory production management process B (S2191) will be described. This accessory effect management process B (S2191) differs from the above-described second control example in that a control process when an interruption signal is received is added in a state where the operation scenario of the launch accessory 400 is set. . The other processing contents are the same as those of the accessory production management process (see S2191 of FIG. 279) described above, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the accessory production management process B (S2191) is executed, the same S3801 to S3804 and S3807 as the accessory production management process (see S2151 of FIG. 242) of the second control example described above. ~ The process of S3810 is executed. Then, in the process of S3804, when it is determined that the operation scenario of the projectile accessory 400 exists (is set) (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether the interruption signal is received (S3891). In the process of S3891, when the command (fluctuation pattern command) for indicating that a new special symbol variation is started, it is determined that the interruption signal is received.

  Here, in this modified example, in the same manner as the second control example described above, the variation effect executed during the variation period of the special symbol, and the standby period (demo period) in which the special symbol variation is not performed. Both the demonstration effect to be executed and the effect using the launching accessory 400 can be executed (the operation scenario of the launching accessory 400 can be set). Further, in the present modification, as in the second control example described above, while one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is changing, another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. It is configured not to be.

  That is, in the character effect production management process B (S2191), the interruption signal is received (changed) in a state where it is determined that the operation scenario of the projectile character is set (a state where Yes is determined in the process of S3804). When it is determined that the pattern command has been received), the demonstration effect is being executed using the projectile accessory 400.

  Then, in the processing of S3891, when it is determined that the interruption signal is received (S3891: Yes), it is next determined whether the current operating state of the projectile accessory 400 is the preparation A (see FIG. 278 (b)). If it is determined to be the preparation A (S3892), and if it is determined to be the preparation A (S3892: Yes), the interruption process is executed (S3893), and the present process is ended. In the process of S3893, in order to interrupt the effect using the launching accessory 400 executed during the demonstration effect, the launching accessory 400 located at the position of the preparation A is set to the reference position (FIG. 278 (a)). The process of moving to (see) is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation scenario for moving the projectile accessory 400 from the position of the preparation A to the reference position is previously defined in the accessory operation table 222aa (see FIG. 236 (a)). When executing the interruption processing, the target operation scenario is read from the accessory operation table 222aa (see FIG. 236 (a)) and executed.

  As described above, by executing the process of S3893, the preparatory operation is executed to execute the effect using the accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, and the launch accessory 400 is located at the position of the preparation A. When the ending condition of the demonstration effect is executed, the demonstration effect can be ended early, so that the player can easily enjoy the variable effect.

  Returning to FIG. 279, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3892, when it is determined that the preparation A is not currently performed (S3892: No), it is then determined whether the preparation B (see FIG. 278 (c)) is currently performed (S3894), and the preparation B is performed. If it is determined to be (S3894: Yes), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S3895), the set operation scenario for the projectile accessory 400 is cleared (S3896), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the operation of the launching accessory 400 is temporarily stopped, and is turned on when the operation of the launching accessory 400 is temporarily stopped. And is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is referred to when the variation effect is executed, and when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, it changes more than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured such that the effect using the shooting accessory 400 is easily executed as the effect.

  With this configuration, the state in which the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, that is, the state in which the projectile accessory 400 is in the preparation B (see FIG. 278 (c)) is unlikely to be continued for a long time. It is possible to prevent the projectile object 400 from being damaged in advance.

  When it is determined in the process of S3891 that the interruption signal has not been received (S3891: No), or in the process of S3894 that it is not the preparation B (S3894), the role of the second control example described above. The process of S3805 to S3807 (S3897), which is the same as the object production management process (see S2151 of FIG. 242), is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the effect mode setting process B (S2697) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the content of effect mode setting processing B (S2697). The content of this effect mode setting process B (S2697) is that the process according to the setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is added to the effect mode setting process of the second control example (see S2607 of FIG. 200) described above. Are different, and otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the production mode setting process B (S2697) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S2791), and when it is determined to be set to ON (S2791: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern this time can execute a launch effect using the launch accessory 400 (S2792). In the process of S2792, the variation time of the variation pattern this time is determined, and when the length of the variation time is equal to or more than a predetermined time (30 seconds or more), it is determined that the shooting effect is possible.

  Then, when it is determined in the process of S2792 that the launch effect is possible (S2792: Yes), the launch effect is set (S2793), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to OFF (S2794), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2791, if it is determined that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S2791: No), the same processes of S2701 to S2707 as the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 of FIG. 200). Is executed to end the present process.

  In this way, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, when the length of the variation time satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is produced. By making it executable, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the effect using the launching accessory 400 is executed as the variable effect as compared with the case where the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured to be easy. Thereby, the state of the preparation B can be made difficult to be continued for a long time, and the projectile accessory 400 can be easily prevented from failing.

  The techniques used in the control examples described above may be combined as appropriate, for example, for setting and managing the delay period in the button effect (see FIGS. 136 to 138) used in the first control example. The control may be executed on the display control device 114 side as in the third control example.

  Specifically, when the variable effect pattern is set by the voice lamp control device 113 (when the delayed effect setting process (see S2805 of FIG. 203) in the display setting process (see S2115 of FIG. 199) is executed), Similar to the first control example described above, only the delay period (delay mode for audio effect) for the audio output device 226 is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the button effect is executed without setting the delay mode for the display effect. And a display command indicating the operation valid period (button valid period) in the button effect.

  The display control device 114 extracts and sets the execution timing of the button effect and the operation valid period in the button effect based on the received display command. Then, when a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation effective period in the button effect is received, whether or not to execute the delayed effect for the display effect, and the case of executing the delayed effect. The delay period according to the determined contents is set in the delay timer.

  After that, when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the display effect is executed (image data corresponding to the display effect is generated, and the display mode showing the effect result of the button effect is generated based on the generated image data. It is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 81). Then, the display completion command indicating that the display effect has been executed is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the display completion command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the delay period of the display effect in the button effect executed in the current button effect, and determines the effect mode to be executed next based on the determination result. Set.

  In this case, the command indicating the delay effect is not output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 until the delay period managed by the display control device 114 side elapses and the display effect is executed. Alternatively, the delay generation command indicating that the delay period has been set, that is, that the predetermined value has been set in the delay timer may be output to the voice lamp control device 113. good. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize that the delay period occurs before the delay period elapses, so that the control process corresponding to the delay period can be executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example has operation means (frame button 22, first button 22za, second button 22zb) that can be operated by the player, and effect execution means ( As a part of the effect executed by the control processing by the voice lamp control device 113), the operation effect based on the operation on the operation means can be executed. When the operation effect is executed, the operation effective period during which the operation performed by the player on the operation means is effectively determined is set, and is being executed according to the content of the operation performed within the operation effective period. Since the effect mode of the operation effect of is changed, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the game.

  In the above-described first control example, the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation content (for example, the number of operations) to the operation means within the operation valid period that is continuously set has been described. Without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of operation effective periods may be set within the effect period in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, the operation content of the operation means executed within the first operation effective period. Based on the operation content to the operation means executed within the second operation effective period set after the first operation effective period, the first operation mode is changed to the first effect mode. It suffices to be able to change the effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode. That is, it suffices that the operation effect is executed such that the effect mode is changed over a plurality of operation valid periods set within the effect period of the operation effect. Further, it may be configured such that a plurality of special symbol variations and a production period of the operation production are set so as to straddle a plurality of jackpot games.

  In the above-described first control example, in the case where all the effect modes set in the continuous stroke effect, that is, the effect mode is changed to the final effect mode based on the operation on the operation means, the subsequent operation means is operated. Depending on the content, it is possible to finish the continuous hit effect without waiting for a predetermined period of time during which the continuous hit effect is executed. With such a configuration, the player is allowed to perform a continuous hitting effect in which the effect mode is not changed for a long time, and the player's willingness to play, and thus the willingness to operate the operating means, is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  In the first control example described above, when the player motivates to operate the operation means within the operation valid period, the effect mode of the operation effect can be easily changed, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the production mode may be changed more easily when the operation means is not operated. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment that allows the player to select whether or not to operate the operation means during the operation valid period.

  Further, in the above-described first control example, the operation effect result is displayed once based on the operation content to the operation means within the operation effective period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effective period is not limited thereto. The operation effect result may be displayed a plurality of times inside the display. For example, when the operation effective period of 10 seconds is set as the operation effective period, a predetermined operation condition (for example, the operation means 3 When the operation condition that is satisfied when the operation is performed) is satisfied, the first operation effect result is displayed, and when the operation effective period has a remaining period after the first operation effect result is displayed, The second operation effect result may be displayed by satisfying a predetermined operation condition. Further, in this case, the display content of the operation effect result displayed a plurality of times may be configured to be variable, and specifically, the true operation effect result and the pseudo operation effect result may be configured to be set. It is advisable to provide a deciding means for deciding whether to display the operation effect result and to display any operation effect result every time the operation condition is satisfied. As described above, the operation effect result can be displayed a plurality of times within one operation effective period, whereby the player can motivate the operation means.

  Further, in this case, condition changing means for changing a predetermined operation condition each time the operation effect result is displayed, and restriction means for limiting the number of times the operation effect result can be displayed within one operation effective period are provided. Is also good. In addition, the number of times limited by the limiting means may be changed based on the operation content of the operating means performed during the effect period of the operation effect. For example, the operating means may be changed during the effective operation period. It may be configured such that the more the operation is performed, the more the number of times the operation effect result can be displayed is increased. If the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period, the operation effect result can be displayed more than when the operation is performed. It may be configured to increase the number of times of display. Further, the probability that the true operation effect result is displayed may be changed based on the operation content of the operation means executed during the effect time period of the operation effect.

  In the above-described second control example, the abnormality determination of the ejection accessory (the ejection accessory) 400 (the abnormality determination of whether or not the granular member 320 is housed) is executed at a specific timing to perform the abnormality determination. Depending on the result of the process, the effect using the launching accessory 400 is executed, the retry process for executing the abnormality determination again is executed, or the process of switching to another effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after performing an effect using the ejection accessory (firing accessory) 400, the ejection accessory (firing accessory) 400 is in a normal state, that is, the granular member 320 is normal. It may be configured to execute different processing depending on the length of the period required to reach the state of being housed in, for example, within 4 seconds after the effect using the projectile accessory 400 is executed. The member 320 is stored normally When it is determined that the delay effect is set, a predetermined effect (for example, a series of character effects) is continued, and a delay period is set for 4 to 5 seconds after the effect using the projectile character 400 is executed. However, during this delay period, execution of a series of accessory effects can be delayed, and when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored during this delay period, immediately after that, or after the delay period elapses, a series of If the granular member 320 is not normally stored even after 5 seconds have elapsed (even after the delay period has elapsed) after the effect production has been restarted and the production using the firing accessory 400 has been executed, The effect contents of the series of effect effects may be changed to an effect mode in which the shooting accessory 400 is not used. Further, in this case, when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored within 2 seconds after the effect using the shooting accessory 400 is executed, the shortened storage state is set and the specific effect is set for a predetermined period (shooting). The effect may be configured to be executed for a period of 4 seconds from the execution of the effect 400.

  With such a configuration, different effects can be executed according to the length of the period from the execution of the effect using the projectile accessory 400 until the granular member 320 is normally stored. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  As described above, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning a prize device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery ball By passing, the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol after the jackpot game has been described, but in this way, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player As a configuration capable of providing the player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the fact that the ball has passed through a specific area in a state where, for example, the special symbol lottery is a lottery result different from the jackpot win. If you win the small hit, you can execute the second bonus game (small hit game) different from the bonus game (big hit game), and the variable ball is opened during the second bonus game. When a specific area through which a ball entered can be passed in a row (variable winning device 65 may be provided, or another winning device may be separately provided), and the ball passes the specific area during the second bonus game In addition, you may use the structure which can perform a privilege game (big hit game) after completion | finish of a 2nd privilege game (small hit game).

  In the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command Has been described from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

  In each of the control examples described above, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, and the through gate 67 is held up to four times. The number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along the predetermined direction such as the vertical direction or the L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for showing the lottery result of the ordinary symbol. As described above, for example, the display modes may be set using common image data that the display control device 114 has.

  In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for indicating the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display units may be provided for the main symbol that is emphasized by the player and for the sub symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

  In each of the control examples described above, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game status, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game status that is advantageous to the player (time saving) In the case of (state) and the case of a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Further, the left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  In each control example described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation, but other configurations It is also possible to use, and it is possible to determine whether the player has operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, which is configured in the form of a lever, or that the player has operated due to contact or proximity. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is made to change the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. Although it is used as a production operation means for, the production mode of various productions executed by the pachinko machine 10 can be changed based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22, for example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display. A control device that can generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, output signals (operation signals) output from a plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation on the means.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above control examples. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probability variation state) is set in one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probability, for example, as a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined when it becomes a jackpot depending on the setting. May be. That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be changed according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type unfavorable to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the proportion of jackpots with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is changed according to the setting, or jackpots with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) are decided. It is also possible to change the advantage ratio for each setting by changing the ratio depending on the setting. In addition, for example, the proportion of the jackpots to which a large number of shorter working hours (for example, 100 times) are determined after the jackpot is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a smaller number of shorter working hours (for example, 0 times) is awarded. The rate at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the proportion of the jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability changing state) is changed according to the setting, or an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a normal state). ) May be changed according to the setting. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only by a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured so that it can be set in 6 stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. Then, in the setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot of 6 rounds is decided at a rate of 2%, whereas in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is decided only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With such a configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player is allowed to play while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, in the setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 times of shortening times are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Further, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or a character inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be provided so that the jackpot type is likely to be determined by a specific setting (the determined rate is high). Also, in the case of changing the combination of the jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. The more the jackpot probability is increased, the better. This configuration, especially in the probability change state, tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big jackpot, and by applying to a type of gaming machine that has a small probability with a high probability in the probability variation state, the high setting advantage The sex can be enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big win in the probability changing state is low, the number of lottery until the next big win tends to increase, so that the chances of winning a prize ball also increase. Therefore, in the probability changing state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a plurality of levels of settings, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when the fluctuation pattern is selected by the main controller 110 is set based on the set value that is set. Different, different types of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol by the voice lamp control device 113, or a detailed effect executed as a variation effect. It may be configured such that the types of various selection tables that are referred to when selecting a mode are different. With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variation effect to be executed, so that the variation effect that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

  Further, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, the setting that is set as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "setting suggestion" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratios are the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "setting suggestion" is executed. It is preferable that the effect content of the operation effect is changed according to each set value, and the selection ratio of other effect modes is changed according to the set value. With such a configuration, when the "setting suggestion" operation effect that directly suggests the setting value is executed, the effect contents are described, and when the other operation effects are executed, each effect mode Since it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehending the selection ratios of the above, it is possible to make the player interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

  Further, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different depending on the set game state, for example, from the setting “1” which is disadvantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting values can be set in 6 stages up to the setting "6" which is advantageous to the player, the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game which is advantageous to the player The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (probability change state) is set and the settings "4" to "6" are set, and the player is more disadvantageous than the first game state. 2 By making the selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the game state (time saving state) is set the same, playing the pachinko machine 10 for which the set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set Set value that is advantageous to the player even for the player who is Than is set can it is convincing.

  In addition, like the above-described first control example, the same effect mode is set when the first game state (probability change state) is set and when the second game state (time saving state) is set. By setting the “chance mode”, which is the case, when the configuration that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state is used, the above-described effect can be made more prominent. . Further, as in the above-described first control example, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the second game state after the first game state is finished, and it is determined whether or not the first game state is actually set. By making it difficult, the effect can be more remarkably achieved.

  In this way, based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (the result of the jackpot, the set game state, the selected variation pattern (variation time)) By making the selection ratio variable, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the set value set in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  All or a part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising: an action means and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured such that the displacement means has a plurality of displacement modes. A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of a liquid crystal display area and includes a displacement means that is displaced in accordance with the driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the function of the auxiliary means that the displacement means makes the displacement mode of the displacement means plural. This can prevent the player from getting tired and can keep the player's attention in a high state.

  It should be noted that the specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be a box-shaped space forming means that forms a displaceable space, or the pushing means for changing the displacement mode of the displacing means by displacing the displacing means by a driving device different from the operating means Means may be used. Further, the drive device for the pushing means may also be used as the drive device for driving the operating means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A game machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to change the portion when the action means acts on the displacement means, so that even if the movement of the action means during operation is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be different.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means is provided with a contact means for contacting the displacement means to apply a load, and the load can be generated in a plurality of types through the contact means. A game machine A3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of loads generated via the abutting means, so that the displacement means can have a plurality of displacement modes.

  In the gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable, a first contact portion configured to contact the displacement means, and the first contact configured to contact the displacement means. A second contact portion different from the portion, and an angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or a tangent line of the first contact portion) in a predetermined direction is A gaming machine A4, which is configured so as to have a different angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent line of the second contact portion) when viewed in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacing means can be changed without changing the displacing direction of the abutting means. Can occur in the direction of.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent line drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and tangent lines parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the displacement means can be loaded in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means is displaced with less energy loss. Can be made. This makes it possible to secure a large amount of displacement of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating unit configured to generate a load for displacing the acting unit is provided, and the load generating unit loads at a position where the displacing unit is arranged more densely. A gaming machine A6 configured to generate a.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support mode that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on the side where it is easy to maintain the balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the action means. A game machine A7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the equilibrium of the disposition of the displacement means by changing the attitude of the operating means, so that the operating means is locally overloaded. This can be avoided.

  The cause of the change in the posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device for changing the attitude of the action means may be provided. When the posture of the action means is changed by balancing the load from the displacement means, it is easy to change the posture of the action means by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. Can occur in multiple types.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guide means configured to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide displacement of the displacement means in one direction. A first guide part and a second guide part capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in the other direction, and the first guide part and the second guide part are surfaces facing the displacement means. A gaming machine A8, which is characterized by different formation modes.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, and the disposition means changes the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means at a position where it is easy to maintain the balance of the displacement means. A gaming machine A9, which is configured to be operable on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

  The gaming machine A10 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or a plurality of members, and the members are configured so as not to be coupled to each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and agglomerated. Therefore, a structure in which a plurality of members scatter can be easily realized.

  In the gaming machine A10, the one or more members have a center of gravity arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

  The method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming holes in the member may be used.

<Change by the advancing / retreating means moving forward / backward within the range of displacement of the displacement means>
An arranging unit configured to be arranged in a predetermined range and an advancing / retreating unit configured to be displaceable in an advancing / retreating direction with respect to the range are provided. The game machine B1 is configured so that its width can be changed, and the width can be changed in a plurality of types.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right, and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members due to the displacement of the first movable member. (For example, see JP-A-2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means is configured by a plurality of types of the width variation of the range when entering the range, the displacement aspect of the arranging means can be configured by a plurality of types. The displacement mode can be improved.

  The arrangement means is not limited in any way. For example, a granular effect member formed of a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball may be used.

  Further, the method of configuring a plurality of types of range width changing modes by the displacement of the advancing / retreating means is not limited at all. For example, the entrance side of the advancing / retreating means may be formed as an inclined surface and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion having a different width to enter the range, or the range may be changed by changing the displacement width of the advancing / retreating means. The width of may be variable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means capable of preventing the placement means from entering and exiting, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing / retreating means enters in a non-changed state of the range. A gaming machine B2, which is configured to be displaceable in an aspect, wherein the box-like means is provided with an opening portion through which the advancing / retreating means can be inserted, and the arranging means cannot be inserted.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retreating means can enter the range through the opening portion, while preventing the disposing means from falling out of the range.

  Note that the arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, you may arrange | position in the location which an arrangement | positioning means cannot reach easily. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging means accidentally falls out of the range. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a place where the load from the arrangement means is unlikely to occur (for example, the upper side as the opposite side to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent the load from the disposing means from being applied to the advancing / retreating means during displacement, thereby hindering the displacement of the advancing / retreating means, or causing a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the disposing means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that the direction in which the arranging means is guided differs depending on the direction in which the arranging means abuts.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to show the player that the arrangement means is guided in different directions by the same advancing / retreating means. As a result, since the types of effects can be increased, it is possible to improve the effect of effects using the placement means and the advancing / retreating means.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that, in a state where the advancing / retreating means has entered the range, the gap between the facing surface of the range is shorter than the width of the arranging means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even when the arranging means is arranged on the side far from the advancing / retreating means, the advancing / retreating means is placed in the arranging means in the entered state. Can be operated.

  It should be noted that there may be no gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range. Further, there may be a gap in a part and no gap in the other part.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing / retreating means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip of the entering side, the representative tip part farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the gap between the range and the range is configured to be the shortest.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, by causing the representative tip end portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the shaft, to enter the range first, It is possible to deal with the positional deviation at an early stage and reduce the resistance of the subsequent approach operation.

  In the gaming machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined overhanging portion, and is formed to incline toward the side that recedes from the range as it goes away from the overhanging portion along the axial direction. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to displace the arranging means away from a predetermined overhang portion in the course of the advancing / retreating means entering.

  In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position distant from the overhang portion in the axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion, so that the arranging means pushed away by the overhanging portion. It is possible to secure the place of arrangement.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is opened. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before the advancing / retreating means enters, or the range side may be opened when the advancing / retreating means enters.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a driving means capable of generating a driving force and a transmitting means configured to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the advancing / retreating means are provided, and the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means are provided. The driving force is transmitted by abutting, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advancing / retreating means is changeable, and the contact area is such that the advancing / retreating means enters the range. A gaming machine B8, which is configured to have a maximum initially and then decrease.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry when the advancing / retreating means starts contact with the arranging means and a large load is likely to occur. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced.
Thereby, the durability of the advancing / retreating means and the transmitting means can be improved.

  The mode of the advancing / retreating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that displaces outside the game area or a means that displaces inside the game area.

<Synchronous operation of two members with a transmission cam>
Drive means, displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members, and transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, wherein the transmission means A first transmission portion configured to transmit the driving force of the driving means to a first target portion of the displacement means in the first aspect, and a second transmission portion of the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect. A game machine C1 comprising: a second transmission part configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to a second target part.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which is a drive device used for displacement of the displacement means, the drive device includes a first drive device for vertically moving the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There is a game machine (for example, see JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the plurality of displacement means are displaced in synchronization with the first drive device and the second drive device in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement means, the drive timing is displaced. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. Since it is configured, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

  The time when the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partial simultaneous transmission) may be used.

  Further, when the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, it is preferable that the driving force is arranged so that at least a part of the driving force is generated along the gravity direction. Thereby, the own weight can be used for transmitting the driving force.

  In the gaming machine C1, the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur at different times.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance to a low value, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the driving means.

  Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission caused by displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Is also good.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The first member is configured to be capable of contacting the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contact state, the first member is interposed via the first member. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that the driving force can be transmitted to the second member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, it is possible to configure a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission means to the second member and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted via the first member.

  In the gaming machine C3, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be capable of retracting to a position where it does not contact the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, it is possible to avoid the first member being displaced from contacting the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches the predetermined arrangement and is stopped, so that the mode of the driving force transmission to the second member can be smoothly switched. Can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means, the gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, switching of the driving force transmission mode can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. It is possible to avoid an unintended collision or contact of each member.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging unit configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and driving force transmission to the second member is in a direction opposing the urging force. The gaming machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined position with the second member arranged on the side opposite to the first member in the predetermined direction. You can With this, it is possible to form the timing of displacing the second member against the biasing force and the timing of stopping the second member against the biasing force as the transmission means is displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, the first member is configured to be displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction side. .

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the biasing force can be used supplementarily.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission portion is capable of forming a non-contact state in which it does not contact the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member A gaming machine C8, wherein the second member is configured so that the second transmission portion does not interfere with the above.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, as the displacement state of the second member, the displacement state pushed by the second transmission portion and the displacement state separated from the second transmission portion And can be configured.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel to the predetermined direction from the contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means to be in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine C9, which is characterized by passing through a regulating section for regulating.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is blocked by the restricting portion to reach the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

  The mode of the regulation unit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide part that limits the displacement mode to a slide displacement by restricting the displacement, or a shaft support part that limits the rotational displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a driving force of the driving means, is displaced or stopped, and receives a load from the second target portion. A game machine C10, which is configured to be capable of changing its state between a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<The load transmission is interrupted by limiting the load generation only when it is far>
A game machine comprising: a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, wherein the contact means abuts on the displacement means. A first means configured to be changeable between a state and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means, and an object for transmitting a load applied from the outside to the first means is switchable A gaming machine D1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacing means composed of one movable body that is displaced by a driving force of a driving means may come into contact with another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (See, for example, JP-A-2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacing means, and the state of the driving means under control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor), Since there is a possibility that the actual state of the driving means may be different, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

  Further, there is a possibility that the operating resistance of the driving means may be unstablely increased or decreased due to the load applied to the driving means, and the deterioration of the driving means may be accelerated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the drive state of the drive means can be stabilized. Further, by suppressing the unstable increase and decrease of the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  The method for suppressing the load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed at the abutting portion, and the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means receiving an external force) that causes the load may cause the first means to move. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

  In the gaming machine D1, the load that the displacing means receives from the first means and the driving force that the displacing means receives via the transmitting means face the same side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face the opposite side.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 is provided with an arrangement means arranged so as to be able to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured such that the transmission means and the displacement means are in a non-contact state. A gaming machine D3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs in the state where the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the load transmission is performed between the transmission means and the displacement means. Can be shut off.

  The collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means or in the non-contact state of the first means. When the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-abutting state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. ), Load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes an abutting portion configured to be able to abut the displacing means, and the abutting portion bends in the direction of the load generated by the abutting ( A gaming machine D4 characterized by being configured so as to be flexible (deformable).

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacing means include a second abutting portion configured to be abuttable, and the second means of at least one of the first means and the displacing means. A game machine D5, wherein the abutting portion is formed of a material capable of absorbing shock.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, since the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, it is possible to suppress the load transmission to the drive means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a biasing means for biasing the displacement means is provided, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end portion of the biasing direction displacement range of the biasing means. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid the standby position of the displacing means (position for waiting for load generation from the transmission means) from shifting. It is easy to dispose the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position in the control of operating the transmission means at high speed up to the position where the first means and the displacement means are separated from each other. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the drive means.

  In addition, by lowering the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means.

  The gaming machine D7 according to any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, wherein the first means is allowed to change its posture due to the collision of the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used for the attitude change of the first means, so that the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means applies the biasing force of the biasing means. When the urging state is received, the transmitting means contacts the displacing means to displace the displacing means to the opposite side in the direction of the urging force of the urging means. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that the state can be changed between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the means is invalid and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are apart from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of easiness of posture change with respect to the collision of the arranging means).

<Regulating one of forward and reverse rotations conditionally>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position that is a reference point where the displacement mode changes, and from the reference position, a plurality of types The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the above mode.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable accessory so as to perform different operations with a plurality of effects (for example, see JP-A-2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, different operations correspond to the presence / absence of switching of the drive direction of the drive device, so the type of effect can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player because the player can predict.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the discrimination involvement means makes it difficult for the player to discriminate the effect to be executed. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to have different effects involving the displacement of the displacing means for the winning effect and the off effect. In this case, if there is only one way of displacing the displacement means to the predetermined position, displacement from the predetermined position (for example, a driving sound is generated) makes it possible to know whether or not there is any certainty. On the other hand, by using a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the certainty is correct or not, even if displacement occurs (for example, drive sound occurs).

  Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a route, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

  The gaming machine E1 includes drive means for generating a drive force for displacing the displacing means, and regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacing means, and the regulating means is such that the driving means generates the driving force. A gaming machine E2, which is configured so that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in the absence state.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be turned off when the displacement means is regulated. Therefore, when the gaming machine E2 is re-driven after that, whether the driving direction is the forward direction, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is in the opposite direction.

  Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate the driving force when performing the long-time effect (long reach etc.) while the displacement of the displacing means is restricted, it is possible to suppress heat generation of the driving means.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacement means by the driving force of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means provided can be reduced as compared with the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is separately provided.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is provided with a discrimination participation means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which of the plurality of types of modes the displacement is occurring. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to make it difficult for the discriminating means to discriminate the displacement mode of the displacement means in the predetermined section. It is possible to make it easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means until the displacement mode is difficult to be discriminated compared to the case where it is difficult to discriminate the displacement mode only in the above.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is configured to be able to maintain the arrangement of the displacement means in the section.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, it becomes possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of the displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such that the drive means is driven before the notification of the result.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detection means determines an executable switching of the displacement among the displacements of the plurality of types of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used in combination. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
In a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are displaceable, the manner in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a first member and a second member that are displaceable are controlled to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member may return after coming into contact with each other depending on the speed of approach. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the performance mode regardless of the displacement speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different. For example, the displacement modes of the first member and the second member are not set to be close to each other on the same straight line, but are changed to be closer to each other after being close to each other on another straight line, thereby making the first member and the second member move closer to each other. It is possible to avoid the reversion and make it easier to maintain the presentation mode.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is at least divided into a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for contacting each other, and the first member and The gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is configured so that the postures in the first section and the second section are different.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

  The gaming machine F1 or F2 is provided with a load generating means capable of generating a load toward the side that maintains the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

  The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to the load in a fixed direction or the load of a fixed size. For example, when the load (for example, a presentation mode that produces an external force) that is easily received changes depending on the situation (for example, a game state), the direction and size of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

  Further, the load generated by the load generating means does not have to be constantly generated. For example, the generation of the load and the cancellation of the load may be switched according to the change in the above situation. The load generating means may be external.

  In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first member and the second member is configured to be displaced, and the displacement generating means is configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means is the displacement. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being configured integrally with a generating means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member, and the shifted timings. It is possible to prevent the load from being generated.

  Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can be mutually complementary. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

  In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contacting state in which at least a part of the first member contacts the second member, and the gaming machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute the effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state, the gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than the predetermined state.

  The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, wherein the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of points with respect to the first member or the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means applies a load to the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, and therefore the state is not limited to the displacement in one direction. It is also possible to maintain the state with respect to the posture change of the first member or the second member. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to prevent the misalignment from being conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded parts that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded parts include a first loaded part and a first loaded part thereof. A second loaded portion having a displacement amount with respect to the load generating means larger than that of the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be gradually applied to the first member or the second member. Further, the roles of the loads given to the first loaded portion and the second loaded portion can be divided. For example, the first loaded portion can be used for arranging at a predetermined position, and the second loaded portion can be used for posture adjustment.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, in the load generating means, a portion that applies a load directed to a side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member compared to other portions. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing length of the facing surface facing the second member is long.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, in the other portions, the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so that the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the assembling of the first member and the second member is configured such that the first member and the second member can be assembled in a separated state. .

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of cracks or chips in the first member or the second member due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, as compared with the case where the assembling work is performed in the contact state, it is easier to avoid the load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without loss. it can.

  As a result, the contact surfaces as designed can be provided on the first member and the second member, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the displacement is likely to occur due to the load of the load generating means, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbled state of displacement means>
A gaming machine G0, comprising: a displacement means and an operation means for displacing the displacement means, the operation means being configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement unit configured to be capable of displacement constituted by a change in arrangement and rotation (for example, see JP-A-2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, although the portion for supporting the displacement means arranged at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap to secure the displacement. There is a problem that there is not enough countermeasure against the change and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in posture of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the attitude change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. Accordingly, even when the space in which the displacement means is allowed to displace is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

  The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting may be performed with a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction or the like) as an axis, or lateral swing may be performed with a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction or the like) as an axis.

  In the gaming machine G0, the acting means is configured to be capable of increasing or decreasing an acting force for suppressing a posture change of the displacing means, corresponding to an arrangement position of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the space for arranging the displacing means while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the effect of the displacing means.

  For example, when the displacement means is reciprocally displaced, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to prevent the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

  In addition, for example, when the displacement means itself is enlarged / reduced or rotationally displaced by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse. By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

  In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the acting means is configured to support the displacing means by a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through a center of gravity of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G0 or G1, the acting means supports the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacing means, so that the displacing means is prevented from tilting. Can be made easier.

  In the gaming machine G2, the operating means includes auxiliary supporting means for supporting the displacing means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main supporting means is arranged, and the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the displacement means is supported by the main support means and the auxiliary support means at three or more support points which are not arranged on a straight line, The posture change can be suppressed in all directions.

  In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as a guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means, the gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

  In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means is displaceable in such a manner that the area when viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the action force generation position becomes maximum at the displacement end position of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacing means is most effective, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacing means at a plurality of points. It is possible to effectively suppress the posture change of the displacement means.

  Further, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement, so if the action force generation position is increased excessively, the action force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises only. However, a problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

  On the other hand, by arranging the action force generation position to be reduced at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid excessive displacement resistance of the displacement means, and to avoid upsizing of the drive device.

<Propeller unit wiring guidance>
Displacement means, electrical wiring connected to the displacement means, and electrical wiring displacement means configured to displace a predetermined portion of the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring displacement means, the displacement means is the predetermined portion A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the predetermined portion is displaceable to the side avoiding the displacement means when the displacement is made to the side approaching.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring connected to the displacement means is added to a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electric wiring (for example, JP2012-157474A). See the bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue displacement beyond the electric wiring for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement end of the displacement means. Since a space for arranging the electric wiring is required outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the predetermined portion of the electric wiring can be displaced by the electric wiring displacing means to the side avoiding the displacing means, so that the contact between the displacing means and the electric wiring is positive. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to displace beyond the electric wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

  In addition, when the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion, it is not limited at all. For example, there may be a risk that the displacement means and the predetermined portion may contact each other if the predetermined portion is stopped, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be shorter than the reference length.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid the displacement amount of the displacement means on the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction being limited to the electric wiring.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view, the gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction in which the predetermined portion is displaced can be set to the direction along the predetermined direction view, so that the electric wiring is displaced in the predetermined direction view. It is possible to reduce the influence on the appearance.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, there is provided a retaining means for retaining a second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electric wiring displacement means is A gaming machine H4, wherein the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stopping means.

  The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

  In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, and the gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, since the retaining means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, the retaining means is projected to the plane side on which the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. This makes it possible to increase the amount of electric wiring accommodated in the retaining means, so that the displacement amount of the displacement means that compensates for the distance from the retaining means by the second predetermined portion can be further increased.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wire displacement means is integrally formed with the displacement means, and includes a corresponding change means for changing the arrangement of the electric wire displacement means in correspondence with the arrangement of the displacement means. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the correspondence changing means can appropriately manage the relative arrangement of the electric wiring and the displacing means.

<Flow path of a ball that has passed through a power line>
It is provided with a game area and a flow-down means for flowing down the game balls discharged from the game area, and the flow-down means is provided with a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. Playing machine I0.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a base plate forming a game area is a veneer plate (for example, see JP-A-2017-80178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate and the player cannot visually recognize the game ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and unless the player pays attention to the discharge timing, there is a possibility that the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

  In addition, even if paying attention to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning port and the out port are often arranged close to each other, and even though the player actually entered the out port, There is a possibility that you may mistake it for entering a ball. In this case, there is a possibility of distrust of not paying out the prize balls. That is, the conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is provided with a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, so that the player visually checks the game balls flowing down the section. By doing so, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, the discharge of the game balls from the game area can be improved.

  It should be noted that the discharge of the game balls from the game area generally means the manner in which the game balls are discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through the prize ball opening, or may be discharged through an outlet without a prize ball.

  In the gaming machine I0, a game ball that has flown through the game area is arranged so that it can pass therethrough, and the game ball is provided with a profit giving means configured to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passing of the game ball. The means is arranged on the upper side of the profit giving means so as to be able to guide the game ball to the side closer to the profit giving means, and is arranged downstream of the first constituent portion, and the profit is provided. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I0, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means. It is possible to avoid that the game ball approaches the lower profit giving means. As a result, the game ball already discharged from the game area and the game ball still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to be able to.

  The predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, prize balls may be paid out, a lottery for symbols such as the first symbol and the second symbol, or other profits may be used.

  The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes an attention means formed inside the game area and a frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the downflow means is the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2, characterized in that the gaming ball is made to flow inward of the means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flow-down means allows the game ball discharged from the game area to enter the visual field of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even when the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to know that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

  Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

  In the gaming machine I2, the flow-down means includes a deceleration means for decelerating a game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Device design and light guide plate surroundings>
A predetermined substrate provided with a light emitting means, and arranged means arranged on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction, the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction, A gaming machine J0, characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is arranged so as to be smaller than the visible area.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a decorative board having a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged on the back side of a base board having a game area on the front side, and the board surface of the decorative board and the board surface of the base board There is a game machine in which are arranged substantially parallel to each other (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-333887). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the area of the decorative board visually recognized in front view is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the decorative board is irradiated with the LED light, the visual field thereof is illuminated. There is a possibility that the decorative substrate may enter, and the decorative member and the decorative substrate may be visually recognized as overlapping in the front and rear.

  On the surface of the decorative substrate, only the components necessary for the function such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and usually the design is not high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the electric decorative substrate are visually recognized to overlap each other in the front and rear, the appearance may be poor and the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the effect of rendering the predetermined board.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate is arranged such that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. A region in which only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate can be formed. As a result, the effect of producing the predetermined substrate can be improved.

  The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, the visible area may be reduced by being partially hidden, or the entire area may be blocked so that there is no visible area.

  The optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be set arbitrarily. For example, the optical axis may be oriented in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be oriented in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be oriented at an angle between them. It can be anything.

  The light transmittance of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, the light transmission may be excellent, the light transmission may be low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each part.

  In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surface sides of the predetermined substrate for changing a traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. And a low-transmission means having a light transmittance lower than that of the direction changing means is disposed, and at least a part of the predetermined substrate is disposed inside the low-transmission means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low-transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visually recognized can be narrowed.

  It should be noted that the direction changing means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows down, a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But good.

  In the gaming machine J1, the low-transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion that forms a shape of a predetermined pattern or graphic, and the gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the low-transmission means can be mixed in with the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  It should be noted that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone part such as a window frame, or a bone part that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire to the rotation outer peripheral part, or a series of meanings composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

  The gaming machine J3 according to any one of the gaming machines J0 to J2, wherein the predetermined substrate is arranged with an end surface of the plate facing the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined board viewed in the predetermined direction can be minimized.

  The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing a display effect that can be visually recognized in a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means, wherein the predetermined substrate is the display area of the display means, and A game machine J4, which is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined substrate at the boundary, light is radiated from the back side of the game area to the front side, and unlike the case where overall light production is performed, only the display area side from the predetermined board is provided. It is possible to perform an effect of irradiating light to the game or an effect of irradiating light only to the game area side.

  In the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board having the gaming area on the front side.

  According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, for example, the arrangement of the light emitting means is compared with the case where the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the rear case where the movable accessory or the like is arranged. The degree of freedom of can be improved.

  Further, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the rear case along the rear surface of the game board, it is possible to visually recognize the rear case side from the window portion of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back surface of the game board without looking around with a special wide view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electric wiring.

  Further, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the central portion of the back case, the arrangement space of the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but the predetermined substrate is arranged on the back surface of the game board. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited to the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Lock member that prevents misalignment of accessories during shipping>
Displacement means and restriction means configured to restrict displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the restriction means has a first state in which the displacement means is operable and a second state in which the displacement means is inoperative. In the first state, the gaming machine K1 is configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (for example, see JP-A-2015-231434). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the displacement means.

  That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after being installed, it is possible to fix the movable accessory even in situations where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment. Not configured to work.

  Therefore, as a measure to fix the movable accessory at the time of shipping, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by filling the range in which the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is pulled out after it arrives at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily pulled out, and there is a possibility that the burden on the game hall will be great.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the restriction means, it is possible to favorably dispose and release the displacement means.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, the limiting means is not pulled out, so it is difficult to continue the game if the state changes easily due to the external force that can occur during the game. On the other hand, since the limiting means is configured to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect during the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the limiting means is configured to be capable of changing states between the first state and the second state when not energized.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to cause the state change of the limiting means to occur when the gaming machine is not energized, so that it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the work of the worker from becoming difficult in the power failure state and the recovery work from the power failure state.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, a urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means is such that the operating portion is displaced by a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operating portion is displaceable in the predetermined direction from the reference position by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operating portion is displaceable from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3, which is arranged at a separated position away from

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, in the second state, since the operation unit is arranged at the separated position away from the reference position, it is provided to the installed gaming machine such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for changing the state of the limiting means from occurring due to the external force that can be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing state from the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means forming the area in which the displacing means is displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, since the operating portion is arranged outside the area constituting means, even if the displacement means is displaced by the operation of the operating means, It is possible to avoid the displacement means coming into contact with the operator.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means is such that the operating portion has a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The restricting means is configured to change its state as it is displaced, and the limiting means includes guide means for guiding the displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction, and the guide means operates the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5, which is configured to ensure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of a portion.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the displacement of the operating means can be made in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement in the predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation portion from being displaced by the predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to avoid changing the state of the limiting means due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

  In the gaming machine K5, the operation section includes an engagement section configured to be engageable with the guide means, the biasing means is arranged at the center of the operation section, and the engagement section is the operation section. A gaming machine K6, which is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5, even when an external force whose direction is unknown is given to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operation portion is displaced with the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, by merely performing (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restriction unit from changing from the first state to the second state due to external force such as opening and closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipping, and the like.

  In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable by the support shaft on the left and right positions, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging part of the limiting means. Therefore, the game hall clerk opens the front door. Thus, the operation when operating the control means can be facilitated. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width increases (the side opposite to the support shaft), so that the operating position of the limiting means can be set closer to the front side.

  In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area forming means, the gaming machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side, so that an operator who opens the front door and works can prevent the operator from accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

  In addition, the load applied to the restriction means when opening and closing the front door can be reduced compared to the case where the restriction means is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. It can be prevented from changing.

  The gaming machine K9 in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, wherein the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the limiting means in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guiding accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacing means in a state where the guiding accuracy of the displacement of the limiting means alone is lowered, Can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a prevention notifying means for notifying the continuation of the energized state when energized in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notifying means can notify that the state of the limiting means is switched from the first state.

  Note that the mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, it may be notified by displaying an error display on the liquid crystal display device, may be notified by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or may be illuminated by a predetermined illumination means (or maintained in an off state). You may notify by this.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine having a container for accommodating an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object so as to be operable, wherein the container has an opening formed at a position corresponding to the operating means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by the following.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing) for housing a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent unauthorized manipulation of the control board.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with the operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

According to the gaming machine L0, the operating means is provided so as to be arranged on the target object so as to be operable, and since the opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operating means, the operating means is operated through the opening. It can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means.
Therefore, the labor can be suppressed.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Substrate Boxes A100 and A2100 (Coatings A270 and A2270) as an Example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the containing body, and the containing body includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. M1.

  According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the containing body, and the containing body includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the housing body from the opening.

  In the gaming machine M1, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding a displacement locus of the operator on the first surface of the operation means. A gaming machine M2, which is arranged so as to face a part.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is disposed so as to face at least a part of the range of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. While the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the operator inserted are prevented from being obstructed, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, and foreign matter such as wire is introduced from the opening into the container. It can be suppressed from being inserted.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed into a plate shape in which a base end is fixed and one end is free.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine M3, the facing portion is provided with a protrusion so as to project.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the facing portion, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be increased and the damage can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

  In the gaming machine M4, the projecting portion is provided so as to project from a surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M4, the projection is provided so as to project from the surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operating means, and thus the first facing portion and the operating means are provided. It is possible to reduce the gap between the surface and the surface and prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the container through the gap.

  In the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means. By eliminating the gap between them, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the container.

  Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, when the operator is inserted into the operating means, even if the facing portion is pushed by the operator in the inserting direction, the facing portion moves in the inserting direction. Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, damage to the base end side of the facing portion can be suppressed.

  Since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form the contacting state of the protrusion and maintain it ( That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire).

  The gaming machine M7 according to any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, wherein the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the facing portion is in contact with an edge part of the operation element inserted in the operation means. A game machine M8 characterized by being formed possible.

  Here, when the operator inserted into the operation means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly operates the operator in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens or closes a member in which the container is disposed, When the operator collided with another member is laterally pressed), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the connecting portion with the object) increases. Further, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operating means (the connecting portion with the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a possibility that the operating device may fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion that connects the operating device and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) is brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion, so that the operator can be prevented from tilting or excessively displacing. As a result, tilting or excessive displacement of the operating device can be suppressed, and the operating device can be prevented from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M9 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, wherein the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, since the container includes the covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly inserts the operating element). When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally, or when the member on which the container is arranged is opened and closed carelessly), the operating means is tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the connecting portion with the object) becomes large. In this case, there is a possibility that the operating device may fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion that connects the operating device and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering portion, so that the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion, the gaming machine M10.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion. The gap between the cover and the cover can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion and the operating means has a receiving portion that receives the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11, which comprises:

  According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operating means has a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion and the operating means is the other. Since the receiving portion that receives the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, a gaming machine M12.

  According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M11, since the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are brought into contact with each other, and the operation means Excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M13 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the container includes an upright wall that is upright from an inner surface of the accommodation body and has an upright end abutting against the object.

  According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container has an upright wall that is upright from the inner surface of the container and the upright end of which abuts against the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, so that the path for entering the inside of the container can be blocked. That is, even if foreign matter such as wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface on which the electronic parts are connected to the circuit of the control board by solder is the side on which the operation means is arranged. Is a game machine M15, which is set on the opposite side.

  According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the operating means. Since it is set on the surface opposite to the side on which the is installed, the standing tip of the standing wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the standing wall can be separated from each other. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can be surely made to function as a wall against which the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire inserted through the opening abuts, and the foreign matter such as the wire can be prevented from being inserted into the container.

  The gaming machine M16 according to any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, wherein the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and a thickness dimension of a standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced, so that it is brought into contact with the object. Further, the surface pressure at the standing tip can be increased to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted between the object and the standing tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall is formed with a taper surface on the surface on the side of the operating means, whereby the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall is formed with a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side, so that the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the inside of the container while improving the moldability. That is, the tapered surface makes it possible to moderate the change in shape and ensure the fluidity of the resin in the molding die. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall contacts the object, the groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object.
As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, A game machine M18, wherein the covering portion is provided so as to project from two areas.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is composed of a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion projects from the second region, the height of the covering portion can be increased.
Therefore, it is possible to further increase the area covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as wire and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the inside of the container, and the operation means from falling off from the object.

  The gaming machine M19 according to any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, wherein the covering portion is provided so as to project from an outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed at a protruding tip end side of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is provided so as to project from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed at the protruding tip side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the foreign matter to reach the opening.

  For example, if it is difficult to insert the tip of foreign matter such as wire directly into the opening because the opening is not visible due to a shield or the like, slide the tip of the foreign matter such as wire on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire is abutted against the outer surface of the covering portion, and further Can stop the progress of. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

<Concept of the invention with the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the container is formed so as to be capable of contacting an outer surface of the operation means or the operator. A gaming machine N1.

  Here, when the operator inserted into the operation means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly operates the operator in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens or closes a member in which the container is disposed, When the operator collided with another member is laterally pressed), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the target object may be pulled out or broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so as to be capable of contacting the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element, so that the operating means or operating element By receiving it, the displacement of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the housing body is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface of the housing and has a standing tip that abuts the object.

  Here, if the container receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect that the gaming machine N1 has, the housing body is provided with a standing wall which is erected from the inner surface thereof and the standing tip of which abuts against the object. Serves as a support, and deformation of the container can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  At the same time, since the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed easily.

  In the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, so that the standing wall can be formed even when the operating means is tilted in any direction. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the path for entering the inside of the container can be blocked by the standing wall. That is, even if foreign matter such as wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container in which the standing wall is erected.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the housing in which the standing wall is erected. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the standing wall by utilizing, and to increase the rigidity of the entire container by connecting the inner surfaces. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function as the support portion (deformation suppressing means) of the standing wall that suppresses the deformation of the container when the operating means is tilted. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine N5 according to any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the container has the covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Thus, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, the gap between the operating means and the covering part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container.

  In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided so as to project from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with a projecting strip that projects from the outer surface and extends in a streak shape, and one end of the projecting strip is provided. A gaming machine N6, which is connected to the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided so as to project from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with a ridge that is provided so as to project from the outer surface and extend in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the cover, the ridge can function as a rib to support the cover by the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to bring the operating means into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means and to prevent damage to the covering portion at that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, since the covering portion is provided so as to project from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be correspondingly increased. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the area covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as wire and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the inside of the container, and the operation means from falling off from the object.

  In the gaming machine N6, the housing is provided with a display portion formed on an outer surface thereof for displaying predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface and displaying predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge. Therefore, the function as an instruction line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit can be also used as the ridge. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator into the first surface, and the accommodation is performed. The body is provided with a facing portion that faces the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing is a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the container.

  Further, the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means, so that the operator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) is the edge of the facing portion. It is possible to suppress the tilting and excessive displacement of the operator by bringing it into contact with the portion. As a result, tilting or excessive displacement of the operating device can be suppressed, and the operating device can be prevented from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is disposed so as to face at least a part of a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operator.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N8, since the facing portion is arranged in at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element, the operating element Foreign matter such as wire is inserted from the opening to the inside of the container by the amount that the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion while suppressing the obstruction of the insertion into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Can be suppressed.

  Further, it is possible to easily suppress the excessive displacement (particularly, the displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operator by increasing the area of the facing portion that abuts the displaced operator. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N9, the operation means is formed such that the operator can be displaced to a first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A game machine N10, characterized in that the child and the facing portion are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A gaming machine N11, wherein the operating element displaced to two positions and a facing portion are brought into contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed such that the operator can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion. Since the operated position is a position where the operating element displaced to the first position or the second position comes into contact with the facing portion, the operating element displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the facing portion. It is possible to effectively prevent the opposing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other by using the ridge.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Substrate Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (Operation Wall A210) as an Example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized by being formed.

  Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the labor can be suppressed. However, there is a possibility that a foreign object such as a wire may be illegally inserted through the opening.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region. Since the opening is formed in the opening, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This can increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine O1, at least a part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

  Here, in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board), it is necessary for the container (board box) to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far away from the operating means, the operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the container from the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the hand of the operator (operator) interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first region and the second region, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the operation means may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface that connects the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. In addition to the effect produced by O1, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved by expanding the space continuous to the second region by the amount of the descending inclination.

  In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a substantially rectangular area in a front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operating means is operated. The game machine O3 is characterized in that the child is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operator when inserting into or pulling out of the operating means is a attitude along the other direction. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, the second region is a substantially rectangular region in front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when inserting or pulling out the operation element is the attitude along the other direction. It is possible to secure a space on the side where the gripping surface faces, with the surface for gripping the child facing the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operating element from interfering with the container when the operating element is inserted into or removed from the operating means. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the second region, and the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is the second region from the first region. A gaming machine O4, which is inclined downward toward the area.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connecting surface located on one longitudinal side in the second region is the first side. Since it is inclined downward from the 1st area toward the 2nd area, it is possible to prevent the fingers different from the grasped fingers from interfering with the container when the operator is grasped and displaced. For example, when the operator is grasped by the forefinger and the thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the descending inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, It is possible to secure a space for moving the little finger side, and it is possible to suppress interference between the little finger side and the container. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5, wherein the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, so that the operation is performed by the connecting surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress the interference with other members at the time of manufacturing and suppress the damage of the operating means. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening and prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the housing body from the opening.

  Further, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be increased by that amount, that is, in order to cope with heat radiation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction of the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction of the second area. A gaming machine O6 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connecting surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and a connecting surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is grasped with the fingers and operated (insertion into the operation means, withdrawal from the operation means, or displacement (eg rotation) of the operator), the grasped fingers (eg thumb and forefinger). The open space described above can be used as a space for disposing or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the operation means.

  In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one longitudinal side in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other connection surface is the first area. A gaming machine O7, which is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one longitudinal side in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the like. Since the connection surface of is substantially orthogonal to the first area and the second area, a container for dealing with heat radiation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of descending and tilting the connection surface. The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

  In the gaming machine O4 or O5, a base body in which the containing body is arranged and a rotary shaft that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotary shaft. It is substantially orthogonal to each other and a lateral direction thereof is substantially parallel to an axial direction of the rotation shaft, and one side in the second region in the longitudinal direction is arranged farther from the rotation shaft than the other side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 is provided with a base body in which the housing body is arranged and a rotary shaft that rotatably supports the base body, The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one side in the second region in the longitudinal direction is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the operation means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body about the rotation axis, the space formed by the descending inclination of the connection surface can be effectively utilized. That is, the space for allowing the hand of the worker (operator) to access the operation means can be secured by the space formed by the descending inclination of the connection surface. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the operation means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine having a container for accommodating an object, comprising: a display device arranged in a game area; and operating means arranged on the object so as to be operable. Information is displayable on the display device, a gaming machine P1.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing) for housing a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the display device provided in the game area and the operation means provided on the object so as to be operable are provided, and the information regarding the operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand the operation state of the operation unit based on the display on the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information regarding the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine P1, the accommodation body is formed to be displaceable, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, the housing is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the housing is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), so that the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state where the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine P2, the housing is displaceable to a position where the surface of the housing on which the operation means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operation means while confirming the display on the display device. As a result, improvement of operability and suppression of operation error can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed farther from the center of the housing than the axially supported position.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P3, the accommodation body is rotatably supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the position where the accommodation means is pivotally supported than the center thereof. In a state where the housing is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is provided and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time, the operating means is located farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine body. Can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine body.
As a result, operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality, and the second operating means, which has a higher operating frequency than the first operating means, is farther from the position where the second operating means is pivotally supported than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized by being disposed in.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means having a higher operating frequency than the first operating means has a higher operating frequency than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side farther from the position where it is pivotally supported, it is possible to arrange the operation means (first operation means) with a high operation frequency at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine body when operating the operating means (first operating means) having a high operating frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine having a container for accommodating an object, comprising an operation means disposed on the object and operably formed, wherein the object is connected to one or a plurality of electrical connection lines. A game machine Q1 in which whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to a connection state of an electrical connection line with the object.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing) for housing a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is room for improvement regarding whether or not the operating means can be operated. That is, if the operation is allowed regardless of the connection state of the one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operation means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of the one or more electrical connection lines may be performed. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work associated with the operation of the operation means may be deteriorated.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, it is provided with an operation means that is arranged on the object and is operably formed, and one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since the propriety of operation of the operation means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the housing is formed to be displaceable, the gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated.
As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state where the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, at the time of displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, and accordingly, the operability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is allowed in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected, It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, and thus fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

  In particular, in the configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange the container for easy operation) is used. In order to allow the operation of the operation means after displacing, the extension line is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection line, and the other electrical connection line is released (pulled out). It is possible to avoid the trouble of reconnecting the object with the object.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is prohibited in a state in which at least one electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is released from the object. Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections are made). If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operation means is prohibited, and thus it is possible to prevent the operation means from being illegally operated.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line that is released (disconnected) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange the container for easy operation) is used. After displacing, for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and another electrical connection line and reconnecting the other electrical connection line that has been released (removed) to the object, Since the operation of the operating means can be permitted, the operation by operating the operating means can be enabled.

<About the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine having a container for accommodating an object, comprising: an operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, wherein the container is displaceably formed and disposed during a game. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means is easier to operate than a position.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing) for housing a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, it is provided with an operation means that is disposed on the object and is operably formed, and the container is formed so as to be displaceable, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position that is disposed during the game. Since it can be displaced to the position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the accommodation body is rotatably supported by a shaft, and is displaced by rotation around the shaft-supported portion as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the container is rotatably supported by a shaft, and is displaced by rotation around the shaft-supported portion, so that the container is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, in the gaming machine R3, another member faces the operation means at a position where the housing is arranged during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the container is arranged during the game, another member faces the operating means, so the operating means is illegally operated. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and in a state where the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the separate member, A gaming machine R4, wherein the container is not displaceable to a position provided during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element contacts another member. By contacting, the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is arranged during the game, so that forgetting to remove the operator can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being illegally used.

<Characteristic AA group> (Informs that the final display mode was displayed within the production period in the continuous button production)
It has operation means operable by the player, effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means within the effective period, and effective period setting means capable of setting the effective period. In the gaming machine, the effect execution means can execute the first effect as the effect after the effective period becomes at least the first state based on the operation of the operating means within the effective period. And the effective period is variably set so as to be in the first state when the production execution means determines that the first production is to be executed. A gaming machine AA1 characterized by the above.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is an effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the display mode is changed by allowing the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the display mode of the effect can be changed by the player's own operation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the above-described continuous hit production, for example, the number of times (upper limit number) that the display mode can be changed in the continuous hit effect is preset according to the result of the special symbol lottery. No matter how many times the player operates the operation means within the operation effective period in which the operation of is effectively set, when the display mode (upper limit display mode) that is changed by the preset upper limit number of times is displayed, Further, there is a problem that the display mode cannot be changed and the remaining period of the operation valid period at the time when the upper limit display mode is displayed cannot be used for the effect. In addition, in general, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be a big hit, and the number of times (upper limit number) in which the display mode can be changed in the continuous striking effect is larger than when the result is a big hit, In addition, it is configured so that the player can not grasp the upper limit number of times set in the continuous hit production this time, and the player is motivated to operate the operation means to improve the interest of the game. However, in this case, despite the upper limit display mode being displayed, the player continues to motivate the operation means until the operation effective period elapses, and the operation means is operated a plurality of times. There was a problem that the display mode did not change frequently despite the operation, and the player's motivation for playing decreased.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by improving the player's willingness to play the game. There is.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, when the production execution means determines that the first production is to be executed, the effective period is set so as to be in the first state, so that the first production for the player. Willing to decide that will be executed. There is an effect that the operating means can be operated and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, since the first effect can be executed even if the preset effective period has not elapsed, the effect executed by the effect executing means is delayed and the effect is reduced. There is an effect that can suppress.

  The gaming machine AA1 has an operation determination means capable of determining the operation content for the operation means within the valid period, and the effect execution means, when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result, A game machine AA2 capable of executing the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to execute the first effect when the determination result of the operation determining means is a specific determination result. Thus, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated eagerly so as to obtain a specific determination result, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AA2 has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means within the valid period, and the operation determining means has the operation number measured by the operation number measuring means is the specific operation number. When it becomes, it is possible to determine that it is the specific determination result, the gaming machine AA3.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA2, when the number of times the operating means is operated reaches the specific number of operations, the operation determining means determines that the result is the specific determination result. On the other hand, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated promptly so that the specific operation number is reached, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the number of operations reaches the specific number of operations by eagerly operating the operating means, it is determined that the determination result is a specific determination result. It is possible to prevent the motivation for operation from being lowered without the determination result of No. being obtained.

  In the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the effect execution means can execute the effect in an effect mode including at least a first mode and a second mode that is variable from the first mode, and the operation determination means, An amusement machine AA4, characterized in that the contents of an operation performed on the operation means after the effect is executed in the second mode are determined.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the operation determination means makes a determination based on the operation content after the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed to the second mode. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting the effect executed by the effect executing means to be changed to the second mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA4, a gaming machine AA5 having suggesting means capable of suggesting that the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA4, the suggesting means suggests that the effect is being executed in the second mode, so that the player can be provided with an easily understandable effect. There is.

<Feature AB group> (display control of random display)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and privilege that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a symbol, a symbol display means capable of displaying a plurality of different symbols on the display means, and a plurality of displays capable of displaying a plurality of the symbols It has a display position setting means capable of setting a position and a symbol determining means for determining the type of the symbol to be displayed at the plurality of display positions by the symbol displaying means, and the symbol determining means is configured to display the plurality of displays. Among the positions, the type of symbols to be displayed at a predetermined display position is determined, and the type of symbols to be displayed at the remaining display positions is determined based on the determined type of symbols. That the gaming machine AB1.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of types of icons are randomly displayed at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that a variety of effects can be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, a place where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of effect pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol. However, when the method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance is used, there is a problem that the data amount of the effect data stored in advance increases in accordance with the number of effect patterns.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a suitable effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of effect data.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to determine the type of the symbol to be displayed at the remaining display positions based on the type of the symbol to be displayed at the predetermined display position, which is preferable while suppressing an increase in the effect data amount. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine capable of executing an effect.

  In the gaming machine AB1, there is a symbol type order storage unit that stores a plurality of types of the symbols in a specific order in advance, and the symbol determination unit is the specific type stored in the symbol type order storage unit. A gaming machine AB2, which determines the type of the symbol to be displayed at the remaining display position based on the order.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB1, the type of symbols displayed at the remaining display positions is determined based on a predetermined specific order, so the type of symbol is determined. There is an effect that the processing for can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine AB2, the symbol type order storage means stores at least a first order and a second order different from the first order as the specific order. Gaming machine AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB2, a plurality of orders are stored in advance in the symbol type order storage means, so the order used when the symbol type is determined by the symbol determining means By making them different, effects that are rich in variations can be executed, and the effect of effects can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AB3, the type of the symbols included in the first order and at least a part of the types of the symbols included in the second order are different from each other, and the gaming machine AB4 is characterized. .

  According to the gaming machine AB4, different symbol types are determined depending on whether the symbol type is determined based on the first order or the symbol type is determined based on the second order. There is an effect that rich production can be executed and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AB4, the symbol determination unit can determine the type of the symbol based on the second order when the determination result of the determination unit is the determination result in which the specific identification information is displayed. A gaming machine AB5 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB4, if the determination result is that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the type of the symbol can be determined based on the second order. It is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the types of symbols included only in the order are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Characteristic AC group> (button delay effect)
The operating means operable by the player, the measuring means capable of measuring a predetermined period based on the operation of the operating means, and the length of the period measured by the measuring means satisfy the first condition. In this case, the game machine AC1 is provided with a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a condition setting means capable of setting at least one condition from among a plurality of different conditions as the first condition.

  Conventionally, the effect is provided by making the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the content of each effect to be executed (a display effect for changing the display mode, a sound effect for outputting a sound). There has been a gaming machine that executes an effect-enhancing effect (so-called delayed effect). This delay effect makes it possible for only a player who is aware of discomfort to understand that the delay effect has been executed, and as a benefit of this, a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot winning) is provided with a high probability. It has been used in recent years as an effect that indicates that.

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low as long as the player uses the advantageous privilege as a production with a high probability, and even if the game is played all day, it is only executed once or twice. It was a thing. As described above, in the case of a delayed effect whose execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. Preparation data dedicated to delay effect is prepared in advance with display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of, and voice data including voice corresponding to the waiting period until the voice effect is executed. However, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to execute the above-described delay effect without increasing the capacity of effect data.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, since it is possible to easily change the period from the operation of the operating means to the execution of the effect by setting different conditions by the condition setting means, a variety of effects, There is an effect that it can be executed without increasing the capacity of effect data.

  The gaming machine AC1 has a first display mode display means capable of displaying on the display means a first display mode indicating that the operation means is operated based on the operation of the operation means. The game machine AC2, wherein the first display mode display means is configured such that at least the display is continued until the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC1, the first display mode is continuously displayed even if there is an interval before the effect is executed, so that the operation of the operating means can be performed. There is an effect that it is possible to identify that the game has been accepted by and to play the game with confidence.

  In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the game machine AC1 or AC2 has an effective period setting means for effectively setting the operation of the operating means, and the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect even after the effective period has elapsed. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, since the effect can be executed even after the expiration of the effective period, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Feature AD group> (Gauge reduction control)
When the discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, In the gaming machine having a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, a performance executing unit capable of executing a variable effect corresponding to the number information, and subtraction or addition of the number information. A number of times determining means for determining the number of times to perform, and setting means capable of determining, for each number of times, number information to be subtracted or added in one time, corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. A gaming machine AD1 characterized by being a thing.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is one that displays a predetermined number of pieces of information and executes an addition / subtraction suggestion effect that suggests a lottery result based on the result of adding or subtracting the number of pieces of information a plurality of times.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing such an adjustment suggestion effect, a predetermined lottery result is displayed by changing the number of times the number information is added or subtracted in order to suggest the lottery result by the effect result of the adjustment suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a problem in that the effect content of the adjustment suggestion effect becomes one pattern, and the effect of the effect deteriorates. Also, if the addition amount or subtraction amount is randomly determined each time the number information is added or subtracted, the effect result cannot suggest the lottery result, and meaningless effect is executed. There was a problem that the effect decreased.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which amusement of a game is improved by enhancing a rendering effect of rendering using number information. To do.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, since the number information to be subtracted or added at each time is set after determining the number of times the number information is subtracted or added, it is possible to produce a result without changing the number of times the number information is changed. It is possible to set the appropriate number information. Therefore, the effect of changing the number information can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AD1, the effect executing means is configured to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit value or upper limit value of the number information when the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine AD2, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AD1, it is possible for the player to predict the determination result of the determination means according to the variable result of the number information, so that the player can be in a situation where the number information is variable. Can make you pay attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the setting means determines the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added among the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, and then the subtraction or A gaming machine AD3, wherein number information to be subtracted or number information to be added is set with respect to the remaining number of times based on the number information that can be added.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or added is determined first, so the number information that is subtracted or added beyond the lower limit or the upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that is set.

<Characteristic AE group> (symbol display control)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and privilege that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting, a plurality of predetermined identification symbols are assigned to the identification information, and the gaming machine has a pattern corresponding to each of the identification symbols. A symbol determining means that can be determined, and a symbol updating means that can display the symbol newly determined by the symbol determining means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition in association with the corresponding identification symbol, A gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it has.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, a number) showing the lottery result of the special symbol and a character identifiable by the player are associated with a variation effect using a plurality of decorative symbols associated with each other to enhance the effect. There is something.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing such a variable effect, since a plurality of characters are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect as compared with an effect in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is continuously played, the freshness of the game is deteriorated and the effect of the performance is deteriorated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with an improved effect by providing a player with a novel effect.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, since the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol is determined by the symbol determining means and a new symbol is displayed by the symbol updating means, it is possible to execute a symbol display which is surprising to the player. There is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AE1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings that display the symbols corresponding to the identification symbols in a predetermined order, and the privilege granting means is a combination of the identification symbols determined in advance. In the gaming machine AE2, the privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AE1, since a privilege is given when a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined which symbol corresponds to which symbol is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the identification symbol that can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the period until the identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the gaming machine AE3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed as the identification information is a specific combination. .

  According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AE1 or AE1 or 2, a specific effect is executed in accordance with a combination of symbols, so an identification symbol displayed as identification information to the player, There is an effect that it is possible to play the game while making each of the symbols interesting and improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pseudo deviation confirmation change)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information for dynamically displaying the specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the identification information is dynamically displayed, a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player, In a gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing an effect within a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means determines whether the determination result is a specific determination result or other than the specific determination result. Configured with the same dynamic display period It is configured to be able to determine a fixed period dynamic display mode, and the specific period dynamic display mode is configured such that a common specific effect is executed before execution of dynamic display is started. A gaming machine AF1 characterized by the above.

  Conventionally, there is one having a storage means capable of holding and storing the right to execute the special symbol fluctuation (lottery right of the special symbol lottery) up to a predetermined number (four). Thereby, even when the lottery right (special figure hold) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during execution of the special symbol change, the lottery right (special figure hold) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously executed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different according to the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. is there. Specifically, when the number of lottery rights (the number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means is 0 and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out, an out variation of a long variation time is executed. Some are configured to be easier. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the period in which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed, the state in which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed continues, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. .

  However, according to the conventional gaming machine using the above-described configuration, the player can easily confirm that the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is out when the out variation of the long variation time is executed. There was a problem in that the player's willingness to play could be reduced during the special symbol variation period because they could be grasped.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by improving the player's willingness to play the game. There is.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, there is a problem that the player predicts the determination result by starting the dynamic display mode of the approximate period, and the willingness to play decreases before the determination result is notified. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AF1, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display mode regardless of the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine AF2, characterized in that the second state for determining is settable.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AF1, the method of determining the dynamic display mode can be switched between the first state and the second state, so that the discrimination result is identified to the player at the start of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game by suppressing the tendency to be played and making the determination result interesting until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  In the gaming machine AF2, when the second state is set, the content of the dynamic display mode is determined by determining the determination result at a predetermined timing when the determined dynamic display mode is executed. A gaming machine AF3, which is variable based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AF2, by varying the content based on the determination result, it is possible to expect the variable timing to play the game.

  In the gaming machine AF3, if the remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining dynamic display period at the time when the determination is performed and the determination result by the remaining period determination means satisfy the variable condition, A gaming machine AF4 having dynamic display mode changing means for changing the dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AF3, the dynamic display mode can be changed in accordance with the remaining dynamic display period. Therefore, the timing at which the determination unit executes the determination and the dynamic display period There is an effect that a game can be played with interest in both the length and the length.

  In any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically moved by the dynamic display means. A possible dynamic display period setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means can set the first period when the determination result of the determining means is other than the specific determination result, and The dynamic display mode determining means can determine the specific period dynamic display mode corresponding to the length of the first period, and the performance executing means sets the dynamic display mode in which the second period is set. An amusement machine AF5, wherein an effect including the dynamic display mode for the specific period can be executed as a part of the effect corresponding to.

  According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, even when a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the specific period dynamic display mode is set, the specific period is set. Since the effect using the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that a game can be played with interest in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  In the gaming machine AF5, the effect executing means can execute an effect in which the specific period dynamic display mode is set a plurality of times as an effect corresponding to the dynamic display in which the second period is set. A gaming machine AF6.

  According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF5, it is possible to execute the dynamic display mode for the specific period a plurality of times for one dynamic display period, so that the effect of enhancing the effect can be enhanced. There is.

<Characteristic AG group> (seconds management on liquid crystal side)
In a gaming machine having a first control means for executing an effect and a second control means different from the first control means, the first control means is capable of setting an effect content of the effect. And a first output unit capable of outputting a first signal based on the effect set by the first setting unit to the second control unit, the second control unit including the first output unit. A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect corresponding to the first signal output from the first output means, and a period for executing the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. And a second output unit capable of outputting a second signal to the first control unit when a specific condition is satisfied by the measuring unit, the first control unit comprising: Identification based on the second signal output from the second output means Gaming machine AG1, wherein the output is capable of executing.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to spend a predetermined period until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the effect to be performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. It was something that could be done.

  Further, in recent game machines, as the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, the effect of using a plurality of movable decorative ornaments is mainly used. There is a problem in that the processing content of the control device that centrally manages is increased.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and manages the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery by using a plurality of control devices, and thus a specific control device The purpose is to suppress concentration of processing load.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, there is no need for the first control means to measure the period required for executing the second effect, and the control load of the first control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AG1, the measuring means is configured to be able to measure the end timing of the second effect, the gaming machine AG2.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AG1, the ending timing of the second effect is measured by the measuring means. Therefore, the control for managing the ending timing by the first controlling means becomes unnecessary, and the first controlling means This has the effect of reducing the control load due to.

  In the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the second control means has a mode changing means capable of changing the effect mode of the second effect when a variable condition is satisfied, and the second output means measures the second measurement. The information command for indicating at least a part of the effect mode of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means when the effect period measured by the means satisfies the ending condition is also the first control means. And the first control means can determine the effect mode of the specific effect executed after the second effect based on the information command output from the second output means. A gaming machine AG3 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the effect mode of the second effect varied by the second control means can be determined by the first control means, and specified based on the determination result. The production mode of the production is changed. This can enhance the effect of production.

<Characteristic AH group> (Control of delay of accessory by pressing button)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting an advantageous privilege to the player, an operating means operable by the player and an effect can be executed based on the operation of the operating means. A game machine AH1 comprising: a performance executing means, and a determining means capable of variably determining the execution timing at which the performance is executed by the performance executing means.

  Conventionally, the effect is provided by making the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the content of each effect to be executed (a display effect for changing the display mode, a sound effect for outputting a sound). There has been a gaming machine that executes an effect-enhancing effect (so-called delayed effect). This delay effect makes it possible for only a player who is aware of discomfort to understand that the delay effect has been executed, and as a benefit of this, a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot winning) is provided with a high probability. It has been used in recent years as an effect that indicates that.

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low as long as the player uses the advantageous privilege as a production with a high probability, and even if the game is played all day, it is only executed once or twice. It was a thing. As described above, in the case of a delayed effect whose execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. Preparation data dedicated to delay effect is prepared in advance with display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of, and voice data including voice corresponding to the waiting period until the voice effect is executed. However, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to execute the above-described delay effect without increasing the capacity of effect data.

  According to the gaming machine AH1, since the execution timing of the effect is variably determined by the determining means, it is not necessary to previously set a plurality of effect data corresponding to the difference in the execution timing of the effect, and the data capacity is increased. This has the effect of suppressing the problems that occur.

  In the gaming machine AH1, the movable means configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AH2 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine AH2, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by moving the moving means.

  In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the gaming machine AH3 is provided with a notification mode execution means capable of executing a notification mode in a period from the operation of the operation means to the start of execution of the effect. .

  According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the notification mode is executed in the period until the execution of the effect is started, so that the player can recognize that the operation of the operating means is effective, There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be played.

  In any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the gaming machine has a timekeeping means capable of starting timekeeping based on the operation of the operating means, and the deciding means has an execution timing of performance based on the timekeeping data of the timekeeping means. A gaming machine AH4 characterized by determining the

  According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, it is possible to measure the period that has elapsed since the operating means was operated by the timing means, and thus the period during which the operating means was operated There is an effect that the execution timing of the effect can be set according to the above, and the player can be interested in the length of the period from the operation of the operation means to the start of the execution.

  In the gaming machine AH4, the effect execution means is composed of at least output means capable of outputting a signal instructing execution of the effect, and setting means for setting execution of effect based on the signal from the output means. The gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that the output means outputs the signal based on that the timing data of the timing means has a value corresponding to the content determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AH4, the signal is not output until the timekeeping data reaches the corresponding value, so if the execution start of the effect is executed at the timing when the signal is received, it is determined by the determining means. It is possible to easily execute the game at the designated timing, and it is possible to easily control the game.

<Characteristic AI group> (Crash control)
Advantageous to the player when the discrimination means, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, the effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and the first setting necessary for the effect executing means to execute the effect. A second setting that is executed after the first setting is executed, and at least an executable setting execution unit, wherein the first setting is before execution of the second setting is started. The game machine AI1 is characterized in that the setting execution means is configured to be able to execute the first setting by the setting execution means even when the effect is not executed.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show the result of a special symbol lottery. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to spend a predetermined period until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the effect to be performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. It was something that could be done.

  Furthermore, in recent game machines, as the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, the effect of using a plurality of decorative movable accessories is mainly used. By using the movable accessory, it is possible to provide a powerful effect to the player and enhance the effect of the effect.

  However, in order to prevent the movable accessory from breaking down, when the movable accessory is not located at the execution position at the execution timing of the effect using the movable accessory described above, the movable accessory is Since it is configured to prohibit the execution of the effect using the, there is a problem that the frequency of executing the effect using the movable accessory decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of an effect by suitably performing an effect using a movable accessory. Has an aim.

  According to the gaming machine AI1, since the first setting is executed even when the effect is not executed, the preparation for executing the effect can be completed early, and the effect can be executed in a short period of time. The effect is that you can do it.

  The gaming machine AI2 is configured so that it can be identified that the first setting has been executed in the gaming machine AI1.

  According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AI1, it is possible to improve the enjoyment that makes it possible to expect the execution of the production even when the production is not executed by executing the first setting. is there.

  The gaming machine AI1 or AI2 has a movable means that can be moved as at least a part of the effect, and the first setting drives a drive unit for moving the movable means. A gaming machine AI3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect exerted on the gaming machine AI1 or AI2, the movable unit is configured to be movable by driving the driving unit, but is executed even when the movable unit is not movable for the first setting. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined early that the movable means is movable by the first setting.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Large set)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying an identification symbol for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbol on the display means. , A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for displaying the specific determination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed, and the privilege granting In the gaming machine having a privilege type determining unit capable of determining a privilege type granted by the means, the dynamic display unit dynamically displays a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of the identification symbols. In the gaming machine, the identification symbol is selected from the storage means in which identification display modes of more types than the plurality of identification symbols are stored, and the identification display modes stored in the storage device. For each Determination means capable of determining different identification display modes to be displayed, and the identification display mode different from the identification pattern for indicating the specific determination result when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine AJ1 characterized by comprising: a stop display of the displayed identification symbol, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the stop displayed identification display mode.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, a number) showing the lottery result of the special symbol and a character identifiable by the player are associated with a variation effect using a plurality of decorative symbols associated with each other to enhance the effect. There is something.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing such a variable effect, since a plurality of characters are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect as compared with an effect in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is continuously played, the freshness of the game is deteriorated and the effect of the performance is deteriorated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with an improved effect by providing a player with a novel effect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, since the effect executed when the specific condition is satisfied is changed by the identification display mode determined by the determining means, the player is interested in the identification display mode displayed on the identification pattern. By having it, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved even if the identification pattern showing the specific determination result is not displayed.

  In the gaming machine AJ1, the effect executing means can re-dynamically display the identification symbol in which the identification display mode is displayed a plurality of times after the stop display, when the specific condition is satisfied. The determination means is configured to be able to update the type of the identification display mode displayed on the identification pattern when the identification symbol is re-dynamically displayed by the effect performing means. A game machine AJ2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AJ1, the identification display mode is updated when re-dynamically displayed, so that various types of identification display modes can be stopped and displayed, and various There is an effect that it is possible to allow the production to be executed.

  In the gaming machine AJ2, the effect performing means identifies, as the effect, information corresponding to the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed every time the identification symbol is stopped and displayed when the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to execute a possible notification effect, and to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification effect, based on the establishment of the effect condition. AJ3 which is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AJ2, the specific effect is changed depending on the identification display mode displayed every time the display is stopped, so that the identification display is displayed over a plurality of times. There is an effect that the combination of modes can be made interesting.

<Characteristic AK group> (Derived from large set system)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes, display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means, and the identification display modes of a type larger than the predetermined number are stored. Storage means, a determination means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display manners to be displayed on the display means from the identification display manners stored in the storage means, and a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AK1 is characterized by further comprising: an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the identification display mode displayed on the display means.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, identification information (for example, a number) showing the lottery result of the special symbol and a character identifiable by the player are associated with a variation effect using a plurality of decorative symbols associated with each other to enhance the effect. There is something.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing such a variable effect, since a plurality of characters are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect as compared with an effect in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when the game is continuously played, the freshness of the game is deteriorated and the effect of the performance is deteriorated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by providing a novel effect to the player to enhance the effect of the effect. It is intended to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine AK1, the determination means determines a predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means, and the effect corresponding to the displayed identification display mode is executed by the effect execution means, and thus is displayed on the display means. It is possible to make people interested in the type of identification display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AK1 has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means is dynamically operated by the dynamic display means. An amusement machine AK2, which is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode in which the display is stopped and then displayed at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1, it is possible to make the stop position of the identification display mode of interest more interesting, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to re-dynamically display the identification display mode after the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine AK3, characterized in that the displayed type is updated when the target type is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, when the stopped and displayed identification display mode is re-dynamically displayed, the type of the identification display mode is updated, so that the re-dynamic display is performed. Each time, a new interest can be given to the type of identification display mode to be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the effect execution means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed can be identified every time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. The game machine AK4 is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect, based on the establishment of the effect condition. .

  According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed is informed, so that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AL group> (Large set system derivative 2)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes, display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means, and storage means for storing a plurality of types of the identification display modes, A determination unit capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display unit from the identification display modes stored in the storage unit, and a display unit displaying the identification display modes on the display unit within a predetermined period. A game machine AL1 characterized by comprising: an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the type of the identified display mode has reached a predetermined number.

  Conventionally, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is configured to be informed (stop display) through the special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is There are many things that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, numbers) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are variably displayed, and the player is informed of the result of the special symbol lottery by the combination of the identification information stopped and displayed, There is also something that makes the identification information that is variably displayed interesting.

  In the gaming machine capable of executing such a variable effect, while the plurality of identification information items are being displayed in a variable manner, the variation effect is provided while expecting that the identification information indicating the lottery result advantageous to the player is stopped and displayed. Although it was something that you could enjoy, if the stop-displayed identification information is a combination that indicates a lottery result other than winning, you will lose interest in the stop-displayed identification information and the performance effect will decrease. There was a problem of doing.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by providing a novel effect to the player to enhance the effect of the effect. It is intended to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, since the specific effect is executed when the number of types of the displayed identification display modes reaches the predetermined number, no matter what kind of combination of the identification display modes is displayed, the specific display mode is predetermined. Since there is a possibility that the specific effect is executed until the period elapses, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AL1 has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means is dynamically operated by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine AL2, which is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode in which the display is stopped and then displayed at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to make the stop position of the identification display mode of interest more interesting, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to re-dynamically display the identification display mode after the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine AL3, which is configured such that the type displayed when the target is displayed is updated.

  According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, when the stopped and displayed identification display mode is re-dynamically displayed, the type of the identification display mode is updated, so that the re-dynamic display is performed. Each time, a new interest can be given to the type of identification display mode to be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the effect execution means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect that enables identification of information corresponding to the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. And is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified by the notification effect, based on the establishment of the effect condition. .

  According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed is informed, so that the player can perform an effect that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 Frame buttons (operation means)
113 Voice Lamp Control Device 113 (Valid Period Setting Means)
S3407 Operation count measuring means S3617 Operation determining means

Claims (3)

An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Production execution means capable of executing production based on the operation means being operated within the effective period;
In a gaming machine having a valid period setting means capable of setting the valid period,
The effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the first effect as the effect after the effective period is at least in the first state, based on the operation of the operating means within the effective period. And
The effective period is variably set so as to be in the first state when it is determined by the effect executing means that the first effect is to be executed. Machine. An operation determination means capable of determining the operation content of the operation means within the valid period,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing the first effect when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result. The operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means within the effective period,
The operation discriminating means can discriminate that the specific discriminating result is obtained when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a specific operation number. Amusement machine.

Images